You are on page 1of 455

EDSG18-936

- Cooling Only -

E-Series

EDSG18-936

Part 1 Features ............................................................................ 1


1. Features ..................................................................................................2
1.1 Features ...................................................................................................2
1.2 Selection Procedure .................................................................................6
1.3 Control System.........................................................................................8

Part 2 Multi-Split System Room Air Conditioners


SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only .................... 13
1. Power Supply ........................................................................................15
2. Functions...............................................................................................16
3. Specifications ........................................................................................20
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Outdoor Units .........................................................................................20


BP Unit ...................................................................................................21
Combination Capacity Index ..................................................................22
Indoor Units ............................................................................................25

4. Dimensions ...........................................................................................32
4.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................32
4.2 BP Units .................................................................................................33
4.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................34

5. Wiring Diagrams....................................................................................45
5.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................45
5.2 BP Units .................................................................................................46
5.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................47

6. Piping Diagrams....................................................................................52
6.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................52
6.2 BP Units .................................................................................................53
6.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................54

7. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................57


7.1 Total Capacity ........................................................................................57
7.2 Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping ............63

8. Operation Limit......................................................................................65
9. Fan Characteristics ...............................................................................66
10.Sound Level ..........................................................................................69
10.1 Measuring Location ................................................................................69
10.2 Octave Band Level .................................................................................70

11.Electric Characteristics..........................................................................73

Part 3 Installation Manual ......................................................... 75


1. Outdoor Units ........................................................................................76
1.1 Installation ..............................................................................................76
1.2 Service Precautions ...............................................................................94

2. BP Units ................................................................................................98
3. Indoor Units.........................................................................................110
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series

Safety Precautions ...............................................................................110


Wall Mounted Type FTKS25/35D.........................................................111
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50/60/71F ....................................................119
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50B..............................................................126
Duct Connected Type FDKS25/35CA ..................................................134
i

EDSG18-936

3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9

Duct Connected Type FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA ...........................144


Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FFQ25/35/50/60B..............................154
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FCQ35/50/60/71B .............................176
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type FBQ60/71B...........................................199

Part 4 Operation Manual .......................................................... 219


1. Operations...........................................................................................220
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

RMKS112/140/160E Series .................................................................220


FTKS, FDKS Series .............................................................................221
FFQ25/35/50/60B Series......................................................................275
FCQ35/50/60/71B Series .....................................................................288
FBQ60/71B Series ...............................................................................299

Part 5 Options .......................................................................... 309


1. Option List ...........................................................................................310
1.1 Outdoor Units .......................................................................................310
1.2 BP Units ...............................................................................................310
1.3 Indoor Units ..........................................................................................310

2. Options for Outdoor & BP Units ..........................................................314


2.1 Options for Outdoor Units.....................................................................314
2.2 Options for BP Units.............................................................................315

3. Options for Indoor Units ......................................................................318


3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Duct Connected Type...........................................................................318


Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (600600)..........................................319
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (950950)..........................................329
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type ..............................................................345

4. Control Devices...................................................................................355
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15

ii

<DCS302CA61> Central Remote Controller .......................................355


<DCS301BA61> Unified ON/OFF Controller .......................................387
<DST301BA61> Schedule Timer .........................................................395
Combination of <DCS302CA61 / DCS301BA61 / DST301BA61>
Combinations of Optional Controllers for Centralized Control..............414
<KRP928B2S> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET
(Residential Air Conditioner) ................................................................417
<DTA112BA51> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir).....................419
<KRC72> Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms...........................421
<KRP413A1S> Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock / Remote Controller...423
<KRP4AA51/53> Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices.................427
<KRP1BA54/57> Adaptor for Wiring ....................................................432
<KRP1BA101> Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ................................433
<KRCS01-1B> Remote Sensor............................................................435
<BRC1C61> Wired Remote Controller for SkyAir................................438
<BRC7C613W> Wireless Remote Controller.......................................445
<BRC7E531W> Wireless Remote Controller.......................................450

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series

EDSG18-936

Part 1
Features
1. Features ..................................................................................................2
1.1 Features ...................................................................................................2
1.2 Selection Procedure .................................................................................6
1.3 Control System.........................................................................................8

Features

Features

EDSG18-936

1. Features
1.1

Features
More Variation of Indoor Units

Features

L.S.P. Duct Slim & Compact Type

Energy Saving
Developed DAIKIN original
new scroll compressor

Quiet Operation
Night Quiet Mode

Easy Installation
Automatic Test Operation
Easy Wiring Working

RMKS112E (4HP)
RMKS140E (5HP)
RMKS160E (6HP)

Easy Maintenance
Operation Data Memory Function
before failure
06RAG09-2

Indoor Units
Cooling Only

: New Model Mo/C: Mo/C model : Continued Model

Type

Model Name

25

35

Wall Mounted

FTKS-DVM

50

60

71

FTKS-BVMA
FTKS-FVM

L.S.P. Duct (Slim Compact)

FDKS-EAVMB

L.S.P. Duct (Slim)

FDKS-CAVMB

FDKS-CVMB

M.S.P. Ceiling Mounted Built-in

FBQ-BV1

Ceiling Mounted Cassette


(950x950 Multi Flow)

FCQ-BVE

Ceiling Mounted Cassette


(600x600 Multi Flow)

FFQ-BV1B9

: Invalidated Model

Mo/C

Mo/C Mo/C

Mo/C

Added slim & compact duct type which is suitable for a small room. Meet more variation of needs!

06RAG09-14

External Appearance
Wall Mounted

< FTKS25/35D >

Duct Connected

Slim & Compact Type


(25/35 class)
< FDKS25/35EA >

Built-in

Slim type (25-60 class)


< FDKS25/35CA >
< FDKS50/60C >

< FBQ60/71B >

< FTKS50B >


Cassette

< FTKS50-71F >


950x950
< FCQ35-71B >

600x600
< FFQ25-60B >

06RAG09-20

Features

EDSG18-936

Features

1
New Scroll Compressor
The efficient scroll G type compressor realized further energy saving
High Thrust mechanism realized a reduction of friction loss and leaks of refrigerant and high efficiency.
- Improvement in scroll performance by high precision processing technology (improvement in the
degree of outline of VOLUTE)
Compressed
gas load

High
precision
scrolling

Fixed
Scroll

High Thrust
mechanism

Low Pressure

Hydro Dynamic
Bearing

DC motor
of high
efficiency
and low
vibration

Rotor

Stator

Differential
Pressure Pump

Pushing back
Power of High
Pressure Oil

Moving
Scroll

Thrust Slide Part

Housing

Reduction of
Sliding Loss
High-pressure
pushing power

Crank
Shaft

High Efficiency G Type Compressor

High
Pressure

High Pressure
Oil

High Thrust mechanism

06RAG09-23

Night Quiet Mode


3 steps of setting are possible (Button setting of an outdoor unit
unit PC Board).

(dBA)
STEP1

47

STEP2

44

STEP3

41

Night Quiet Mode


Night Quiet Mode Starts

Night Quiet Mode Ends

Note: This function is available in setting at site.


The relationship of outdoor temperature (load) and time shown in the
graph is just an example.

06RAG09-24

Automatic Test Operation


Check of wiring, stop valves, sensors and refrigerant volume
automatically.

Test Operation
Simply press the
test operation
button!

Just press the test operation button after


refrigerant charging completes. The check of wiring,
stop valves, sensors and refrigerant volume is
performed. The operation stops automatically
when the check is completed.
06RAG09-25

Features

Features

EDSG18-936

Easy Wiring Work


Improved the shape of PCB. Divided the operating part and the
terminal plate for easy wiring work.
Current Model

Operating part

Transmission wiring
Connection (to BP Unit)

06RAG09-26

Memory Function of
the Operation Data before Failure
When a malfunction occur, operating data for the 3 minutes preceding the
breakdown is stored in memory automatically. This function speeds up the
process of identifying and correcting the cause of the problem.

Normal Operation

Malfunction

Analysis of data to
identify location of
problem and
cause of
malfunction

Automatic
storage of 3
minutes of
operation data

Implementation of
measures to
eliminate cause of
malfunction

06RAG09-27

(ex. 5HP)

Refrigerant Piping

Total main piping length


(between Outdoor unit BP unit)
Total branch piping length
(between BP unit Indoor unit)

55m
80m

135m(55+80)

Total piping length

Note) Refrigerant charge is necessary.


Main piping
Branch piping

Max. height
difference

30m

BP unit
Branch piping

BP unit

06RAG09-28

Features

EDSG18-936

Features

1
Refrigerant
Piping

Max. Inter-unit Piping Length

4HP

5HP

Piping length BP I/U (f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m)

15m

Piping length 1st branch I/U (ex. b+c+m)

40m

Total main piping length *1 (O/U - BP: a+b+c+d+e)

6HP

55m

Total branch piping length *2 (f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m)

60m

80m

90m

Total piping length ( *1+*2 )

115m

135m

145m

Note) The pipe size of branch BP varies according to the capacity of


I/Us connected to the BP. (for oil return operation)
st

1 Branch

Max. height
difference
30m

06RAG09-29

Features

Features

EDSG18-936

1.2

Selection Procedure

1.2.1

Outdoor Unit
Cooling only
Model name

RMKS112E

RMKS140E

RMKS160E

Type

4HP

5HP

6HP

Rated capacity (kW) Cooling

11.2

14.0

15.5

5 units

7 units

8 units

5.5-14.5

7.0-18.2

8.0-20.8

Connectable indoor
units

Maximum number
of indoor units
Total indoor unit
capacity (kW)

Maximum number of connectable BP units

1.2.2

3 Units

Indoor Unit
Cooling only
Type

25

35

50

60

71

Rated capacity (kW)

2.5

3.5

5.0

6.0

7.1

RA

SA

1.2.3

Wall mounted

FTKS

Duct connected
(Slim compact)

FDKS-EA

Duct connected (Slim)

FDKS-C(A)

Ceiling mounted
cassette (600600)

FFQ

Ceiling mounted
cassette (950950)

FCQ

Ceiling mounted built-in

FBQ

Decoration Panel
A decoration panel is required for SkyAir models.

1.2.4

Ceiling mounted cassette


(600600)

FFQ

BYFQ60B8W1

Ceiling mounted cassette


(950950)

FCQ

BYC125K-W1

Ceiling mounted built-in

FBQ

BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1)

Remote Controller
Choose the suitable remote controller for SkyAir models.
Cooling only
Wireless remote controller

Wired remote controller

FFQ

BRC7E531W

FCQ

BRC7C613W

FBQ

FFQ
FCQ

BRC1C61

FBQ

1.2.5

BP Unit
Cooling only
Model name
Type
Maximum capacity (kW)
Maximum number of BP units for 1 system

BPMKS967B2B

BPMKS967B3B

2 rooms

3 rooms

14.2

20.8
3 units

Features

EDSG18-936

1.2.6

Features

REFNET JOINT
Model name
Number of BP units

1.2.7

KHRP26A22T
1

Not necessary

KHRP26A22T1

KHRP26A22T2

Option
You can choose various optional accessories for control system, indoor unit, and outdoor unit.
(See "Part 5 Options" for details.)

Features

Control by Remote Controller


Residential Air conditioner

Local operation
of remote
controller

Control Method

Example of
typical use

Objective / Use

ARC433 series

Unit Name and


Model

Receiver
Wireless
Wireless
Remote
Remote
Controller
Controller
The wireless remote controller transmits the signals up to 7m long.

Outline of System

Available functions are different by models.

Functions
Start/stop (ON/OFF)
Operation mode change-over
Temperature setting
Timer setting
Airflow rate setting
Airflow direction adjustment (Swing flap)
INTELLIGENT EYE operation
POWERFUL operation
HOME LEAVE operation
ECONO mode operation
MOLD PROOF operation
Error code display

Function

1 remote controller
controls 1 indoor unit

Standard Number of
Units

(R4925)

Part 5
Operation
Manual

Relevant
Page

Features
EDSG18-936

1.3
Control System

1.3.1
Various Control by Remote Controller

Features

Features
Same as the number of
units controlled by
remote controller

Operation of
other equipment
combined with
the operation of
indoor unit

Combining
control by
remote controller

Control by Remote Controller

Note:
1. These figures above show the system using wired remote controllers. Wireless remote controller replaced for wired remote controller can be used for same control.
2. In control by two remote controllers, one of two remote controllers must be a wired remote controller. Two wireless remote controllers must not be used.
3. Wiring from a wireless remote controller to the receiver can be lengthened to 200m in maximum.

Operates HRV in accordance with


indoor unit operation.

2 remote controllers
control up to 16 indoor
units from 2 different
places simultaneously

For above
control from
distant place.

1 remote controller
controls up to 16 indoor
units simultaneously

Group control by
2 remote
controllers

2 remote controllers
control 1 indoor unit

1 remote controller
controls 1 indoor unit

Standard Number of
Units

Group control

Operational functions
Start/Stop (ON/OFF)
Temperature setting
Timer setting (Settings in units of 1 hour
up to a maximum of 72 hours)
Airflow setting
Airflow direction adjustment (Swing flap)
Indication function
Operating display
Program dry function display
Defrost/Hot start display
Filter sign
Temperature setting display
Timer display
Airflow display
Abnormal operation display
In case of group control all the indoor
units in the system are set to the same
value and each unit is controlled
individually by its internal thermostat.
(Not by the thermostat equipped in
remote controller)
In command by double remote controls,
the most recent one takes priority.
(Selection between master and slave
controller is essential)
According to indoor units model, some
models cannot be set.

Function

For the control of


plural indoor
units on a floor
at the same time

Outline of System

For control from


2 places (distant
or local)

For control from


distant place

Remote
operation of
remote controller

BRC1C61

Unit Name and


Model

2 remote control
Note 2

Example of
typical use

Objective / Use

Local operation
of remote
controller

Control Method

438

Relevant
Page

(R4926)

EDSG18-936
Features

Central Control
Residential Air conditioner, SkyAir

10

Room Air conditioner

Schedule timer

Schedule
timer
Central
remote
controller
Unified ON/
OFF
controller

Unified ON/OFF
controller

For controlling
all indoor units
from one place

For carrying out


weekly
schedule
operation by
1-minute unit

Central remote
controller

Control from
one position

Objective / Use

Central remote
controller for
five indoor units

Control Method

DCS301BA61

DCS302CA61

DST301BA61

DCS301BA61

DCS302CA61

DST301BA61

KRC72

Unit Name and Model

Outline of System

Respective functions of schedule timer,


central remote controller and unified ON/
OFF controller are possible. (Control mode
of central remote controller is given priority
for operation of remote controller for indoor
unit.)

Controls up to 128 indoor


units with one schedule
timer, two central remote
controllers (4 units at the
double functions) and eight
unified ON/OFF controllers
(16 units at the double
functions).

Controls up to 16 groups of
indoor units with one unified
ON/OFF controller.

Controls up to 64 groups of
indoor units with one central
remote controller.

Double central control function


Function of liquid crystal remote controller
can be controlled individually for each zone
of the indoor unit.
Individual/unified operation
Up to 8 patterns of scheduled operation can
be set in combination with schedule timer.
Temperature setting for each zone
Control operation for each room during
centralized control
Remote controller operation rejected
command
Sequential start function
Double central control function
Indoor unit ON/OFF control
Individual/unified operation
Remote controller operation rejected
command (Central remote controller given
priority when used in combination with
central remote controller.)
Sequential start function

Simultaneously controls 64
groups with one schedule
timer. Max. 128 units

Controls max. 5 indoor units


individually by one central
remote controller.

Standard Number of Units

ON/OFF time can be set by units of day,


hour and minute; ON/OFF pattern can be
set by time zone of twice per day in
accordance with the application.

Individual operation/stop
Operation display

Function

(R4927)

414

387

355

395

355

Relevant
Page

Features
EDSG18-936

Features

Remote Control

Wiring adaptor
for electrical
appendices

Interface
adaptor

Remote control
adaptor

Remote
operation
command is
required for
control.

Objective / Use

KRP4AA5153

KRP928B2S

KRP413A1S

Unit Name and Model

Outline of System

Note:
1. "Remote control adaptor" used for the central remote controller regulating five indoor units is KRP413A1S.
2. "Interface adaptor for residential air conditionor" used for connecting DIII-NET central control devices is KRP928B2S.
3. "Interface adaptor for SkyAir" used for connecting DIII-NET central control devices is DTA112BA51.
4. Make sure the control system devices applied for each indoor unit in accordance with the option list.

SkyAir

Features

Residential Air conditioner

Control Method

1 PC board simultaneously
controls 16 groups.

1 PC board simultaneously
controls 1 group of indoor
units.

To use adaptor both as a constant "a"


contact and an instantaneous "a" contact.
12~24 VDC or no-voltage
Various remote control methods available
by mode select switch
Voltage, no-voltage selector switch
Output of alarm and operation display
signal (no-voltage)
Remote temperature setting (resistance
input of 0~135)
Selector for remote controller temperature
setting enable/inhibit

For group unified control, the setting


becomes the same for all connected indoor
units, and each indoor unit is controlled
individually by built-in thermostat.

One adaptor controls one


indoor unit

One adaptor controls one


indoor unit

Standard Number of Units

This kit is an interface between central


control equipment (central remote
controller, unified ON/OFF controller,
schedule timer, etc.) and the room air
conditioner.

Constant "a" contact without voltage


Instantaneous "a" contact with voltage
Output of alarm and operation display
signal

Function

(R4928)

427

419

423

Relevant
Page

EDSG18-936
Features

11

Features

12

EDSG18-936

Features

EDSG18-936

Part 2
Multi-Split System
Room Air Conditioners
SUPER MULTI PLUS
E-Series
Cooling Only
FTKS25DVM
FTKS35DVM
FTKS50FVM
FTKS60FVM
FTKS71FVM
FTKS50BVMA8
FDKS25CAVMB
FDKS35CAVMB
FDKS50CVMB
FDKS60CVMB
FDKS25EAVMB
FDKS35EAVMB

FFQ25BV1B9
FFQ35BV1B9
FFQ50BV1B9
FFQ60BV1B9
FCQ35BVE
FCQ50BVE
FCQ60BVE
FCQ71BVE
FBQ60BV1
FBQ71BV1

RMKS112EVM
RMKS140EVM
RMKS160EVM
BPMKS967B2B
BPMKS967B3B

1. Power Supply ........................................................................................15


2. Functions...............................................................................................16
3. Specifications ........................................................................................20
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Outdoor Units .........................................................................................20


BP Unit ...................................................................................................21
Combination Capacity Index ..................................................................22
Indoor Units ............................................................................................25

4. Dimensions ...........................................................................................32
4.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................32
4.2 BP Units .................................................................................................33
4.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................34

5. Wiring Diagrams....................................................................................45
5.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................45
5.2 BP Units .................................................................................................46
5.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................47

6. Piping Diagrams....................................................................................52
6.1 Outdoor Units .........................................................................................52
6.2 BP Units .................................................................................................53
6.3 Indoor Units ............................................................................................54
SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

13

EDSG18-936

7. Capacity Tables ....................................................................................57


7.1 Total Capacity ........................................................................................57
7.2 Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping ............63

8. Operation Limit......................................................................................65
9. Fan Characteristics ...............................................................................66
10.Sound Level ..........................................................................................69
10.1 Measuring Location ................................................................................69
10.2 Octave Band Level .................................................................................70

11.Electric Characteristics..........................................................................73

14

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Power Supply

1. Power Supply
Indoor Unit
Wall Mounted Type

FTKS25DVM
FTKS35DVM
FTKS50FVM
FTKS60FVM

Outdoor Unit

Power Supply

RMKS112EVM
RMKS140EVM
RMKS160EVM
BPMKS967B2B
BPMKS967B3B

1, 230V, 50Hz

FTKS71FVM
FTKS50BVMA8
Duct Connected Type

FDKS25CAVMB
FDKS35CAVMB
FDKS50CVMB
FDKS60CVMB
FDKS25EAVMB
FDKS35EAVMB

Ceiling Mounted
Cassette Type

FFQ25BV1B9
FFQ35BV1B9
FFQ50BV1B9
FFQ60BV1B9
FCQ35BVE
FCQ50BVE
FCQ60BVE
FCQ71BVE

Ceiling Mounted
Built-in Type

Note:

FBQ60BV1
FBQ71BV1

Power Supply Intake ; Outdoor Unit

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

15

Functions

EDSG18-936

Basic
Function

Compressor

Functions

Comfort
Control

5
~
46

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Operation Limit for Heating (CWB)

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic


Deodorizing Function

PAM Control

Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic


Air-Purifying Filter

Longlife Filter (Option)

Swing Compressor

Air Filter (Prefilter)

Rotary Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

Washable Grille

Oval Scroll Compressor

Power-Airflow Flap

Filter Cleaning Indicator

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Mold Proof Operation

Power-Airflow Diffuser

Heating Dry Operation

Wide-Angle Louvers

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

24-Hour ON/OFF Timer

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

3-D Airflow

COMFORT AIRFLOW Mode

Timer

Worry Free
Reliability &
Durability

Note:

16

Night Set Mode

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure)

Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) Display

Wiring-Error Check

Auto Fan Speed

Automatic Test Operation

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

Memory Function
Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor
Heat Exchanger
Flexibility

Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation (Manual)

Lifestyle
Convenience

72-Hour ON/OFF Timer

3-Step Airflow (H/P Only)

Night Quiet Mode (Automatic)

Operation

Operation Limit for Cooling (CDB)

Reluctance DC Motor
Comfortable
Airflow

Air-Purifying Filter with Bacteriostatic &


Virustatic Functions

Category

Health &
Clean

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)

Functions

RMKS112/140/160EVM

Category

RMKS112/140/160EVM

2. Functions

Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible


Indoor Unit

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

Flexible Voltage Correspondence

Quick Warming Function

High Ceiling Application

Hot-Start Function

Chargeless

Automatic Defrosting

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

Automatic Operation

Power Selection

5-Rooms Centralized Controller


(Option)

Remote
Control

Program Dry Function

Fan Only

Remote Control Adaptor


(Normal Open-Pulse Contact) (Option)

New POWERFUL Operation


(Non-Inverter)

Remote Control Adaptor


(Normal Open Contact) (Option)

Inverter POWERFUL Operation

Dlll-NET Compatible (Adaptor)


(Option)

Priority-Room Setting

COOL / HEAT Mode Lock

HOME LEAVE Operation

ECONO Mode

Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button

Signal Receiving Sign

Temperature Display

Another Room Operation

Remote
Controller

Wireless

Wired

: Holding Functions
: No Functions

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

Compressor

Comfortable
Airflow

Health &
Clean

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Oval Scroll Compressor

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic


Deodorizing Function

Swing Compressor

Rotary Compressor

Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic


Air-Purifying Filter

Reluctance DC Motor

Longlife Filter (Option)

Power-Airflow Flap

Air Filter (Prefilter)

Washable Grille

Wide-Angle Louvers

Filter Cleaning Indicator

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Mold Proof Operation

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Heating Dry Operation


Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

3-D Airflow

COMFORT AIRFLOW Mode

Timer

3-Step Airflow (H/P Only)

Night Quiet Mode (Automatic)

24-Hour ON/OFF Timer


72-Hour ON/OFF Timer
Night Set Mode

Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation (Manual)

Worry Free
Reliability &
Durability

Wiring Error Check

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure)


Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) Display

Quick Warming Function

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor


Heat Exchanger

Hot-Start Function

Flexibility

Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible


Indoor Unit

Automatic Defrosting

Flexible Voltage Correspondence

Automatic Operation

High Ceiling Application

Program Dry Function

Chargeless

Fan Only

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

New POWERFUL Operation


(Non-Inverter)

Priority-Room Setting

COOL / HEAT Mode Lock

Remote Control Adaptor


(Normal Open-Pulse Contact) (Option)

HOME LEAVE Operation

Remote Control Adaptor


(Normal Open Contact) (Option)

Inverter POWERFUL Operation

ECONO Mode

Power Selection
Remote
Control

5-Rooms Centralized Controller (Option)

DIII-NET Compatible (Adaptor)


(Option)

Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button


Signal Receiving Sign

Note:

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

Lifestyle
Convenience

Functions

PAM Control

Auto Fan Speed

Operation

Air-Purifying Filter with Bacteriostatic,


Virustatic Functions

Category

Operation Limit for Heating (CWB)

Power-Airflow Diffuser

Comfort
Control

FTKS50BVMA8

Operation Limit for Cooling (CDB)

FTKS50-71FVM

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)

FTKS25/35DVM

Basic
Function

Functions

FTKS50BVMA8

Category

FTKS50-71FVM

Functions

FTKS25/35DVM

EDSG18-936

Temperature Display

Another Room Operation

Remote
Controller

Wireless
Wired

: Holding Functions
: No Functions

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

17

FDKS50/60CVMB

FDKS25/35EAVMB

Basic
Function

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Operation Limit for Heating (CWB)

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic


Deodorizing Function

PAM Control

Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic


Air-Purifying Filter

Oval Scroll Compressor

Longlife Filter (Option)

Swing Compressor

Functions

Comfortable
Airflow

Lifestyle
Convenience

Air Filter (Prefilter)

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

Reluctance DC Motor

Washable Grille

Power-Airflow Flap

Filter Cleaning Indicator

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Mold Proof Operation

Power-Airflow Diffuser

Heating Dry Operation

Wide-Angle Louvers

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Timer

24-Hour ON/OFF Timer

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

72-Hour ON/OFF Timer

3-D Airflow

Night Set Mode

COMFORT AIRFLOW Mode

Worry Free
Reliability &
Durability

Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) Display

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure)

Auto Fan Speed

Wiring-Error Check

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor


Heat Exchanger

Night Quiet Mode (Automatic)

Operation

Rotary Compressor

3-Step Airflow (H/P Only)


Comfort
Control

Category

Health &
Clean

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)


Operation Limit for Cooling (CDB)

Compressor

FDKS25/35EAVMB

Air-Purifying Filter with Bacteriostatic &


Virustatic Functions

Category

FDKS50/60CVMB

Functions

FDKS25/35CAVMB

EDSG18-936

FDKS25/35CAVMB

Functions

Flexibility

Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible


Indoor Unit

Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation (Manual)

Flexible Voltage Correspondence

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

High Ceiling Application

Quick Warming Function

Chargeless

Hot-Start Function

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

Automatic Defrosting

Power Selection

Automatic Operation

Remote
Control

5-Rooms Centralized Controller


(Option)

Program Dry Function

Remote Control Adaptor


(Normal Open-Pulse Contact) (Option)

Fan Only

Remote Control Adaptor


(Normal Open Contact) (Option)

New POWERFUL Operation


(Non-Inverter)

Inverter POWERFUL Operation


Priority-Room Setting

COOL / HEAT Mode Lock

DIII-NET Compatible (Adaptor) (Option)


Remote
Controller

Wireless
Wired

HOME LEAVE Operation


ECONO Mode

Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button


Signal Receiving Sign

Note:

18

Temperature Display

Another Room Operation

: Holding Functions
: No Functions

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

Comfortable
Airflow

FBQ60/71BV1

Photocatalytic Deodorizing Filter

Operation Limit for Heating (CWB)

Air-Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic


Deodorizing Function

PAM Control

Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic


Air-Purifying Filter

Oval Scroll Compressor

Longlife Filter (Option)

Swing Compressor

Air Filter (Prefilter)

Rotary Compressor

Wipe-Clean Flat Panel

Reluctance DC Motor

Washable Grille

Power-Airflow Flap

Power-Airflow Dual Flaps

Power-Airflow Diffuser

Wide-Angle Louvers

Filter Cleaning Indicator

Heating Dry Operation

Good-Sleep Cooling Operation

Timer

24-Hour ON/OFF Timer

72-Hour ON/OFF Timer


Night Set Mode

3-D Airflow

COMFORT AIRFLOW Mode

Worry Free
Reliability &
Durability

3-Step Airflow (H/P Only)

Auto Fan Speed

Indoor Unit Quiet Operation

Flexible Voltage Correspondence

Night Quiet Mode (Automatic)

High Ceiling Application

Outdoor Unit Quiet Operation (Manual)

Chargeless

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

Either Side Drain (Right or Left)

Quick Warming Function

Power Selection

5-Rooms Centralized Controller


(Option)

Flexibility

Self-Diagnosis (Digital, LED) Display


Wiring-Error Check

Anti-Corrosion Treatment of Outdoor


Heat Exchanger

Multi-Split / Split Type Compatible


Indoor Unit

Hot-Start Function

Automatic Defrosting

Remote Control Adaptor


(Normal Open-Pulse Contact) (Option)

Automatic Operation

Remote Control Adaptor


(Normal Open Contact) (Option)

Dlll-NET Compatible (Adaptor)


(Option)

Fan Only

Note:

Auto-Restart (after Power Failure)

Remote
Control

Program Dry Function

Lifestyle
Convenience

Mold Proof Operation

Horizontal Auto-Swing (Right and Left)

Operation

FCQ35-71BVE

Vertical Auto-Swing (Up and Down)

Comfort
Control

Air-Purifying Filter with Bacteriostatic &


Virustatic Functions

Category

Health &
Clean

Inverter (with Inverter Power Control)


Operation Limit for Cooling (CDB)

Compressor

Functions

FFQ25-60BV1B9

Basic
Function

Functions

FBQ60/71BV1

Category

FCQ35-71BVE

Functions

FFQ25-60BV1B9

EDSG18-936

Remote
Controller

New POWERFUL Operation


(Non-Inverter)

Inverter POWERFUL Operation

Priority-Room Setting

COOL / HEAT Mode Lock

HOME LEAVE Operation

ECONO Mode

Indoor Unit ON/OFF Button

Signal Receiving Sign

Temperature Display

Another Room Operation

Wireless

Wired

: Holding Functions
: No Functions

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

19

Specifications

EDSG18-936

3. Specifications
3.1

Outdoor Units
50Hz 230V

Model

RMKS112EVM

RMKS140EVM

RMKS160EVM

4HP

5HP

6HP

kW
(kcal/h)

11.2 (9,630)

14.0 (12,040)

15.5 (13,330)

Total Indoor Unit Capacity

kW

5.5~14.5

7.0~18.2

8.0~20.8

Power Consumption 1

Running Current 1

Cooling Capacity

Casing Color

Ivory White
Type

Compressor

Hermetically Sealed Scroll Type

Model

JT100G-VDL

Motor Output
(2.2kW/60rps)
Refrigerant
Oil
Refrigerant
Air Flow Rate
(H)

kW

2.5

3.0

Model
Charge
Type

1.5
R-410A

Charge

kg

4.0

m/min(cfm)

106 (3,742)

Type
Fan

Propeller

Motor Output

70+70

Running Current
Power Consumption

A
W

0.4+0.4
88+88

Starting Current

15.4

19.7

Dimensions (HWD)

mm

1,345900320

Package Dimensions (HWD)

mm

1,475925390

Weight

kg

125

Gross Weight

kg

136

Operation Sound
Liquid
Piping
Gas
Connection
Drain

dBA
mm

52

Max. piping
length
Max. level
difference

53

54

19.1 (Brazing Connection)

mm

18

mm

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


3 For Power Supply (Including Earth Wiring), 2 For Interunit Wiring (Outdoor Unit-BP)

O.U. - BP
BP - I.U.

m
m

System Total
BP - I.U.

m
m

1st Branch - I.U.


O.U. - BP

m
m

40
30

O.U. - I.U.
BP - BP, I.U. - I.U.

m
m

30
15

kg/m

Necessary

Necessity of Additional Charge 2

Note:

23.5

9.5 (Flare Connection)

Heat Insulation
No. of Wiring Connection
Total piping
length

3.5

DAPHNE FVC68D

55
80

60
115

135
15

1. 1 See page 22 Combination Capacity Index.


2. 2 Refrigerant charge is required. (Chargeless piping length 0m)
Formula for calculation charge : R (kg)
R = Total length (m) of liquid pipe size at 9.50.054 +Total length (m) of liquid piping size at 6.40.022
3. The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Cooling

90
145

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

Piping Length

Indoor ; 27CDB / 19CWB


Outdoor ; 35CDB

Main Piping : 5m
Branch Piping : 3m
Level difference:0m

Outdoor Unit
Main Piping
Indoor Unit
BP Unit

Branch Piping
(Q0143)

20

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

3.2

Specifications

BP Unit
50Hz 230V

Model

BPMKS967B2B

Connectable Indoor Units

BPMKS967B3B

1~2 Units

Casing Color
Power Consumption

1~3 Units
Paintingless

Running Current
Refrigerant Type

10

10

0.05

0.05

R-410A

Dimension (HWD)

mm

Package Dimension (HWD)

mm

Machine Weight
Gross Weight

kg
kg

7.5
11

mm

Main : 9.51 / Branch : 6.42

Main : 9.51 / Branch : 6.43

mm

Main : 19.11 / Branch : 15.92

Main : 19.11 / Branch : 15.93

Number of Wiring Connections


Liquid
Piping
Connection
Gas
(Brazing)
Drain

180294(650)*350
257738427

4 for Interunit Wiring

Heat Insulation
Max. Piping Length
Amount of Additional Charge

mm

Drain Processingless

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes

g/m

Max. Height Difference

Max. Combination

kW

Min. Combination

kW

Installation Manual

14.2

pc.

pc.

Accessories

For Branch
Hanger Metal

pc.

Drawing No.

Note:

Liquid

1 (For I.D. 6.4)

Gas

1 (For I.D. 12.7)

Gas

1 (For I.D. 15.9, 19.1)


1 (For I.D. 9.5)

Liquid
Gas

2 (For I.D. 12.7, 9.5)

pc.

Screws
pc.
Heat Insulation (2pc. is 1 set)
Binding Band

20.8
2.0

For Main
L Shape Reducer

8
12

3 (For I.D. 12.7, 9.5)


4
8 (M48)

3 Set

4 Set
2
C : 4D050058B

1. BP or Indoor Unit Max. Height - BP or Indoor Unit Min. Height Max. 15m.
Set up BP and indoor unit within 15m height difference.
2. The piping connection must be cut so as to suit the piping sizes of the indoor unit which will be connected.
The same sizes should be used for the piping on the outdoor unit.
3. ( )* : including auxiliary piping length

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

21

Specifications

3.3

EDSG18-936

Combination Capacity Index


Indoor Unit

FTKS, FDKS, FFQ, FCQ, FBQ

Class

25

35

50

60

71

Rated Capacity (kW)

2.5

3.5

5.0

6.0

7.1

Capacity of each indoor unit = Capacity calculated on the table below Rated capacity of each indoor unit
Total rated capacity of the indoor units

Cooling Capacity for 4HP

4HP(cooling)
Capacity, power consumption (kW)

25
20

Capacity [kW]
Power consumption [kW]

15
10
5
0
0

5
10
15
Total indoor unit capacity

20
(R5902)

4HP (cooling)
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1

Power
consumption
(kW)
1.68
1.71
1.75
1.78
1.81
1.85
1.88
1.91
1.95
1.98
2.01
2.05
2.08
2.11
2.14
2.18
2.21
2.24
2.28
2.31
2.34
2.38
2.41
2.44
2.48
2.51
2.54
2.57
2.61
2.64
2.67
2.71
2.74
2.77
2.81

Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6

Power
consumption
(kW)
2.84
2.87
2.90
2.94
2.97
3.00
3.04
3.07
3.10
3.14
3.17
3.20
3.24
3.27
3.30
3.33
3.37
3.40
3.43
3.47
3.50
3.53
3.57
3.60
3.63
3.67
3.70
3.73
3.76
3.80
3.83
3.86
3.90
3.93
3.96

Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
12.7
12.7
12.8
12.8
12.8
12.8
12.8
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
12.9
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
13.1
13.1
13.1

Power
consumption
(kW)
4.00
4.00
4.01
4.02
4.02
4.03
4.04
4.05
4.05
4.06
4.07
4.07
4.08
4.09
4.10
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.12
4.13
4.14

(R5903)

22

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Specifications

Total rated capacity =


of the indoor units

2.5

Cooling capacity of FTKS25D =


Cooling capacity of FTKS35D =

5.0

15.1 2.5
17
15.1 3.5
17

FBQ60B

3.5

FDKS50C
=

for a 5HP (cooling):


FTKS25D
+
FTKS35D
=

For Example:

6.0 = 17 < 18.2

= 2.221

Cooling capacity of FDKS50C

= 3.109

Cooling capacity of FBQ60B

15.1 5.0 = 4.441


17
15.1 6.0 = 5.329
17

Cooling Capacity for 5HP

5HP (cooling)
Capacity, power consumption (kW)

25
Capacity [kW]
Power consumption [kW]
20

15

10

0
0

5
10
15
Total indoor unit capacity

20
(R5904)

5HP (cooling)
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
6.9
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.5
10.6
10.7

Power
consumption
(kW)
1.80
1.84
1.87
1.91
1.95
1.98
2.02
2.06
2.10
2.13
2.17
2.21
2.25
2.28
2.32
2.36
2.40
2.43
2.47
2.51
2.54
2.58
2.62
2.66
2.69
2.73
2.77
2.81
2.84
2.88
2.92
2.96
2.99
3.03
3.07
3.10
3.14
3.18
3.22
3.25

Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7

Power
consumption
(kW)
3.29
3.33
3.37
3.40
3.44
3.48
3.52
3.55
3.59
3.63
3.67
3.70
3.74
3.78
3.81
3.85
3.89
3.93
3.96
4.00
4.04
4.08
4.11
4.15
4.19
4.23
4.26
4.30
4.34
4.37
4.41
4.45
4.49
4.52
4.56
4.60
4.64
4.67
4.71
4.75

Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
16.0
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8
16.9
17.0
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
18.0
18.1
18.2

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
14.8
14.8
14.8
14.8
14.8
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
14.9
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.1
15.2
15.2
15.2
15.2
15.2
15.2

Power
consumption
(kW)
4.79
4.79
4.80
4.80
4.81
4.82
4.82
4.83
4.84
4.84
4.85
4.86
4.86
4.87
4.88
4.88
4.89
4.90
4.90
4.91
4.91
4.92
4.93
4.93
4.94
4.95
4.95
4.96
4.97
4.97
4.98
4.99
4.99

(R5905)

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

23

Specifications

EDSG18-936

Cooling Capacity for 6HP

6HP(cooling)
Capacity, power consumption (kW)

25
Capacity [kW]
Power consumption [kW]
20

15

10

0
0

5
10
15
Total indoor unit capacity

20
(R5906)

6HP (cooling)
Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
7.8
7.8
7.9
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
10.9
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
12.0

Power
consumption
(kW)
2.04
2.09
2.13
2.17
2.21
2.26
2.30
2.34
2.39
2.43
2.47
2.51
2.56
2.60
2.64
2.68
2.73
2.77
2.81
2.85
2.90
2.94
2.98
3.03
3.07
3.11
3.15
3.20
3.24
3.28
3.32
3.37
3.41
3.45
3.50
3.54
3.58
3.62
3.67
3.71
3.75
3.79
3.84
3.88
3.92

Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
16.0
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8
16.9

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
13.0
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
14.0
14.0
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.5
15.5
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.7

Power
consumption
(kW)
3.96
4.01
4.05
4.09
4.14
4.18
4.22
4.26
4.31
4.35
4.39
4.43
4.48
4.52
4.56
4.60
4.65
4.69
4.73
4.78
4.82
4.86
4.90
4.95
4.99
5.03
5.07
5.12
5.16
5.20
5.25
5.29
5.33
5.37
5.42
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46

Total indoor
unit capacity
(kW)
17.0
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
18.0
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.8
18.9
19.0
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8
19.9
20.0
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8

Cooling
capacity
(kW)
15.7
15.7
15.7
15.7
15.8
15.8
15.8
15.8
15.8
15.8
15.9
15.9
15.9
15.9
15.9
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
16.1
16.1
16.1
16.1
16.1
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.3
16.3
16.3
16.3
16.3
16.4
16.4

Power
consumption
(kW)
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.46
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.47
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48
5.48

(R5907)

Note:
Cooling capacity is based on: indoor temp. 27CDB, 19 CWB; outdoor temp. 35 CDB.
The rated capacities above show the rise in the total indoor unit capacity when operating frequency is constant.
Values for changes in capacity are fixed after accounting for variations in operating frequency and should be used as
reference values.
24

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

3.4

Specifications

Indoor Units

Wall Mounted Type


50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Direction Control
Air Filter
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L/SL
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps

A
W
%
mm
mm
kg
kg

Air Flow Rates

Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Direction Control
Air Filter
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan

Note:

FTKS35DVM
3.5kW Class
White
8.9 (314)
6.9 (242)
4.8 (169)
4.0 (141)
Cross Flow Fan
40
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.18
40
96.6
Microcomputer Control
283800195
265855340
9
12

dBA

37/25/22

39/26/23

mm
mm
mm

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4
9.5
18.0
3D049321

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4
9.5
18.0
3D049322

mm
mm
kg
kg

FTKS50FVM
5.0kW Class
White
14.7 (519)
12.6 (445)
10.2 (360)
9.2 (325)
Cross Flow Fan
43
5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.15
34
98.6
Microcomputer Control
2901,050238
3371,147366
12
17

FTKS60FVM
6.0kW Class
White
16.2 (572)
13.9 (491)
11.5 (406)
10.0 (353)
Cross Flow Fan
43
5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.18
40
96.6
Microcomputer Control
2901,050238
3371,147366
12
17

dBA

43/39/34/31

45/41/36/33

mm
mm
mm

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4
12.7
18.0
3D056225

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4
12.7
18.0
3D056226

Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
m/min
(cfm)

FTKS25DVM
2.5kW Class
White
8.7 (307)
6.7 (237)
4.7 (166)
3.9 (138)
Cross Flow Fan
40
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.16
35
95.1
Microcomputer Control
283800195
265855340
9
12

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps

A
W
%

See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

25

Specifications

EDSG18-936

50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Direction Control
Air Filter
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
Sound Power H
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan

Note:

26

mm
mm
kg
kg

FTKS71FVM
7.1kW Class
White
17.4 (614)
14.6 (516)
11.9 (420)
10.7 (378)
Cross Flow Fan
43
5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.20
45
97.8
Microcomputer Control
2901,050238
3371,147366
12
17

FTKS50BVMA8
5.0kW Class
White
11.4 (402)
9.8 (346)
8.7 (306)
7.7 (271)
Cross Flow Fan
40
5 Steps, Quiet, Auto
Right, Left, Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.17
40
98
Microcomputer Control
290795238
280840338
9
13

dBA

46/42/37/34

44/40/35/32

dBA

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4
15.9
18.0
3D056227

63
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
12.7
18.0
3D060919

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps

A
W
%

mm
mm
mm

See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Specifications

Duct Connected Type


50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color

FDKS25CAVMB
2.5kW Class

m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Fan

Type
Motor Output
Speed

mm
mm
kg
kg

9.5 (335)
8.8 (311)
8.0 (282)
6.7 (237)
Sirocco Fan
62
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.47
100
92.5
Microcomputer Control
200900620
2661,106751
25
31

10.0 (353)
9.3 (328)
8.5 (300)
7.0 (247)
Sirocco Fan
62
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.47
100
92.5
Microcomputer Control
200900620
2661,106751
25
31

dBA

35/33/31/29

35/33/31/29

Pa
L/h

40
1.2
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D048947C

40
1.9
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D048948C

FDKS50CVMB
5.0kW Class

FDKS60CVMB
6.0kW Class

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps

Air Filter
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
External Static Pressure
Moisture Removal
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.

A
W
%

mm
mm
mm

Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color
m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Fan

Type
Motor Output
Speed

Note:

mm
mm
kg
kg

12.0 (424)
11.0 (388)
10.0 (353)
8.4 (297)
Sirocco Fan
130
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.64
140
95.1
Microcomputer Control
200900620
2661,106751
27
34

16.0 (565)
14.8 (523)
13.5 (477)
11.2 (395)
Sirocco Fan
130
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.74
160
94.0
Microcomputer Control
2001,100620
2661,306751
30
37

dBA

37/35/33/31

38/36/34/32

Pa
L/h

40
2.9
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
12.7
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D052134A

40
3.9
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
12.7
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D052135

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps

Air Filter
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
External Static Pressure
Moisture Removal
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.

FDKS35CAVMB
3.5kW Class

A
W
%

mm
mm
mm

1. See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.


2. The operating sound is based on the rear side suction inlet and the external static pressure 40 Pa.
Operating sound for under side suction inlet: [operating sound for rear side suction inlet]+5 dB.
However, when installation to which the external static pressure becomes low is carried out,
5 dB or more may go up.

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

27

Specifications

EDSG18-936

50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Front Panel Color

FDKS25EAVMB
2.5kW Class

m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Fan

Type
Motor Output
Speed

Note:

28

mm
mm
kg
kg

8.7 (307)
8.0 (282)
7.3 (258)
6.2 (219)
Sirocco Fan
62
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.48
71
64.3
Microcomputer Control
200700620
274906751
21
29

8.7 (307)
8.0 (282)
7.3 (258)
6.2 (219)
Sirocco Fan
62
5 Steps, Silent, Auto
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.48
71
64.3
Microcomputer Control
200700620
274906751
21
29

dBA

35/33/31/29

35/33/31/29

Pa
L/h

30
1.2
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D051882A

30
1.9
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D051884A

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps

Air Filter
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/M/L/SL
Sound
External Static Pressure
Moisture Removal
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.

FDKS35EAVMB
3.5kW Class

A
W
%

mm
mm
mm

1. See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.


2. The operating sound is based on the rear side suction inlet and the external static pressure 30 Pa.
Operating sound for under side suction inlet: [operating sound for rear side suction inlet]+6 dB.
However, when installation to which the external static pressure becomes low is carried out,
6 dB or more may go up.

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Specifications

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type


50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity 1
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Direction Control
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD) 2
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Sound Power H
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan

mm
mm
kg
kg

FFQ25BV1B9
2.5kW Class
White
55700700
9.0 (318)

6.5 (230)

Turbo Fan
55
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
0.37
73
85.8
Microcomputer Control
260 (286)575575
370687674
17.5
21

FFQ35BV1B9
3.5kW Class
White
55700700
10.0 (353)

6.5 (230)

Turbo Fan
55
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
0.40
84
91.3
Microcomputer Control
260 (286)575575
370687674
17.5
21

dBA

29.5/24.5

32/25

dBA

46.5
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D040444B

49.0
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
9.5
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D040442B

mm
mm
kg
kg

FFQ50BV1B9
5.0kW Class
White
55700700
12.0 (424)

8.0 (283)

Turbo Fan
55
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
0.49
97
86.1
Microcomputer Control
260 (286)575575
370687674
17.5
21

FFQ60BV1B9
6.0kW Class
White
55700700
15.0 (530)

10.0 (353)

Turbo Fan
55
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
0.61
120
85.5
Microcomputer Control
260 (286)575575
370687674
17.5
21

dBA

36/27

41/32

dBA

53
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
12.7
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D040437

58
Both Liquid and Gas Pipes
6.4
12.7
VP20 (O.D. 26 / I.D. 20)
3D040431

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
%

mm
mm
mm

Model
Rated Capacity 1
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Direction Control
Running Current (Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Power Factor
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD) 2
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Sound Power H
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan

Note:

1
2

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps
A
W
%

mm
mm
mm

See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.


( ) : dimension including control box

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

29

Specifications

EDSG18-936

50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Direction Control
Air Filter
Running Current (Max. Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps

A
W
mm
mm
kg
kg

Air Flow Rates

Type
Motor Output
Speed
Air Direction Control
Air Filter
Running Current (Max. Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.
Fan

Note:

30

FCQ50BVE
5.0kW Class
White
40950950
15.0 (530)

11.0 (388.3)

Turbo Fan
45
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.8
140
Microcomputer Control
230840840
305930920
24
32

dBA

34/30

34/30

mm
mm
mm

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4 (Flare)
9.5 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049093A

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049093A

FCQ60BVE
6.0kW Class
White
40950950
19.0 (670.7)

14.0 (494.2)

Turbo Fan
45
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.8
161
Microcomputer Control
230840840
305930920
24
32

FCQ71BVE
7.1kW Class
White
40950950
19.0 (670.7)

14.0 (494.2)

Turbo Fan
45
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.8
161
Microcomputer Control
230840840
305930920
24
32

Model
Rated Capacity
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)

FCQ35BVE
3.5kW Class
White
40950950
14.0 (494)

10.0 (353)

Turbo Fan
45
2 Steps
Horizontal, Downward
Removable-Washable-Mildew Proof
0.8
140
Microcomputer Control
230840840
305930920
24
32

H
M
L
SL
W
Steps

A
W
mm
mm
kg
kg
dBA

36/31

36/31

mm
mm
mm

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049093A

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049093A

See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Specifications

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type


50Hz 230V
Model
Rated Capacity
Color
Decoration
Panel
Dimensions (HWD)
m/min
(cfm)

Air Flow Rates

Fan

Type
Motor Output
Speed

W
Steps

Air Filter
Running Current (Max. Rated)
Power Consumption (Rated)
Temperature Control
Dimensions (HWD)
Packaged Dimensions (HWD)
Weight
Gross Weight
Operation
H/L
Sound
Heat Insulation
Liquid
Piping Connection
Gas
Drain
Drawing No.

Note:

H
M
L
SL

A
W
mm
mm
kg
kg

FBQ60BV1
6.0kW Class
White
551,100500
17.0 (600)

13.0 (459)

Sirocco Fan
110
2 Steps
Resin Net (with mold resistant)
0.9
165
Microcomputer Control
3001,000800
4001,171991
41
50

FBQ71BV1
7.1kW Class
White
551,100500
19.0 (670)

14.0 (494)

Sirocco Fan
12.5
2 Steps
Resin Net (with mold resistant)
1.1
184
Microcomputer Control
3001,000800
4001,171991
41
50

dBA

42/36

42/36

mm
mm
mm

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


6.4 (Flare)
12.7 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049097

Both Liquid and Gas Pipes


9.5 (Flare)
15.9 (Flare)
VP25 (O.D. 32 / I.D. 25)
3D049097

See Page 22 Combination Capacity Index.

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

Conversion Formulae
kcal/h=kW860
Btu/h=kW3414
cfm=m/min35.3

31

30

45

140

376

191

71

142

89

620
140
(Pitch of foundation bolt holes)
900

92

30
16

19

39

7
6

30
410
435

(Pitch of foundation bolt holes)


350
(345~355)

24

71 102 117

60
89

95
54
16

19

55

13

145

67
8 Drain pipe connection
7 Control wiring intake
6 Power supply wiring intake
5 Refrigerant piping intake
4 Grounding terminal
3 Service port
2 Liquid pipe connection
1 Gas pipe connection
NO.
Parts name

52

80

84

36
54
320
58

95
54

55
223

32
95

In switch box (M5)


In the unit
9.5 Flare
19.1 Brazing
Remarks

Outside Diameter 26
27 knock hole
34 knock hole

3D052596

4.1

53

Hole for anchor


bolt 4-M12

Dimensions
EDSG18-936

4. Dimensions
Outdoor Units

RMKS112EVM, RMKS140EVM, RMKS160EVM

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

1345

EDSG18-936

4.2

Dimensions

BP Units

BPMKS967B2B
Manufacturers
Branch piping label

4-Suspension
bolt(M8~M10)

Standard accessories (Caution5. )


68
163

For indoor side(Gas)

I.D.9.5
Cut line for
Cut line for I.D.12.7

322
Suspension bolt pitch
Terminal(For A room)
Wiring clamp
Terminal(For B room)
45 Wiring clamp
Electric box
Terminal(For transmission)
I.D.19.1CuT
2-I.D.15.9CuT
Suspension bolt pitch

INDOOR UNIT SIDE

Terminal
Earth(M4) (For Power supply) Earth(M4) I.D.9.5CuT
178
178
294
(650)

Characteristics:
1. No drain treatment necessary.
2. This unit can be installed so that or side
faces forward. (It choosed by servicing direction).
3. The piping for the indoor unit and outdoor unit can be.
freely installed to directions of , , or .
4. This unit can be installed with either suspending
from the ceiling or mounting on wall.

Wall-mounting
(Characteristic 4. )

90

I.D.12.7

165
90

For outdoor side(Gas)


110
Dimple
65

O.D.19.1

I.D.19.1

Cut line for


45
I.D.15.9
For indoor side(Liquid)
Cut line for O.D.6.4
150
For outdoor unit side(Liquid)
O.D.9.5 100 I.D.6.4
I.D.9.5

Installation restrictions
(servicing space) (installation and service space) (servicing space)
Min390
Min390

OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE

Screw for temporary fixing


323~355 (Cautions 3.)

113

25

Cautions:
1. This unit must be installed so that side of is facing up.
2. The slant of face must be within 5
for front and rear, right and left.
3. Before mounting on the wall , installation becomes easy
by hanging this unit on screw for temporary fixing. (2 places)
4. At the time of brazing the pipes, wrap the pipes with
sufficient wet cloths.
And after brazing also, must cool piping enough.
5. Cut the piping of the standard accessories in order to
match the indoor units piping diameter.

2-Brazing
197
107

For outdoor unit side(Gas)


O.D.15.9

(servicing space)
Min300

2-I.D.6.4CuT

RoomB

RoomA

23 73.5

(180)

(304)
57 95

23 73.5

22-Brazing

70
125

155

(304)
254

O.D.15.9

110

25

(Characteristic 3. )

The opening for Inspection


Servicing is needed
opening of 650mm square
for service and maintenance.

:screw for fixing. (4 places)

3D048412A

BPMKS967B3B
Manufacturers 4-Suspension
bolt(M8~M10)
Branch piping label

Standard accessories(Caution5. )

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

110
45

Cut line for


I.D.15. 9

For indoor side(Liquid)


Cut line for O.D.6. 4
150
For outdoor unit side(Liquid)
100

O.D. 9.5
I.D.6.4

OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE

Screw for temporary fixing


323~355 (Cautions 3.)
25

Cautions:
1. This unit must be installed so that side of is facing up.
2. The slant of face must be within 5
for front and rear, right and left.
3. Before mounting on the wall , installation becomes easy
by hanging this unit on screw for temporary fixing. (2 places)
4. At the time of brazing the pipes, wrap the pipes with
sufficient wet cloths.
And after brazing also, must cool piping enough.
5. Cut the piping of the standard accessories in order to
match the indoor units piping diameter.

165
90

155

Wall-mounting
(Characteristic 4. )

I.D.19. 1

O.D.19. 1

I.D.9.5

113

Characteristics:
1. No drain treatment necessary.
2. This unit can be installed so that or side
faces forward. (It choosed by servicing direction).
3. The piping for the indoor unit and outdoor unit can be.
freely installed to directions of , , or .
4. This unit can be installed with either suspending
from the ceiling or mounting on wall.

2-Brazing
197
107

For outdoor side(Gas)


110
Dimple
65

Installation restrictions
(servicing space) (installation and service space) (servicing space)
Min460
Min390

(servicing space)
Min300

Terminal
Earth(M4) (For Power supply) Earth(M4) I.D.9.5CuT
178
178
294
(650)

For outdoor unit side(Gas)


O.D.15.9 90
I.D.12.7

23 73.5

(180)
RoomC

RoomB

RoomA

23 73.5
INDOOR UNIT SIDE

O.D.15.9

I.D.9.5
Cut line for
Cut line for I.D.12.7

322
Suspension bolt pitch
Terminal(For A room)
Wiring clamp
Wiring clamp
Terminal(For B room)
23-Brazing (304)
Terminal(For C room)
45
Electric box
Terminal(For transmission)
57 95 95 57
I.D.19.1CuT
3-I.D.15.9CuT
Suspension bolt pitch

3-I.D.6.4CuT

For indoor side(Gas)

70
125

68
163
258

(304)
254

25

(Characteristic 3. )

The opening for Inspection


Servicing is needed
opening of 650mm square
for service and maintenance.

: screw for fixing.(4 places)

3D048411A

33

Dimensions

EDSG18-936

4.3

Indoor Units

4.3.1

Wall Mounted Type

THE MARK () SHOWS PIPING DIRECTION

AIR FLOW(INDOOR )
30MIN.

REAR

800
RIGHT

LEFT

( INCLUDING
MOUNTING PLATE )

50MIN.

197

50MIN.

(SPACEFOR
MAINTENANCE)

195

( SPACE FOR
PERFORMANCE)

FTKS25DVM, FTKS35DVM

(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)

REQUIRED SPACE

SIGNAL RECEIVER
283

NAME PLATE
OPERATION LAMP
TIMER LAMP
INTELLIGENT EYE LAMP

TERMINAL BLOCK
WITH EARTH
TERMINAL

INTELLIGENT EYE SENSOR


BOTTOM

GAS PIPE 9.5Cut


(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE
THE UNIT:ABOUT390)

DRAIN HOSE
(CONNECTING PART
I. D. 14
LIQUID PIPE 6.4CuT
O. D.18
(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE THE HOSE LENGTH OF OUTSIDE
THE UNIT:ABOUT 340)
THE UNIT IS APPROX. 440)

INDOOR UNIT ON/OFF SWITCH


FLAPS

FRONT PANEL FIXED SCREWS


( INSIDE )

ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR( INSIDE )

SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
17

711

13

800

BLADE ANGLE

18

58

49

UP/DOWN( AUTOMATIC )

163

60
50

44.5

10

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER

283

44.5

FAN

COOLING, DRY

180

DAIKIN

110

WALL HOLE FOR EMBEDDED PIPING


65 HOLE

70

WALL HOLE
65 HOLE

STANDARD LOCATIONS OF WALL HOLES

RIGHT/LEFT( MANUAL )

( ARC433B47 )

3D047958F

45

45

AIR FLOW(INDOOR)
(FOR PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE)

REAR

1050

RIGHT
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
MIN.50

INCLUDING
INSTALLATION PLATE
240
238

OPERATION LAMP
SIGNAL RECEIVER
290

FRONT GRILLE FIXING SCREWS


(INSIDE)

MODEL NAME
PLATE

INDOOR UNIT ON/OFF


SWITCH

FLAPS

TERMINAL BLOCK WITH


EARTH TERMINAL
(INSIDE)

ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR


(INSIDE)
INTELLIGENT EYE SENSOR
TIMER LAMP
HOME LEAVE LAMP

DRAIN HOSE FOR VP13


(CONNECTING PART
I. D. 14.0, O. D. 18.0)
(THE HOSE LENGTH OF
LIQUID PIPE 6.4 CuT
OUTSIDE THE UNIT :
(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE ABOUT 530)
THE UNIT : ABOUT 480)
1050

GAS PIPE 12.7 CuT


(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE
THE UNIT : ABOUT 430)

SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER
18

BLADE ANGLES
HORIZONTAL BLADE
(AUTOMATIC)
COOLING

893.5

52.5

14.5

58

MIN.50
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)

REQUIRED SPACE

DRY

(ARC433B71)

35 5
35

FAN

VERTICAL BLADE(AUTOMATIC)

5
50

5
55

34

50

60
WALL HOLE FOR
EMBEDDED PIPING
80 HOLE

99.5

52

WIRELESS REMOTE
CONTROLLER

52

40 10
40

155.5
290

163

10

30

REAR
LEFT

MIN.30

THE MARK () SHOWS PIPING DIRECTION

(SPACE FOR
PERFORMANCE)

FTKS50FVM, FTKS60FVM

WALL HOLE
80 HOLE

STANDARD LOCATIONS OF WALL HOLES

3D055868A

55

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Dimensions

AIR FLOW(INDOOR)
(FOR PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE)

REAR

REAR

1050

LEFT

MIN.30

THE MARK () SHOWS PIPING DIRECTION

RIGHT
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)
MIN.50

MIN.50
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)

REQUIRED SPACE

INCLUDING
( INSTALLATION
PLATE )

(SPACE FOR
PERFORMANCE)

FTKS71FVM

240
238
OPERATION LAMP
SIGNAL RECEIVER

TERMINAL BLOCK WITH


EARTH TERMINAL
(INSIDE)

ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR


(INSIDE)
INTELLIGENT EYE SENSOR
TIMER LAMP
HOME LEAVE LAMP

DRAIN HOSE FOR VP13


(CONNECTING PART
I. D. 14.0, O. D. 18.0)
(THE HOSE LENGTH OF
LIQUID PIPE 6.4 CuT
OUTSIDE THE UNIT :
(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE ABOUT 530)
THE UNIT : ABOUT 480)

GAS PIPE 15.9 CuT


(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE
THE UNIT : ABOUT 430)

SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER
18

1050

BLADE ANGLES

893.5

HORIZONTAL BLADE
(AUTOMATIC)
COOLING

52.5

14.5

58

35

35

FAN

CONTROLLER

VERTICAL BLADE(AUTOMATIC)

60

(ARC433B71)

99.5

WALL HOLE FOR


EMBEDDED PIPING
80 HOLE

50 50

5
55

52

WIRELESS REMOTE

52

40 10
40

155.5
290

163

DRY

10

30

FRONT GRILLE FIXING SCREWS


(INSIDE)

FLAPS

290

MODEL NAME
PLATE

INDOOR UNIT ON/OFF


SWITCH

STANDARD LOCATIONS OF WALL HOLES

WALL HOLE
80 HOLE

3D055869A

55

FTKS50BVMA8
THE MARK () SHOWS PIPING DIRECTION

RIGHT
INCLUDING
( INSTALLATION
PLATE )
(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)

238

GAS PIPE 12.7 CuT


(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE
THE UNIT : ABOUT 400)

FLAPS

BLADE ANGLES

35

40

625. 5

62. 5

155. 5

40 10

795

14. 5

DRY

CONNECTING PART
I. D. 14
O. D. 18
THE HOSE LENGTH OF
OUTSIDE THE UNIT :
ABOUT 500

44. 5

163

LIQUID PIPE 6.4 CuT


(THE LENGTH OF PIPE OUTSIDE
THE UNIT : ABOUT 450)

HORIZONTAL BLADE
(AUTOMATIC)
COOLING

10

DRAIN HOSE FOR VP13

30

FRONT GRILLE FIXING SCREWS


(INSIDE)
HOME LEAVE LAMP

58

REQUIRED SPACE

TERMINAL BLOCK
WITH EARTH
TERMINAL
(INSIDE)

SIGNAL RECEIVER
INDOOR UNIT ON/0FF SWITCH
INTELLIGENT EYE SENSOR
ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR(INSIDE)
TIMER LAMP

SIGNAL
TRANSMITTER
18

(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)

MODEL NAME
PLATE

290

OPERATION LAMP

MIN.50

MIN.50

240

(SPACE FOR
MAINTENANCE)

REAR

290

795

MIN.30

REAR
LEFT

AIR FLOW(INDOOR )
(FOR PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE)

35
VERTICAL BLADE(AUTOMATIC)

WIRELESS REMOTE
CONTROLLER
ARC433A22

5
5
55

60

98

WALL HOLE FOR EMBEDDED PIPING


80 HOLE
50

55

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

50

44. 5

FAN
WALL HOLE
80 HOLE

STANDARD LOCATIONS OF WALL HOLES

3D044774A

35

Dimensions

4.3.2

EDSG18-936

Duct Connected Type

FDKS25CAVMB, FDKS35CAVMB, FDKS50CVMB

90

130 63

163

100
160
180

170

100

330

150
100
90
80

20-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)
NOTE)
1. IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION,
MOUNT CHAMBER COVER TO BOTTOM SIDE OF THE UNIT.
INCASEOFBOTTOM-SUCTION,
MOUNT CHAMBER COVER TO BACK SIDE OF THE UNIT.
2. LOCATION OF UNITS NAME PLATE : CONTROL BOX COVER
3. MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE.
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD(GRAVITY METHOD)
50% OR MORE.
IT CAN NOT BE EQUIPPED WITH AIR FILTER(ACCESSORY)
WHEN CONNECTING DUCT TO SUCTION SIDE.
6
4. PIPE SPECIFICATION
CDX(K)S25
CDX(K)S35
9.5 (FLARE CONNECTION)
FDX(K)S25
FDX(K)S35
CDX(K)S50
12.7 (FLARE CONNECTION)
FDX(K)S50

200
180
160
100
10
20
50

SIGNAL RECEIVER
CORD
(LENGTH:1900mm)

INFRARED RECEIVER UNIT

20-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)

HOME
LEAVE
LAMP

23

30

7xP100=700
780
800
820

DAIKIN

38

50
20
10

TIMER
LAMP
INDOOR UNIT
ON/OFF
SWICH

(72)

300
ALLOW VIEW

(20)

70

SERVICE SPACE

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER


FDKS--C(A)VMB : (ARC433B76)

ROOM
TEMP.
SENSOR

120

900
OPERATION
LAMP

INSPECTION DOOR
(CEILING OPENING)

18-M4 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)

(45)

CEILING

200
170
153
80

90

880
860
4xP150=600

400 OR MORE
(INCASE OF
BOTTOM SUCSION)

47
90

12.5
21
57.5

SUSPENSION
BOLT
4-M8~M10

DAIKIN

60

(ALL AROUND)22-4.7 HOLE


8xP100=800
940
(SUSPENSION BOLT PITCH)

SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
18

58

620

240 OR MORE

620

500
(SUSPENSION BOLT PITCH)

20 OR MORE
20 OR MORE

300 OR MORE
(SERVICE SPACE)

900

130
100
90
80

IN CASE OF BOTTOM-SUCTION

7xP100=700
780
800
820

IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION
AIR FILTER(ACCESSORY)

9
8

SUSPENSION BRACKET
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTION
INFRARED RECEIVER
6
UNIT CONNECTION
5
CONTROL BOX
DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY)
4
SOCKET FOR DRAIN
3
GAS PIPE CONNECTION
2
LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
1
NUMBER
NAME
7

I.D.25(OUTLET)
VP20 (O.D. 26/I.D. 20)
NOTE) 4.
6.4 (FLARE CONNECTION)
DESCRIPTION

C: 3D045486E

163
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER
FDKS60CVMB : (ARC433B76)

HOME
LEAVE
LAMP

SIGNAL RECEIVER
CORD (LENGTH:1900mm)

100
160
180

170

47
90

24-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)

330

38

INFRARED RECEIVER UNIT

100
23

30

ROOM
(20)
TEMP.
SENSOR

(72)

300

INDOOR UNIT
ON/OFF
SWICH

ALLOW VIEW
INSPECTION DOOR
(CEILING OPENING)
130 63

70

TIMER
LAMP

120

OPERATION
LAMP

SERVICE SPACE

SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
18

50
20
10

500
(SUSPENSION BOLT PITCH)

12.5
21
57.5

(45)

CEILING

200
170
153
80
18-M4 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)

58

60

620

26-4.7 HOLE (ALL AROUND)


10xP100=1000
1140
(SUSPENSION BOLT PITCH)
SUSPENSION BOLT
4-M8~M10
1080
1060
6xP150=900

620
400 OR MORE
(IN CASE OF
BOTTOM SUCSION)

1100

300 OR MORE
(SERVICE SPACE)

1100

240 OR MORE

20 OR MORE
20 OR MORE

FDKS60CVMB

150
100
90
80

9xP100=900
980
1000
1020

IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION
9

200
180
160
100

24-M5 HOLES (ALL AROUND)

10
20
50

9xP100=900
980
1000
1020
IN CASE OF BOTTOM-SUCTION

36

130
100
90
80

NOTE)
1. IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION,
MOUNT CHAMBER COVER TO BOTTOM SIDE OF THE UNIT.
IN CASE OF BOTTOM-SUCTION,
MOUNT CHAMBER COVER TO BACK SIDE OF THE UNIT.
2. LOCATION OF UNITS NAME PLATE : CONTROL BOX COVER
3 .MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE.
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD (GRAVITY METHOD)
50% OR MORE.
IT CAN NOT BE EQUIPPED WITH AIR FILTER(ACCESSORY)
WHEN CONNECTING DUCT TO SUCTION SIDE.

SUSPENSION BRACKET

POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTION

AIR FILTER(ACCESSORY)

5
4
3
2
1
NUMBER

INFRARED RECEIVER
UNIT CONNECTION
CONTROL BOX
DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY) I.D.25(OUTLET)
VP20 (O.D. 26/I.D. 20)
SOCKET FOR DRAIN
12.7 (FLARE CONNECTION)
GAS PIPE CONNECTION
LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION 6.4 FLARE (CONNECTION)
NAME
DESCRIPTION

C: 3D045487C

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Dimensions

FDKS25EAVMB, FDKS35EAVMB

163
OPERATION LAMP

ROOM TEMP.
SENSOR (20)

70

38

(72)

120
HOME LEAVE
LAMP

SIGNAL RECEIVER
CORD(LENGTH:1900mm)

16-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)

10 9

100
23

200
170
153
80

DAIKIN

50
20
10

130 63

TIMER LAMP
INDOOR UNIT
ON/OFF SWITCH

INFRARED RECEIVER UNIT

47
90

30

14-M4 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)

FDKS25,35EAVMB(ARC433B76)

ALLOW VIEW
INSPECTION DOOR
(CEILING OPENING)

680
660
4P150=600

12.5
21
57.5

700

SERVICE SPACE

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER


(45)

100
160
180

SUSPENSION BOLT
4-M8~M10

400 OR MORE
(IN CASE OF
BOTTOM SUCSION)

170

DAIKIN

CEILING

60

(ALL AROUND)
16-4.7 HOLE
5P100=500
740
(SUSPENSION BOLT PITCH)

SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
18

58

620

300

620

500
(SUSPENSION BOLT PITCH)

20 OR MORE
20 OR MORE

300 OR MORE
(SERVICE SPACE)

240 OR MORE

700

330

140
100
90
80

5P100=500
580
600
620

IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION

200
180
160
100

6
10 5P100=500

10
20
50
16-M5 HOLES
(ALL AROUND)

4.3.3

NOTE) 1. IN CASE OF BACK-SUCTION,


MOUNT CHAMBER COVER TO BOTTOM SIDE OF THE UNIT.
IN CASE OF BOTTOM-SUCTION,
MOUNT CHAMBER COVER TO BACK SIDE OF THE UNIT.
2. LOCATION OF UNITS NAME PLATE: CONTROL BOX COVER
3. MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE.
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD(GRAVITY METHOD)
50% OR MORE.
IT CAN NOT BE EQUIPPED WITH AIR FILTER(ACCESSORY)
WHEN CONNECTING DUCT TO SUCTION SIDE.
4. PIPE SPECIFICATION

140
580
100
600
90
80
620
IN CASE OF BOTTOM-SUCTION

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NUMBER

PROTECTION NET
AIR FILTER(ACCESSORY)
SUSPENSION BRACKET
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
INFRARED RECEIVER UNIT CONNECTION
CONTROL BOX
DRAIN HOSE(ACCESSORY)
SOCKET FOR DRAIN
GAS PIPE CONNECTION
LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
NAME

I.D.25(OUTLET)
VP20(O.D.26/I.D.20)
9.5(FLARE CONNECTION)
6.4(FLARE CONNECTION)
DESCRIPTION

C: 3D050379A

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (600600)

FFQ25BV1B9, FFQ35BV1B9 with BYFQ60B8W1 (Decoration Panel)


300 OR LESS

700

NOTE)2.

585 ~ 660(CELING OPENING SPACE)


533(SUSPENTION POSITION)
320

89

PIPE CONNECTION
SIDE

CEILING
89

B
10

150

533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)

700

585 ~ 660(CELING OPENING SPACE)

210

DRAIN CONNECTION
SIDE

4-M4 HOLE

OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE


(DIRECT CONNECTION)
B ARROW VIEW

7
320
REQUIRED SPACE

3
575

62.5

575

62.5

1500mm
OR MORE

62.5

196

1500mm OR MORE

211

45 OR LESS

NOTE) 1. STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURES LABEL


MANUFACTURES LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT : ON THE BELL MOUTH INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
MANUFACTURES LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL : ON THE INNER FRAME INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
2. IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER.
REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAIL.
3. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30C AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR
IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION, AN ADDITIONAL
INSULATION (THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM) IS REQUIRED.
4. THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 660mm SQUARE CEILING OPENING,
KEEP THE CLEARANCE OF 45mm OR LESS BETWEEN THE MAIN UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT
THE PANEL OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

45 OR LESS
NOTE)4.
A

DECORATION PANEL
BYFQ60B8W1

WHITE Ral 9010

1500 OR MORE
(REQUIRED SPACE)
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE
2500 OR MORE
FOR HEIGHT INSTALLATION

172

(180)

145
183
285

205

30

55

25

260

SUSPENTION BOLT
4-M8 ~ M10

1500mm OR MORE

62.5

295 OR MORE

750
ADJUSTABLE(0 ~ 545)

A ARROW VIEW

1500mm OR MORE
WHEN THE DISCHARGE GRILL IS CLOSEOUT,
THE REQUIRED SPACE IS 200mm OR MORE.

8
7
6
5

DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY)


SUCTION GRILLE
AIR DISCHARGE GRILL
REMOTE CONTROL CODE
AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION
2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION
1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
ITEM
PART NAME

I. D.25 (OUTLET)

VP20(O.D.26)
9.5 (FLARE CONNECTION)
6.4 (FLARE CONNECTION)
REMARK

C: 3D039003B

37

Dimensions

EDSG18-936

FFQ50BV1B9, FFQ60BV1B9 with BYFQ60B8W1 (Decoration Panel)


700

300 OR LESS

NOTE)2.

585~660(CELING OPENING SPACE)


533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)
320

PIPE CONNECTION
SIDE

210
CEILING
B

89

100

150

533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)

700

585~660(CELING OPENING SPACE)

89

DRAIN CONNECTION
SIDE

4-M4 HOLE

OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE


(DIRECT CONNECTION)
B ARROW VIEW

7
320

REQUIRED SPACE
3

196

575

1500mm
OR
OR MORE
MORE

62.5

575

1500mm OR MORE

45 OR LESS
NOTE)4.

45 OR LESS

NOTE) 1.STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURES LABEL


MANUFACTURES LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT:ON THE BELL MOUTH INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
MANUFACTURES LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL :ON THE INNER FRAME INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE
2.IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER.
REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAIL.
3.WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30C AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR
IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION,AN ADDITIONAL
DECORATION PANEL
INSULATION (THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM) IS REQUIRED.
4.THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 660mm SQUARE CEILING OPENING,
KEEP THE CLEARANCE OF 45mm OR LESS BETWEEN THE MAIN UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT BYFQ60B8W1 WHITE Ral 9010
THE PANEL OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.

1500 OR MORE
(REQUIRED SPACE)
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE
2500 OR MORE

211

(180)

145
183
285

205

172

30

55

25

260

SUSPENTION BOLT
4-M8~M10

1500mm OR MORE

62.5

295 OR MORE

62.5

62.5

1500mm OR MORE
WHEN THE DISCHARGE GRILL IS CLOSEOUT,
THE REQUIRED SPACE IS 200mm OR MORE.

DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY)


SUCTION GRILLE
AIR DISCHARGE GRILL
REMOTE CONTROL CODE
AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION
2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION
1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION
ITEM
PAR TNAME
8
7
6
5

FOR HEIGHT INSTALLATION

750
ADJUSTABLE(0~545)

A ARROW VIEW

I. D.25 (OUTLET)

VP20 (O.D.26)
12.7 (FLARE CONNECTION)
6.4 (FLARE CONNECTION)
REMARK

C: 3D039005B

BYFQ60B8W1 Decoration Panel (Option)

700

700

62.5

62.5

62.5

575

(140)
A

40
THICKNESS
OF PANEL SPACER

3
2

15
DIMENSION BETWEEN
THE BOTTOM SURFACE
OF INDOOR UNIT AND
THE SURFACE OF CEILING

105

575

143
245

62.5

255 OR MORE

A ARROW VIEW

3
2
1

PANEL SPACER
DECORATION PANEL
INDOOR UNIT

ITEM

NAME

REMARK

3D041038

38

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Dimensions

BRC1C61 Wired Remote Controller (Option)


NOTE)1.REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD AND STAPLE ARE NOT ATTACHED.
THEY ARE FIELD SUPPLIED PARTS.
SPECIFICATIONS OF CORD
VINYL CORD WITH SHEATH OR CABLE
TYPE
(INSULATED THICKNESS : 1mm OR MORE)
SIZE
0.75~1.25mm 2
TOTAL
500m
LENGTH

38

84

120

42

REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS

120

18

17

CORD OUTLET HOLE


23

28

46
INSTALLATION METHOD

STAPLE
REMOTE CONTROLLER

B EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD


C EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD
CONDUIT
17
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER
117

A EXPOSED BODY, EXPOSED CORD

0~5
BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX

(
17

THROUGH HOLE
(12~16)

17

)
CONTROL BOX

C: 3D028952

BRC7E531W Wireless Remote Controller (Option for Cooling Only Type)


REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS

RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

TRANSMITTING PART

157

DRAIN PIPING SIDE

REFRIGERANT PIPING SIDE

RECEIVER

62

17.5

REMOTE CONTROLLER HOLDER


INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
<INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE>
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)

DECORATION PANEL
(BYFQ60B8W1)

RECEIVER DETAIL

REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER

3D038937A

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

39

Dimensions

4.3.4

EDSG18-936

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (950950)

FCQ35BVE with BYC125K-W1 (Decoration Panel)


C
85
(165)

2 100=200

80

950

780 Suspension position

10

40

Branch duct
connection

350

C view
60

4-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
7
5

80
80

950

860~890 Ceiling opening

Note3.

860~890 Ceiling opening


680 Suspension position
300 or less
420

55

55

840
2 100=200

80

55
12-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)

85

*1500mm or more
Required space

30

260
270
315

150
2

40
350

Branch duct
connection

A
Notes:
1. Location of units Name Plate
For Main body:Switch Box cover inside surface of suction grille.
For decoration panel: Panel frame inside surface of suction grille.

1000 or more
Required space 165

125
150
240

95
110

295

240

Suspension
bolt
4-M8~M10

For fresh air intake kit


connection
(direct installation type)

B view
840

55

200

750
Adjustable(0~550)

40

230
10

420

160

A view

*1500mm
or more

*1500mm
or more

*1500mm or more
*When the discharge grill is closeout, the required space is
200mm or more.
Name

Number

3. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will


be a signal receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote
controller in detail.

2. When installing an optional accessory, refer to the


installation drawings.
For fresh air intake kitInspection port is necessary.
For high efficiency filter unitInspection port is not necessary.

Description

Liquid pipe connection

6.4 flare

Gas pipe connection

9.5 flare

Drain pipe connection

VP25

Power supply connection

Remote control code and control


wiring connection

Air discharge grille

Air suction grille

Port for water supply

Corner decoration cover

10

Drain hose

O.D.32

3D049126

FCQ50BVE, FCQ60BVE with BYC125K-W1 (Decoration Panel)

C
950

300 or less
9

860~890 Ceiling opening


680 Suspension position
420

2 100=200

80

85
(165)

Note3.

Branch duct
connection

350

C view
4-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
7
5

60
80
80

40

860~890 Ceiling opening

950

780 Suspension position

10

55

840

55

55
80

840
2 100=200

85

240
8

260
270
315

12-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)

*1500mm or more
Required space

Branch duct
connection

165

150
2

40
350

*1500mm
or more

*1500mm
or more

*1500mm or more
*When the discharge grill is closeout, the required space is
200mm or more.
Name

Number

Notes:
3. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will
1. Location of units Name Plate
be a signal receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote
For Main body:Switch Box cover inside surface of suction grille.
controller in detail.
For decoration panel:Panel frame inside surface of suction grille.
2. When installing an optional accessory, refer to the
installation drawings.
For fresh air intake kitInspection port is necessary.
For high efficiency filter unitInspection port is not necessary.

For fresh air intake kit


connection
(direct installation type)

B view

1000 or more
Required space

125
150
240

30
Suspension
bolt
4-M8~M10

55

95
110

295

200

750
Adjustable(0~550)

40

230
10

420

160

A view

Description

Liquid pipe connection

6.4flare

Gas pipe connection

12.7flare

Drain pipe connection

VP25

Power supply connection

Remote control code and control


wiring connection

Air discharge grille

Air suction grille

Port for water supply

Corner decoration cover

10

Drain hose

O.D.32

3D049127

40

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Dimensions

FCQ71BVE with BYC125K-W1 (Decoration Panel)

300 or less

2100=200

80

40
860~890 Ceiling opening

950

780 Suspension position

10

C view
4-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)
7
5

60
80

55

55
80

160

55
12-M4 Hole
(prepared hole)

85

95
110

295

840
2100=200

240

260
270
315

Branch duct
connection

165

150
40
350

*1500mm or more

Required space

1000 or more
Required space

125
150
240

750

840

30

Suspension
bolt
4-M8~M10

For fresh air intake kit


connection
(direct installation type)

B view

55

200

Adjustable(0~550)

40

230
10

420

Branch duct
connection

350

A view

85
(165)

950

80

Note3.

860~890 Ceiling opening


680 Suspension position
420

*1500mm
or more

*1500mm
or more
*1500mm or more

*When the discharge grill is closeout, the required space is


200mm or more.
Description
9.5 flare

Gas pipe connection

15.9 flare

Drain pipe connection

VP25

Notes:
3. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will
1. Location of units Name Plate
be a signal receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote
For Main body: Switch Box Cover inside surface of suction grille.
controller in detail.
For decoration panel: Panel frame inside surface of suction grille.
2. When installing an optional accessory, refer to the
installation drawings.
z For fresh air intake kitInspection port is necessary.
z For high efficiency filter unitInspection port is not necessary.

Name
Liquid pipe connection

Number

Power supply connection

Remote control code and control wiring connection

Air discharge grille

Air suction grille

Port for water supply

Corner decoration cover

10

Drain hose

O.D. 32

3D012312D

BRC1C61 Wired Remote Controller (Option)


NOTE)1.REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD AND STAPLE ARE NOT ATTACHED.
THEY ARE FIELD SUPPLIED PARTS.
SPECIFICATIONS OF CORD
VINYL CORD WITH SHEATH OR CABLE
TYPE
(INSULATED THICKNESS : 1mm OR MORE)
SIZE
0.75~1.25mm 2
TOTAL
500m
LENGTH

38

84

120

42

REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS

120

18

17

CORD OUTLET HOLE


23

28

46
INSTALLATION METHOD

STAPLE
REMOTE CONTROLLER

B EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD


C EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD
CONDUIT
17
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER
117

A EXPOSED BODY, EXPOSED CORD

0~5
BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX

(
17

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

17

)
CONTROL BOX

THROUGH HOLE
(12~16)
C: 3D028952

41

Dimensions

EDSG18-936

BRC7C613W Wireless Remote Controller (Option for Cooling Type)


RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS

DRAIN PIPING
SIDE

TRANSMITTING PART

157

RECEIVER

REFRIGERANT
PIPING SIDE
62

17.5

REMOTE CONTROLLER HOLDER


INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

(BYC125K-W1,W1S,W2,W2C)
(BYC125KJW1)

RECEIVER DETAIL

<INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE>

DECORATION PANEL

LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT FOR EACH DECORATION PANEL

REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER

WIRELESS REMOTE
CONTROLLER KIT
BRC7C612W
BRC7C613W
BRC7C612WC
BRC7C613WC
BRC7C512W BRC7CA512W
BRC7C513W BRC7CA513W

BYC125K-W1 W2
BYC125K-W2C
BYC125KJW1
BYC125K-W1S

BRC7C613WS

4.3.5

DECORATION PANEL

3D005912D

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

FBQ60BV1 with BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1) (Decoration Panel)

46

160
228
18-M5 hole

1060(Ceiling opening)
1100

6150=900
1000

View

1165=715
600
Fresh air intake position

Notes;
1. Location of units Name Plate:Fan housing surface
inside of filter.
2. When installing an optional accessory, refertothe
installation drawings.
3. Refer to the separate drawing when installing the
duct.
4. "Decoration panel"and"Air suction canvas"are
optional accessories.
Number
Name
1
Liquid pipe connection
2
Gas pipe connection

6-M5 hole
(Circumference)

Position of
Natural evaporating
pan type humidifier
(Note2)

7
1050(Suspension position)

View

42

Suction air intake position


when installing the duct
(Note 3)

100

630 (Suspension position) 145

P.C.D160
125
(Knockout hole)

195

6
45

950
927
500

462 (Ceiling opening)

135 120

57
300 or more
(Service space)

* The required ceiling depth


varies according to configuration
of specific system.

150
250

300
245
215
150
135

67
150
200

265=130

45
10

5150=750
785

800
595(Air suction panel center)
440
3
315

300

60
50
Suspension bolt
4-M8~M10

350 or more
Required
installation space

25
1000
760
65

View

3
4

Drain pipe connection


Interunit wiring port

5
6

Power wiring port


Drain hole

Air filter

Description
6.4 flare connection
12.7 flare connection
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)

VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)

3D049451

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Dimensions

FBQ60BV1 with BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1) (Decoration Panel) and KSA-25KA80 (Canvas Duct)
25

135 120
46

45

57
300 or more

* The required ceiling depth


varies according to configuration
of specific system.

265=130

300
245
215
150
135
45
75~255

440
315

195

Suspension bolt
4-M8~M10

800
595 (Air suction panel center)

425 or more
Required installation space

60
50

67
150
200

1000
785
760
5150=750
65

6 4

150
250

160
228
18-M5 hole

300

Suction air intake position


when installing the duct
(Note 3)

950
927
500

462(Ceiling opening)

10

(Service space)

6150=900
1000

1060(Ceiling opening)
1100

Notes;
1. Location of units Name Plate:Fan housing surface
inside of filter.
2. When installing an optional accessory, refer to the
installation drawings.
3. Refer to the separate drawing when installing the
duct.
4. "Decoration panel"and"Air suction canvas"are
optional accessories.

View

1165=715

600
Fresh air intake position

100

630(Suspension position)

145

P.C.D160
125
(Knockout hole)

Name
Number
1
Liquid pipe connection

6-M5 hole
(Circumference)

2
3
4
5
6
7

Position of
Natural evaporating
pan type humidifier
(Note 2)

7
1050(Suspension position)

Gas pipe connection


Drain pipe connection
Interunit wiring port
Power wiring port
Drain hole
Air filter

Description
6.4 flare connection
12.7 flare connection
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)

VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)

View

3D049452

View

FBQ71BV1 with BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1) (Decoration Panel)

46

160
228
18-M5 hole

1060(Ceiling opening)
1100

6150=900
1000

View

1165=715

Suction air intake position


when installing the duct
(Note 3)

600
Fresh air intake position

Notes;
1. Location of units Name Plate:Fan housing surface
inside of filter.
2. When installing an optional accessory, refer to the
installation drawings.
3. Refer to the separate drawing when installing the
duct.
4. "Decoration panel"and"Air suction canvas"are
optional accessories.

100

630(Suspension position)

145

P.C.D160
125
(Knockout hole)

195

6
45

950
927
500

462 (Ceiling opening)

135 120

57
300 or more
(Service space)

* The required ceiling depth


varies according to configuration
of specific system.

150
250

300
245
215
150
135

67
150
200

265=130

45
10

5150=750
785

800
595(Air suction panel center)
440
3
315

300

60
50
Suspension bolt
4-M8~M10

350 or more
Required
installation space

25
1000
760
65

6-M5 hole
(Circumference)

Position of
Natural evaporating
pan type humidifier
(Note 2)

7
1050(Suspension position)

View

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

View

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Name
Liquid pipe connection
Gas pipe connection
Drain pipe connection
Interunit wiring port
Power wiring port
Drain hole

Description
9.5 flare connection
15.9 flare connection
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)

VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)

Air filter

3D039435A

43

Dimensions

EDSG18-936

FBQ71BV1 with BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1) (Decoration Panel) and KSA-25KA80 (Canvas Duct)
25

45
75~255

300
245
215
150
135

67
150
200

265=130

57
300 or more

* The required ceiling depth


varies according to configuration
of specific system.

45

195

Suspension bolt
4-M8~M10

800
595(Air suction panel center)
440
3
315

46

6 4

425 or more
Required installation space

60
50

135 120

1000
785
760
5150=750
65

150
250

160
228
18-M5 hole

300

Suction air intake position


when installing the duct
(Note 3)

950
927
500

462 (Ceiling opening)

10

(Service space)

6150=900
1000

1060(Ceiling opening)
1100

Notes;
1. Location of units Name Plate:Fan housing surface
inside of filter.
2. When installing an optional accessory, refer to the
installation drawings.
3. Refer to the separate drawing when installing the
duct.
4. "Decoration panel"and"Air suction canvas"are
optional accessories.

View

1165=715

600
Fresh air intake position

100

630 (Suspension position) 145

P.C.D160
125
(Knockout hole)

6-M5 hole
(Circumference)

Position of
Natural evaporating
pan type humidifier
(Note 2)

7
1050(Suspension position)

Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Name
Liquid pipe connection
Gas pipe connection
Drain pipe connection
Interunit wiring port
Power wiring port
Drain hole
Air filter

Description
9.5 flare connection
15.9 flare connection
VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)

VP25(O.D.32 I.D.25)

View

3D039439A

View

BRC1C61 Wired Remote Controller (Option)


NOTE)1.REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD AND STAPLE ARE NOT ATTACHED.
THEY ARE FIELD SUPPLIED PARTS.
SPECIFICATIONS OF CORD
VINYL CORD WITH SHEATH OR CABLE
TYPE
(INSULATED THICKNESS : 1mm OR MORE)
SIZE
0.75~1.25mm 2
TOTAL
500m
LENGTH

38

84

120

42

REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS

120

18

17

CORD OUTLET HOLE


23

28

46
INSTALLATION METHOD

STAPLE
REMOTE CONTROLLER

B EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD


C EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD
CONDUIT
17
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER
117

A EXPOSED BODY, EXPOSED CORD

0~5
BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX

(
17

44

17

)
CONTROL BOX

THROUGH HOLE
(12~16)
C: 3D028952

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

HBP

K1R

Y1S
Y2S
Y3S
Z1C~7C
Z1F~4F

K3R

L1R

SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE)


L-RED
N-BLU
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (MAIN)
SOLENOID VALVE (HOT GAS) A1P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (SERVICE)
SOLENOID VALVE (U/L CIRCUIT) A2P
X1M L N
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (NOISE FILTER)
NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE) A3P
Z1C
X37A
A2P
A4P
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (C/H SELECTOR)
NOISE FILTER
N=1
A3P
C4
PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
BS1~5
C/H SELECTOR
BLU
RED
H2P H4P H6P
H8P
N
A4P
S1S
SELECTOR SWITCH (FAN/COOL HEAT)
(MODE, SET, RETURN, TEST, RESET)
LA F1U Z
NA
HAP X2M
L
H3P
H7P
H1P
H5P
S2S
SELECTOR
SWITCH
(COOL/HEAT)
C1~4
CAPACITOR
DS1
2
ON
DS1
CONNECTOR OF OPTION ADAPTOR
A1P
DIP SWITCH
F
E
GRN
A3P
OFF
E1HC
CRANKCASE HEATER
CONNECTOR
X37A
(BACK)
BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5
Z1F
1 2
X1M (FRONT) NOTE)4 (OPTION ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY) F1U,F4U FUSE(T 6.3A/250V)
FUSE(T 5.0A/250V)
F6U
X205A
LB
NB
A2P
EL,COMPO,BOX
H1P~8P PILOT LAMP(SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE)
BLU
RED
[H2P]PREPARE,TEST ------ FLICKERING
F4U
LC
NC
MALFUNCTION DETECTION - LIGHT UP
X37A
NOTE)4
OPERATION PILOT LAMP
HAP
X5A
(SERVICE MONITOR - GREEN)(A1P)
Z4C
Z3F
INV. PILOT LAMP
HBP
N=1
(SERVICE MONITOR - GREEN)(A1P)
Z4F
PS
S1NPH
X17A
R1
K1M
MAGNETIC CONTACTOR
L1R
K1R
MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S)
K1M
BLU
K5R
WHT LD
K2R
MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S)
X26A
X28A
X27A
X25A
MAGNETIC RELAY (Y3S)
S1NPL K3R
X2A WHT LE
X18A
K4R
MAGNETIC
RELAY (E1HC)
S1PH
K5R
MAGNETIC RELAY
Z3C
V2R
P<
HAP
HBP
REACTOR
L1R
E1HC
N=1
+
Y1E M1C
Y1S
Y2S
Y3S
MOTOR (COMPRESSOR)
X32A
V1T
6 M M1F
+ C2 + C3
MOTOR (FAN) (UPPER)
X21A
FIN
C4
V3R
P ORG
R6T
R3T
R5T
R4T
R7T
R2T
R1T
MOTOR (FAN) (LOWER)
M2F
TH
PS
POWER SUPPLY
+ C1
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
N GRY
Y3E R1
t
RESISTOR
6 M R2
RESISTOR
X22A
R2
F6U
THERMISTOR (AIR)
R1T
+
Z7C
1 X13A
X111A
X11A 1 X12A
R2T
THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE)
V1R
N=1
THERMISTOR (SUCTION1)
R3T
X106A
X107A
X81A
R4T
THERMISTOR (COIL)
X66A
A1P
THERMISTOR (SUCTION2)
R5T
Z6C
R6T
THERMISTOR (SUBCOOL)
MS
MS
Z5C
N=1
THERMISTOR (LIQUID)
R7T
N=4
M1F 3~
M2F 3~
Z2C
X1A
FINTH
THERMISTOR (FIN)
X2M
N=6
C/H
SELECTOR
RED WHT BLU
PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)
S1NPH
F1 F2 F1 F2
B
C
A
X1M
U V W
PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)
S1NPL
NOTES)1. THIS WIRING DIAGRAM IS APPLIED ONLY TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT.
A4P
TO BP UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT
PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
S1PH
MS
2.
: FIELD WIRING.
3~
POWER MODULE
V1R
M1C
3.
: TERMINAL STRIP
,
: MOVABLE CONNECTOR
: FIXED CONNECTOR
DIODE
MODULE
V2R,
V3R
: TERMINAL
:PROTECTIVE EARTH (SCREW)
:NOISELESS EARTH
V1T
IGBT
4.
WHEN
USING
THE
OPTION
ADAPTOR,
REFER
TO
THE
INSTALLATION
MANUAL.
HEAT
THE POSITION OF
W
TERMINAL STRIP (POWER SUPPLY)
X1M
S2S AIR CONTROL
5. REFER TO "OPERATION CAUTION LABEL "(ON BACK OF FRONT PLATE)
NOTE)8
COMPRESSOR U
X2M
TERMINAL STRIP (CONTROL)
COOL
HOW TO USE BS1~BS5 AND DS1 2 SWITCH.
NOTE)9
TERMINAL
X1M
TERMINAL STRIP (C/H SELECTOR) (A4P)
S1S
6. WHEN OPERATING,DONT SHORT CIRCUIT FOR PROTECTION DEVICE.(S1PH)
OUTDOOR
V
BP
UNIT
THE ENTRANCE
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (MAIN)
Y1E
FAN
7. COLORS BLU:BLUE BRN:BROWN GRN:GREEN RED:RED WHT:WHITE YLW:YELLOW ORG:ORANGE.
(F1)(F2)
(F1)(F2)
OF WIRE
Y3E
ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE (SUB COOL)
COOL/HEAT SELECTOR
8. REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL,FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO
3D051733C
BP-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2.
9. WHEN USING THE CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM,CONNECT OUTDOOR-OUTDOOR TRANSMISSION F1 F2.

GRN/YLW

BRN

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only


RED

5.1

K4R

YLW

POWER SUPPLY
V1A:220-240V~50Hz
VM :220-230V~50/60Hz

EDSG18-936
Wiring Diagrams

5. Wiring Diagrams
Outdoor Units

RMKS112EVM, RMKS140EVM, RMKS160EVM

45

ORG

K2R

Wiring Diagrams

5.2

EDSG18-936

BP Units

BPMKS967B2B
R1T R2T R3T R4T
(DLA) (DGA) (DLB) (DGB)
t

BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLU
BLU
BLU
BLU

FIELD WIRING
OFF
1
2 DS2
3
4

12
6
X22A
(BLU)
1
6
X21A
(RED)
1
6
X20A
(WHT)
1
1
X90A
(WHT)
X6M

X3M
INDOOR
ROOM A

3
X4M

INDOOR
ROOM B

TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT

H1P

LEDA

H2P

LED1

H3P

LED2

H4P

LED3

H5P

LED4
F2U
3.15A

RED
BLU
YLW
RED
BLU
YLW
RED
BLU
YLW

BRW
ORG
WHT
BRW
ORG
WHT
BRW
ORG
WHT

Y3E
M

Y1E
M BYPASS

FOR TRANSMISSION
TO OUTDOOR (F1F2)
OR OTHER BP UNIT

F2

TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT

T201R

ROOM B

Y2E
M ROOM A

F1
X1M
N2

N1
TO OTHER BP UNIT
L1

L2

N1
E1

PCB

L1

POWER SUPPLY
230V~50Hz

GRN/YLW

X20A~X22A, X90A : CONNECTOR


: PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
PCB
: FUSE
F2U

H1P~H5P : PILOT LAMP


R1T~R4T : THERMISTOR
DS2
: DIP SWITCH

T201R
: TRANSFORMAR
X1M, X3M, X4M, X6M : TERMINAL STRIP
Y1E~Y3E
: MOTOR OPERATED VALVE COIL

3D048565B

BPMKS967B3B
R1T R2T R3T R4T R5T R6T
(DLA) (DGA) (DLB) (DGB) (DLC) (DGC)

YLW

t
YLW

BLU

YLW

YLW

t
BLU

BLK

BLU

BLU

t
BLK

BLK

BLK

FIELD WIRING
OFF
1
2 DS2
3
4

12

INDOOR
ROOM A

3
X4M

INDOOR
ROOM B

3
X5M

INDOOR
ROOM C

TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT

H1P
H2P

LEDA
LED1

H3P
H4P

LED2
LED3

H5P

LED4
F2U
3.15A

TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT

RED

1
6

YLW
RED
BLU

1
6

X21A
(RED)

1
X90A
(WHT)

BLU

X22A
(BLU)

X3M
1

X23A
(YLW)

YLW
RED
BLU

X20A
(WHT)

1
6

YLW
RED
BLU

YLW

BRW
ORG
WHT
BRW
ORG

Y3E
M ROOM B

WHT
BRW
ORG

Y2E
M ROOM A

WHT
BRW
ORG

Y1E
M BYPASS

WHT

X6M
F2

T201R

Y4E
M ROOM C

F1

FOR TRANSMISSION
TO OUTDOOR (F1F2)
OR OTHER BP UNIT

X1M
N2
L2
TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT

PCB

N1
L1

E1

N1
TO OTHER BP UNIT
L1
N
L

POWER SUPPLY
230V~50Hz

GRN/YLW

X20A~X23A, X90A : CONNECTOR


: PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
PCB
: FUSE
F2U

46

H1P~H5P : PILOT LAMP


R1T~R6T : THERMISTOR
DS2
: DIP SWITCH

T201R
: TRANSFORMAR
X1M, X3M~X6M : TERMINAL STRIP
Y1E~Y4E
: MOTOR OPERATED VALVE COIL

3D048566A

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Wiring Diagrams

5.3

Indoor Units

5.3.1

Wall Mounted Type

FTKS25DVM, FTKS35DVM

FIELD WIRING.
S27

PCB3

S26

PCB1

H1

F1U

~
RECTIFIER

LED1

3.15A

X1M

V1

H1P

H2

LED2
H2P
LED3
H3P

WHT

RED

GRN /

H3

TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT

BLK

FG

S1
RED

t
HA

R1T

BLU
BRN
ORG

INTELLIGENT EYE
SENSOR

WHT

S35
S28

PCB2

S32

S6

M
M1F

FG
F1U
H1P~H3P
M1F
M1S
PCB1~PCB4
R1T, R2T
S1~S38
S1W
X1M

RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU

S36

PCB4

OUTDOOR

CAUTION
NOTE THAT OPERATION WILL
RESTART AUTOMATICALLY IF
THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS
TURNED OFF AND THEN BACK
ON AGAIN.

YLW

S1W
S21

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

FRAME GROUND
FUSE
PILOT LAMP
FAN MOTOR
SWING MOTOR
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
THERMISTOR.
CONNECTOR
OPERATION SWITCH
TERMINAL STRIP
PROTECTIVE EARTH

S29
R2T

WIRELESS
REMOTE
CONTROLLER

SIGNAL
RECEIVER

INDOOR

M
M1S

3D046453E

FTKS50FVM, FTKS60FVM, FTKS71FVM

FIELD WIRING.
PCB3

S27

S26

PCB1

H1

~
~
RECTIFIER

Fu
3.15A
H2

t
R1T
S38

BLK

WHT

RED 3
GRN
/
YLW

H3

TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT

X1M

FG
PCB4
S37

S21

S1
RED

LED1 LED2 LED3


H1P

BLU
BRN
ORG
WHT

H2P H3P

PCB5

S36

S35

INTELLIGENT EYE

S28

S32

S6

S8

M
M1F

SIGNAL
WIRELESS
REMOTE

RECEIVER
S1W

t
S29

BRN
RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU

PCB2

RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU

SENSOR

INDOOR

R2T
M
M1S

CONTROLLER

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

M
M2S

FG
Fu
H1 ~ H3
H1P ~ H3P
M1F
M1S, M2S
PCB1~ PCB5
R1T, R2T
S1 ~ S38
S1W
X1M

OUTDOOR

CAUTION
NOTE THAT OPERATION WILL
RESTART AUTOMATICALLY IF
THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS
TURNED OFF AND THEN BACK
ON AGAIN.
: FRAME GROUND
: FUSE
: HARNESS
: PILOT LAMP
: FAN MOTOR
: SWING MOTOR
: PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
: THERMISTOR
: CONNECTOR
: OPERATION SWITCH
: TERMINAL STRIP
: PROTECTIVE EARTH
3D038530S

47

Wiring Diagrams

EDSG18-936

FTKS50BVMA8

FIELD WIRING.
PCB3

S27

S26

PCB1

H1

~
~
RECTIFIER

Fu
3.15A

H2

t
R1T
S38

X1M
BLK
1
WHT
RED
GRN
/ YLW

H3

TRANSMISSION
CIRCUIT

2
3

2
3

CAUTION
NOTE THAT OPERATION WILL
RESTART AUTOMATICALLY IF
THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS
TURNED OFF AND THEN BACK
ON AGAIN.

FG
PCB4
S37

S21

OUTDOOR

S1
RED

LED1 LED2 LED3


BLU
BRN
ORG
WHT

H1P H2P H3P


S35

INTELLIGENT EYE
SENSOR

S28

S32

PCB2

t
S29

SIGNAL
RECEIVER
WIRELESS
REMOTE
CONTROLLER

5.3.2

S6

S8

M
M1F

INDOOR
R2T

S1W

: FRAME GROUND

Fu

: FUSE

H1~H3

: HARNESS

H1P~H3P

: PILOT LAMP

M1F

: FAN MOTOR

: SWING MOTOR
M1S, M2S
PCB1~PCB5 : PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
: THERMISTOR
R1T, R2T

BRN
RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU

S36

RED
ORG
YLW
PNK
BLU

PCB5

FG

S1~S38

: CONNECTOR

S1W

: OPERATION SWITCH

X1M

: TERMINAL STRIP
: PROTECTIVE EARTH

M2S

M1S

3D038065K

Duct Connected Type

FDKS25CAVMB, FDKS35CAVMB, FDKS50CVMB, FDKS60CVMB, FDKS25EAVMB, FDKS35EAVMB

X1M

PCB1
PCB2

H1
F1U
3.15A

V1TR
LED LED LED S1
1
H1P H2P H3P

S26
1

SIGNAL

TERMINAL FOR
CENTRALIZED CONTROL

S21

S1W

RECEIVER

H2

10
2 S32 1

RED

S7

10
2 RTH11

S1

GRY

R1T

YLW
C1

BRN BRN

R2T
WIRELESS
REMOTE
CONTROLLER

:
C1 :
F1U :

indoor

PROTECTIVE EARTH
CAPACITOR(M1F)
FUSE

PPL
BLU

M
1~
M1F

Q1M
130C

WHT

RED

GRN / YLW
GRN / YLW

1
2
3

outdoor

FIELD WIRING.
CAUTION
NOTE THAT OPERATION WILL
RESTART AUTOMATICALLY IF
THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY IS
TURNED OFF AND THEN BACK
ON AGAIN.

BLK

N=2

H3
TRANSMISSION
GND
CIRCUIT

WHT
t

Z1C

BLK

H1P ~ H3P
M1F
PCB1 ~ PCB2
Q1M
R1T ~ R2T
S1 ~ S32, RTH1
S1W
V1TR
X1M
Z1C

: PILOT LAMP
: FAN MOTOR
: PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
: THERMAL PROTECTOR (M1F EMBEDDED)
: THERMISTOR
: CONNECTOR
: OPERATION SWITCH
: PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
: TERMINAL BLOCK
: NOISE FILTER(FERRITE CORE)

3D045012K

48

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

5.3.3

Wiring Diagrams

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type

FFQ25BV1B9, FFQ35BV1B9, FFQ50BV1B9, FFQ60BV1B9

SS1

REMOTE
CONTROLLER

SS2

X2A

A1P

X27A

X60A NOTE)3

T1R
t

F1
P2
P1

X11A

SS1
P2
P1 R1T

X5A X1M
KPR
V1TR X20A

H1P
H2P BS1
H3P
H4P

C1

RED

X25A
YLW

RC

TC

YLW

Q1M
M1F

BLK

~
M1P

MSW

X36A
X40A NOTE)3

NOTE)3
X33A NOTE)3 X35A HAP

: CONNECTOR

2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT


IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3. X24A, X33A, X35A, X40A, X60A AND X61A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL
ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION
SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD TO THE INDOOR UNIT (IN CASE OF USING SHIELD WIRE).
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED:RED BLK:BLACK WHT:WHITE YLW:YELLOW PRP:PURPLE GRY:GRAY BLU:BLUE

GRN

NOTE)5 WIRED
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
F2

X24A
NOTE)3

X17A
X10A

X1A
X1A
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT

YLW
WHT
YLW

X19A X18A
X61A NOTE)3

H05VV-U4G2.5
A3P
A4P

X24A
NOTE)3

:CONNECTER DISCRIMINATION COLOR FOR COMPONENTS.


:CONNECTER COLOR FOR COMPONENTS.
:CONNECTER COLOR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.

R3T

YLW

TO OUTDOOR UNIT

GRN/YLW

NOTES)
1.
: TERMINAL
: FIELD WIRING

R2T

INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT


(MASTER)
(SLAVE)
F1U
TO OUTDOOR X2M
X2M
X2M
1 BLK
UNIT
1
1
2 WHT
2
2
3 RED
3
3

A1P

R1T

WHT

IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS
OPERATION SYSTEM

M1S
X15A
S1L
C1
T1R
X1M
A1P

X2M

CONTROL BOX
A1P
C1
F1U
HAP

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD


CAPACITOR (M1F)
FUSE (F,5A,250V)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P)
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN)
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP)
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED)
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL-1)
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-2)
FLOAT SWITCH
S1L
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V)
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
X1M TERMINAL STRIP
X2M TERMINAL STRIP
RC
SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT)
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)


LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(ON-RED)
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(TIMER-GREEN)
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(FILTER SIGN-RED)
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
SELECTOR SWITCH
SS1
(MAIN/SUB)
SELECTOR SWITCH
SS2
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS
REMOTE CONTROLLER)
X33A CONNECTOR
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
X35A CONNECTOR
(GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
X40A CONNECTOR
(ON/OFF INPUT FROM OUTSIDE)
X60A CONNECTOR
X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
BS1
H1P

3D064844

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

49

Wiring Diagrams

EDSG18-936

FCQ35BVE, FCQ50BVE, FCQ60BVE, FCQ71BVE


:CONNECTER DISCRIMINATION COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.

R3T

:CONNECTER COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.

R2T

:CONNECTER COLOUR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.

t
t

YLW
WHT

A1P

X2M

X19A

BLK

WHT

RED

X18A

X17A

NOTE)3

GRN/YLW

X27A

NOTE)5

T1R

X10A

NORM. EMG.

X1M

KPR
V1TR

X20A
RED

X25A
YLW
RC

TC

YLW

BLK

M
~
M1P
X36A

X33A

X35A

P2
P1

P1

X5A

X2A

H4P
X1A

X1A

RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT

R1T

WIRED
REMOTE
CONTROLLER

C1

M
~

Q1M

T1R

M1F
MSW
M1S

HAP

X24A
NOTE)3

SS1

P2

X60A

X24A

SS1

X11A

H1P
H2P BS1
H3P

SS2

NOTE)5

X61A

H05VV-U4G2.5

A3P
SS1

YLW

TO BP UNIT

A2P

A1P
GRN

YLW

WHT

R1T

X15A
S1L

X33A

C1

X60A
X61A X35A

X2M
A1P

X1M

SS1

SWITCH BOX

NOTES)

1.

: TERMINAL

: CONNECTOR

: FIELD WIRING
2.IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
3.X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
4.REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION
SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5.GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD TO THE INDOOR UNIT
(IN CASE OF USING SHIELD WIRE).
6.SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED:RED BLK:BLACK WHT:WHITE YLW:YELLOW
PRP:PURPLE GRY:GRAY BLU:BLUE
7.CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH(SS1,SS2)
BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.

A1P
C1
HAP

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD


CAPACITOR(M1F)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
KPR
MAGNETIC RELAY(M1P)
M1F
MOTOR(INDOOR FAN)
M1P
MOTOR(DRAIN PUMP)
M1S
MOTOR(SWING FLAP)
Q1M
THERMO SWITCH(M1F EMBEDDED)
R1T
THERMISTOR(AIR)
R2T
THERMISTOR(LIQUID)
R3T
THERMISTOR(COIL)
S1L
FLOAT SWITCH
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH(EMERGENCY)
T1R
TRANSFORMER(220-240V/22V)
V1TR
PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT
X1M
TERMINAL STRIP
X2M
TERMINAL STRIP
SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
RC
SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
TC
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
R1T
THERMISTOR(AIR)
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH(MAIN/SUB)
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT)
A2P
A3P

BS1
H1P

PUSH BUTTON(ON/OFF)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(ON-RED)

H2P

LIGHT EMITTING DIODE


(TIMER-GREEN)

H3P

LIGHT EMITTING DIODE


(FILTER SIGN-RED)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(DEFROST-ORANGE)

H4P
SS1

SELECTOR SWITCH
(MAIN/SUB)

SELECTOR SWITCH
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
CONNECTOR
X33A
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
CONNECTOR
X35A
(GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
CONNECTOR
X60A
X61A
(INTERFACE ADAPTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
SS2

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD


PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

3D048793

50

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

5.3.4

Wiring Diagrams

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

FBQ60BV1, FBQ71BV1
R1T

:CONNECTER DISCRIMINATION COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.

R3T

R2T

:CONNECTER COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.


:CONNECTER COLOUR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.

t
t

INDOOR UNIT
X2M

TO BP UNIT

BLK

WHT

A1P

X60A
X61A

C1

X2M

RED

YLW
WHT

X18A

X61A
X10A

T1R X11A
t

X60A

SS1
NORM. EMG.

K4R

KPR

H05VV-U4G2.5

X25A WHT

X1M

X5A

X1M
P2
P1

SS1
P2
P1 R1T

NOTE)7
X21A
FLL
ORG

K3R

FL

BLU

K2R

FM

BLK

K1R

FH

GRY

FC

RED

NOTE)7

M1F WHT
M
~
C1
Q1M YLW

M
~

CONTROL BOX

M1P

RC

TC
X15A
X33A

NOTES)

WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER


(OPTIONAL PARTS)

A1P
X17A

X27A

T1R

SS1

YLW

1.

:TERMINAL

2.

:FIELD WIRING

S1L

GRN/YLW

X35A
X33A

X19A

X35A HAP

:CONNECTOR

3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT


TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM,
CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED:RED BLK:BLACK WHT:WHITE YLW:YELLOW
GRN:GREEN GRY:GRAY BLU:BLUE ORG:ORANGE
6. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH(SS1)
BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING MATERIALS, ETC.
7. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD TO THE INDOOR UNIT
(IN CASE OF USING SHIELD WIRE).

A1P
C1
HAP

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD


CAPACITOR(M1F)
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
K1R~4R MAGNETIC RELAY(M1F)
KPR
MAGNETIC RELAY(M1P)
M1F
MOTOR(INDOOR FAN)
M1P
MOTOR(DRAIN PUMP)
Q1M
THERMO SWITCH(M1F EMBEDDED)
R1T
THERMISTOR(AIR)
R2T
THERMISTOR(LIQUID)
R3T
THERMISTOR(COIL)
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH
(EMERGENCY)
S1L
FLOAT SWITCH
T1R
TRANSFORMER(220-240V/22V)
X1M
TERMINAL STRIP
X2M
TERMINAL STRIP
SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
RC
SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
TC
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
R1T
THERMISTOR(AIR)
SS1
SELECTOR SWITCH(MAIN/SUB)

CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS


X33A CONNECTOR
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING)
X35A CONNECTOR
(GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
X60A CONNECTOR
X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)

3D048487

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

51

Piping Diagrams

EDSG18-936

6. Piping Diagrams
6.1

Outdoor Units

RMKS112EVM, RMKS140EVM, RMKS160EVM

Electronic
expansion valve
Electronic
expansion valve

Double pipe
heat exchanger

Filter
Heat exchanger

Pressure
regulating valve
Filter

Service port
Four way
valve

High pressure
sensor

Service port

Solenoid
valve
SV
Filter

Capillary
tube

Oil
separator

Capillary
tube

SP

SP

Filter

Low pressure
sensor

Filter

Compressor
HPS

SV

Capillary
tube
High pressure
switch

Solenoid
valve

ACCUMULATOR
Stop valve (With service port on field piping side 7.9mm flare connection)

52

3D052628

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

6.2

Piping Diagrams

BP Units

BPMKS967B2B

INDOOR UNIT
GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGA)

REFRIGERANT FLOW
HEATING

ROOM A
(15.9CuT)
LOCAL PIPING

COOLING

GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGB)

EVH

GAS

LOCAL PIPING

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(BYPASS)
FILTER

ROOM B
(15.9CuT)

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM A)
EVA FILTER
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM B)
EVB FILTER

INDOOR UNIT
LIQUID SIDE
THERMISTOR(DLA)

ROOM A
(6.4CuT)
LOCAL PIPING

LIQUID SIDE
THERMISTOR(DLB)

OUTDOOR UNIT
(19.1CuT)

LIQUID
ROOM B
(6.4CuT)
LOCAL PIPING

LOCAL PIPING

OUTDOOR UNIT
(9.5CuT)

FILTER

LOCAL PIPING

3D048286B

BPMKS967B3B

INDOOR UNIT
GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGA)

ROOM A
(15.9CuT)
LOCAL PIPING

GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGB)

REFRIGERANT FLOW
HEATING

ROOM B
(15.9CuT)

GAS

LOCAL PIPING

COOLING

GAS SIDE
THERMISTOR(DGC)
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(BYPASS)
FILTER EVH

LOCAL PIPING
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM A)
LIQUID SIDE
EVA FILTER THERMISTOR(DLA)
ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM B)
LIQUID SIDE
EVB FILTER THERMISTOR(DLB)

OUTDOOR UNIT
(19.1CuT)

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION VALVE(ROOM C)
LIQUID SIDE
EVC FILTER THERMISTOR(DLC)

LOCAL PIPING

ROOM C
(15.9CuT)

INDOOR UNIT
ROOM A
(6.4CuT)
LOCAL PIPING
ROOM B
(6.4CuT)

LIQUID

LOCAL PIPING
ROOM C
(6.4CuT)
LOCAL PIPING

OUTDOOR UNIT
(9.5CuT)

FILTER

LOCAL PIPING

3D048285A

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

53

Piping Diagrams

EDSG18-936

6.3

Indoor Units

6.3.1

Wall Mounted Type

FTKS25DVM, FTKS35DVM

FTKS50FVM, FTKS60FVM

INDOOR UNIT

INDOOR UNIT

MUFFLER ASSY
HEAT EXCHANGER
7.0CuT
(7.9CuT)

7.9CuT

6.4CuT

THERMISTOR
ON HEAT EXCH.

6.4CuT

HEAT EXCHANGER

6.4CuT
THERMISTOR
ON HEAT EXCH.

FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)

CROSS FLOW FAN


FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)

M
FAN MOTOR

FIELD PIPING
(12.7CuT)

9.5CuT

FIELD PIPING
(9.5CuT)

CROSS FLOW FAN

M
FAN MOTOR
(12.7CuT)

REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING

REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING

4D050757D

FTKS71FVM

4D054932D

FTKS50BVMA8

INDOOR UNIT

INDOOR UNIT

(7.9CuT)

(7.9CuT)

HEAT EXCHANGER
HEAT EXCHANGER
THERMISTOR
ON HEAT EXCH.

THERMISTOR
ON HEAT EXCH.
FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)

FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)

CROSS FLOW FAN

FIELD PIPING
(12.7CuT)

FAN MOTOR
FIELD PIPING
(15.9CuT)

CROSS FLOW FAN

M
FAN MOTOR
(12.7CuT)

(12.7CuT)

REFRIGERANT FLOW

REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
HEATING

COOLING

4D050919H

54

4D040081T

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

6.3.2

Piping Diagrams

Duct Connected Type

FDKS25CAVMB, FDKS35CAVMB, FDKS50CVMB, FDKS60CVMB, FDKS25EAVMB, FDKS35EAVMB


INDOOR UNIT
(6.4CuT)

2
HEAT EXCHANGER

FIELD PIPING
(6.4CuT)

THERMISTOR
ON HEAT
EXCH.

SIROCCO FAN

M
FAN MOTOR
FIELD PIPING
(
CuT)

CuT)

REFRIGERANT FLOW
COOLING
HEATING
FDKS25EAVMB
FDKS35EAVMB
FDKS25CAVMB
FDKS35CAVMB

9.5

FDKS50CVMB
FDKS60CVMB

12.7

C: 4D045449K

6.3.3

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type

FFQ25BV1B9, FFQ35BV1B9, FFQ50BV1B9, FFQ60BV1B9

Indoor heat exchanger

MODEL

FFQ25 35BV1B9

6.4

9.5

FFQ50 60BV1B9

6.4

12.7

Field piping

C1220T-O

Field piping

C1220T-O

To
Outdoor unit

Indoor unit
C : 4D039335

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

55

Piping Diagrams

EDSG18-936

FCQ35BVE, FCQ50BVE, FCQ60BVE, FCQ71BVE


Indoor heat exchanger

Field piping

C1220T-0

Field piping

C1220T-0

To
Outdoor unit

Indoor unit
MODEL
FCQ35BVE
FCQ50, 60BVE
FCQ71BVE

6.4
6.4
9.5

9.5
12.7
15.9

C: 4D037995H

6.3.4

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

FBQ60BV1, FBQ71BV1
Indoor heat exchanger

Field piping

C1220T-0

Field piping

C1220T-0

To
Outdoor unit

Indoor unit
MODEL
FBQ60BV1
FBQ71BV1

6.4
9.5

12.7
15.9

C: 4D037995H

56

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Capacity Tables

7. Capacity Tables
7.1

Total Capacity

7.1.1

RMKS112EVM

[Cooling Capacity]
Combination
(%)

130%

120%

110%

100%

90%

Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46

14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
12.61 2.23
12.38 2.39
12.12 2.59
11.98 2.69
11.76 2.87
11.44 3.12
11.09 3.41
10.72 3.72
10.31 4.06
9.88
4.42
9.04
4.33
12.46 2.17
12.23 2.33
11.97 2.52
11.83 2.63
11.61 2.80
11.29 3.06
10.94 3.34
10.57 3.64
10.17 3.98
9.74
4.34
8.92
4.33
11.86 2.04
11.64 2.20
11.40 2.39
11.27 2.49
11.06 2.66
10.76 2.90
10.44 3.18
10.09 3.47
9.71
3.80
9.31
4.15
8.81
4.33
10.54 1.81
10.36 1.96
10.16 2.13
10.06 2.22
9.89
2.38
9.64
2.60
9.37
2.85
9.07
3.13
8.75
3.43
8.41
3.75
8.13
4.01
9.55
1.54
9.38
1.68
9.20
1.84
9.10
1.93
8.94
2.07
8.71
2.29
8.46
2.53
8.19
2.79
7.89
3.08
7.58
3.39
7.33
3.63

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
13.99 2.22
13.72 2.39
13.41 2.60
13.25 2.71
12.99 2.89
12.63 3.15
12.23 3.45
11.81 3.77
11.35 4.11
10.87 4.49
9.87
4.33
13.79 2.16
13.51 2.33
13.20 2.53
13.04 2.64
12.78 2.82
12.42 3.09
12.03 3.37
11.61 3.69
11.16 4.03
10.68 4.40
9.74
4.33
13.14 2.03
12.88 2.20
12.60 2.40
12.44 2.50
12.20 2.68
11.86 2.93
11.50 3.21
11.10 3.51
10.68 3.85
10.23 4.20
9.62
4.33
11.79 1.80
11.57 1.95
11.33 2.13
11.21 2.23
11.00 2.39
10.71 2.62
10.40 2.88
10.06 3.16
9.70
3.47
9.31
3.80
9.00
4.06
10.65 1.52
10.45 1.67
10.22 1.83
10.11 1.93
9.92
2.08
9.65
2.30
9.37
2.54
9.06
2.81
8.73
3.10
8.38
3.42
8.10
3.67

Indoor Air Temp.:CWB


18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
15.02 2.21 15.54 2.21
14.71 2.40 15.22 2.40
14.37 2.61 14.87 2.61
14.19 2.72 14.68 2.73
13.91 2.91 14.39 2.92
13.52 3.18 13.98 3.19
13.09 3.48 13.54 3.49
12.64 3.80 13.06 3.82
12.15 4.16 12.56 4.18
11.63 4.54 12.03 4.56
10.50 4.33 10.83 4.33
14.82 2.15 15.33 2.15
14.50 2.33 15.01 2.33
14.17 2.54 14.66 2.55
13.99 2.66 14.47 2.66
13.71 2.84 14.18 2.85
13.31 3.11 13.77 3.12
12.89 3.40 13.33 3.42
12.44 3.73 12.86 3.74
11.96 4.07 12.36 4.10
11.44 4.45 11.83 4.47
10.37 4.33 10.69 4.33
14.14 2.02 14.64 2.02
13.85 2.20 14.34 2.20
13.53 2.40 14.01 2.41
13.37 2.51 13.83 2.52
13.11 2.69 13.56 2.70
12.73 2.95 13.17 2.96
12.34 3.24 12.76 3.25
11.91 3.55 12.32 3.56
11.46 3.88 11.85 3.90
10.98 4.24 11.36 4.27
10.24 4.33 10.56 4.33
12.71 1.79 13.18 1.78
12.47 1.95 12.93 1.95
12.20 2.13 12.65 2.13
12.06 2.24 12.50 2.24
11.84 2.40 12.27 2.40
11.52 2.64 11.93 2.65
11.18 2.90 11.58 2.91
10.82 3.19 11.20 3.20
10.42 3.50 10.80 3.51
10.01 3.83 10.36 3.85
9.68
4.10 10.02 4.12
11.47 1.51 11.89 1.50
11.25 1.66 11.65 1.65
11.00 1.83 11.40 1.83
10.87 1.93 11.26 1.92
10.67 2.08 11.05 2.08
10.38 2.31 10.75 2.31
10.07 2.56 10.42 2.56
9.73
2.83 10.08 2.84
9.38
3.13
9.72
3.14
9.01
3.44
9.33
3.46
8.71
3.70
9.02
3.71

2
22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
17.16 2.20
16.79 2.40
16.39 2.63
16.18 2.75
15.85 2.95
15.39 3.23
14.90 3.54
14.38 3.88
13.83 4.25
13.25 4.64
11.83 4.33
16.94 2.14
16.57 2.34
16.17 2.56
15.96 2.68
15.63 2.88
15.17 3.16
14.68 3.47
14.17 3.80
13.62 4.16
13.04 4.55
11.68 4.33
16.21 2.01
15.86 2.20
15.48 2.42
15.28 2.53
14.98 2.72
14.54 2.99
14.08 3.29
13.60 3.61
13.08 3.96
12.53 4.33
11.54 4.33
14.64 1.77
14.34 1.94
14.02 2.14
13.85 2.24
13.59 2.42
13.21 2.67
12.82 2.94
12.39 3.24
11.95 3.56
11.47 3.90
11.10 4.18
13.19 1.48
12.92 1.64
12.63 1.82
12.47 1.92
12.23 2.08
11.89 2.32
11.53 2.58
11.15 2.86
10.75 3.17
10.32 3.50
9.99
3.76

24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
18.27 2.20
17.86 2.40
17.44 2.64
17.21 2.76
16.86 2.97
16.36 3.26
15.84 3.58
15.28 3.92
14.70 4.29
14.08 4.69
12.51 4.33
18.05 2.13
17.64 2.34
17.21 2.57
16.98 2.70
16.63 2.90
16.14 3.19
15.62 3.50
15.06 3.84
14.49 4.21
13.87 4.60
12.36 4.33
17.29 2.00
16.90 2.20
16.50 2.42
16.28 2.54
15.95 2.74
15.49 3.02
14.99 3.32
14.47 3.65
13.93 4.00
13.35 4.38
12.20 4.33
15.64 1.75
15.31 1.94
14.96 2.14
14.78 2.25
14.49 2.43
14.09 2.68
13.67 2.96
13.22 3.26
12.74 3.59
12.24 3.94
11.84 4.21
14.09 1.46
13.79 1.63
13.47 1.82
13.30 1.92
13.04 2.09
12.68 2.33
12.30 2.59
11.89 2.88
11.46 3.19
11.01 3.52
10.66 3.79

57

Capacity Tables

Combination
(%)

80%

70%

60%

50%

Symbols
TC
: Total capacity
PI
: Power input

EDSG18-936

Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46

14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
8.50
1.29
8.35
1.42
8.18
1.56
8.09
1.65
7.95
1.78
7.74
1.98
7.52
2.20
7.28
2.45
7.02
2.72
6.74
3.01
6.52
3.25
7.39
1.08
7.26
1.18
7.12
1.31
7.04
1.38
6.92
1.50
6.75
1.67
6.56
1.87
6.35
2.10
6.13
2.35
5.89
2.62
5.70
2.84
6.22
0.89
6.12
0.97
6.01
1.07
5.95
1.13
5.86
1.23
5.72
1.38
5.57
1.55
5.40
1.74
5.22
1.96
5.02
2.20
4.87
2.39
4.98
0.73
4.93
0.78
4.86
0.85
4.82
0.89
4.75
0.97
4.66
1.09
4.55
1.22
4.43
1.38
4.29
1.56
4.14
1.76
4.02
1.92

16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
9.46
1.27
9.28
1.40
9.08
1.55
8.98
1.64
8.81
1.77
8.57
1.98
8.32
2.21
8.05
2.46
7.76
2.73
7.45
3.03
7.21
3.27
8.23
1.05
8.07
1.16
7.91
1.29
7.82
1.36
7.68
1.49
7.48
1.67
7.26
1.88
7.03
2.10
6.78
2.36
6.51
2.63
6.30
2.85
6.95
0.87
6.83
0.95
6.70
1.05
6.63
1.11
6.52
1.22
6.36
1.37
6.19
1.55
6.00
1.74
5.79
1.97
5.58
2.21
5.40
2.41
5.63
0.71
5.55
0.76
5.47
0.84
5.42
0.88
5.34
0.96
5.23
1.08
5.10
1.22
4.96
1.38
4.80
1.56
4.63
1.76
4.50
1.93

Indoor Air Temp.:CWB


18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
10.19 1.25 10.57 1.24
9.99
1.39 10.35 1.38
9.77
1.54 10.13 1.54
9.66
1.63 10.01 1.63
9.47
1.77
9.82
1.77
9.22
1.98
9.55
1.98
8.94
2.21
9.26
2.22
8.65
2.47
8.96
2.47
8.34
2.75
8.64
2.75
8.01
3.05
8.30
3.06
7.75
3.29
8.03
3.30
8.88
1.03
9.21
1.02
8.71
1.14
9.03
1.13
8.52
1.28
8.83
1.27
8.42
1.35
8.73
1.35
8.27
1.48
8.57
1.48
8.05
1.67
8.34
1.67
7.82
1.88
8.10
1.88
7.56
2.11
7.84
2.11
7.30
2.36
7.56
2.37
7.01
2.64
7.27
2.65
6.79
2.87
7.04
2.87
7.52
0.85
7.81
0.84
7.39
0.93
7.68
0.93
7.25
1.04
7.52
1.04
7.17
1.10
7.44
1.10
7.05
1.21
7.31
1.20
6.87
1.37
7.13
1.36
6.68
1.54
6.93
1.54
6.48
1.75
6.72
1.75
6.26
1.97
6.49
1.97
6.02
2.22
6.25
2.22
5.83
2.42
6.06
2.42
6.13
0.69
6.39
0.68
6.05
0.75
6.30
0.74
5.95
0.83
6.19
0.82
5.89
0.87
6.13
0.87
5.81
0.95
6.04
0.95
5.68
1.08
5.91
1.08
5.54
1.22
5.76
1.22
5.38
1.38
5.60
1.38
5.22
1.57
5.42
1.57
5.03
1.77
5.23
1.77
4.88
1.94
5.08
1.94

22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
11.72 1.21
11.48 1.36
11.22 1.52
11.08 1.62
10.87 1.77
10.57 1.98
10.25 2.22
9.92
2.49
9.56
2.78
9.19
3.08
8.89
3.33
10.23 0.99
10.03 1.11
9.81
1.25
9.69
1.34
9.51
1.47
9.25
1.66
8.98
1.88
8.69
2.12
8.39
2.38
8.07
2.66
7.81
2.89
8.72
0.81
8.56
0.90
8.38
1.02
8.29
1.08
8.15
1.19
7.94
1.36
7.72
1.54
7.48
1.75
7.23
1.98
6.96
2.23
6.75
2.44
7.19
0.66
7.07
0.73
6.95
0.81
6.88
0.86
6.78
0.94
6.62
1.07
6.46
1.22
6.27
1.39
6.08
1.58
5.87
1.79
5.70
1.96

24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
12.52 1.19
12.26 1.34
11.98 1.52
11.83 1.61
11.60 1.76
11.28 1.98
10.94 2.23
10.58 2.50
10.20 2.79
9.80
3.10
9.49
3.35
10.94 0.97
10.72 1.09
10.48 1.24
10.35 1.33
10.16 1.46
9.88
1.66
9.59
1.88
9.28
2.12
8.96
2.39
8.62
2.68
8.35
2.91
9.35
0.79
9.17
0.89
8.98
1.01
8.88
1.07
8.72
1.19
8.50
1.35
8.26
1.54
8.01
1.75
7.74
1.99
7.45
2.24
7.23
2.45
7.74
0.65
7.61
0.71
7.48
0.80
7.40
0.85
7.29
0.94
7.12
1.07
6.94
1.22
6.74
1.39
6.53
1.58
6.30
1.80
6.12
1.97

NOTE:
(kW)
(kW)

1. This table shows outdoor unit cooling capacity and power input.
2.
is specified point.
3. PI of indoor units is not included in the table.
3D052905

58

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

7.1.2

Capacity Tables

RMKS140EVM

[Cooling Capacity]
Combination
(%)

130%

120%

110%

100%

90%

Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46

14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
14.84 2.78
14.55 2.98
14.23 3.20
14.06 3.32
13.78 3.53
13.39 3.82
12.96 4.15
12.49 4.51
11.99 4.90
11.47 5.13
8.69
4.10
14.57 2.74
14.30 2.92
14.00 3.14
13.83 3.26
13.57 3.46
13.19 3.75
12.78 4.07
12.33 4.43
11.84 4.81
11.33 5.13
8.58
4.10
14.29 2.68
14.03 2.86
13.74 3.07
13.58 3.19
13.33 3.39
12.97 3.67
12.57 3.99
12.13 4.34
11.66 4.73
11.19 5.13
8.47
4.10
13.35 2.45
13.11 2.62
12.83 2.83
12.69 2.94
12.45 3.12
12.12 3.39
11.74 3.69
11.34 4.02
10.91 4.39
10.44 4.78
8.37
4.10
11.97 2.05
11.75 2.22
11.50 2.42
11.37 2.53
11.16 2.70
10.86 2.95
10.53 3.23
10.18 3.54
9.80
3.87
9.39
4.23
8.26
4.10

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
16.49 2.79
16.14 2.99
15.76 3.23
15.56 3.36
15.24 3.57
14.78 3.88
14.29 4.22
13.77 4.59
13.20 4.99
12.53 5.13
9.52
4.10
16.21 2.74
15.88 2.94
15.52 3.17
15.32 3.30
15.02 3.50
14.58 3.81
14.11 4.14
13.60 4.50
13.05 4.90
12.37 5.13
9.40
4.10
15.93 2.68
15.61 2.87
15.26 3.10
15.08 3.23
14.78 3.43
14.36 3.73
13.90 4.06
13.40 4.42
12.87 4.81
12.22 5.13
9.28
4.10
14.93 2.44
14.64 2.63
14.31 2.85
14.14 2.97
13.86 3.16
13.46 3.44
13.04 3.75
12.58 4.09
12.08 4.46
11.56 4.86
9.17
4.10
13.39 2.04
13.12 2.22
12.83 2.43
12.67 2.54
12.43 2.72
12.07 2.98
11.70 3.27
11.29 3.59
10.86 3.93
10.40 4.29
9.05
4.10

Indoor Air Temp.:CWB


18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
17.75 2.79 18.37 2.80
17.36 3.01 17.96 3.02
16.94 3.26 17.52 3.27
16.72 3.39 17.29 3.41
16.37 3.61 16.93 3.63
15.87 3.93 16.41 3.95
15.34 4.28 15.86 4.30
14.77 4.65 15.27 4.69
14.16 5.06 14.64 5.10
13.35 5.13 13.75 5.13
10.16 4.10 10.49 4.10
17.45 2.74 18.05 2.75
17.07 2.95 17.66 2.96
16.67 3.20 17.24 3.21
16.46 3.33 17.02 3.34
16.12 3.54 16.67 3.56
15.65 3.85 16.17 3.87
15.13 4.19 15.64 4.22
14.58 4.57 15.07 4.60
14.00 4.97 14.46 5.00
13.18 5.13 13.58 5.13
10.03 4.10 10.36 4.10
17.17 2.68 17.76 2.68
16.81 2.89 17.39 2.89
16.42 3.12 16.98 3.14
16.22 3.25 16.77 3.27
15.89 3.46 16.43 3.48
15.43 3.77 15.94 3.79
14.93 4.11 15.43 4.13
14.39 4.48 14.87 4.51
13.82 4.88 14.28 4.91
13.02 5.13 13.41 5.13
9.90
4.10 10.22 4.10
16.14 2.44 16.70 2.44
15.80 2.64 16.35 2.65
15.44 2.87 15.97 2.87
15.25 2.99 15.77 3.00
14.94 3.19 15.45 3.20
14.51 3.48 15.00 3.50
14.04 3.80 14.52 3.82
13.54 4.14 14.00 4.17
13.01 4.52 13.45 4.55
12.44 4.93 12.86 4.96
9.78
4.10 10.09 4.10
14.47 2.04 15.01 2.03
14.17 2.22 14.69 2.22
13.84 2.44 14.35 2.44
13.67 2.55 14.17 2.56
13.40 2.74 13.88 2.75
13.01 3.01 13.48 3.02
12.60 3.30 13.06 3.32
12.16 3.62 12.60 3.64
11.69 3.97 12.12 3.99
11.20 4.34 11.60 4.36
9.65
4.10
9.96
4.10

22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
20.25 2.81
19.79 3.05
19.29 3.31
19.03 3.46
18.62 3.69
18.04 4.03
17.43 4.39
16.78 4.78
16.73 5.13
14.95 5.13
11.42 4.10
19.90 2.76
19.46 2.99
18.98 3.25
18.73 3.39
18.34 3.62
17.79 3.95
17.20 4.30
16.57 4.69
15.90 5.11
14.77 5.13
11.27 4.10
19.61 2.69
19.18 2.92
18.72 3.17
18.47 3.31
18.09 3.54
17.55 3.86
16.98 4.21
16.37 4.60
15.72 5.01
14.58 5.13
11.13 4.10
18.47 2.45
18.07 2.66
17.63 2.90
17.40 3.04
17.04 3.25
16.54 3.55
16.00 3.89
15.43 4.25
14.82 4.64
14.18 5.05
10.99 4.10
16.63 2.02
16.26 2.23
15.87 2.45
15.66 2.58
15.34 2.77
14.89 3.06
14.42 3.36
13.91 3.69
13.38 4.05
12.82 4.43
10.85 4.10

24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
21.56 2.82
21.05 3.07
20.51 3.35
20.23 3.50
19.79 3.73
19.18 4.08
18.52 4.45
17.83 4.85
17.65 5.13
15.78 5.13
12.17 4.10
21.20 2.77
20.71 3.01
20.20 3.28
19.93 3.43
19.50 3.66
18.91 4.00
18.28 4.36
17.61 4.76
17.43 5.13
15.59 5.13
12.02 4.10
20.90 2.70
20.43 2.94
19.93 3.20
19.67 3.35
19.26 3.57
18.68 3.91
18.06 4.27
17.41 4.66
16.73 5.08
15.39 5.13
11.86 4.10
19.72 2.45
19.28 2.68
18.80 2.93
18.56 3.06
18.17 3.28
17.63 3.59
17.05 3.94
16.49 4.30
15.80 4.70
15.11 5.12
11.71 4.10
17.76 2.02
17.36 2.23
16.94 2.46
16.71 2.59
16.37 2.79
15.89 3.08
15.37 3.39
14.87 3.73
14.27 4.09
13.67 4.48
11.56 4.10

59

Capacity Tables

Combination
(%)

80%

70%

60%

50%

EDSG18-936

Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46

Symbols

14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
10.60 1.68
10.40 1.84
10.19 2.02
10.07 2.12
9.88
2.28
9.62
2.51
9.33
2.77
9.03
3.05
8.70
3.35
8.34
3.68
8.06
3.94
9.24
1.34
9.07
1.48
8.88
1.64
8.78
1.72
8.62
1.87
8.39
2.07
8.15
2.30
7.88
2.55
7.60
2.82
7.30
3.11
7.06
3.34
7.88
1.03
7.74
1.14
7.58
1.27
7.50
1.34
7.37
1.46
7.18
1.63
6.98
1.82
6.75
2.04
6.52
2.27
6.26
2.53
6.06
2.74
6.52
0.75
6.42
0.82
6.30
0.91
6.23
0.97
6.13
1.05
5.98
1.19
5.82
1.34
5.64
1.52
5.44
1.71
5.23
1.93
5.06
2.10

16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
11.86 1.67
11.62 1.83
11.36 2.02
11.22 2.12
11.01 2.29
10.70 2.53
10.37 2.79
10.02 3.08
9.64
3.39
9.25
3.72
8.93
3.98
10.33 1.32
10.13 1.46
9.90
1.63
9.79
1.72
9.60
1.87
9.34
2.08
9.06
2.31
8.76
2.57
8.44
2.84
8.10
3.14
7.83
3.37
8.81
1.01
8.64
1.12
8.46
1.26
8.36
1.33
8.21
1.45
7.99
1.63
7.75
1.83
7.50
2.05
7.24
2.29
6.95
2.55
6.72
2.75
7.29
0.73
7.17
0.81
7.03
0.90
6.95
0.95
6.83
1.05
6.66
1.18
6.47
1.34
6.26
1.52
6.04
1.72
5.81
1.94
5.62
2.12

Indoor Air Temp.:CWB


18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
12.81 1.65 13.31 1.65
12.54 1.83 13.03 1.82
12.25 2.02 12.73 2.02
12.10 2.13 12.57 2.13
11.86 2.30 12.32 2.30
11.53 2.54 11.97 2.55
11.17 2.81 11.60 2.82
10.79 3.10 11.20 3.11
10.39 3.41 10.78 3.43
9.96
3.75 10.34 3.77
9.52
4.02
9.89
4.03
11.16 1.30 11.61 1.30
10.93 1.45 11.37 1.45
10.68 1.62 11.11 1.62
10.55 1.72 10.97 1.71
10.35 1.86 10.76 1.86
10.06 2.08 10.46 2.08
9.76
2.32 10.14 2.32
9.43
2.58
9.80
2.58
9.09
2.86
9.44
2.87
8.72
3.16
9.06
3.17
8.44
3.40
8.77
3.41
9.51
0.99
9.90
0.98
9.33
1.11
9.70
1.10
9.12
1.25
9.48
1.24
9.02
1.32
9.37
1.32
8.85
1.45
9.20
1.44
8.61
1.63
8.95
1.63
8.36
1.83
8.68
1.83
8.09
2.05
8.40
2.06
7.80
2.29
8.10
2.30
7.49
2.56
7.78
2.56
7.25
2.77
7.53
2.78
7.87
0.72
8.17
0.71
7.73
0.79
8.03
0.79
7.58
0.89
7.86
0.89
7.49
0.95
7.77
0.94
7.36
1.04
7.64
1.04
7.17
1.18
7.44
1.18
6.97
1.34
7.23
1.34
6.75
1.52
7.00
1.53
6.51
1.73
6.76
1.73
6.26
1.95
6.49
1.95
6.06
2.13
6.29
2.13

22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
14.77 1.63
14.44 1.81
14.10 2.02
13.92 2.13
13.64 2.31
13.24 2.57
12.83 2.84
12.39 3.15
11.93 3.47
11.44 3.81
10.68 4.08
12.89 1.27
12.61 1.43
12.32 1.61
12.16 1.71
11.92 1.86
11.59 2.09
11.23 2.33
10.86 2.60
10.46 2.89
10.05 3.20
9.72
3.44
11.00 0.96
10.78 1.08
10.53 1.23
10.40 1.31
10.21 1.44
9.93
1.63
9.63
1.83
9.32
2.06
8.99
2.31
8.64
2.58
8.36
2.80
9.10
0.69
8.93
0.77
8.74
0.87
8.64
0.93
8.48
1.03
8.26
1.18
8.03
1.35
7.77
1.53
7.50
1.74
7.22
1.97
6.99
2.15

24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
15.78 1.62
15.43 1.81
15.06 2.02
14.86 2.13
14.56 2.32
14.14 2.58
13.69 2.86
13.22 3.17
12.73 3.50
12.21 3.84
11.41 4.10
13.78 1.25
13.48 1.42
13.16 1.60
13.00 1.70
12.74 1.86
12.38 2.09
12.00 2.34
11.59 2.61
11.17 2.90
10.73 3.22
10.39 3.46
11.77 0.94
11.52 1.07
11.26 1.22
11.12 1.30
10.91 1.43
10.61 1.62
10.29 1.84
9.96
2.07
9.60
2.32
9.23
2.59
8.94
2.81
9.73
0.67
9.54
0.76
9.34
0.87
9.23
0.93
9.07
1.03
8.83
1.18
8.58
1.35
8.32
1.54
8.02
1.75
7.72
1.98
7.48
2.16

NOTE:

TC

: Total capacity

(kW)

PI

: Power input

(kW)

1. This table shows outdoor unit cooling capacity and power input.
2.
is specified point.
3. PI of indoor units is not included in the table.
3D052906

60

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

7.1.3

Capacity Tables

RMKS160EVM

[Cooling Capacity]
Combination
(%)

130%

120%

110%

100%

90%

Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46

14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
15.66 2.95
15.37 3.16
15.04 3.40
14.86 3.54
14.58 3.75
14.17 4.08
13.72 4.43
13.23 4.82
12.71 5.25
11.23 5.27
8.69
4.18
15.31 2.96
15.03 3.16
14.71 3.40
14.54 3.54
14.27 3.75
13.88 4.07
13.45 4.43
12.98 4.82
12.47 5.25
11.09 5.27
8.58
4.18
14.97 2.96
14.70 3.17
14.40 3.40
14.24 3.54
13.98 3.75
13.60 4.07
13.19 4.42
12.74 4.81
12.25 5.24
10.95 5.27
8.47
4.18
14.64 2.97
14.39 3.17
14.10 3.41
13.94 3.54
13.70 3.75
13.33 4.07
12.93 4.42
12.50 4.81
12.02 5.24
10.81 5.27
8.36
4.18
13.05 2.49
12.83 2.68
12.59 2.90
12.45 3.02
12.24 3.22
11.92 3.51
11.58 3.83
11.20 4.18
10.80 4.57
10.36 4.98
8.25
4.18

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
17.65 2.96
17.28 3.19
16.88 3.45
16.66 3.59
16.32 3.82
15.84 4.15
15.32 4.53
14.76 4.93
13.66 5.27
12.29 5.27
9.63
4.18
17.25 2.97
16.90 3.19
16.52 3.45
16.31 3.59
15.99 3.82
15.52 4.15
15.02 4.52
14.48 4.92
13.49 5.27
12.14 5.27
9.51
4.18
16.86 2.97
16.53 3.19
16.16 3.45
15.96 3.59
15.65 3.81
15.21 4.15
14.72 4.51
14.20 4.92
13.31 5.27
11.98 5.27
9.39
4.18
16.48 2.98
16.16 3.19
15.91 3.45
15.63 3.58
15.33 3.81
14.90 4.14
14.43 4.51
13.93 4.91
13.14 5.27
11.83 5.27
9.27
4.18
14.64 2.49
14.37 2.69
14.17 2.93
13.91 3.05
13.65 3.26
13.28 3.56
12.89 3.89
12.46 4.26
11.99 4.65
11.50 5.07
9.15
4.18

Indoor Air Temp.:CWB


18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
19.02 2.97 19.67 2.98
18.60 3.21 19.24 3.22
18.16 3.48 18.77 3.50
17.92 3.63 18.53 3.65
17.55 3.87 18.14 3.89
17.02 4.21 17.59 4.24
16.45 4.59 17.00 4.63
15.85 5.01 16.38 5.04
14.69 5.27 15.07 5.27
13.20 5.27 13.55 5.27
10.28 4.18 10.59 4.18
18.60 2.98 19.26 2.98
18.21 3.21 18.85 3.22
17.78 3.48 18.40 3.49
17.55 3.63 18.16 3.64
17.19 3.86 17.79 3.88
16.69 4.21 17.26 4.23
16.14 4.59 16.69 4.62
15.56 5.00 16.08 5.04
14.51 5.27 14.88 5.27
13.03 5.27 13.38 5.27
10.15 4.18 10.46 4.18
18.19 2.97 18.85 2.98
17.81 3.20 18.45 3.22
17.40 3.47 18.02 3.49
17.18 3.61 17.79 3.64
16.84 3.85 17.44 3.88
16.35 4.19 16.93 4.23
15.83 4.57 16.38 4.61
15.26 4.98 15.79 5.03
14.33 5.27 14.69 5.27
12.87 5.27 13.21 5.27
10.02 4.18 10.33 4.18
17.77 2.95 18.44 2.99
17.42 3.18 18.06 3.22
17.03 3.44 17.65 3.49
16.82 3.58 17.43 3.64
16.49 3.82 17.09 3.88
16.02 4.15 16.60 4.22
15.51 4.53 16.07 4.60
14.97 4.93 15.50 5.02
14.14 5.27 14.50 5.27
12.70 5.27 13.04 5.27
9.89
4.18 10.19 4.18
15.89 2.47 16.49 2.49
15.58 2.68 16.17 2.71
15.24 2.93 15.81 2.95
15.06 3.06 15.62 3.09
14.77 3.27 15.32 3.31
14.37 3.58 14.89 3.62
13.93 3.92 14.44 3.96
13.46 4.29 13.95 4.34
12.96 4.68 13.43 4.74
12.42 5.11 12.88 5.18
9.76
4.18 10.06 4.18

22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
21.69 3.00
21.20 3.26
20.67 3.55
20.39 3.71
19.95 3.96
19.34 4.33
18.69 4.73
18.00 5.16
16.42 5.27
14.79 5.27
11.63 4.18
21.28 3.00
20.80 3.26
20.29 3.55
20.02 3.71
19.60 3.96
19.01 4.32
18.38 4.72
17.71 5.15
16.22 5.27
14.60 5.27
11.49 4.18
20.87 3.00
20.41 3.26
19.92 3.55
19.66 3.70
19.26 3.95
18.68 4.32
18.07 4.71
17.43 5.14
16.01 5.27
14.42 5.27
11.34 4.18
20.47 3.01
20.03 3.26
19.56 3.54
19.31 3.70
18.91 3.95
18.36 4.31
17.77 4.71
17.14 5.14
15.81 5.27
14.23 5.27
11.20 4.18
18.34 2.49
17.96 2.72
17.55 2.98
17.33 3.13
16.99 3.35
16.51 3.68
16.00 4.04
15.46 4.42
14.88 4.84
14.05 5.27
11.05 4.18

24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
23.08 3.02
22.54 3.29
21.97 3.59
21.67 3.76
21.20 4.02
20.55 4.39
19.86 4.80
19.12 5.24
17.33 5.27
15.62 5.27
12.50 4.18
22.66 3.02
22.14 3.29
21.59 3.59
21.30 3.75
20.85 4.01
20.21 4.39
19.54 4.79
18.83 5.23
17.11 5.27
15.42 5.27
12.34 4.18
22.25 3.02
21.75 3.29
21.22 3.58
20.94 3.75
20.50 4.01
19.88 4.38
19.23 4.79
18.54 5.22
16.89 5.27
15.23 5.27
12.18 4.18
21.84 3.02
21.36 3.29
20.84 3.58
20.57 3.74
20.15 4.00
19.55 4.37
18.92 4.78
18.25 5.22
16.68 5.27
15.03 5.27
12.03 4.18
19.60 2.49
19.18 2.74
18.73 3.01
18.50 3.15
18.13 3.39
17.61 3.72
17.06 4.09
16.48 4.48
15.87 4.90
14.84 5.27
11.87 4.18

61

Capacity Tables

Combination
(%)

80%

70%

60%

50%

EDSG18-936

Outdoor
Air Temp.
CDB
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46
10
14
18
20
23
27
31
35
39
43
46

Symbols

14C
TC
PI
kW
kW
11.51 2.02
11.32 2.20
11.11 2.40
10.99 2.51
10.81 2.69
10.54 2.95
10.25 3.24
9.93
3.55
9.58
3.89
9.21
4.26
8.14
4.18
10.02 1.57
9.85
1.72
9.67
1.90
9.57
2.00
9.41
2.15
9.18
2.38
8.93
2.63
8.66
2.91
8.37
3.21
8.05
3.53
7.80
3.79
8.56
1.14
8.42
1.26
8.27
1.41
8.18
1.48
8.05
1.61
7.85
1.81
7.64
2.02
7.41
2.26
7.16
2.52
6.89
2.80
6.67
3.02
7.16
0.73
7.04
0.81
6.90
0.92
6.83
0.98
6.71
1.08
6.55
1.23
6.36
1.40
6.17
1.60
5.95
1.81
5.72
2.05
5.54
2.24

16C
TC
PI
kW
kW
12.92 2.02
12.69 2.20
12.53 2.41
12.29 2.53
12.07 2.71
11.76 2.98
11.41 3.28
11.05 3.60
10.65 3.95
10.23 4.33
9.03
4.18
11.32 1.56
11.12 1.72
10.99 1.90
10.77 2.00
10.58 2.16
10.31 2.40
10.02 2.66
9.70
2.94
9.37
3.25
9.00
3.58
8.72
3.84
9.84
1.12
9.66
1.24
9.56
1.39
9.36
1.48
9.19
1.61
8.95
1.81
8.70
2.03
8.42
2.28
8.13
2.54
7.82
2.83
7.57
3.06
8.47
0.69
8.31
0.78
8.23
0.90
8.04
0.96
7.89
1.07
7.68
1.22
7.45
1.40
7.20
1.61
6.94
1.83
6.66
2.07
6.44
2.27

Indoor Air Temp.:CWB


18C
19C
TC
PI
TC
PI
kW
kW
kW
kW
14.04 2.00 14.59 2.00
13.77 2.19 14.30 2.20
13.48 2.41 13.99 2.42
13.33 2.53 13.83 2.54
13.08 2.72 13.57 2.74
12.73 3.00 13.21 3.02
12.36 3.30 12.82 3.32
11.96 3.63 12.40 3.66
11.53 3.98 11.96 4.01
11.07 4.37 11.48 4.40
9.63
4.18
9.93
4.18
12.24 1.55 12.72 1.54
12.01 1.71 12.47 1.71
11.76 1.90 12.21 1.90
11.62 2.00 12.07 2.00
11.41 2.17 11.85 2.17
11.12 2.41 11.54 2.42
10.80 2.67 11.21 2.68
10.45 2.96 10.85 2.97
10.09 3.27 10.47 3.29
9.70
3.61 10.07 3.63
9.40
3.88
9.75
3.89
10.47 1.11 10.89 1.10
10.28 1.24 10.68 1.23
10.06 1.39 10.45 1.39
9.95
1.48 10.34 1.47
9.77
1.61 10.15 1.61
9.52
1.82
9.89
1.82
9.25
2.04
9.60
2.04
8.96
2.29
9.30
2.29
8.65
2.56
8.98
2.56
8.32
2.85
8.64
2.85
8.06
3.08
8.37
3.09
8.75
0.68
9.09
0.67
8.58
0.77
8.92
0.77
8.40
0.89
8.73
0.88
8.31
0.95
8.63
0.95
8.15
1.06
8.47
1.06
7.94
1.22
8.25
1.22
7.71
1.40
8.01
1.40
7.46
1.60
7.75
1.61
7.20
1.83
7.48
1.83
6.92
2.07
7.19
2.08
6.70
2.27
6.96
2.28

22C
TC
PI
kW
kW
16.25 1.99
15.92 2.20
15.56 2.43
15.38 2.56
15.08 2.76
14.67 3.05
14.23 3.37
13.76 3.71
13.27 4.08
12.75 4.47
10.90 4.18
14.19 1.52
13.90 1.70
13.60 1.90
13.44 2.01
13.19 2.18
12.84 2.43
12.46 2.71
12.06 3.01
11.64 3.33
11.20 3.67
10.85 3.95
12.15 1.07
11.91 1.21
11.65 1.38
11.52 1.47
11.31 1.61
11.01 1.82
10.69 2.05
10.35 2.31
9.99
2.59
9.62
2.88
9.32
3.12
10.15 0.65
9.95
0.75
9.73
0.87
9.61
0.94
9.44
1.05
9.18
1.22
8.91
1.41
8.63
1.62
8.33
1.85
8.01
2.10
7.76
2.30

24C
TC
PI
kW
kW
17.38 1.99
17.02 2.20
16.63 2.44
16.43 2.57
16.11 2.78
15.67 3.08
15.19 3.40
14.69 3.75
14.17 4.12
13.61 4.52
11.72 4.18
15.19 1.51
14.87 1.69
14.54 1.90
14.37 2.01
14.10 2.19
13.72 2.45
13.32 2.73
12.89 3.03
12.44 3.36
11.97 3.71
11.53 3.98
13.01 1.05
12.75 1.20
12.47 1.37
12.32 1.46
12.09 1.61
11.77 1.83
11.43 2.06
11.07 2.32
10.69 2.60
10.29 2.90
10.12 3.14
10.87 0.63
10.65 0.74
10.41 0.86
10.29 0.93
10.10 1.05
9.82
1.22
9.54
1.41
9.23
1.62
8.91
1.86
8.57
2.11
8.25
2.32

NOTE:

TC

: Total capacity

(kW)

PI

: Power input

(kW)

1. This table shows outdoor unit cooling capacity and power input.
2.
is specified point.
3. PI of indoor units is not included in the table.
3D052907

62

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

7.2

Capacity Tables

Capacity Correction Factor by the Length of Refrigerant Piping

Rate of Change in Capacity by the Main Piping Length


Rate of Change in Cooling Capacity
Main Piping Length

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

Rate of Change in Cooling Capacity 100.0% 98.6% 97.2% 95.9% 94.7% 93.5% 92.3% 91.2% 90.1% 89.1% 88.1%

Main Piping Length Rate of Change in Capacity


100%
98%
Rate of Change in Capacity (%)

96%
94%
92%
90%
88%

Rate of Change in Cooling


Capacity

86%
84%
82%
80%
0

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

Main Piping Length L1 (m)

(R11192)

Both case the outdoor unit is in inferior or superior for indoor unit, the rate of change in capacity is the same.

Rate of Change in Capacity by Branch Piping Length


1. Refrigerant Piping Connection Diameter

2. Refrigerant Piping Connection Diameter

liquid: 6.4 or 9.5

liquid: 6.4

gas : 15.9

gas : 12.7

Rate of Change in Capacity

Rate of Change in Capacity

piping length

Cooling

piping length

Cooling

100.0%

100.0%

99.6%

99.1%

10

98.7%

10

96.9%

15

97.9%

15

94.8%

3. Refrigerant Piping Connection Diameter


liquid: 6.4

Piping size for field connection (mm)

gas : 9.5

RA
Rate of Change in Capacity

Liquid

piping length

Cooling

20

100.0%

25

98.0%

10

93.4%

15

89.3%

Class
(kW)

35
50
60
71

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

SA
gas

Liquid

gas

9.5
6.4

9.5
6.4

12.7
15.9

12.7
9.5

15.9

63

100%

EDSG18-936

Refrigerant Piping Connection Diameter


liquid: 6.4, gas: 15.9
liquid: 9.5, gas: 15.9

Refrigerant Piping Connection Diameter


liquid: 6.4, gas: 12.7

Cooling

99%
98%
97%
96%
95%
0

10

15

99%
98%
97%
96%
95%
94%
93%
92%
91%
90%
0

Branch piping length L2 (m)

Refrigerant Piping Connection Diameter


liquid: 6.4, gas: 9.5

10

Branch piping length L2 (m)

(R11194)

Rate of Change in Capacity (%)

Cooling

100%
Rate of Change in Capacity (%)

Rate of Change in Capacity (%)

Capacity Tables

15

(R11193)

Cooling

100%
98%
96%
94%
92%
90%
88%
0

10

Branch piping length L2 (m)

15

(R11195)

[Method of calculating cooling/heating capacity]


Total capacity from capacity tables (Rate of change in capacity by main piping length
Rate of change in capacity by branch piping length)
Note:

1. These figures illustrate the rate of change in capacity of a standard indoor unit system at maximum load
(with the thermostat set to maximum) under standard conditions.
Moreover, under partial load conditions there is only a minor deviation from the rate of change in
capacity shown in the above figures.
2. With this outdoor unit, evaporating pressure constant control when cooling, and condensing pressure
constant control when heating is carried out.
3. System layout of piping
Piping length : L1 = 5m, L2 = 3m

Outdoor unit

L1

L2

5m

3m
BP unit

Indoor unit
(R4882)

C: 3D050529

64

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Operation Limit

8. Operation Limit
RMKS112EVM, RMKS140EVM, RMKS160EVM
Cooling
50

(50/60Hz)

46

30

20

10

Pull-down period

Continuous operation

Outdoor temp.( CDB)

40

0
-5

10

14

20

23

28 30

Indoor temp.( CWB)

Notes:
The graphs are based
on the following conditions.
Equivalent piping length
From outdoor unit to BP unit
From BP unit to each indoor units
Level difference
Air flow rate

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

5m
3m
0m
High

3D049155C

65

Fan Characteristics

EDSG18-936

9. Fan Characteristics
FDKS25CAVMB

(Pa)

50

60

External static pressure

(mmH2O)

70

rn
a

40

U
st ppe
at r
ic lim
pr i
es t o
su f e
re xt
e

(mmH2O)

30

H
3
l
rna

xte
fe
it oure
m
i
r l ss
we re
Lotatic p
s

20

SL
1

10

(Pa)
6

(mmH2O)

8
9
Air flow rate (m3/min)

10

11

(mmH2O)

3D045760E

FDKS35CAVMB

(mmH2O)
7

(Pa)

(mmH2O)

70

60

50

External static pressure

r
te
ex
f
o
it ure
im s
r l pres
e
p c
Up tati
s
L

30

20
SL

na

40

4
H
3

al
ern

t
f ex
it oure
m
i
l
s
er res
Lowatic p
st

10

(Pa)
(mmH2O)

66

8
9
10
Air flow rate (m3/min)

11

(mmH2O)
3D045761E

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Fan Characteristics

FDKS50CVMB

(mmH2O)
7

(Pa)

60

50

External static pressure

(mmH2O)

70

2
6

5
al

n
er

t
ex
of
it sure
im
r l res
pe ic p
p
t
U ta
s

40

4
H

30

L
2

20

SL

rnal

exte
it of
er lim ure
Low c press
stati

10

(Pa)
(mmH2O)

10
11
12
Air flow rate (m3/min)

13

14

(mmH2O)

3D045762D

FDKS60CVMB

(mmH2O)
7

(Pa)

60

50

External static pressure

(mmH2O)

70

al

n
ter

x
fe
it o ure
m
s
r li es
pe pr
Up tatic
s

40

H
4

L
30

SL
2

20

10

al

tern
of ex
r limit ure
Lowtiec press
sta

(Pa)
(mmH2O)

9.5

10.5

11.5

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

12.5

13.5

14.5

Air flow rate (m3/min)

15.5

16.5

17.5

(mmH2O)
3D045763D

67

Fan Characteristics

EDSG18-936

FDKS25EAVMB, FDKS35EAVMB

(Pa)
70

(mmH 2 O)
7

(mmH 2 O)
7

60

50

l
Up
sta p e r o
tic f li
pre mit
ssu e x
re tern
a

External static pressure

40

30

3
H

20

2
L

10
SL
(Pa)

(mmH 2 O)

10

11 (mmH 2 O)

Air flow rate(m 3 /min)


3D051853

FBQ60BV1, FBQ71BV1
Notes:
1.The remorte controller can be used to switch between "high" and "low".
2.The air flow is set to "standerd" before leaving the factory. It is possible
to switch between "standerd ESP" and "high ESP" by changing the
terminals in the indoor unit electrical box.

50HZ 220V

High(standerd ESP)

10

60HZ 220V

High(high ESP)

100

10

2
3

50

10

Intake panel
Long life 1
filter

20

30

40

(mmH2O) (Pa)

68

al
extern ESP)
h
limit of
Lower pressure(hig
c
stati

14

16
18
Air flow(m3/min)

20

Internal
External
static pressure static pressure

Internal
External
static pressure static pressure

10

High(Low ESP)

Low

High(Low ESP)
50

15

l P)
rna ES
xte h
f e e(hig
o
it ur
r lim ss
pe pre
Up tatic
s

100

10

Low
5

High(standerd ESP) High(high ESP)


(mmH2O)

(mmH2O) (mmH2O) (Pa)


150
15
15

U
sta pper
tic lim
pre it
ssu of e
re( xte
hig rna
hE l
SP
)

(mmH2O) (Pa)
150
15

3.The external static pressure indicates the characteristics of the fan


when a suction panel (optional accessory)and a canvas for the suction
panel (optional accessory) are incorporated into the main unit (with a
long-life filter).

5
al )
extern
limit of igh ESP
Lowecr pressure(h
ti
sta

10

20

30

40

21
(mmH2O) (mmH2O) (Pa)

14

18
16
Air flow(m3/min)

20

21

Intake panel
Long life
filter

4
(mmH2O)
3D049455

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Sound Level

10. Sound Level


10.1 Measuring Location
Indoor Units
Duct Connected Type

Wall Mounted Type

2m

1m

DUCT

DUCT

0.8m

1.5m

1m

MICROPHONE

(R4124)
(R1759)

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

Outdoor Units

0.67m
1m

Note:

(R4948)

1. Operation sound is measured in an anechoic chamber.


2. The data are based on the conditions shown in the table below.
Cooling

Piping Length

Indoor ; 27CDB/19CWB
Outdoor ; 35CDB

5m

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

69

Sound Level

EDSG18-936

10.2 Octave Band Level


10.2.1 Outdoor Units
RMKS112EVM
COOLING

70

OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

60

NC-50

50

SCALE

220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz

52

68.5

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


OPERATING CONDITIONS
220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz
RETURN
AIR
TEMPERATURE:
27CDB, 19.0CWB
COOLING OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE: 35CDB,
24CWB

NC-40
40

POWER SOURCE
NC-30

30
NC-20
20

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

70

RMKS140EVM
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

60

NC-50

50

SCALE

220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz

53

69

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


OPERATING CONDITIONS
220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz

NC-40

40

POWER SOURCE

AIR TEMPERATURE: 27CDB, 19.0CWB


COOLING RETURN
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE: 35CDB, 24CWB

NC-30

30
NC-20

20

4D049260A

8000

COOLING

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

4D049261A

8000

RMKS160EVM

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

70

COOLING
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

60

NC-50

50

SCALE

220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz

54

69

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


OPERATING CONDITIONS
220-240V 50Hz
220-230V 60Hz
AIR TEMPERATURE: 27CDB, 19.0CWB
COOLING RETURN
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE: 35CDB, 24CWB

NC-40

40

POWER SOURCE
NC-30

30
NC-20

20

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

4D049262A

8000

10.2.2 Indoor Units


FTKS25DVM

FTKS35DVM
70

60
NC-50

37

25

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

50

OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz

40

JIS STANDARD
STANDARD EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)

NC-30

30

50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
NC-20

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

FTKS50FVM

70

NC-50

50/60Hz
50/60Hz
220-240/220-230v 220-240/220-230v
(H)
(L)
39

26

(B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED)


OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz

40

JIS STANDARD
STANDARD EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230v(H)

NC-30

30

50/60Hz 220-240/220-230v(L)
NC-20
20

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
250
500
1000 2000 4000 8000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

4D048814

FTKS60FVM

70

OVER ALL ( dB )

60

50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)

NC-60

NC-50

43

70

34

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

50

OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz

40

JIS STANDARD
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)

NC-30
30

50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
Cooling
NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

SCALE

50

4D048279C

8000

NC-60

60

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

20

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)

NC-60

20

OVER ALL(dB)

OVER ALL ( dB )

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

8000

4D056195A

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

70

OVER ALL ( dB )
50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)

NC-60
60

NC-50

45

36

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

50

OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz

40

JIS STANDARD
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)

NC-30
30

50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
Cooling
NC-20

20

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

8000

4D040304G

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Sound Level

FTKS71FVM

FTKS50BVMA8
70

60

46

NC-50

37

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

50

OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE

40

220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz

JIS STANDARD
50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)

NC-30
30

50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)
Cooling
NC-20

FDKS25CAVMB

50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(L)

35

31

POWER SOURCE

230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

JIS STANDARD
STANDARD EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
(H) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

NC-30
30

(L) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz


Cooling

NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

4D040303A

8000

COOLING
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

NC-50

SCALE

50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(H)

50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(L)

35

31

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

50

OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE

40

230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

JIS STANDARD
STANDARD EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
(H) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

NC-30
30

(L) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz


Cooling

NC-20
20

70

OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

NC-50

SCALE

50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(H)

50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(L)

37

33

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE

40

230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

JIS STANDARD
STANDARD EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
(H) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

NC-30
30

(L) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz


Cooling

NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

4D046334C

8000

COOLING
OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

60

NC-50

SCALE

50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(H)

50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(L)

38

34

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

50

OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE

40

230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

JIS STANDARD
STANDARD EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
(H) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz

NC-30
30

(L) 230V/50Hz, 220V/60Hz


Cooling

NC-20
20

4D046335B

8000

FDKS25EAVMB, FDKS35EAVMB

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

FDKS60CVMB

50

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

4D046336B

8000

FFQ25BV1B9

COOLING
70

OVER ALL ( dB )
220-240V/50Hz
SCALE 220-230V/60Hz
(H)

NC-60

60

NC-50

220-240V/50Hz
220-230V/60Hz
(L)

35

31

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

50

OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

POWER SOURCE 220-240V/50Hz, 220-230V/60Hz

40

JIS STANDARD
STANDARD EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE
(H)220-240V/50Hz, 220-230V/60Hz

NC-30

30

(L)220-240V/50Hz, 220-230V/60Hz
Cooling

NC-20

20

Cooling

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE

63

COOLING

63

50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(L)

60

4D046333C

8000

FDKS50CVMB

70

20

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

SCALE

50Hz/230V
60Hz/220V
(H)

OPERATING CONDITIONS
NC-40

60

50/60Hz 220-240/220-230V(H)

NC-20

70

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

40

20

NC-30
30

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

NC-60

NC-50

70

JIS STANDARD

OVER ALL ( dB )

63

POWER SOURCE 220-240/220-230V 50/60Hz

FDKS35CAVMB

50

20

OPERATING CONDITIONS

NC-40

COOLING

60

35

(B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED)

40

4D040305K

8000

44

NC-50
50

63

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)

NC-60

60

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

70

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

50/60Hz
50/60Hz
SCALE 220-240/220-230V 220-240/220-230V
(H)
(L)

NC-60

20

OVER ALL(dB)

OVER ALL ( dB )

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

8000

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

4D051868

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

70

OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

60

NC-50

NC-40
40
HI
NC-30
LOW
NC-20

24.5

36.1

32.3

HI
LOW
46.5
OPERATING CONDITIONS
230V 50Hz

RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE : 27C DB, 19C WB


COOLING OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE : 35C DB, 24C WB
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE : 20C DB, 15C WB
HEATING OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE : 7C DB, 6C WB

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

LOW

29.5

POWER SOURCE

30

63

HI

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


POWER LEVEL ( dB )

50

20

SCALE

4 DIRECTION DISCHARGE

8000

4D040176A

71

Sound Level

EDSG18-936

FFQ35BV1B9

FFQ50BV1B9
70

NC-60
60

SCALE

HI

LOW

32.0

25.0

NC-50

38.0

32.7

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


POWER LEVEL ( dB )

50

NC-40

HI

40

LOW
-

49.0

HI

OPERATING CONDITIONS

NC-30

LOW

30

LOW

NC-20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

FFQ60BV1B9

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

60

NC-50

50

SCALE

HI

LOW

41.0

32.0

44.8

38.0

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


HI
HI

40

LOW

58.0
NC-30

OPERATING CONDITIONS

LOW

30

POWER SOURCE

20

RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE:27C DB, 19CWB


COOLING
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE:35C DB, 24CWB
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE:20C DB, 15CWB
HEATING
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE:7C DB, 6CWB
4 DIRECTION DISCHARGE

NC-20

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

230V 50Hz

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

34.2

HI

OPERATING CONDITIONS

NC-30

30

POWER SOURCE
LOW
NC-20

20

LOW

53.0

HI

HEATING

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE

230V 50Hz

RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE:27C DB, 19C WB


COOLING OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE:35C DB, 24C WB
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE:20C DB, 15C WB
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE:7C DB, 6C WB

4 DIRECTION DISCHARGE

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

4D040178A

8000

NC-60

SCALE

NC-50

50

H(240V)
NC-40
H(220V)

40

220V

240V

35

30

37

32

41

36

43

38

OPERATING CONDITIONS
POWER SOURCE 50Hz/60Hz
JIS STANDARD

30

220V
240V
NC-20
L(220V)

125
250
500
1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

NC-50

50
H(240V)

220V

240V

33

29

35

31

39

35

41

37

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

NC-40

OPERATING CONDITIONS

40

POWER SOURCE 50Hz/60Hz

H(220V)
NC-30

JIS STANDARD

30

220V
240V

20

NC-20

L(240V)

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE

L(220V)

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

4D006198C

8000

70

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )

NC-30

L(240V)

SCALE

60

63

OVER ALL ( dB )

60

OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

FBQ60BV1, FBQ71BV1

70

72

27.0

41.0

NC-40

4D040179A

8000

FCQ60BVE, FCQ71BVE

63

LOW

36.0

70

POWER LEVEL ( dB )
NC-40

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE

HI

A
C

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


POWER LEVEL ( dB )

40

63

OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

20

NC-50

SCALE

FCQ35BVE, FCQ50BVE

70

63

NC-60

50

4D040177A

8000

OVER ALL ( dB )

60

4 DIRECTION DISCHARGE

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

20

230V 50Hz
POWER SOURCE
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE : 27C DB, 19C WB
COOLING
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE : 35C DB, 24C WB
RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE : 20C DB, 15C WB
HEATING
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE : 7C DB, 6C WB

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

OVER ALL ( dB )

8000

4D006201D

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


dB(0dB=0.0002 bar)

70

OVER ALL ( dB )
NC-60

60

SCALE

NC-50
H(240V)
H(220V)
NC-40

50

220V

240V

41

35

43

37

48

43

50

45

( B.G.N IS ALREADY RECTIFIED )


OPERATING CONDITIONS

40

POWER SOURCE 220V 240V 50Hz


JIS STANDARD

NC-30

30

L(240V)

220V
240V

NC-20

20

APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63

STANDARD ESP 49Pa (H)

L(220V)

125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

8000

DU426-4186A

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Electric Characteristics

11. Electric Characteristics


Model
Outdoor

Hz

Volts

Units
Min.

Max.

Power supply
MCA
MFA

Comp.
MSC
RLA

RMKS112EVM

Cooling

50

230

198

253

27.0

30

15.4

15.4

RMKS140EVM

Cooling

50

230

198

253

27.0

30

19.7

19.7

RMKS160EVM

Cooling

50

230

198

253

27.0

30

23.5

23.5

SYMBOLS:
MCA : MIN. CIRCUIT AMPS (A)
MFA : MAX. FUSE AMPS (A)
MSC : MAX. CURRENT DURING THE
STARTING COMPRESSOR (A)
RLA
: RATED LOAD AMPS (A)
OFM : OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR
FLA
: FULL LOAD AMPS (A)
W
: FAN MOTOR RATED OUTPUT (W)

OFM
W
88
+
88
88
+
88
88
+
88

FLA
0.4
+
0.4
0.4
+
0.4
0.4
+
0.4

NOTE:
1. RLA is based on the following conditions.
Power Supply: 50Hz 230V
Cooling
Indoor temp.: 27CDB/19CWB
Outdoor temp.: 35CDB.
2. Voltage range.
Units are suitable for use on electrical systems where voltage
supplied to unit terminal is not below or above listed range limits.
3. Maximum allowable voltage variation between phases is 2%.
4. Select wire size based on the value of MCA.
5. MCA represents maximum input current.
MFA represents capacity which may accept MCA.
6. Instead of fuse, use circuit breaker.
7. MFA is used to select the circuit breaker and the ground fault
circuit interrupter (earth leakage circuit breaker).
8. Be sure to install an earth leak detector. (One that can handle
higher harmonics.)
(This unit uses an inverter, which means that it must be used an
earth leak detector capable handling high harmonics in order to
prevent malfunctioning of the earth leak detector itself.)
C : 3D052890

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

73

Electric Characteristics

74

EDSG18-936

SUPER MULTI PLUS E-Series Cooling Only

EDSG18-936

Part 3
Installation Manual
1. Outdoor Units ........................................................................................76
1.1 Installation ..............................................................................................76
1.2 Service Precautions ...............................................................................94

2. BP Units ................................................................................................98
3. Indoor Units.........................................................................................110
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9

Installation Manual

Safety Precautions ...............................................................................110


Wall Mounted Type FTKS25/35D.........................................................111
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50/60/71F ....................................................119
Wall Mounted Type FTKS50B..............................................................126
Duct Connected Type FDKS25/35CA ..................................................134
Duct Connected Type FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA ...........................144
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FFQ25/35/50/60B..............................154
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FCQ35/50/60/71B .............................176
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type FBQ60/71B...........................................199

75

Outdoor Units

EDSG18-936

1. Outdoor Units
1.1

Installation
1

1
1
2

2
2

1,500
1,000
1,000

3
6

1,500

1,500

5
2

figure 1

figure 2

[1]

figure 3

[2]

10

re

o
rm

0o

r
0o
50 ore
m

[1]

[2]

rm

0o

or

ore

10
0o

00

rm

[3]

or

r
mo

10

ore

15
0
mo or
re

rm

0o

10

500 or
more

[3]

15
0
mo or
re

500 or
more

10

0o

rm

1000 or
more

1000 or
more

0
15

or

or
m

1000 or
more

10
0
mo 0 or
re

ore

20

re

re

0o

rm

r
0o

mo

20
0
mo or
re

30

ore

figure 4

0
30

or

mo

figure 5

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

H
L
L

ore

re

rm

0o

50

0
00

mo

L>H

L>H

r
0o
50 ore
m

[3]

or

r
0o
10 ore
r
m
o
0
50 ore
m

r
0o
50 ore
m

[4]

r
0o
50 less
1000 or
more

rm

0o

00

or

re
mo

figure 6

L
r
0o
30 ore
m

figure 7

[6]

[5]

[7]

[8]

r
0o
50 ore
m

r
0o
50 ore
m
1000 or
more

H
L

r
0o
10 ore
m
or
0
50 ore
m

1000 or
more

H
H

L>H

r
0o
25 ore
m

10

50

or

1000 or
more

L
ore

00

r
0o
30 ore
m

[4]

[3]

1000 or
more

1000 or
more

10

r
0o
50 less

ore

L
L
A

or
00 e
10 mor

or
00 e
10 mor

or
00 e
15 mor

figure 7

76

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

[1]

[1]
20

100
or
00
20 more

figure 10

r
or 00 ore
2 o
00
m
10 more

re
mo
or
00
10

[2]

r
0o
10 ore
m

[2]

L
A

100

r
0o
60 re
or mo
0
0
15 more

ore
rm
0o
0
3

figure 9

figure 11

620
620

140
140
350350

117117

30 30
219219

290290

1
1

140
140

45
45

8
9

8
8

4
5

8
7

3
3

421
421612
612

(345~355)
(345~355)

figure 8

or
00
30 more

10

2
2

4
3

figure 12

7
10

8
8

8
8

10

3
5
10

figure 13

figure 14

11
1
11

4
9
10

10

2
3
5

5
5
2

2
7

3
6

8
7

figure 15

Installation Manual

figure 16

77

Outdoor Units

EDSG18-936

1
4

TO BP UNIT TO OUT/D UNIT


F1 F2 F1 F2

2
3
1

F1 F2

F1 F2

F1 F2

3
F1F2

F1F2

F1F2

F1F2

figure 17

F1F2

F1F2

5
4

figure 18

figure 19

figure 20
1

2
3

4
6

figure 23

[2]

2
3

figure 22

figure 21

8
7

[1]

figure 24

[3]

[4]

3
3

figure 25
1

2
9

10
8

11

2
1
2

12

12

4
5

3
4

figure 26

figure 27

5
3

8
9

6
1
2

figure 28

10

7
5

4
1

figure 29

78

figure 30

figure 31

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

1.

Outdoor Units

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Please read this SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before


installing air conditioning equipment and be sure to install it correctly.
This manual classifies precautions into WARNINGS and CAUTIONS.
Be sure to follow all precautions below: they are all important for
ensuring safety.
After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates
properly during the start-up operation.
Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it
maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual
along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the terms appliances not accessible to the general public.
Safety Precaution
VRV System is a class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Meaning of warning and caution symbols.
Warning ........Failure to observe a warning may result in death
or serious injury.
Caution .........Failure to observe a caution may result in injury
or damage to the unit.

Warning
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation
work. Do not try to install the machine yourself.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Perform installation work in accordance with this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks
or fire.
Steps must be taken to prevent the critical concentration from
being exceeding in case the refrigerant leaks when the unit is
installed in a small room. Consult your dealer about ways to avoid
exceeding the critical concentration.
If the refrigerant does leak and the critical concentration is
breached, the room may become deprived of oxygen.
Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in water leakage,
electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
Install in a location which can fully support the weight of the unit.
Insufficiently strong locations will cause the unit to drop and
cause injury.
Carry out the specified installation work after taking into account
strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Improper installation work may result in the equipment falling and
causing accidents.
Electrical wiring work should be done in compliance with all local
laws, specifications, and this manual. Dedicated power supply
wiring should be used.
Insufficient capacity in the power supply wiring or incorrect wiring
work may cause electric shock or fire.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used,
and no external forces act on the terminal connections or wires.
Improper connections or installation may result in fire.
Wiring between indoor and outdoor units and for the power wiring
should be laid out and securely attached with an outer panel so it
does not force the service lid or other parts out of place.
Otherwise this may cause the terminal board to get hot, electric
shock, or fires.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area
immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire.
After completing the installation work, check that the refrigerant
gas does not leak.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the
room and comes into contact with a source of fire, such as a fan
heater, stove or cooker.
Always shut off the power before touching any electrical parts.
Be sure to establish an earth.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause
damage to the air conditioner.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric
shocks, or fire.

Caution
Drain pipes should be laid following the explanation in this installation manual to achieve proper drainage and should be insulated
to prevent condensation.
Improper drain work may cause leaks, damaging furniture, etc.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wiring at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios in
order to prevent image interference or noise.
Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
(a) where a mineral oil mist or an oil spray or vapor is produced,
for example in a kitchen.
Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall off or result in water leakage.

Installation Manual

79

Outdoor Units

EDSG18-936

(b) where corrosive gas, such as sulfurous acid gas, is produced.


Corroding copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
(c) near machinery emitting electromagnetic waves.
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of the equipment.
(d) where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon
fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or where volatile
flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire.
(e) Make sure to provide for adequate measures in order to prevent that the outdoor unit be used as a shelter by small animals.
Small animals making contact with electrical parts can cause
malfunctions, smoke or fire. Please instruct the customer to
keep the area around the unit clean.
Do not mount or place objects on the outdoor unit.
Falling and tipping may cause injury.
Do not wash outdoor or indoor units with water.
This may cause electric shock or fire.
Disposal requirements
Dismanting of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and eventual other parts, shold be done in accordance with the relevant
local and national regulations.
Caution
See the indoor units and BP unit installation manual for indoor unit
and BP unit and the remote controller installation.

2.
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

INTRODUCTION
This series uses R410A new refrigerant. Be absolutely sure to
comply with 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING,
because even greater caution is needed to prevent impurities
from entering R410A (mineral oils and water).
The design pressure is 4.0MPa (2.8MPa for R22), which means
that piping may be thicker than conventionally, so please refer to
7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING.
This is a mixed refrigerant, so charge as a liquid when adding
refrigerant.
(If charged as a gas, the composition of the refrigerant may
change, preventing normal operation.)
The indoor unit must use R410A. See the catalog for indoor unit
and BP unit models which can be connected. (Normal operation
is not possible when connected to other units.)
The power supply of this series is single-phase, 220 to 240V
(50Hz) in the model ~EV1A, single-phase, 220 to 230V (50/60Hz)
in the model ~EVM, single-phase, 220V (60Hz) in the model
~EVLT.

2-2 Standard operation limit


Normal operation
The figures below assume following operating conditions for indoor
and outdoor units:
Equivalent pipe length
From outdoor unit to BP unit................................................. 5m
From BP unit to indoor unit................................................... 3m
Level difference .................................................................... 0m
(H/P model only)
A

Cooling

Heating
*(c)
*(a)

46

40

*(b)

35
15.5
10
5

5
10

A
B
C
D

14

19

23

15
10

28

14

20

28

Outdoor temperature (CDB)


Indoor temperature (CWB)
Outdoor temperature (CWB)
Indoor temperature (CDB)
Range for continuous operation
Range for pull down operation
Range for warming up operation

2-3 Spec list


For operating conditions marked with a *(a)(b) in the table, see 2-2
Standard operation limit.
H/P
Model name
C/O

RMXS112EV1A RMXS140EV1A RMXS160EV1A


RMXS112EVLT RMXS140EVLT RMXS160EVLT
RMKS112EVM RMKS140EVM RMKS160EVM Remarks
RMKS112EV1A RMKS140EV1A RMKS160EV1A

Refrigerant type

R410A

Cooling performance

(kW)

11.2

14.0

15.5

* (a)

Heating performance

(kW)

12.5

16.0

17.5

* (b)
H/P
model
only

Energy use during cooling

(kW)

3.50

4.49

5.46

* (a)

Energy use during heating

(kW)

4.17

5.19

5.65

* (b)
H/P
model
only

External dimensions
(width depth height)

(mm)

Mass

(kg)

Connec- Gas line piping


tion piping
Liquid line piping

(inch)
(mm)

3/4
19.1

3/4
19.1

3/4
19.1

(inch)
(mm)

3/8
9.5

3/8
9.5

3/8
9.5

2-1 Combination
The indoor units can be installed in the following range.
Be sure to connect a dedicated indoor unit. See the catalog
for indoor unit models which can be connected.
Total capacity/quantity of indoor units
Outdoor unit
Total capacity of indoor units Total quantity of indoor units
RMXS112EV1A, RMXS112EVLT, RMKS112EVM, RMKS112EV1A.......... 55 ~ 145.5
6 units
RMXS140EV1A, RMXS140EVLT, RMKS140EVM, RMKS140EV1A....70 ~ 182
8 units
RMXS160EV1A, RMXS160EVLT, RMKS160EVM, RMKS160EV1A..........80 ~ 208
9 units

80

1345 900 320


125

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

2-4 Electrical properties

3.

For operating conditions marked with a *(c) in the table, see 2-2

<Transporting the Unit>


As shown in figure 2, bring the unit slowly. (Take care not to let hands
or things come in contact with rear fins.)

Standard operation limit.


H/P RMXS112EV1A RMXS140EV1A RMXS160EV1A Remarks

Model name

C/O RMKS112EV1A RMKS140EV1A RMKS160EV1A

Phase

Frequency

(Hz)

50Hz

Voltage

(V)

220-240V

Voltage tolerance range

(%)

10

Rated current for fuses

30

Maximum outdoor unit operating current

(A)

Model name

H/P RMXS112EVLT RMXS140EVLT RMXS160EVLT Remarks

27

Phase

* (c)

Frequency

(Hz)

60Hz

Voltage

(V)

220V

Voltage tolerance range

(%)

10

Rated current for fuses

30
(A)

Model name

C/O RMKS112EVM RMKS140EVM RMKS160EVM Remarks

27

Phase

* (c)

Frequency

(Hz)

50Hz/60Hz

Voltage

(V)

220-230V

Voltage tolerance range

(%)

10

Rated current for fuses

30

Maximum outdoor unit operating current

(A)

27

* (c)

2-5 Standard supplied accessories


Make sure that the accessories shown below are all present.
(The accessories can be found behind the front panel.)
Name

Regarding use

Clamp

Quantity

2 pcs.

Name

Others

Installation manual

Shape

Gas side
Gas side
Gas side
accessory pipe (1) accessory pipe (2) accessory pipe (3)

Quantity

1 pc.

1 pc.

1 pc.

Shape

(Refer to figure 31)


1. Accessories
2. Screw for front panel
3. Front panel

2-6 Option accessory


Refrigerant branching kit
REFNET joint

KHRP26A22T

* See 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING for


details on how to connect refrigerant branch kits and how many
are needed.

Installation Manual

(Refer to figure 2)
1. Air outlet grille
2. Intake hole
3. Corner
4. Outdoor unit
5. Handle
6. Front
7. Rear
8. Always hold the unit by the corners, as holding it by the
side intake holes on the casing may cause them to
deform.
Use only accessories and parts which are of the designated specification when installing.

4.

Maximum outdoor unit operating current

BEFORE INSTALLATION

SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE

(1) Select an installation site where the following conditions are


satisfied and that meets with your customers approval.
Places which are well-ventilated.
Places where the unit does not bother next-door neighbors.
A locations where small animals will not make nests in the unit.
Safe places which can withstand the units weight and vibration
and where the unit can be installed level.
Locations not exposed to rain.
A locations where there is enough space to install the unit.
Places where the indoor and outdoor units piping and wiring
lengths come within the allowable ranges.
A location where there is no risk of flammable gas leaking.
(2) If the unit is installed in a location where it might be
exposed to strong wind, install as per figure 3.
5m/sec or more strong wind blown against the outdoor units air
outlet causes the outdoor unit to deteriorate in air capacity and
suck in the air blown out of its air outlet (short circuit), and the following effects may result.
Drop in performance.
Increased frost formation in heating mode.
Shutting down due to increase in pressure.
If very strong wind blows continuously on the side of the outdoor
unit with the outlet vent, the fan may turn in reverse at high
speed and break, so install as per figure 3.
(Refer to figure 3)
1. Turn the air outlet side toward the buildings wall, fence or
windbreak screen.
2. Air inlet grille
3. Ensuring there is enough space for installing the unit.
4. Set the outlet side at a right angle to the direction of the
wind.
5. Strong wind
6. Blown air
(3) In installing the unit in a place frequently exposed to snow,
pay special attention to the following:
Elevate the foundation as high as possible.
Attach the snow hood (field supply).
Remove the rear inlet grille to prevent snow from accumulating
on the rear fins.
(4) The outdoor unit may short circuit depending on its environment,
so use the louvers (field supply).
(5) The refrigerant gas (R410A) is a safe, non-toxic and non-flammable gas, but if it leaks into the room, the concentration may
exceed tolerance levels, especially in small rooms, so steps need
to be taken to prevent refrigerant leakage. See the equipment
design reference for details.

81

Outdoor Units

EDSG18-936

(6) Inverter-type air conditioners sometimes cause static in other


electrical appliances.
When selecting an installation location, make sure the air conditioner and all wiring are sufficiently far away from radios, computers, stereos, and other appliances, as shown in figure 1.
Particularly for locations with weak reception, ensure there is a
distance of at least 3 meters for indoor remote controllers, place
power supply wiring and interunit wiring in conduits, and ground
the conduits. Use shielded wire for interunit wiring.

Note)
Get the lower part of the frame sealed so that air from the outlet
does not bypass.

2.

LH

(Refer to figure 1)
1. Indoor unit
2. Branch switch (ground-fault circuit interrupter)
3. Remote controller
4. Personal computer or radio
5. BP unit
(7) Space needed for installation
<Precautions when installing units in series>
The direction for interunit piping is either forward or down when
installing units in series, as shown in the figure.
If the piping is brought out from the back, the outdoor unit will
require at least 250 mm from its right side.
(All figures represent millimeters.)
(7)-1 IN CASE OBSTACLES EXIST ONLY IN FRONT OF THE
AIR INLET
When nothing is obstructing the top
1. Installation of single unit
In case obstacles exist only in front of the air inlet
(Refer to figure 4-[1])
In case obstacles exist in front of the air inlet and on both sides
of the unit (Refer to figure 4-[2])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row
In case obstacles exist in front of the air inlet and on both sides
of the unit (Refer to figure 4-[3])
When something is obstructing the top
1. Installation of single unit
In case obstacles exist only in front of the air inlet
(Refer to figure 5-[1])
In case obstacles exist in front of the air inlet and on both sides
of the unit (Refer to figure 5-[2])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row
In case obstacles exist in front of the air inlet and on both sides
of the unit (Refer to figure 5-[3])

Series installation (up to two units) (Refer to figure 7-[4])


Relation of dimensions of H, A, and L are shown in the table
below.

When nothing is obstructing the top


1. Installation of single unit (Refer to figure 7-[1])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row (Refer to figure 7-[2])
When something is obstructing the top
1. Installation of single unit (Refer to figure 7-[3])
Relation of dimensions of H, A, and L are shown in the table below.

LH
H<L

82

0 < L 1/2H

750

1/2H < L H

1000

1/2H < L H

1250

Set the frame to be L H

Note)
1. Get the lower part of the frame sealed so that air from the outlet does not bypass.
2. Only two units at most can be installed in series.
Pattern 2: Where obstacles in front of the air outlet is lower than the
unit.
(There is no height limit for obstructions on the intake
side.)
When nothing is obstructing the top
1. Installation of single unit (Refer to figure 7-[5])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row (Refer to figure 7-[6])
Relation of dimensions of H, A, and L are shown in the table
below.
L

0 < L 1/2H

250

1/2H < L H

300

When something is obstructing the top


1. Installation of single unit (Refer to figure 7-[7])
Relation of dimensions of H, A, and L are shown in the table
below.

LH

0 < L 1/2H

100

1/2H < L H

200

Set the frame to be L H

H<L

Note)
Get the lower part of the frame sealed so that air from the outlet
does not bypass.

2.

Series installation (up to two units) (Refer to figure 7-[8])


Relation of dimensions of H, A, and L are shown in the table
below.

LH

When nothing is obstructing the top


1. Installation of single unit (Refer to figure 6-[1])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row (Refer to figure 6-[2])

(7)-3 IN CASE OBSTACLES EXIST IN FRONT OF BOTH THE


AIR INLET AND OUTLET SIDES
Pattern 1: Where obstacle in front of the air outlet is higher than the
unit.
(There is no height limit for obstructions on the intake side.)

A
1000

H<L

(7)-2 IN CASE OBSTACLES EXIST IN FRONT OF THE OUTLET


SIDE

When something is obstructing the top


1. Installation of single unit (Refer to figure 6-[3])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row (Refer to figure 6-[4])

L
0 < L 1/2H

H<L

0 < L 1/2H

250

1/2H < L H

300

Set the frame to be L H

Note)
1. Get the lower part of the frame sealed so that air from the outlet does not bypass.
2. Only two units at most can be installed in series.
(7)-4 IN CASE OF STACKED INSTALLATION

1.

2.

In case obstacles exist in front of the outlet side


(Refer to figure 8-[1])
Note)
1. No more than two units should be stacked.
2. About 100 mm is required as the dimension for laying the
upper outdoor units drain pipe.
3. Shut off the Z part (the area between the upper outdoor unit
and the lower outdoor unit) so that outlet air does not bypass.
In case obstacles exist in front of the air inlet (Refer to figure 8-[2])
Note)
1. No more than two units should be stacked.
2. About 100 mm is required as the dimension for laying the
upper outdoor units drain pipe.
3. Shut off the Z part (the area between the upper outdoor unit
and the lower outdoor unit) so that outlet air does not bypass.

Set the frame to be L H

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

(7)-5 IN CASE OF MULTIPLE-ROW INSTALLATION (FOR ROOF


TOP USE, ETC.)
1. In case of installing one unit per row (Refer to figure 9-[1])
2. In case of installing multiple units (2 units or more) in lateral connection per row (Refer to figure 9-[2])
Relation of dimensions of H, A, and L are shown in the table
below.

LH
H<L

5.

0 < L 1/2H

250

1/2H < L H

300

Installation impossible.

PRECAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION

Install making sure the unit is level and the foundation is sturdy
enough to prevent vibration noise.
In accordance with the foundation drawing in figure 10, fix the unit
securely by means of the foundation bolts.
(Prepare four sets of M12 foundation bolts, nuts and washers
each which are available on the market.)
The foundation bolts should be inserted 20 mm.
(Refer to figure 10)
1. Diagram of lower surface
<Drain pipe disposal>
Locations where drainage from the outdoor unit might be a problem.
In such locations, for example, where the drainage might drip onto
passersby, lay the drain piping using the separately sold drain
plug.
When laying the drain, at least 100 mm from the bottom of the outdoor unit is needed.
Make sure the drain works properly.
(Watch out for water leaks if piping is brought out the bottom.)
(Refer to figure 11)
1. Drain plug
2. 4 tabs
3. Drain receiver
4. Insert the drain receiver as far as possible into the drain
plug and hook the tabs.
5. Bottom frame drain hole
6. (1) Insert the drain plug through the drain hole in the
bottom frame shown in figure 12.
(2) Turn the drain plug along the guides until it stops
(approx. 90), and then attach the bottom frame.
7. Guide
(Refer to figure 12)
1. Air outlet side
2. Diagram of lower surface (Unit: mm)
3. Drain hole
[How to remove the transport clasp]
A yellow transport clasp and washer are attached to the legs of
the compressor to protect the unit during transportation, so
remove them as shown in figure 13.
(Refer to figure 13)
1. Compressor
2. Securing nut
3. Washer
4. Transport clasp
5. Turn in the direction of the arrow and remove.
6. Sound-proof cover
7. Do not remove with the cover open.
(1) Open the sound-proof cover as shown in figure 13.
Do not pull the sound-proof cover or remove it from the compressor.
(2) Remove the securing nut.
(3) Remove the washer.
(4) Remove the transport clasp as shown in figure 13.
(5) Retighten the securing nut.
(6) Return the sound-proof cover as it was.

Installation Manual

6.

FIELD WIRING
Caution
To the electrician
Do not operate until refrigerant piping work is completed.
(If operated before complete the piping work, the compressor
may be broken down.)
Be sure to install an earth leakage circuit breaker.
(This unit uses an inverter, so install the earth leakage circuit
breaker that be capable of handling high harmonics in order to
prevent malfunctioning of the earth leakage circuit breaker
itself.)

6-1 Wiring connection example for whole system


Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified professional.
Follow the Electrical wiring diagram face plate when carrying out
any electrical wiring.
Only proceed with wiring work after blocking off all power.
Make sure the ground resistance is no greater than 4 .
Attach a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
Ground the indoor and outdoor units.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, sewage pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes: can explode or catch fire if there is a gas leak.
Sewage pipes: no grounding effect is possible if hard plastic
piping is used.
Telephone ground wires and lightning rods: dangerous
when struck by lightning due to abnormal rise in electrical potential in the grounding.
Use copper wire.
When doing the electrical wiring, always shut off the power source
before working, and do not turn on the switch until all work is complete.
This unit has an inverter, so it must be grounded in order to reduce
noise and prevent it affecting other appliances, and also to
release any electrical build-up in the unit case due to leaked current.
Do not install a power-factor improving phase-advancing capacitor under any circumstances.
(Not only will this not improve the power factor, but it might cause
a fire.)
Connect the wire securely using designated wire and fix it with
attached clamp without applying external pressure on the terminal parts (terminal for power wiring, terminal for transmission wiring and earth terminal). See 6-3 How to connect the power
supply wiring.
Left-over wiring should not be wrapped and stuffed into the unit.
To prevent the power wiring from being damaged by the knock
hole edges, put it in a wiring pipe or plastic tube to protect it.
Secure the wiring with the included clamp so that it does not come
in contact with the piping or shutoff valve.
(See 6-3 How to connect the power supply wiring.)
Caution
Use a power wire pipe for the power supply wiring.
Outside the unit, make sure the weak electric wiring (i.e. for the
remote controller cord, between units, etc.) and the strong electric wiring do not pass near each other, keeping them at least
50 mm apart.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and
breakage.
Be sure to connect the power wiring to the power wiring terminal
block and secure it as described in 6-3 How to connect the
power supply wiring.
Interunit wiring should be secured as described in 6-4 Interunit wiring connection procedure.
Secure wiring with clamp (accessory) to avoid contact with piping.
Make sure the wiring and the front panel do not stick up above
the structure, and close the cover firmly.

83

Outdoor Units

EDSG18-936

(Refer to figure 14)


1. When the power source is connected in series between
the BP units.
2. When the power source is suppled to each BP unit individually.
3. Branch switch and over-current interrupter (ground-fault
circuit interrupter)
4. Power supply
5. Outdoor unit
6. 16V
7. 220-240V
8. Indoor unit
9. BP unit
10. Ground wire

6-2 How to lay the power supply wiring and transmission wiring
Pass the power supply wiring (including the ground wire) through the
holes on the side, front, or back of the unit.
The interunit wiring should be passed through the wiring hole, the
piping out-hole, or the knock hole on the front of the unit.
Precautions when knocking out knock holes
Open the knock holes with a hammer or the like.
After knocking out the holes, we recommend you remove burrs in
the knock holes and paint the edges and areas around the edges
using the repair paint to prevent rusting.
When passing wiring through knock holes, make sure there are
no burrs, and protect the wiring with protective tape.

Burr

If small animals might enter the


unit, block the knock holes with an
appropriate material (field supply).

(Refer to figure 15)


1. Shutoff valve attachment plate
2. Interunit wiring
3. Connecting electrical wiring (including ground wire)
4. Backward
5. Knockout hole
6. Sideways
7. Set apart
8. Forward
9. Clamp (accessory)
10. Terminal block
11. Control box
<Precautions when laying power wiring>
Wiring of different thicknesses cannot be connected to the power
terminal block.
(Slack in the power wiring may cause abnormal heat.)
Use sleeve-insulated round pressure terminals for connections to
the power terminal block. When none are available, connect wire
of the same diameter to both sides, as shown in the figure.

Insulating sleeve
Round crimp-style
terminal

Electric Wire

Do not connect
Do not connect
Connect wires
of the same gauge wires of the same wires of different
gauge to one side. gauges.
to both side.

Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws.


A screwdriver with a small head will strip the head and make
proper tightening impossible.
Over-tightening the terminal screw may break it.
See the table below the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Tightening torque (Nm)
M5

Power terminal

2.39~2.91

M4

Shield ground

1.18~1.44

M3

Transmission wiring terminal block

0.8~0.97

6-3 How to connect the power supply wiring


Caution
Attach a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
A ground-fault circuit interrupter is required in order to prevent
electric shock and fires.

Maximum
Rated
outdoor unit
current
operating
for fuses
current

Model name

Frequency

Voltage

RMXS112EV1A, RMKS112EV1A

~50Hz

220-240V

30A

27.0A

RMXS140EV1A, RMKS140EV1A

~50Hz

220-240V

30A

27.0A

RMXS160EV1A, RMKS160EV1A

~50Hz

220-240V

30A

27.0A

Model name

Frequency

Voltage

RMXS112EVLT

~60Hz

220V

30A

27.0A

RMXS140EVLT

~60Hz

220V

30A

27.0A

RMXS160EVLT

~60Hz

220V

30A

27.0A

Frequency

Voltage

RMKS112EVM

~50/60Hz

220-230V

30A

27.0A

RMKS140EVM

~50/60Hz

220-230V

30A

27.0A

RMKS160EVM

~50/60Hz

220-230V

30A

27.0A

Model name

Maximum
Rated
outdoor unit
current
operating
for fuses
current

Maximum
Rated
outdoor unit
current
operating
for fuses
current

Caution
The wiring should be selected in compliance with local specifications. See the table above.
Comply with IEC60245 as regards individual specifications for
local power supply wiring.
Use H05VV as the power supply wiring if a wiring conduit is
being used.
If a conduit cannot be used, then use H07RNF.
Always turn off the power before doing wiring work.
Grounding should be done in compliance with local laws and
regulations.
Attach a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
(This unit has an inverter, so an interrupter capable of handling
high frequencies is needed to prevent malfunction of the interrupter itself.)
As shown in figure 16, when connecting the power supply wiring
to the power supply terminal block, be sure to clamp securely.
Once wiring work is completed, check to make sure there are no
loose connections among the electrical parts in the control box.

Follow the instructions below if the wiring gets very hot due to
slack in the power wiring.
For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect firmly,
then secure using the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the terminal board.

84

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

(Refer to figure 16)


1. Control box
2. Ground position
3. Clamp (accessory)
4. Shutoff valve attachment plate
5. Connecting electrical wiring
6. Ground wire (Yellow/Green)
7. Terminal block (X1M)
8. Pass through included clamp.
9. Interunit wiring
10. (To X2M [TO BP UNIT] (F1, F2))
11. Terminal block (X2M)

6-4 Interunit wiring connection procedure


Between indoor units in the same system, pass the wiring
between the units as shown in figure 17. (There is no polarity.)
(Refer to figure 17)
1. Terminal block (X2M)
2. Use balance type shield wire (with no polarity).
3. BP unit
4. Under no circumstances should 220-240V be connected.
Precautions regarding the length of wiring between units
Exceeding the following limits may cause transmission malfunctions,
so observe them.
Max. wiring length
Max. 200 m
Total wiring length
Max. 300 m
Precautions regarding wiring between units
Do not connect 220-240V power wiring to terminals for the
interunit wiring. Doing so would destroy the entire system.
Wiring to the indoor unit should be wired to F1 and F2 (TO BP
unit) on the outdoor units terminal block (X2M).
The interunit wiring should be secured inside the unit and then finished by being wrapped with tape at the same time as the on-site
refrigerant piping, as shown in figure 18.
(Refer to figure 18)
1. Liquid pipe
2. Finishing tape
3. Insulation material
4. Interunit wiring
5. Gas pipe
Note
2
The above wiring should be wired using 0.75 1.25 mm shielded
(balance type) wiring.
(See figure 16 for how to ground the shielded parts.)
All interunit wiring is to be procured on site.
Caution
(Refer to figure 19)
1. Branch
2. Caution on branches in the wiring among BP units
3. The following branches can not be performed

7.

PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT
PIPING
Caution
To the pipe-layer
Do not operate the unit with the transport clasp attached. This
can cause abnormal shaking or noise. See 5. PRECAUTIONS
ON INSTALLATION and How to remove the transport clasp.

7-1 Installation tools


Use the right parts to ensure tolerance and to prevent foreign matter
for entering.
Gauge manifold, charge hose, etc.
Make sure to use installation tools that are exclusively used for
R410A installations to withstand the pressure and to prevent foreign materials (e.g. mineral oils such as SUNISO and moisture)
from mixing into the system.
(The screw specifications differ for R410A and R407C.)
Vacuum pump
Use extreme caution to prevent pump oil from flowing backwards through the system when the pump is stopped.
Use a vacuum pump which can evacuate to 100.7 kPa (5Torr,
755mmHg).

7-2 Selecting piping material


Use pipes that have no contaminants adhered to their inner surfaces
(such as sulfur, iron oxide, dust, cutting chips, oil and moisture). (It is
desirable that adhered oil inside the piping is 30mg or less per 10m.)
The wall thickness of the refrigerant piping should comply with local
laws and regulations. The design pressure for R410A is 4.0MPa.
Use the following material for the refrigerant piping.
Material: Jointless phosphor-deoxidized copper pipe.
Thickness and size: choose based on the piping size selection
method on the 7-8 Air tight test and vacuum drying.
Make sure to use the separately sold refrigerant branch kit when
branching the piping.
Piping work should be done within the maximum length, height
difference, and length after branches set out in 7-8 Air tight test
and vacuum drying.
Install the refrigerant branch kit while observing the following condition and referring to the installation manual offered as an accessory of the kit.
(Refer to figure 20)
1. Install the REFNET joint so it splits horizontally or vertically.
2. Horizontal surface
3. A-arrow view
4. 30 or less
5. Level
6. Vertical is also OK

7-3 Protection against contamination when


installing pipes
Wrap the piping to prevent moisture, dirt, dust, etc. from entering
the piping.
Exercise caution when passing copper piping through the
through-holes and when passing them out to the outside.
Place
Outdoor
Indoor

Installation period

Protection method

More than a month

Pinch the pipe

Less than a month


Regardless of the period

Pinch or tape the pipe

7-4 Pipe connection


See Shutoff valve operation procedure in 7-8 Air tight test and
vacuum drying regarding handling of the shutoff valve.
Only use the flare nuts included with the unit. Using different flare
nuts may cause the refrigerant to leak.
Be sure to perform a nitrogen blow when brazing.
(Brazing without performing nitrogen replacement or releasing
nitrogen into the piping will create large quantities of oxidized film
on the inside of the pipes, adversely affecting valves and compressors in the refrigerating system and preventing normal operation.)

Installation Manual

85

Outdoor Units

EDSG18-936

Table 1

Caution
Do not use a flux when brazing the refrigerant pipe joints.
Use phosphor copper brazing (BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.
(Using a chlorine flux may cause the pipes to corrode, and if it
contains fluoride it may cause the refrigerant lubricant to deteriorate, adversely affecting the refrigerant piping system.)
(Refer to figure 21)
1. Refrigerant pipe
2. Location to be brazed
3. Regulator
4. Nitrogen
5. Manual valve
6. Taping

7-5 Connecting the refrigerant piping


The local interunit piping is connectable in four directions.
(Refer to figure 22)
1. Front panel
2. Pipe outlet panel
3. Backward
4. Sideways
5. Downward
6. Pipe outlet panel screw
7. Forward
8. Screw for front panel
When connecting in a downward direction, make four round holes
using a 6-mm iameter drill in the central section around the knock
hole and open the knock hole.
(Refer to figure 23)
1. Dril
2. Center area around knockout hole
3. Knockout hole
4. Slit
After knocking out the knock-out, it is recommended to apply
repair paint to the edge and the surrounding end surfaces to prevent rusting.
(Refer to figure 24)
1. Bottom frame
2. Interunit piping
Note
Cutting out the two slits makes it possible to install as shown in figure 24. (Use a metal saw to cut out the slits.)
<Precautions when connecting pipes>
Please refer to the Table 1 for the dimensions for processing
flares.
When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare both inside and outside with refrigerating machine oil and initially tighten by hand 3 or
4 turns before tightening firmly.
Please refer to the Table 1 for the tightening torque. (Too much
tightening will end up in splitting of the flare.)

86

Tightening
torque (Nm)

9.5
Bending radius: 32.7~39.9
30mm or larger
15.9
Bending radius: 61.8~75.4
50mm or larger
19.1
Bending radius: 97.2~118.6
60mm or larger

A dimensions for
processing
flares (mm)
12.8~13.2
19.3~19.7

Flare shape

Pipe size

R0.4~0.8
A

set to 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm : just enough to feel a breeze on your
cheek) with the decompression valve.
Do not mix any refrigerant other than that specified into the refrigerant system.
Do not mix air into the refrigerant system.

90 2
45

Note
The nitrogen used when brazing while flowing the nitrogen should be

23.6~24.0

Refrigerant oil

If a torque wrench is not available, there is a place where the tightening torque will suddenly increase if a normal wrench is used to
tighten the flare nut.
From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown
below.
Pipe size

Further tightening angle

9.5
Bending radius: 60~ 90
30mm or larger
15.9
Bending radius: 30~ 60
50mm or larger
19.1
Bending radius: 20~ 35
60mm or larger

Recommended arm length


of tool
Approx. 200 mm

Approx. 300mm

Approx. 450mm

After all the piping has been connected, use nitrogen to perform a
gas leak check.
(Refer to figure 25-[1])
1. Front connection
2. Gas side accessory pipe (1)
3. Gas side accessory pipe (3)
4. Gas side piping (field supply)
5. Cut at an appropriate length.
6. Gas side accessory pipe (2)
(Refer to figure 25-[2])
1. Rear-side connection
2. Gas side accessory pipe (1)
3. Gas side accessory pipe (2)
4. Gas side accessory pipe (3)
5. Gas side piping (field supply)
(Refer to figure 25-[3])
1. Side connection
2. Gas side accessory pipe (2)
3. Cut at an appropriate length.
4. Gas side piping (field supply)
5. Gas side accessory pipe (3)
6. Gas side accessory pipe (1)
(Refer to figure 25-[4])
1. Bottom connection
2. Cut at an appropriate length.
3. Gas side piping (field supply)
4. Gas side accessory pipe (3)
5. Gas side accessory pipe (1)

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

Precautions for connecting pipes


Be careful not to let the interunit piping come into contact with the
compressor terminal cover.
Adjust the height of the insulation material on liquid pipe when it
has the possibility of getting in contact with the terminal. Also
make sure that the interunit piping does not touch the mounting
bolt of the compressor.
(Refer to figure 27)
1. Terminal cover
2. Compressor
3. Corking, etc.
4. Insulation material
5. Bolts
6. Interunit piping
If installing the outdoor unit higher than the indoor unit, caulk the
space around insulation and tubes because condensation on the
check valve can seep through to the indoor unit side.

[Preventing foreign objects from entering]


Plug the pipe through-holes with putty or insulating material (pro
cured locally) to stop up all gaps, as shown in figure 26.
(Insects or small animals entering the outdoor unit may cause a
short in the control box.)
(Refer to figure 26)
1. Putty or insulating material
2. (field supply)

7-6 Heat insulation of piping


If you think the humidity inside the ceiling might exceed 30C and
RH80%, reinforce the insulation on the cooling piping. (At least
20 mm thick) (Condensation may form on the surface of the insulation.)
Be sure to insulate the interunit piping (liquid and gas-side) and
the refrigerant branch kit. (Not insulating them may cause leaking.)
(The highest temperature that the gas-side piping can reach is
around 120C, so be sure to use insulating material which is very
resistant.)
Caution
For local insulation, be sure to insulate all the way to the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause leaking or burns on contact.

Installation Manual

87

88
a
A

f
1

g
2

BP

H3

i
4

e
j
5

BP
2

k
6

Difference in height

Between indoor and indoor units

How to calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged


Additional refrigerant to be charged R (Kg)
R should be rounded off in units of 0.1Kg.

Pipe size selection

Refrigerant branch kit selection


refrigerant branch kits can only be used with R410A

Piping length

Difference in height

Between BP and BP units

Allowable length after the branch


2 Branch kit are recommanded to set as possible
as near the BP units.
c, d, e are recommanded to be as possible as short.

Difference in height between outdoor and BP units (H2) 30m

Difference in height

Between outdoor and BP units

Piping length

Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units (H1) 30m

Difference in height

Between outdoor and indoor units

Branch with refnet joint

9.5 0.8
9.5 0.8

15.9 1.0

d: 9.5 10m
e: 9.5 10m
f : 6.4 10m

g: 16.4 10m
h: 16.4 10m
i : 6.4 10m

j : 16.4 10m
k: 16.4 15m
l: 6.4 5m

R=[(a+b+d+e)0.054]+[(c+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m)0.022]=[400.054]+[780.022]=3.876 3.9kg

a: 9.5 10m
b: 9.5 10m
c: 06.4 10m

m: 6.4 8m

[Example]
indoor 4: 2.5kW
Qe = 11.0kW
indoor 5: 3.5kW
indoor 6: 5.0kW
=> (Gas pipe) 15.9 1.0 and (Liquid pipe) 9.5 0.8

[Example] for refrigerant branch using refnet joint

See the table A

Liquid pipe

Gas pipe
19.1 1.0

Total length (m) of liquid


Total length (m) of liquid
0.054 + piping size at 6.4
0.022
piping size at 9.5

R=

Qc, Qd, Qe is total connected indoor capacity


c, d, e indicates the symbols in the figure

Total indoor capacity Q


Qc, Qd, Qe 5.0 kw
Qc, Qd, Qe > 5.0 kw

Liquid pipe
6.4 0.8
9.5 0.8

c, d, e

Between refrigerant branch kit and BP unit


Gas pipe
12.7 0.8
15.9 1.0

Between refrigerant branch kit and refrigerant branch kit

Table A

symbol
Between outdoor unit and first refrigerant branch kit

Piping size (Outer diameter minimum thickness)

Refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) name : KHRP26A22T

[Example] unit 8: b+c+m 40m


[Example] unit 6: b+e+k 40m
[Example] unit 3: d+h
40m

Piping length from first refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) to indoor unit 40m

[Example] a 5m

Pipe length between outdoor and first refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) 5m

Difference in height between indoor and indoor units (H4) 15m

Difference in height between BP and BP units (H3) 15m

[Example] f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m 1 5m

Piping length between BP and indoor unit 15m

[Example] RMXS140: f+g+h+i+k+l+m 80m

Piping length between BP and indoor units: RM (XK) S112 60m / RM (XK) S140 80m / RM (XK) S160 90m

[Example] a+b+c+d+e 55m

1 room length

H4

Between BP and indoor unit

Total piping length

BP

Between BP and indoor units

Total piping length

Pipe length between outdoor and BP units 55m

H1

H2

Between outdoor and BP units

refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint)

indoor unit
BP unit

Minimum allowable length


1 Since the sound of refrigerant may be transferred from
the outdoor unit to the indoor unit, make the pipe length
from the outdoor unit to the first junction 5m or longer.

Allowable
height

Maximum
allowable
length

BP 1

Example of connection
(Connection of 8 units heat pump system)

Outdoor Units
EDSG18-936

7-7 Example of connection

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

7-8 Air tight test and vacuum drying


After doing the piping, perform the following inspections.
Air tight test

In cases where the unit is run in heating mode when the outside
temperature is low or in other situations where the operating pressure might drop, seal the gas-side flare nut on the shutoff valve
with silicon sealant or the like to prevent it from freezing.

Be sure to use nitrogen gas. (See the figure (Shutoff valve operation
procedure) for the location of the service port.)
[Procedure]
Pressurize from the liquid pipes and gas pipes to 4.0 MPa (and not
above 4.0 MPa). If there is not pressure drop over the next 24 hours,
the equipment has passed the test.
If the pressure drops, check for leakage positions. (Confirm that there
is no leakage, then release nitrogen.)

Silicon sealing pad

(Make sure that there is no gap)


Shutoff valve operation procedure
Have a hex wrench ready (size: 4 mm and 6 mm).

Vacuum drying
Use a vacuum pump that can create a vacuum down to at least
100.7 kPa (5 Torr, 755 mmHg).
[Procedure]
Operate the vacuum pump for at least 2 hours from both the liquid
and gas pipes and decrease the pressure to at least 100.7 kPa.
Leave at below 100.7 kPa for at least 1 hour and make sure that the
vacuum gauge does not rise. (If it does rise, there is either still moisture in the system or a leak.)

Opening the valve

1.
2.

Close the valve

1.
2.

Cases where moisture might enter the piping (i.e., if doing work
during the rainy season, if the actual work takes long enough that
condensation may form on the inside of the pipes, if rain might enter
the pipes during work, etc.)
After performing the vacuum drying for 2 hours, pressurize to
0.05 MPa (i.e., vacuum breakdown) with nitrogen gas, then depressurize down to at least 100.7 kPa for an hour using the vacuum
pump (vacuum drying). (If the pressure does not reach at least
100.7 kPa even after depressurizing for at least 2 hours, repeat the
vacuum breakdown - vacuum drying process.) Leave as a vacuum
for 1 hour after that, and make sure the vacuum gauge does not rise.
(Refer to figure 28)
1. Nitrogen
2. Decompression valve
3. Vacuum pump
4. Valve (Open)
5. Charge hose
6. Shutoff valve service port
7. Indoor unit
8. Gas line shutoff valve (Close)
9. Liquid line shutoff valve (Close)
10. Indicates local procurement
11. Outdoor unit
12. BP unit
Note
The shutoff valve must always be turned to closed.
Otherwise the refrigerant in the outdoor unit will pour out.

Place the hex wrench on the valve bar and turn counter-clockwise.
Stop when the valve bar no longer turns. It is now open.

Place the hex wrench on the valve bar and turn clockwise.
Stop when the valve bar no longer turns. It is now closed.

Direction to open

Direction to open

<Liquid pipe>

<Gas pipe>

Precautions for handling valve lid


A seal is attached to the point indicated by the arrow.
Take care not to damage it.

Valve lid
Shutoff valve
(lid attachment)
Be sure to tighten the valve lid securely after operating the valves.
Liquid-side tightening torque

Gas-side tightening torque

13.5 ~ 16.5 Nm

22.5 ~ 27.5 Nm

Shutoff valve operation procedure


Precautions when handling the shutoff valve
The names of parts needed to operate the shutoff valve are
shown in the figure below. The unit is shipped from the factory
with the shutoff valve turned to the closed position.

Precautions for handling servicing port


Use a push-rod-provided charging hose for operation.
Be sure to tighten the valve lid securely after operation.
Tightening torque .......... 10.8 ~ 14.7 Nm

Servicing port

8.

ADDITIONAL REFRIGERANT
CHARGE

Valve bar
Warning

Valve lid

When leaving the unit with the power on, be sure to


switch with another person doing the installation or
close the front panel.

Interunit piping connection


Since the side boards may be deformed if only a torque wrench is
used when loosening or tightening flare nuts, always lock the
shutoff valve with a wrench and then use a torque wrench.

Installation Manual

89

Outdoor Units

EDSG18-936

8-1 Before adding refrigerant


Make sure the following work and inspection is complete, in
accordance with the installation manual.
Piping
Wiring
Airtightness test, Vacuum drying

8-2 Checking the refrigerant tank


Check whether the tank has a siphon pipe before charging and
place the tank so that the refrigerant is charged in liquid form.
(See the figure below.)

Tank with siphon pipe

Other tanks

There is a siphon
pipe inside, so the
cylinder need not be
upside-down to fill
with liquid.
(Stand the cylinder
upright when filling.)

Stand the tank


upside down and
charge.

8-3 Adding refrigerant


Filling after calculating the amount of refrigerant to add
1. Calculate the amount of refrigerant to add as described in Calculating the amount of refrigerant to add
in 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING.
2. After the vacuum drying is finished, open valve A and charge the calculated amount of refrigerant through
the service port for the liquid-side shutoff valve.
3. Close valve A after charging is complete.
Note: If all the refrigerant to be added cannot be charged using the above procedure, right-hand the procedure
below and re-charge the refrigerant.

If all the refrigerant could not be added


Add refrigerant using the following procedure. See the Service Precautions plate attached to the control box lid on
the outdoor unit for details on the settings for adding refrigerant.
[Procedure]
1. Close the front panel and turn on the power to all outdoor units and indoor units in the refrigeration system.
2. Open the gas and liquid-side shutoff valves all the way and add the refrigerant. (Open valve A immediately after starting the compressor.)
3. Once the appropriate amount of refrigerant is in, press the confirmation button (BS3) on the outdoor unit PC
board (A2P), and stop operation after adding the refrigerant.
4. Close valve A after charging is complete.

Status of the shutoff valve and other valves when adding refrigerant operation
Status of the shutoff valve and other valves when adding refrigerant
See Shutoff valve operation procedure in 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING for
details on how to use the shutoff valve.
(Refer to figure 29)
1. R410A Tank (Siphon system)
5. Shutoff valve service port
2. Measuring instrument
6. Gas line shutoff valve
3. Valve A
7. Outdoor unit
4. BP unit
8. Liquid line shutoff valve
Gas line
Liquid line
Valve A
State of valve A and the shutoff valve
shutoff valve shutoff valve
Close
Close
Close
Before starting to charge the refrigerant
Open
Close
During charging of the refrigerant
Close

9.

POST-WORK CHECKS

Perform the following checks after work is complete.


(1) Drain pipe connection, removal of transport clasp
See 5. PRECAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION.
(2) Incorrect power supply wiring, loose screws
See 6-3 How to connect the power supply wiring.
(3) Incorrect interunit wiring, loose screws
See 6-4 Interunit wiring connection procedure.
(4) Incorrect refrigerant piping connections
See 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING.
(5) Piping sizes, use of insulation
See : 7-2 Selecting piping material.
7-6 Heat insulation of piping.
(6) Shutoff valve check
Make sure both the liquid-side and gas-side shutoff valves are
open.
(7) Record of Amount of Refrigerant Added
Record it on Record of Amount of Refrigerant Added on the
Service Precautions plate.
(8) Measuring the insulation of the main power circuit
Use a 500V mega-tester.
Do not use the mega-tester for weak currents other than 220240V. (Interunit wiring)
Caution
To the pipe-layer
After completing installation, be sure to open the valve.
(Operating the unit with the valve shut will break the compressor.)

90

See Shutoff valve operation procedure in 7. PRECAUTIONS ON REFRIGERANT PIPING for details on how to use the shutoff valve.
Connect the service port (for charging refrigerant) inside the unit. When the unit is shipped from the factory,
refrigerant is already charged, so be careful when connecting the charge hose.
After adding the refrigerant, do not forget to close the lid of the service port (for adding refrigerant).
The tightening torque of the lid is 11.5 13.9 N/m.
(Refer to figure 30)
1. Gas line shutoff valve
2. Liquid line shutoff valve
3. Shutoff valve service port
4. BP unit
5. Measuring instrument
6. R410A Tank (Siphon system)
7. Valve A
8. Service port
9. (For adding refrigerant)
10. Outdoor unit
Gas line
Liquid line
Valve A
State of valve A and the shutoff valve
shutoff valve shutoff valve
Open
Open
Close
Before starting to charge the refrigerant
Open
Open
Open
During charging of the refrigerant

10. TEST RUN


This unit is equipped with a crank case heater to ensure smooth
startup. Be sure to turn the power on at least 6 hours before
operation in order to have power running to the crank case
heater.
Warning
When leaving the unit with the power on, be sure to
switch with another person doing the installation or
close the front panel.
Precautions before turning the power on
Using insulating sheets, tape electric parts as described in the
Service Precautions plate on the back of the front panel.
All indoor units connected to the outdoor unit operate automatically.
Complete work on the indoor units in order to ensure maximum
safety.

10-1 Power OnCheck Operation


Make sure to perform the check operation after installation.
(If the air conditioner is operated using the indoor remote controller without performing the check operation, the malfunction code
U3 is displayed in the indoor remote controller, and normal operation is disabled.)
When making settings on the outdoor unit PC board (A2P) after
turning the power on, do not touch anything other than the pushbutton switches and dip switches.
(See the Service Precautions plate for the locations of the pushbutton switches (BS1-5) and dip switches (D1-1, 2) on the PC
board (A2P).)

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

During the operation, monitor the outdoor unit operation status


and check for any incorrect wiring.
1. Close the outdoor units front panel. Caution Be sure to turn the power on at least
Turn the power on for the outdoor
6 hours before operation in order to have
unit and the BP unit.
power running to the crank case heater.
2. Open the outdoor units front panel.
Make sure the LED display on the outdoor units PC boards (A1P and
A2P) are as shown in the following chart.
A1P
LED display
(Default status
before delivery)

SEVICE
MONITOR
HAP

A2P
TEST/
MODE
HWL
H1P

H2P

IND MASTER SLAVE L.N.O.P DEMAND


H3P

H4P

H5P

H6P

H7P

LED display: OFF


ON
Blinking
To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not touch anything other than the
push-button switches on the PC board (A2P) when making settings.
3. When the customer requests
quiet operation or demand
operation, make these settings
using the push-button switches
(BS1-5) on the outdoor units
PC board (A2P).
Operate the push-button
switches through the opening
after protecting it with an
insulation cover.
(See the Service Precautions
plate for details.)
4. Check that the liquid and gas-side
shutoff valves are open, and if
they are closed, open them.
5. Press the test run button (BS4) for
at least five seconds and perform
check operation.
For details, see How to perform
check operation on the Service
Precautions plate.

Use caution to avoid electric shock while


working, since the outdoor unit is on.
Only set the push-button switches (BS1-5)
after making sure the microcomputer OK
monitor is lit up.
See the Service Precautions plate on the
front panel of the outdoor unit for details on
how to make the settings.
(Do not forget to write the settings down on
the Service Precautions plate.)
The dip switch (DS1-1) does not need to be
set, so do not touch it.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
Caution Do not leave any shutoff valve closed
otherwise the compressor will fail.

10-2 Temperature control operation checklist


After check operation is complete, checking the temperature control using normal operation.
(Heating is not possible if the outdoor temperature is 24C or
higher. See the included operation manual.)
(1) Make sure the indoor and outdoor units are operating normally.
(If liquid compression by the compressor or other abnormal
noises can be heard, stop the unit immediately, heat the
crank case for a sufficient amount of time, and try again.)
(2) Run each indoor unit one at a time and make sure the corresponding outdoor unit is also running.
(3) Check to see if cold (or hot) air is coming out of the indoor
unit.
(4) Press the fan direction and fan strength buttons on the indoor
unit to see if they operate properly.

<Precautions during temperature control checks>


For around 5 minutes after the compressor stops, the compressor
will not run even if the operate/stop button on the remote controller is pressed.
When the system operation is stopped by the remote controller,
the outdoor units may continue operating for further 1 minutes at
maximum.
Malfunction code U3 is displayed if check operation is not performed using the test run button the first time after installation.
Perform the check operation in accordance with 10-1 Power On
Check Operation.

If you have to leave the outdoor unit during check operation,


either switch with another worker or close the front panel.
The system operates for about 30 minutes (60 minutes at
maximum) and automatically stops the check operation.
The system can start normal operation about
3 minutes after the check operation if the
remote controller does not display any error code.

6. Close the outer panel of the outdoor unit after check operation is complete.

<Precautions During Check Operation>


If operation is performed within 12 minutes of BP units and
outdoor units being turned on, H2P will light up, and the
compressor will not run.
Only perform operation after checking that the LED display is as
shown in 10-1 Power OnCheck Operation 2. table.
In order to ensure uniform refrigerant distribution, it may take up to
around 10 minutes for the compressor to start up after the unit
begins running. This is not a malfunction.
Each indoor unit cannot be checked individually for problems.
After this operation is complete, run the unit normally using the
remote controller.
The check run cannot be performed in recovery or other modes.
If the outlet pipe thermistor (R2T), the intake pipe thermistor
(R3T), and the pressure sensors (S1NPH and S1NPL) are
removed before operation, the compressor might burn out, so
avoid this under all circumstances.

Installation Manual

91

Outdoor Units

EDSG18-936

[Indoor unit displays malfunction sign]


(Check on a remote controller connected to the indoor unit.
For details. see the operation manual which comes with indoor unit.)

11. CAUTION FOR REFRIGERANT LEAKS

Malfunction code

Introduction

Installation error

Remedial action

The shutoff valve of an outdoor Open the gas-side shutoff valve and the
unit is left closed.
liquid-side shutoff valve.
E3
Refrigerant overcharge.

Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and correct
the refrigerant charge level by recovering
any excessive refrigerant with a refrigerant recovery machine.

The shutoff valve of an outdoor Open the gas-side shutoff valve and the
unit is left closed.
liquid-side shutoff valve.
Check if the additional refrigerant charge
has been finished correctly.

E4
Insufficient refrigerant.

Refrigerant overcharge.

F3

(Points to note in connection with refrigerant leaks)


The installer and system specialist shall secure safety against
leakage according to local regulations or standards. The following standards may be applicable if local regulations are not
available.
This system uses R410A as refrigerant. R410A itself is an entirely
safe non-toxic, non-combustible refrigerant. Nevertheless care must
be taken to ensure that air conditioning facilities are installed in a
room which is sufficiently large. This assures that the maximum concentration level of refrigerant gas is not exceeded, in the unlikely
event of major leak in the system and this in accordance to the local
applicable regulations and standards.
Maximum concentration level

Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and add an
adequate amount of refrigerant.

The maximum charge of refrigerant and the calculation of the maximum concentration of refrigerant is directly related to the humanly
occupied space in to which it could leak.

Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and correct
the refrigerant charge level by recovering
any excessive refrigerant with a refrigerant recovery machine.

The unit of measurement of the concentration is kg/m ( the weight in


3
kg of the refrigerant gas in 1m volume of the occupied space).

The shutoff valve of an outdoor Open the gas-side shutoff valve and the
unit is left closed.
liquid-side shutoff valve.

Compliance to the local applicable regulations and standards for the


maximum allowable concentration level is required.
In Australia the maximum allowed concentration level of refrigerant to
3
a humanly space is limited to 0.44 kg/m for R410A.

Check if the additional refrigerant charge


has been finished correctly.
Insufficient refrigerant.

Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and add an
adequate amount of refrigerant.

U2

Insufficient supply voltage

Check to see if the supply voltage is supplied properly.

U3

If a check operation has not


been performed.

Perform a check operation.

U4

No power is supplied to an out- Turn the power on for the outdoor


unit.
door unit.

UA

If no dedicated indoor unit is


being used.

UF

UH

Check the indoor unit. If it is not a dedicated unit, replace the indoor unit.

Direction of the refrigerant flow

BP unit

Room where
refrigerant leak
has occurred
(outflow of all the
refrigerant from
the system)
Pay a special attention to the place, such as a basement, etc.
where refrigerant can stay, since refrigerant is heavier than air.
Procedure for checking maximum concentration

The shutoff valve of an outdoor Open the gas-side shutoff valve and the
unit is left closed.
liquid-side shutoff valve.

Check the maximum concentration level in accordance with steps 1


to 4 below and take whatever action is necessary to comply.

If the right indoor unit piping and Make sure that the right indoor unit piping
wiring are not properly conand wiring are properly connected to the
nected to the outdoor unit.
outdoor unit.

1. Calculate the amount of refrigerant (kg) charged to each system


separately.

If the interunit wiring has not


be connected or it has
shorted.

Make sure the interunit wiring is correctly


attached to terminals (X2M) F1/F2 (TO
BP UNIT) on the outdoor unit circuit
board.

When using a central controller, see the installation manual or


service manual which came with the central controller.
Caution
To the pipe-layer, To the electrician
After the test run, when handing the unit over to the customer,
make sure the front panel on the unit and all screws are attached.

amount of refrigerant in a single unit


system (amount of
refrigerant with
which the system
is charged before
leaving the factory)

additional charging
amount (amount of
refrigerant added
locally in accordance
with the length or
diameter of the refrigerant piping)

total amount
of refrigerant (kg) in
the system

Note
Where a single refrigerant facility is divided into 2 entirely independent refrigerant systems then use the amount of refrigerant
with which each separate system is charged.
3
2. Calculate the smallest room volume (m )
Incase like the following, calculate the volume of (A), (B) as a single room or as the smallest room.
A.Where there are no smaller room divisions

BP unit

92

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

B.Where

there is a room division but there is an opening


between the rooms sufficiently large to permit a free flow of
air back and forth.

BP unit

Opening
between rooms
Partition

(Where there is an opening without a door or where there are


openings above and below the door which are each equivalent in
size to 0.15% or more of the floor area.)
3. Calculating the refrigerant density using the results of the calculations in steps 1 and 2 above.
total volume of refrigerant in the
refrigerant system
3

size (m ) of smallest room in which


there is an indoor unit installed

maximum concen3
tration level (kg/m )

If the result of the above calculation exceeds the maximum concentration level then make similar calculations for the second then
third smallest room and so until the result falls short of the maximum concentration.
4. Dealing with the situations where the result exceeds the maximum concentration level.
Where the installation of a facility results in a concentration in
excess of the maximum concentration level then it will be necessary to revise the system.
Please consult your Daikin supplier.

C : 3PN07193-3E

Installation Manual

93

Outdoor Units

1.2

EDSG18-936

Service Precautions

Cautions on Service

Warning

Caution: Electric shock


Cool/heat selector
connection procedure

Cautions on inspecting the control box for service

1. Before starting the service inspection, confirm using the tester that the power
is shut down in the power terminal block (X1M).
2. Avoid contact with the hot area.
Some portions are extremely hot in electric parts and the inside.
3. Avoid contact with the charged area.
Never touch the charged area before confirming that the residual voltage is 50 V or less.
1 Shut down the power, and then leave the control box for 10 minutes.
2 Make sure to touch the earth terminal to release the static electricity from
your body (to prevent failure of the PC board).
3 Measure the residual voltage in the specified measurement position using
the tester while paying attention not to touch the charged area.
4 Immediately after measuring the residual voltage, disconnect the connectors of
the outdoor unit fan motor. (If the fan rotates by strong wind blowing against it,
the capacitor will be charged, causes the danger of electric shock.)
After finishing the inspection, re-connect the connectors of the outdoor unit fan motor.

ABC

switch knob

A1P
A2P C4
A4P
X2M

Control box

Front
Turn on

Cover this range with


an insulating sheet and
fix the sheet with tape.

Residual voltage
measurement
position
Symbol
on
side

Capacitor (C4)
Flicker

Page

Test
Error

ABC

Side

Side

A1P

Turn off
Curing range

ON/OFF

DS1-1

DS1 1 2

X1M

LED indicator status


Reactor

A4P

IN

A1P
X106A X107A

A2P

OUT

Outdoor unit
fan connectors

Set the remote controller only when


changing over the operation mode
between cooling and heating using the
remote controller installed in the outdoor.
Connect the cool/heat selector (optional
accessory) to the terminals (A, B and
C) on the outdoor PC board (A4P).
Set the cool/heat selector switch
DS1-1 from IN (inside) (which is
selected at the factory before
shipment) to OUT (outside) .

Turn on or off

Batch
(master)

C/H
SELECTOR

If you are unsure during setting,


press the MODE button (BS1).
Set mode 1 (H1P: Turn off) is
selected again.

(The LED indicator status shown at left


indicates the status at factory set.)

Changeover between
cooling and heating

Individual

Cool/heat
selector

Batch
(slave)

Low
noise Demand

DIP switches
(DS1-1 and DS1-2)

H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P

A2P

BS1

BS2

BS3

BS4

BS5

MODE

SET

RETURN

TEST

RESET

A4P

DS1
ON
OFF
1 2

X2M
Sets the address again when the wiring
is changed or an indoor unit is added.
Performs the test run.
Used at field set.
Changes the set mode.

A1P
HAP

X1M
Control box

Cover electric parts with an insulating sheet during inspection to prevent electric shock.

Changing the set mode The set mode can be changed as follows using the MODE button (BS1).
Page
Set mode 1

Press and hold the MODE button (BS1)


for 5 seconds or more.

Page

Turn on
Set mode 2
Press the MODE button (BS1) once.
H1P
H1P
While the LED indicator H1P is flickering ( ), set mode 1 is selected when the MODE button (BS1) is pressed once.
Caution
When performing low noise operation or demand operation using an external command or setting cooling or
heating using the cool/heat centralized remote controller, the outdoor unit external control adaptor (optional
accessory) is required. For the details, refer to the manual attached to the adaptor.

94

Turn off

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

Setting (cooling/heating selection) in set mode 1 (H1P: Turn off)


Setting procedure
Press the SET
button (BS2), and
select either LED
indicator status
shown at right.

Contents of cooling/heating selection


When cooling or heating is selected individually in each outdoor unit
system (at factory set)

LED indicator status and position


H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P

When cooling or heating is selected for all outdoor unit systems (master unit)
When cooling or heating is selected for all outdoor unit systems (slave unit)

Press the RETURN button (BS3) to determine the setting.


For the contents marked with , the outdoor unit external control adaptor (optional accessory) is required. For the details, refer to the
manual attached to the adaptor.

Setting in set mode 2 (H1P: Turn on)


The following contents A to G can be set.
Setting procedure
Press the SET button (BS2), and
select either LED indicator status
shown at right in accordance with the
contents of setting ( A to G ).

Contents of setting

LED indicator status and position


H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P

A Refrigerant additional charging operation


B Refrigerant recovery/evacuation mode
C Automatic low noise setting at night
D External low noise level setting
E Demand level setting
F External low noise demand absence/presence setting

Press the RETURN button (BS3) to display the currently selected setting. (Refer to 3 .)
Contents of each setting
In the case of A or B ON/OFF
In the case of F
In the case of C OFF/mode 1 to mode 3
In the case of D or F Mode 1 to mode 3
Press the SET button (BS2) , and select
either LED indicator status shown at
right in accordance with the above case.
In C and D , noise is smallest in mode
3, and largest in mode 1.
In E , the power consumption is smallest
in mode 3, and largest in mode 1.
(For the details, refer to the Service Manual.)

A B
F

ON
OFF (at factory set)
OFF (at factory set)

Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 1

D E

Mode 2 (at factory set)


Mode 3

Press the RETURN button (BS3) to determine the setting. (The LED indicator status changes from flicker to turn on.)
Press the RETURN button (BS3) again to start the operation in accordance with the setting.
For any setting other than the above cases, refer to the Service Manual.

Checking the set items The following contents can be set in set mode 1 .
Check item
Current operation status

LED indicator status example


Normal status

Error status

LED indicator status and position


H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P

During preparation or check operation

Cooling/heating

When cooling or heating is selected individually in each outdoor unit


system (at factory set)

selection

When cooling or heating is selected for all outdoor unit systems (master unit)
When cooling or heating is selected for all outdoor unit systems (slave unit)

Low noise operation status

During normal operation (at factory set)

During low noise operation

Demand operation status

During normal operation (at factory set)

During demand operation

Installation Manual

95

Outdoor Units

Check operation procedure

EDSG18-936

After the power is turned ON, operation is disabled until the Preparation LED
indicator (H2P) is turned off (within 12 minutes).

Make sure to open the stop valve on the gas side and the stop valve on the liquid side.
After installation, make sure to perform the check operation.
If the check operation is not performed, the error code U3 is displayed and normal operation is disabled.
To protect the compressor, make sure to turn ON the power 6 hours before starting the operation.
Select set mode 1 (H1P: Turn off).
In the stopped status, press and hold the TEST button (BS4) for 5 seconds or more to start the check operation.
The LED indicator H2P flickers, and Test run and Under centralized control are displayed in the remote controller.
For homogenizing the refrigerant status, it may take about 10 minutes to start the compressor. Note that this does
not indicate failure.
The check operation is automatically performed in the cooling mode.
During the check operation, operation sounds caused by the passing refrigerant, actuating solenoid valves, etc.
may be larger.
The following items are automatically checked:
Wiring (to detect erroneous wiring)
Piping length (automatically judged)

Stop valve status (to detect forgetting to open valves)

For suspending the check operation, press the RETURN button (BS3). The check operation is continued for about
30 seconds, and then stopped.
( The check operation cannot be stopped from the remote controller during test run.)
Close the front panel.
The check operation is continued for about 30 minutes, and then automatically stopped. Check the result by the LED
indicator status in the outdoor unit.
(Refer to the table below.)
Caution
Abnormality cannot be checked individually in each indoor unit.
H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P
Finished
normally
Finished
abnormally

After finishing the check operation, check each indoor unit by performing the
normal operation using the remote controller.
The LED indicator status changes during the check operation, but it does not
indicate failure.
During the check operation, attach the front panel to prevent electric shock accidents.

Actions to be taken when the check operation is finished abnormally


1. Check the error code in the remote controller.
2. Correct the error.
(Refer to the Installation Manual, Operation Manual or Service Manual, or contact the dealer.)
3. After correcting the error, press the RETURN button (BS3) to reset the error code.
4. Perform the check operation again, and confirm that the cause of error is definitely corrected.
When the error code is not displayed in the remote controller, normal operation can be started about 5 minutes later.

96

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Units

The service mode cannot start until the LED indicator H2P is
turned off (within 12 minutes) after the power is turned ON.
(The internal evacuation is not required during initial installation. It is required during service.)

Service mode operation procedure

Internal evacuation procedure

In the stopped status, select set mode 2 , and set to ON the refrigerant recovery/evacuation mode B .
(Do not reset set mode 2 until evacuation is completed.)
Test run and Under centralized control are displayed in the remote controller, and all
operations are disabled.
Evacuate the unit using the vacuum pump.
Press the MODE button (BS1) to reset set mode 2 .

Refrigerant recovery procedure using the refrigerant recovery device


In the stopped status, select set mode 2 , and set to ON the refrigerant recovery/evacuation mode B .
All expansion valves are completely opened and some solenoid valves are turned ON in the indoor unit
and outdoor unit.
Test run and Under centralized control are displayed in the remote controller, and all
operations are disabled.
Recover the refrigerant using the refrigerant recovery device.
(Recover the refrigerant in conformance to the laws and regulations of the local site.)
Press the MODE button (BS1) to reset set mode 2 .
Caution Never turn OFF the power of the outdoor unit while the refrigerant is being recovered.
(If the power is turned OFF, the solenoid valves are closed, and the refrigerant cannot be
recovered from the outdoor unit.)

Refrigerant additional charging operation procedure


When the outdoor unit is stopped and the entire quantity of refrigerant cannot be charged from the stop valve on the liquid side, make sure
to charge the remaining quantity of refrigerant using this procedure. If the refrigerant quantity is insufficient, the unit may malfunction.

Turn ON the power of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Make sure to completely open the stop valve on the gas side and the stop valve on the liquid side.
Connect the refrigerant charge hose to the service port (for additionally charging the refrigerant).
Service port
In the stopped status, set to ON the refrigerant additional charging operation A in
for additionally
set mode 2 (H1P: Turn on).
charging the refrigerant
The operation is automatically started.
(The LED indicator H2P flickers, and Test run and Under centralized control are displayed in the remote controller.)
After charging the specified quantity of refrigerant, press the RETURN button (BS3) to stop the operation.
The operation is automatically stopped within 30 minutes.
If charging is not completed within 30 minutes, set and perform the refrigerant additional charging
operation A again.
If the refrigerant additional charging operation is stopped soon, the refrigerant may be overcharged.
Never charge extra refrigerant.
Disconnect the refrigerant charge hose.

1. Recording the contents of various setting


C Automatic low noise setting at night D External low noise setting E Demand level setting
When setting C to E in set mode 2 , circle to
OFF Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3
record the setting contents in the right table.
2. Recording the additionally charged refrigerant quantity (Make sure to record the contents of setting, because they are required in after-sales service.)
Calculate the required refrigerant quantity to be charged using the following procedure.
Liquid pipe length
Liquid pipe length
Additional charge quantity
Liquid pipe size 9.5 X 0.054
Liquid pipe size 6.4 X 0.022

kg

(m)

X 0.054

3. Recording the indoor unit model names and installation places


No.
1
2
3
4
5

(m)
6

X 0.022
9

Model
name
Installation
place

2PN07176-1C

Installation Manual

97

BP Units

EDSG18-936

2. BP Units

System Layout
For installation of the indoor and outdoor units, follow the instructions in the Installation manual for each unit.

BP unit model
FOR 3 rooms : BPMKS967A3B, BPMKS967B3B
FOR 2 rooms : BPMKS967A2B, BPMKS967B2B

Indoor unit side piping

Do not connect more than 9 indoor units together.


Choose the BP unit type (2 rooms or 3 rooms)
according to the installation pattern.

Earth leakage
breaker

BP Unit

Outdoor unit
side piping

Branch switch
overcurrent
breaker (fuse)
Power

BP Unit

REFNET joint
KHRQ22M20T or
KHRP26M22T
(Can be purchased
separately.)
BP Unit

OUTDOOR UNIT

INDOOR UNIT Max. 9 rooms


Power
voltage

Power
Earth leakage
breaker

Outdoor
unit

Total capacity
of Indoor units

Maximum quantity
of Indoor units

RMX(K)S112
RMX(K)S140
RMX(K)S160

55-145.5
70-182
80-208

6
8
9

The number of indoor


units which can be
connected varies
depending on the power
of the outdoor unit. See
the table left for details.

Note that the total indoor capacity per


BP unit is as shown in the table below.

Branch switch
overcurrent
breaker (fuse)

Power
voltage

Power supply line (3 wires)

BP unit

Maximum capacity

BPMKS967A2B
BPMKS967B2B

142

BPMKS967A3B
BPMKS967B3B

208

[Example]
For FTXS50BVMB, the
capacity of this indoor
unit is 50.

~ 50Hz 230V

*Outdoor unit and all BP units


require their own power supply.

Piping

Transmission line (2 wires)

Brazing connection

Power supply and transmission line (4 wires)

Flare connection

98

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

BP Units

Accessories
6 For indoor unit side piping (gas)

1 Installation Manual

(pipe joint)
1pc.

2 For outdoor unit side piping (gas)

BPMKS967A3B
BPMKS967B3B
(For 3 rooms)
: 3pcs.
BPMKS967A2B
BPMKS967B2B
(For 2 rooms)
: 2pcs.

7 Hanger metal

(pipe joint)
1pc.

3 For outdoor unit side piping (gas)

4pcs.

8 Screws

(pipe joint)
1pc.

4 For outdoor unit side piping (liquid)

8pcs.

9 Binding band

(pipe joint)
1pc.

2pcs.

1pc.

BPMKS967A3B
BPMKS967B3B
(For 3 rooms)
: 4sets
BPMKS967A2B
BPMKS967B2B
(For 2 rooms)
: 3sets

5 For Mindoor unit side piping (liquid)

10 Heat insulation (2pcs. is 1set)

(pipe joint)

Items to be prepared in the field

Connecting wires between BP unit and indoor unit (H05VV(*), 4 wires, 1.6mm or 2.0mm)
Connecting wires (H05VV(*), 3 wires, 1.6mm or 2.0mm)
Transmission wires (H05VV(*), 2 wires, 0.75mm to 1.25mm)
Installation parts (hanging bolts: 4 M10 or M8; nuts: 8; flat washers: 8)
Screws for wall-mounting: 6 M5
Heat insulation (joint) [Thermal conductivity: 0.041 - 0.052W/mK (0.035 - 0.045kcal/mhC) / thickness 13mm
(1/2 inch) or more / Heat resistance: 100C or higher]
(*) Only in protected pipes, use H07RN-F when protected pipes are not use.
Specifications for local wiring power cord and branch wiring are in compliance with IEC60245.

Precautions for Selecting the Location


The BP unit is for indoor use.
Install in a location such as above a ceiling or behind a wall in accordance with the following conditions:
That the unit is fully supported, and is in a location with little or no vibration.
That the refrigerant pipes for the indoor and outdoor units can be repaired with ease, and that the units are placed well within
the distance from each other allowed by the pipe length.
That there is nothing nearby that produces heat or steam (gas).
When installing, that there is enough room for servicing the unit.
Do not install in location that is hot or humid for long periods of time.
A location where the dry-bulb (DB) temperature around the BP unit reaches 60C or higher.
A well-ventilated area.
Do not install near bedrooms. The sound of refrigerant flowing through the piping may sometimes be audible.
For restrictions on installation, refer to P5~6. Installation.

Installation Manual

99

BP Units

EDSG18-936

Installation
Branch with refnet joint

Example of connection
(Connection of 8 units heat pump system)
1

indoor unit
b

BP

1
A

BP unit

H2

refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint)

e
BP

H3

H1

BP

g
1

j
4

BP

k
5

m
7

H4

h
3

Maximum
allowable
length

Allowable
height

Pipe length between outdoor and BP units 55m

Between outdoor
and BP units

Total piping length

Between BP and
indoor units

Total piping length

Between BP and
indoor unit

1 room length

Between outdoor
and indoor units

Difference in height

Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units (H1) 30m

Between outdoor
and BP units

Difference in height

Difference in height between outdoor and BP units (H2) 30m

Between BP and
BP units

Difference in height

Difference in height between BP unit and BP units (H3) 15m

Between indoor
and indoor units

Difference in height

Difference in height between indoor and indoor units (H4) 15m

Piping length between BP and indoor unit 15m


[Example] f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m 15m

Pipe length between outdoor and first refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) 5m
Piping length
[Example] a 5m

Allowable length after the branch


2 Branch kit are recommended to
set as possible as near the BP
units.
c, d, e are recommended to be
as possible as short.

Piping length between BP and indoor units:


RMX(K)S112 60m / RMX(K)S140 80m / RMX(K)S160 90m
[Example] RMXS140: f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m 80m

Minimum allowable length


1 Since the sound of refrigerant may
be transferred from the outdoor
unit to the indoor unit, make the
pipe length from the outdoor unit
to the first junction 5m or longer.

[Example] a+b+c+d+e 55m

Piping length from first refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) to indoor unit 40m
Piping length

[Example] unit 8: b+c+m 40m


[Example] unit 6: b+e+k 40m
[Example] unit 3: d+h
40m

Refrigerant branch kit selection


(refrigerant branch kits can only be used with R410A)

Refrigerant branch kit (refnet joint) name: KHRQ22M20T or KHRP26M22T

Piping size selection

Piping size (Outer diameter minimum thickness)


symbol

Gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Between outdoor unit and


first refrigerant branch kit

19.1 1.0

9.5 0.8

Between first refrigerant branch


kit and the other branch kit

15.9 1.0

9.5 0.8

Between refrigerant branch


kit and BP unit

c, d, e

Table A
Total indoor capacity Q
Qc, Qd, Qe 5.0kw
Qc, Qd, Qe > 5.0kw

Gas pipe
12.7 0.8
15.9 1.0

See the table A

Liquid pipe
6.4 0.8
9.5 0.8

Qc, Qd, Qe is total connected indoor capacity


Subscript c, d, e indicates the above symbol
[Example]
indoor 4: 2.5kW
indoor 5: 3.5kW Qe = 11.0kW
indoor 6: 5.0kW
=> (Gas pipe) 15.9 1.0 / (Liquid pipe) 9.5 0.8

100

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

BP Units

Installation
This unit may be installed suspended from the ceiling or mounted on the wall.
This unit may only be installed, as shown in the diagram below. (The side should be facing upwards.)
However, it may be freely installed in any direction forward or back, and to the sides.
Be sure to leave a 650mm square opening for service and inspection as shown in the diagram below, for both ceilingsuspended installation and wall-mounted installation.
This unit does not require drain treatment.
This unit may be installed with sides or
facing forward (servicing direction).
The piping for the indoor unit may be freely led around in directions , , or .
The inclination of side must be within 5 degrees forward or back or to the sides.

For 2 rooms

Wall-mounted

Manufacturers label

4-Suspension bolt
(M8-M10)

254

(304)

25

Indoor unit side


piping

Suspension bolt pitch


22-Brazing

(304)

Terminal (For A room)


Terminal (For B room)

Wiring clamp

95

322
Suspension bolt pitch
Wiring clamp
Electric box
(Top surface)

Terminal (For transmission)

2-I.D. 15.9 CuT

I.D. 19.1 CuT

Room B

Room A

73.5

2-I.D. 6.4 CuT


Earth (M4)
178

INDOOR UNIT SIDE

Terminal
(For Power supply)
294
(650)

Installation restrictions

Earth (M4)
178

2-Brazing
197

I.D. 9.5 CuT

23

23

73.5

(180)

57

45

113 (25)

(product dimensions and attachment bolt pitch)

107

OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE

Standard accessories

(Installation and service space)


(Servicing space)

Min 390

Min 390

68
163

For indoor unit side (Gas)

165
90

(125)
30

155

85 (70)

O.D. 15.9

For outdoor unit side (Gas)


O.D.
110
Dimple
19.1
65

I.D. 9.5

I.D. 19.1

45

Cut line for


I.D. 15.9

Cut line for


I.D. 12.7

For outdoor unit side (Gas)


Min 300

(Servicing space)

Cut line for

110

(Servicing space)

The opening for Inspection


Servicing is needed opening
of 650mm square for
service and maintenance.

O.D.
15.9

90

I.D.
12.7

For indoor unit side (Liquid)


Cut line for O.D. 6.4
150
For outdoor unit side (Liquid)
O.D.
9.5

100

I.D.
6.4

I.D. 9.5

Installation Manual

101

BP Units

EDSG18-936

For 3 rooms

Wall-mounted

Manufacturers label

4-Suspension bolt
(M8-M10)

254

(304)

25

Indoor unit side


piping

Suspension bolt pitch


23-Brazing

(304)

Wiring clamp

95 57

95

3-I.D. 15.9 CuT

322
Suspension bolt pitch
Terminal (For A room)
Terminal (For B room)
Terminal (For C room)
Terminal (For transmission)

Wiring clamp
Electric box
(Top surface)

I.D. 19.1 CuT

Room C

Room B

Room A

73.5

3-I.D. 6.4 CuT


Earth (M4)
178

INDOOR UNIT SIDE

Terminal
(For Power supply)
294
(650)

Installation restrictions

Earth (M4)
178

2-Brazing
197

I.D. 9.5 CuT

23

23

73.5

(180)

57

45

113 (25)

(product dimensions and attachment bolt pitch)

107

OUTDOOR UNIT SIDE

Standard accessories

(Installation and service space)


For indoor unit side (Gas)

I.D. 9.5

I.D. 19.1

45

Cut line for


I.D. 15.9

Cut line for


I.D. 12.7

For outdoor unit side (Gas)


Min 300

(Servicing space)

Cut line for

110

165
90

O.D. 15.9

For outdoor unit side (Gas)


O.D.
110
Dimple
19.1
65

(125)

68
163
258

30

Min 390

85 (70)

(Servicing space)

Min 460

155

(Servicing space)

The opening for Inspection


Servicing is needed opening
of 650mm square for
service and maintenance.

O.D.
15.9

90

I.D.
12.7

For indoor unit side (Liquid)


Cut line for O.D. 6.4
150
For outdoor unit side (Liquid)
O.D.
9.5

100

I.D.
6.4

I.D. 9.5

102

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

BP Units

Installation of the Unit


1.

Replacing the printed circuit board


This unit has two different installation types:
(1) ceiling-suspended type and (2) wall-mounted type.
Choose the proper installation pattern according to the
location of installation.
The installation location for the printed circuit board can
be changed.
Procedure for changing the installation location of
the printed circuit board.
If the installation location of the printed circuit board
needs to be changed because of the installation
conditions, perform the following:

Printed circuit board

To opposite
side

Printed
circuit board

Indoor
unit side
pipe

As-shipped condition

After-location is changed

Caution
Before doing any wiring on site, replace the printed circuit board.
1) Remove the screws and pull off the electrical equipment
cover.

Screw (M412L)

2) Remove 4 screws shown in the figure on the below, remove


the printed circuit board.

Electrical equipment
cover

Remove 4 screws. (M48L)

4
4

4
P
4

3) Remove the binding band (A) which holds the wires.


Binding band
Printed circuit board
(A)
(B)

Press on the protrusion


and pull out.

4) Remove the printed circuit board, and reattach as shown in


the figure.

Top surface of the unit


Lift the tabs.
To opposite side

5) Reattach the binding band to position (B).


Printed circuit board
(A)
(B)

Binding band

Installation Manual

103

BP Units

EDSG18-936

6) Attach the printed circuit board and electrical equipment


cover to the other side and secure with the screws.

Printed circuit board


Electrical
equipment
cover

Top surface of the unit

Insert the
tabs fully.

2.

Ceiling-suspended type
Hanger metal 7

Procedure:

15~20

1) Fix the furnished hanger metal 7 with two screws 8 .


(4 locations in total)
2) Using an insert-hole-in-anchor, hang the hanging bolt.
3) Install a hexagon nut and a flat washer (field supply) to
the hanging bolt as shown in the figure in the below,
and lift the unit to hang on the hanger metal.
4) After checking with a level that the unit is level, tighten
the hexagon nut.
* The tilt of the unit should be within 5 in front/ back
and left/right.

Screws 8

Ceiling side

Hanging bolt (M10 or M8)


Six-sided nut (M10 or M8)
Flat washer

Nut
Flat washer
Hanger metal 7

Hanging bolt

3.

Wall-mounted type

BP unit

Screws 8

Hanger metal 7

Procedure:
1) Fix the furnished hanger metal 7 with two screws 8 .
(4 locations in total)
2) Create a gap with the wall and screw in the temporary
screws (M5, field supply), and hang the BP unit.
3) After checking with a level that the unit is level, fix the
unit with screws (M5, field supply).
* The tilt of the unit should be within 5 in front/ back
and left/right.

Screws 8
Hanger
metal 7

Screws (M5)
(field supply)

CAUTION
Be sure to install the unit with the top surface up.
Do not install near bedrooms. The sound of refrigerant
flowing through the piping may sometimes be audible.

Temporary screw (M5, field supply):


Screw in temporarily after
opening a slight gap with
the wall.
Temporary screws:
attach and then hang the
unit on them. (2 screws)

Screws (M5)
(field supply)

: screw for fixing. (4 places)

104

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

BP Units

Connection of Refrigerant Piping


See the indoor and outdoor units installation manual for details on the size of connection piping to the indoor and outdoor units.

1.

About brazing pipes on site

1) Before brazing, remove the heat insulation.


2) Remove the blue-colored tape, and throw it out.

3
Heat
insulation 10

3) Wrap the pipes to be brazed with sufficient wet cloths so that brazing
does not affect the unit.
4) After brazing, use wet cloths or spray mist to sufficiently cool off all
pipes.
5) When brazing, be careful that the flame of the torch does not come in
contact with the unit.
(Since the inside of the unit is made of plastic, it may become
deformed or melt, destroying its heat-insulation performance.)

Wet cloth
brazing

Wet cloth

2.

Insulation of pipes

1) Attach heat insulation to each pipe.


2) When attaching insulation to the pipes, use one-sided adhesive tape or
similar materials to thoroughly prevent air from entering the heat
insulation.
3) Eliminate any gaps in the heat insulation.

One-sided adhesive tape


(field supply)
Heat insulation
(field supply)

Heat insulation 10

3.

Unconnected pipes

1) For pipes not yet connected to a room, pinch the end of the pipe and
braze them.
2) When brazing this area too, wrap the pipes with sufficient wet cloths to
protect the unit.
3) After brazing this area too, cool the pipes sufficiently.

Wet cloth
brazing

Wet cloth
brazing

4) Attach heat insulation, and use one-sided adhesive tape to thoroughly


prevent air from entering the heat insulation.
5) Cover the ends of the pipes with sufficient heat insulation.

One-sided adhesive tape


(field supply)

Heat insulation
(field supply)

Installation Manual

105

BP Units

EDSG18-936

After brazing and system leakage check, connect a


heat insulation (field supply), and let it cure
completely following the procedure illustrated right.
Use the heat insulation with the following
specifications:
Thermal conductivity: 0.041-0.052W/mK (0.0350.045kcal/mhC) / thickness 13mm or more
Heat resistance = 100C or higher
To ensure that the weight of the local interunit piping
does not bear on directly on the BP unit, secure it
near the BP unit using the clasp (field supply).

Heat insulation
(field supply)

Heat insulation
(field supply)
Heat insulation 10

Clasp
(field supply)

Clasp
(field supply)

BP unit

Indoor unit side piping

Outdoor unit side piping

Place the heat insulation up against the BP unit to


prevent any gaps from forming between the two, and
wrap with masking tape as shown in the figure.

When connecting indoor units, make sure to connect


refrigerant pipes and connection wires to the appropriate connection ports
marked with matching alphabets (A, B and C).

Hanger metal 7
Room A
(Gas)

Room B
(Gas)

Room C
(Gas)

Room A
(Liquid)

Room B
(Liquid)

Room C
(Liquid)

View from the indoor unit

When changing the routing direction, use the pipe joints 2 and 6 (accessories).
Use pipe joints 3 , 4 and 5 to connect refrigerant pipes with different diameters.
Indoor unit side (Gas)

Outdoor unit side (Gas)

30

Brazing

125

I.D 9.5

(125)

When straight.

Piping
Pipe joint 3 (field supply)

Piping
(field supply)

Brazing
I.D 12.7

Cut line for


I.D 15.9

110

Pipe joint 6

Brazing

Piping
(field supply)

Pipe joint 2

I.D 9.5
Cut line for
I.D 12.7

Pipe joint 6
Cut line for straight

(70)

85

Cut line for I.D 12.7

Piping
(field supply)

When the direction is changed.


Brazing

I.D 15.9

Brazing

Connection for 15.9 piping.

I.D 12.7

Connection for 12.7 piping.

When straight.

45

Indoor unit side (Liquid)


Pipe joint 5

Piping
(field supply)

Pipe joint 2

Brazing

I.D 9.5

Piping
(field supply)

Cut line for


I.D 15.9
Piping
(field supply)

I.D 19.1
Pipe joint 3

Connecting 9.5
interunit piping

(65)

Brazing

45

Cut line
for O.D 6.4

Outdoor unit side (Liquid)

I.D 12.7

Brazing
Cut line for
I.D 15.9

Connection for 19.1 and 15.9 piping.

Connection for 12.7 piping.

When the direction is changed.

Pipe joint 4
Piping
(field supply)

Brazing

I.D 6.4

Connecting 6.4
interunit piping

NOTE
When changing the direction of the piping to
something other than the above, bend the
piping on site.

10

106

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

BP Units

Connecting the Wiring


Connection example of total system wiring
Indoor unit

The following kind of wiring methods is okay for the power line.
Pattern 1

Indoor unit

BP unit

Power

Indoor unit

Earth leakage
breaker

N2
L2 BP unit
N1
3
L1

Pattern 2
Power
voltage

N2
L2 BP unit
N1
3
L1

Power
voltage

N2
L2 BP unit
N1
2
L1

Power
voltage

N2
L2 BP unit
N1
1
L1

Outdoor unit
Indoor unit

Branch switch
overcurrent
breaker (fuse)

N2
L2 BP unit
N1
2
L1

BP unit
Indoor unit

Power
voltage

Indoor unit

16V

BP unit
Indoor unit

Power
Ground Earth leakage
breaker

Indoor unit

Power
voltage

N2
L2 BP unit
N1
1
L1

Crossover wiring is possible


for the power line.

Branch switch
overcurrent
breaker (fuse)
Power
voltage

It is also possible to supply


power from the BP units
themselves.

CAUTION
Be sure to connect the power
line to L1 and N1.
For crossover wiring, take the
line from L2 and N2 and
connect it to L1 and N1 on the
other BP unit.

Ground

Work procedure

Electrical equipment
cover

1) Remove the screws and pull off the electrical equipment cover.

Screw (M412L)

2) Tape is attached to the wire binding band. The purpose of the tape is to prevent small animals from entering the unit.
Only remove the tape from places where wiring it to be passed through.

CAUTION

If the tape is not replaced for


places where wiring will not pass
through, small animals may enter,
causing product malfunction.

4
4

The tape to
prevent the entry
of small animals

The tape to
prevent
the entry of
small animals

Wire clamp

The tape to prevent the entry of small animals


(tape is attached when unit is shipped to
prevent animals from entering the unit)

Wire clamp

11

Installation Manual

107

BP Units

EDSG18-936

3) Follow the instructions on the wiring nameplate to connect the connection wires of indoor/outdoor units to terminal block
numbers. (1, 2, 3, F1 and F2) Always fix each ground wire separately with a ground screw. (See the figure below.)

NOTE: The terminal block numbers are arranged from top to bottom in order of 1, 2 and 3.
Peel the outer coating leaving
10mm from the wire clamp.
10mm

Example
For 3 rooms

Binding band 9
Secure the wires with binding band 9 to
prevent them from coming out if pulled
on from the outside.

Wire
clamp

Transmission wire (To other BP unit: F1, F2)

F2
F1

N2
L2
N1
L1

1
2 Room C
3

Ground

*Fix each wire


separately.

1
2 Room B
3

Transmission wire (To other BP unit: F1, F2 or to


outdoor unit: F1, F2)
H05VV(*), 2 wires
0.75mm2 to 1.25mm2
Wire clamp
For other BP unit (To L1, N1)

CAUTION

4
Connection wire for
indoor units.
H05VV(*), 4 wires
1.6mm or 2.0mm

1
2 Room A
3

Warning
Do not use tapped
wires,stand wires,
extensioncords, or
starbust connections,
as they may cause
overtheating, electrical
shock, or fire.

Mistakenly connecting the power


supply to this terminal block could
cause control operating malfunctions.

Power supply wire


for indoor units.
H05VV(*), 3 wires
1.6mm or 2.0mm

Safety breaker Earth leakage


16A or 15A
circuit breaker

When wire length exceed


10m, use 2.0mm wires.

Power supply
~50Hz
230V

(*) Only in protected pipes, use H07RN-F when protected pipes are not use.
Specifications for local wiring power cord and branch wiring are in compliance with IEC60245.

CAUTION
All local interunit wiring must be secured using the wire
binding band over the insulation, as shown in the figure.

Insulation

When connecting the connection wires to the terminal


block using a single core wire, be sure to perform curling.
Problems with the work may cause heat and fires.
Wire binding band

4) Allow 300mm for the pulling-out section of harness.


+300mm
of slack

+300mm
of slack

5) Return the electrical equipment cover to its original position, and fix it with the
screws.

Screw
(M412L)
Install the electrical
equipment cover.

12

108

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

BP Units

Operating Test
Follow the Operating test as described in the installation manual of the outdoor unit.
If the BP unit does not operate normally during the test run, the error can be checked on the remote controller display for the indoor
unit.

Error codes displayed on the remote controller


Malfunction code

Nonconformity during installation

A9

Electric expansion valve connector not


connected (BP unit)

Remedial action

E2

Printed circuit board faulty


(BP unit)

J0

Liquid and gas thermistor faulty


(BP unit)

U4

Transmission error between BP unit


and indoor unit

Connect correctly the interconnections between BP unit and


indoor unit.

U9

Transmission error between outdoor


unit and other BP unit

Connect correctly the interconnections between outdoor and


other BP unit.

UJ

Transmission error between outdoor


unit and this BP unit connecting with the
indoor unit of error code displayed

Connect correctly the interconnections between outdoor and


this BP unit connecting with the indoor unit of error code
displayed.

Please contact your dealer.

The BP Unit
Simple diagnosis can be done using the LEDs on the BP units circuit board.
For details, see the label on the inside of the BP units electrical equipment cover.

13

3P155380-1E

Installation Manual

109

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

3. Indoor Units
3.1

Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions
Read these Safety Precautions carefully to ensure correct installation.
This manual classifies the precautions into WARNING and CAUTION.
Be sure to follow all the precautions below: they are all important for ensuring safety.
WARNING

Failure to follow any of WARNING is likely to result in such grave consequences as death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Failure to follow any of CAUTION may result in grave consequences in some cases.

The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual:


Be sure to observe this instruction.

Be sure to establish an earth connection.

Never attempt.

After completing installation, test the unit to check for installation errors. Give the user adequate instructions
concerning the use and cleaning of the unit according to the Operation Manual.

WARNING
Installation should be left to the dealer or another professional. Improper installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Install the air conditioner according to the instructions given in this manual. Incomplete installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to use the supplied or specified installation parts. Use of other parts may cause the unit to come to lose, water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
Install the air conditioner on a solid base that can support the weight of the unit. An inadequate base or incomplete installation may cause injury in the event the unit falls off the base.
Electrical work should be carried out in accordance with the installation manual and the national electrical wiring
rules or code of practice. Insufficient capacity or incomplete electrical work may cause electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use a dedicated power circuit. Never use a power supply shared by another appliance.
For wiring, use a cable length enough to cover the entire distance with no connection. Do not use an extension cord.
Do not put other loads on the power supply, use a dedicated power circuit. (Failure to do so may cause abnormal heat, electric shock or fire.)
The power supply wire class for the receptacle for the outdoor unit must be polychlorinated vinyl insulation or higher. (IEC60057: No. 245 wire)

Use the specified types of wires for electrical connections between the indoor and outdoor units. When installing
wiring for the outdoor unit, after cutting the wires for each connection point, a length of 3mm or longer is required.
Firmly clamp the interconnecting wires so their terminals receive no external stresses. Incomplete connections or clamping may cause terminal overheating or fire.

After connecting interconnecting and supply wiring be sure to shape the cables so that they do not put undue force on the electrical covers or panels.
Install covers over the wires. Incomplete cover installation may cause terminal overheating, electrical shock, or fire. When electrical appliances are connected in Y formation,
if the power supply is damaged in some way, to avoid danger the power supply must be replaced by the maker or by someone with an equivalent certification.

When installing or relocating the system, be sure to keep the refrigerant circuit free from substances other than the specified
refrigerant (R410A), such as air. (Any presence of air or other foreign substance in the refrigerant circuit causes an abnormal pressure rise or rupture, resulting in injury.)
The installation height from the floor must be over 1.8m.
If any refrigerant has leaked out during the installation work, ventilate the room.
(The refrigerant produces a toxic gas if exposed to flames.)

After all installation is complete, check to make sure that no refrigerant is leaking out.
(The refrigerant produces a toxic gas if exposed to flames.)

During pump-down, stop the compressor before removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still running and the shut-off valve is open during
pump-down, air will be sucked in when the refrigerant piping is removed, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.

During installation, attach the refrigerant piping securely before running the compressor. If the compressor is not attached and the shut-off valve
is open during pump-down, air will be sucked in when the compressor is run, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.

Be sure to establish an earth. Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire. A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.

Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks, or fire.

CAUTION
Do not install the air conditioner in a place where there is danger of exposure to inflammable gas leakage.
If the gas leaks and builds up around the unit, it may catch fire.

Establish drain piping according to the instructions of this manual. Inadequate piping may cause flooding.
Note for installing the outdoor unit. (For heat pump model only.) In cold area where the outside air temperature keep below or around freezing-point for a few days, the outdoor
units drain may freeze. If so, it is recommended to install an electric heater in order to protect drain from freezing. It is recommended that you contact the after-sales service organization.

Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method such as with a torque wrench.
If the flare nut is tightened too hard, the flare nut may crack after a long time and cause refrigerant leakage.

110

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

3.2

Indoor Units

Wall Mounted Type FTKS25/35D

Accessories
A Mounting plate
B

Mounting platefixing screws


M4 25L

D Wireless remote controller

E Remote controller holder

J Insulation tape

Fixing screws for remote


F
controller holder M3 20L

K Operation manual

G AAA dry-cell batteries

L Installation manual

C Titanium Apatite

Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter

Indoor unit fixing screws


M4 12L

3
Choosing an Installation Site
Before choosing the installation site, obtain user approval.

1.

Indoor unit.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

The indoor unit should be sited in a place where:


the restrictions on installation specified in the indoor unit installation drawings are met,
both air intake and exhaust have clear paths met,
the unit is not in the path of direct sunlight,
the unit is away from the source of heat or steam,
there is no source of machine oil vapour (this may shorten indoor unit life),
cool (warm) air is circulated throughout the room,
the unit is away from electronic ignition type fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start type) as they may shorten the
remote control range,
8) the unit is at least 1 metre away from any television or radio set (unit may cause interference with the picture or sound).
9) install at the recommended height (1.8m).

2.

Wireless remote controller.


1) Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote control signals are properly
received by the indoor unit (within 7 metres).

Installation Tips
<When there is no work space because the unit is close to ceiling>

1. Removing and installing front panel.

Removal method

Caution

Hook fingers on the panel protrusions on the left and right of the main body,
and open until the panel stops. Slide the front panel sideways to disengage
the rotating shaft. Then pull the front
panel toward you to remove it.

1) Push up.

Be sure to wear protection gloves.

Place both hands under the center of the front


grille, and while pushing up, pull it toward you.

2) Pull toward you.

Installation method
1) Install the front grille and firmly engage the upper hooks (3 locations).
2) Install 2screws of the front grille.
3) Install the air filter and then mount the front panel.

Installation method
Push the
rotating shaft
of the front
panel into the
groove.

3. How to set the different


addresses.

2. Removing and installing front grille.

Removal method
1) Remove front panel to remove the air filter.
2) Remove the front grille.
mark of the front grille,
3) In front of the
there are 3 upper hooks. Lightly pull the
front grille toward you with one hand, and
push down on the hooks with the fingers of
your other hand.

mark area
(3 locations)

Upper hook

Lightly pull the front


grille toward you with
one hand, and push
down on the hooks with
the fingers of your other
hand. (3 locations)

Push
down.

Upper hook

Upper hook

ADDRESS

When two indoor units are


installed in one room, the
two wireless remote
controllers can be set for
different addresses.
1) In the same way as when
connecting to an HA
system, remove the metal
plate electrical wiring
cover.
2) Cut the address jumper
(JA) on the pindted circuit
board.
3) Cut the address jumper
(J4) in the remote control.

JA

Align the tabs of the front panel with the


grooves, and push all the way in. Then close
slowly. Push the center of the lower surface
of the panel firmly to engage the tabs.

JA ADDRESS
EXIST
CUT

1
2

J4

J4 ADDRESS
EXIST
CUT

Installation Manual

1
2

111

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Indoor Unit Installation Drawings


How to attach the indoor unit.
Hook the claws of the bottom frame
to the mounting plate.
If the claws are difficult to hook,
remove the front grille.
How to remove the indoor unit.
Push up the marked area (at the
lower part of the front grille) to
release the claws. If it is difficult to Front grille
release, remove the front grille.

A Mounting plate

A Mounting
plate

Clip

Bottom frame

Mark (rear side)

The mounting plate


should be installed on a
wall which can support the
weight of the indoor unit.
B Mounting platefixing
screws M4 25L (6)

Caulk
pipe hole
gap
with putty.

30 mm or more from ceiling

Cut thermal insulation


pipe to an appropriate
length and wrap it with
tape, making sure that no
gap is left in the insulation
pipes cut line.

Front panel

50 mm or more from walls


(on both sides)

Wrap the insulation pipe with


the finishing tape from bottom
to top.
Intelligent-eye sensor

Air filters

C Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic


Air-Purifying Filter (2)
Titanium Apatite
Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter

Service lid
Opening service lid
Service lid is opening/closing type.
Opening method
1) Remove the service lid screws.
2) Pull out the service lid diagonally
down in the direction of the arrow.
3) Pull down.

Air filter

Filter frame

Tab

D Wireless
remote controller

F Fixing screws for


remote controller
holder M3 20L (2)

Before screwing the remote


controller holder to the wall,
make sure that control
signals are properly
received by indoor unit.
E
Remote
controller holder

Intelligent-eye Sensor
Caution
1) Do not hit or violently push the intelligent-eye sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.
2) Do not place large objects near the sensor. Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the
sensors detection area.

112

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Indoor Unit Installation


1.

Installing the mounting plate.


The mounting plate should be installed on a wall which can support the weight of the indoor unit.
1) Temporarily secure the mounting plate to the wall, make sure that the panel is completely level, and mark
the boring points on the wall.
2) Secure the mounting plate to the wall with screws.
Recommended mounting-plate retention spots and dimensions

3
450

Recommended
mounting - plate
retention spots
(6 spots in all)

100

400

(Bolt size : M10)

135

110
65
60

65
130
220

60

44.5

Use tape
measure
as shown.
Position the
end of a tape
measure at .

131.5
44.5 87

283

47.5

46.5

(Bolt size : M10)

50.5

80

141.5

b Place a leveler
on raised tab.

110

50
800

Drain hose
position

Throughthe-wall
hole 65mm

Liquid pipe end Keep here the piece cut out


from the unit for piping
Gas pipe end

* The removed pipe port cover can be


kept in the mounting plate pocket.

Removed pipe
port cover

A Mounting plate

2.

Boring a wall hole and installing wall embedded pipe.


For walls containing metal frame or metal board, be sure to use a wall
embedded pipe and wall cover in the feed-through hole to prevent
possible heat, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to caulk the gaps around the pipes with caulking material to
prevent water leakage.
1) Bore a feed-through hole of 65 mm in the wall so it has a down slope
toward the outside.
2) Insert a wall pipe into the hole.
3) Insert a wall cover into wall pipe.
4) After completing refrigerant piping, wiring, and drain piping, caulk pipe
hole gap with putty.

Installation Manual

Inside
Wall embedded pipe
(field supply)

Outside
Caulking

65

Wall hole cover


(field supply)
Wall embedded pipe
(field supply)

113

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Indoor Unit Installation


3.

Installing indoor unit.


3-1. Right-side, right-back, or right-bottom piping.
1) Attach the drain hose to the
underside of the refrigerant pipes
with an adhesive vinyl tape.
2) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and
Remove pipe port cover
drain hose together with an
here for right-side piping. Right-bottom
piping
insulation tape.
Remove pipe port cover
here for right-bottom piping.

3) Pass the drain hose and


refrigerant pipes through the wall
hole, then set the indoor unit on
the mounting plate hooks by
using the markings at the top of
the indoor unit as a guide.

Right-back piping
Bind coolant pipe
and drain hose
together with
insulating tape.

A Mounting plate

4) Open the front panel, then


Hang indoor units hook here.
open the service lid. (Refer to
Installation tips)
5) Pass the interconnecting
A Mounting plate
wires from the outdoor unit
When stripping the
ends of interconnecting
in advance, bind
Interconnecting
through the feed-through wall wires
right ends of wires with
wires
insulating tape.
hole and then through the
Wire guide
back of the indoor unit. Pull
them through the front side.
Bend the ends of tie wires upward for easier work in advance.
(If the interconnecting wire ends are to be stripped first, bundle
wire ends with adhesive tape.)
6) Press the bottom frame of the indoor unit with both hands to
set it on the mounting plate hooks. Make sure that the wires do
not catch on the edge of the indoor unit.

3-2. Left-side, left-back, or left bottom piping.


1) Attach the drain hose to the
underside of the refrigerant
pipes with adhesive vinyl
tape.

Remove pipe
port cover
here for leftside piping.

Remove pipe port cover here for left-bottom piping.

Left-side
piping
Left-back
piping

Left-bottom piping

2) Be sure to connect the drain


hose to the drain port in place
of a drain plug.

114

How to set drain plug


ap

No g

Do not apply lubricating


oil (refrigerant machine
oil) when inserting.
Application of causes
deterioration and drain
leakage of the plug.
Insert a hexagon wrench (4 mm)

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Indoor Unit Installation


3) Shape the refrigerant pipe along the pipe path marking on the
mounting plate.
4) Pass drain hose and refrigerant pipes through the wall hole,
then set the indoor unit on mounting plate hooks, using the
markings at the top of indoor unit as a guide.

Drain
hose

A Mounting plate

Caulk this hole


with putty or
caulking material.

Bind with plastic


tape.

Wrap insulating tape around the bent portion


of refrigerant pipe.
Overlap at least half the width of the tape
with each turn.

5) Pull in the interconnecting wires.


6) Connect the inter-unit piping.
7) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and drain hose together with insulation
tape as right figure, in case of setting the drain hose through the back
of the indoor unit.
8) While exercising care so that the
A
Mounting
Drain hose
plate
interconnecting wires do not catch
indoor unit, press the bottom edge of
Refrigerant
pipes
indoor unit with both hands until it is
firmly caught by the mounting plate
Bottom frame
hooks. Secure indoor unit to the
H M4 12L (2 point)
mounting plate with the screws (M4 12L).
3-3. Wall embedded piping.
Follow the instructions given under
Insert drain hose
to this depth so
it wont be pulled
out of drain pipe.

Left-side, left-back, or left bottom piping


1) Insert the drain hose to this
depth so it wont be pulled out
of the drain pipe.

4.

Inner wall

50 mm
or more

Outer wall

Drain hose
Vinyl chloride
drain pipe
(VP-30)

Wiring.
With a Multi indoor unit , install as described in the installation
manual supplied with the Multi outdoor unit.
1) Strip wire ends (15 mm).
Terminal block
Electrical component box
2) Match wire colours with
Shape wires so
terminal numbers on indoor
that the service
lid will fit securely.
and outdoor units terminal
blocks and firmly screw wires
Firmly secure wire retainer
so that wires sustain no
to the corresponding terminals.
Use the
external stress.
specified
3) Connect the earth wires to the
Wire retainer
wire type.
corresponding terminals.
4) Pull wires to make sure that they are securely latched up, then retain wires with wire retainer.
5) In case of connecting to an adapter system. Run the remote control
cable and attach the S21. (Refer to 5. When connecting to an HA
Firmly fix the wires with
system.)
the terminal screws.
Outdoor unit
6) Shape the wires so
When wire length exceeds
that the service lid
10 m, use 2.0-mm wires.
fits securely, then
Power
Safety
Indoor
close service lid.
Earth leakage
breaker
supply
unit
1 23

LN

1
2
3

15A

Firmly fix the wires with


the terminal screws.

H05VV

circuit breaker

50Hz 220V - 240V


60Hz 220V - 230V

Earth

Warning
1) Do not use tapped wires, stand wires, extensioncords, or starbust
connections, as they may cause overtheating, electrical shock,or fire.
2) Do not use locally purchased electrical parts inside the product. (Do not branch the power
for the drain pump, etc., from the terminal block.) Doing so may cause electric shock or fire.

Installation Manual

115

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Indoor Unit Installation


5.

When connecting to an HA system.


1)
2)
3)
4)

Remove the front grille. (2 screws)


Remove the electrical wiring box. (1 screw)
Remove the metal plate electrical wiring cover. (3 tabs)
Attach the connection cord to the S21 connector and pull the
harness out through the notched part in the figure.
5) Replace the electrical wiring cover as it was, and pull the harness
around, as shown in the figure.
Tab

Notched part

Push
Slide

HA cord

HA connector
(S21)

Slide
3) Remove the metal
plate electrical
wiring cover.

6.

Screw
Pull
Tab

4) Attach the connection cord to


the S21 connector and pull the
harness out through the
notched part in the figure.

5) Replace the electrical


wiring cover as it was,
and pull the harness
around, as shown
in the figure.

Drain piping.
The drain hose should
be inclined downward.

1) Connect the drain hose, as described


right.

No trap is permitted.
Do not put the end
of the hose in water.

3) When drain hose requires extension,


obtain an extension hose commercially
available.
Be sure to thermally insulate the indoor
section of the extension hose.

Indoor unit
drain hose

18

2) Remove the air filters and pour some


water into the drain pan to check the water
flows smoothly.

Extension drain hose

Heat insulation tube


(Field supply)

18

4) When connecting a rigid polyvinyl chloride pipe (nominal diameter


13 mm) directly to the drain hose attached to the indoor unit as with
embedded piping work, use any commercially available drain
socket (nominal diameter 13 mm) as a joint.

Drain hose supplied with


the indoor unit

116

Commercially available drain


socket
(nominal diameter 13 mm)

Commercially available rigid


polyvinyl chloride pipe
(nominal diameter 13 mm)

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Refrigerant Piping Work


With a Multi indoor unit

1.

, install as described in the installation manual supplied with the Multi outdoor unit.

Flaring the pipe end.


1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing downward
so that the chips do not enter the pipe.
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made.

(Cut exactly at
right angles.)

Remove burrs

Flaring
Set exactly at the position shown below.
A

Die

Flare tool for R410A

Conventional flare tool

Clutch-type

Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)

0 ~ 0.5 mm

1.0 ~ 1.5 mm

1.5 ~ 2.0 mm

Check
Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.

The pipe end must


be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
flare nut is fitted.

Warning
1) Do not use mineral oil on flared part.
2) Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
3) Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
4) Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
5) The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
6) Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.

2.

Refrigerant piping.
CAUTION

1) Use the flare nut fixed to the main unit. (To prevent cracking of the flare nut by aged deterioration.)
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for R410A.)
3) Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent damage to the flare nuts and gas leakage.
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]
Do not apply refrigeration
oil to the outer surface.

[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration oil to the
inner surface of the flare.

Torque wrench

Flare nut tightening torque


Gas side
Liquid side
3/8 inch
1/4 inch
32.7-39.9N m
14.2-17.2N m
(333-407kgf cm)
(144-175kgf cm)

Flare nut
Spanner

Piping union

Do not apply refrigeration oil to the flare


nut avoid tightening with over torque.

Flare nut

2-1. Caution on piping handling.


1) Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe
bender for bending.

Rain

If no flare cap is
available, cover
the flare mouth
with tape to keep
dirt or water out.

2-2. Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.


When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
1) Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052 W/mK (0.035 to 0.045 kcal/(mh C))
Refrigerant gas pipes surface temperature reaches 110C max.
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature.
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide
insulation dimensions as below.
Gas side

Liquid side

20/25/35 class

Gas pipe thermal insulation


20/25/35 class

O.D. 6.4mm

O.D. 9.5mm
Minimum bend radius

Wall

Be sure to
place a cap.

Gas pipe

Inter-unit wiring

Gas pipe
insulation

Liquid pipe

Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape

Drain hose

Liquid pipe
thermal insulation

I.D. 12-15mm

I.D. 8-10mm

Thickness 10mm Min.

30mm or more
Thickness 0.8mm (C1220T-O)

3) Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.

Installation Manual

117

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Trial Operation and Testing


1.

Trial operation and testing.


1-1 Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
For Heat pump
In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest
programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
Use the remote control for trial operation as described below.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C
to 24C in heating mode).
3) For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.

For Cooling only


Select the lowest programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
Use the remote control for trial operation as described below.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
3) For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.

1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and
parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for
some time after installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.

If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original
operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.

Trial operation from remote controller.


1) Press ON/OFF button to turn on the system.
2) Simultaneously press centre of TEMP button and MODE button.
3) Press MODE button twice.
( will appear on the display to indicate that Trial Operation mode is selected.)
4) Trial run mode terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial
operation, press ON/OFF button.

2.

Test items.
Test items

Symptom
(diagnostic display on RC)

Indoor and outdoor units are installed properly on


solid bases.

Fall, vibration, noise

No refrigerant gas leaks.

Incomplete cooling/heating function

Refrigerant gas and liquid pipes and indoor drain


hose extension are thermally insulated.

Water leakage

Draining line is properly installed.

Water leakage

System is properly earthed.

Electrical leakage

The specified wires are used for interconnecting


wire connections.

Inoperative or burn damage

Indoor or outdoor units air intake or exhaust has


clear path of air. Shut-off valves are opened.

Incomplete cooling/heating function

Indoor unit properly receives remote controller


commands.

Inoperative

Check

3P142640-4L

118

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

3.3

Indoor Units

Wall Mounted Type FTKS50/60/71F

Accessories
A Mounting plate

D Wireless remote controller

Indoor unit fixing screws


M4 12L

Mounting plate fixing


B
screws M4 25L

E Remote controller holder

Insulation tape

K Operation manual

L Installation manual

C Titanium Apatite

Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter

Fixing screws for remote


controller holder M3 20L

G AAA dry-cell batteries

3
Choosing an Installation Site
Before choosing the installation site, obtain user approval.

1.

Indoor unit.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

2.

The indoor unit should be sited in a place where:


the restrictions on installation specified in the indoor unit installation drawings are met,
both air intake and exhaust have clear paths met,
the unit is not in the path of direct sunlight,
the unit is away from the source of heat or steam,
there is no source of machine oil vapour (this may shorten indoor unit life),
cool air is circulated throughout the room,
the unit is away from electronic ignition type fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start type) as they may shorten the remote controller range,
the unit is at least 1 metre away from any television or radio set (unit may cause interference with the picture or sound),
install at the recommended height (1.8m).

Wireless remote controller.


1) Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote controller signals are
properly received by the indoor unit (within 7 metres).

Installation Tips
<When there is no work space because the unit is close to ceiling>

1. Removing and installing front panel.

Removal method
Hook fingers on the panel protrusions on the left and right
of the main body, and open until the panel stops. Slide
the front panel sideways to disengage
the rotating shaft. Then pull
the front panel toward you
to remove it.

CAUTION

1) Push up.

Be sure to wear protection gloves.

Place both hands under the center of the front


grille, and while pushing up, pull it toward you.

2) Pull toward you.

Installation method
1) Install the front grille and firmly engage the upper hooks (3 locations).
2) Install 3 screws of the front grille.
3) Install the air filter and then mount the front panel.

Installation method
Push the
rotating shaft
of the front
panel into the
groove.

2. Removing and installing front grille.

Removal method
1)Remove front panel to remove
the air filter.
2) Remove the front grille.
3) In front of the
mark of
the front grille, there are 3
upper hooks. Lightly pull the
front grille toward you with one
hand, and push down on the
hooks with the fingers of your
other hand.

Installation Manual

Upper hook

Lightly pull the front grille


toward you with one
hand, and push down on
the hooks with the fingers
of your other hand.
(3 locations)

mark area
(3 locations)

Push
down.

Upper hook

Upper hook

When two indoor units are


installed in one room, the
two wireless remote
controllers can be set for
different addresses.
1) In the same way as when
connecting to an HA
system, remove the metal
plate electrical wiring
cover.
2) Cut the address jumper
(JA) on the prindted
circuit board.
3) Cut the address jumper
(J4) in the remote
controller.

Address

3. How to set the different


addresses.

JA

Align the tabs of the front panel with


the grooves, and push all the way in.
Then close slowly. Push the center of
the lower surface of the panel firmly to
engage the tabs.

JA Address
EXIST
CUT

1
2

J4

J4 ADDRESS
EXIST
CUT

1
2

119

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Indoor Unit Installation Drawings


How to attach the indoor unit.
Hook the claws of the bottom frame
to the mounting plate.
If the claws are difficult to hook,
remove the front grille.

A Mounting plate

How to remove the indoor unit.


Push up the marked area (at the
lower part of the front grille) to
Front grille
release the claws. If it is difficult to
release, remove the front grille.

A Mounting
plate
Clip
Bottom frame

Mark (rear side)

The mounting plate


should be installed on a
wall which can support the
weight of the indoor unit.

B Mounting plate fixing


screws M4 25L (9)

Caulk
pipe hole
gap
with putty.

30mm or more from ceiling

Cut thermal insulation


pipe to an appropriate
length and wrap it with
tape, making sure that no
gap is left in the insulation
pipes cut line.

Front panel
Wrap the insulation pipe with
the finishing tape from bottom
to top.

50mm or more from walls


(on both sides)

Air filters

Intelligent-eye sensor

M4 16L

C Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic


Air-Purifying Filter (2)

Service lid
Opening service lid
Service lid is opening/closing type.
Opening method
1) Remove the service lid screws.
2) Pull out the service lid diagonally
down in the direction of the arrow.
3) Pull down.

Tabs (upper 3 locations)


M4 16L

Tabs (lower 3 locations)


Insert the upper side of the C Titanium
Apatite Photocatalytic Air-purifying filter into
the tabs (upper 3 locations),push the lower
side of the filters up a little and into the tabs
(lower 3 locations).

D Wireless
remote controller

F Fixing screws for


remote controller
holder M3 20L (2)

Before screwing the remote


controller holder to the wall,
make sure that control
signals are properly
received by indoor unit.
E
Remote
controller holder

Intelligent-eye Sensor
CAUTION
1) Do not hit or violently push the intelligent-eye sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.
2) Do not place large objects near the sensor. Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the
sensors detection area.

120

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Indoor Unit Installation (1)


1.

Installing the mounting plate.


The mounting plate should be installed on a wall which can support the weight of the indoor unit.
1) Temporarily secure the mounting plate to the wall, make sure that the panel is completely level, and
mark the boring points on the wall.
2) Secure the mounting plate to the wall with screws.
Recommended mounting plate retention spots and dimensions

Recommended mounting plate retention


spots (9 spots in all)
Place a leveler on raised tab.
(Bolt size : M10)

(Bolt size : M10)

100
55

125

90

290

Use tape
measure
as shown.
Position the
end of a tape
measure at .

80

52

52

80
60

83

413.5

44.5

100

99.5

1050
Gas pipe end
Liquid pipe end

Through-the-wall
Drain hose position hole 80mm

* The removed pipe port cover can be


kept in the mounting plate pocket.

(length: mm)

Removed pipe
port cover

A Mounting plate

2.

Boring a wall hole and installing wall embedded pipe.


For walls containing metal frame or metal board, be sure to use a wall
embedded pipe and wall cover in the feed-through hole to prevent
possible heat, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to caulk the gaps around the pipes with caulking material to
prevent water leakage.
1) Bore a feed-through hole of 80mm in the wall so it has a down slope
toward the outside.
2) Insert a wall pipe into the hole.
3) Insert a wall cover into wall pipe.
4) After completing refrigerant piping, wiring, and drain piping, caulk pipe
hole gap with putty.

Installation Manual

Inside
Wall embedded pipe
(Field supply)

Wall hole cover


(Field supply)

Outside
Caulking

80
Wall embedded pipe
(Field supply)

121

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Indoor Unit Installation (2)


3.

Installing indoor unit.


3-1. Right-side, right-back, or right-bottom piping.
1) Attach the drain hose to the underside of the refrigerant pipes
with an adhesive vinyl tape.
2) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and drain hose together with an
insulation tape.

Remove pipe port cover


here for right-side piping.

Right-back piping
Right-bottom
piping

Remove pipe port cover


here for right-bottom piping.

A Mounting plate

3) Pass the drain hose and refrigerant pipes through the wall
hole, then set the indoor unit on the mounting plate hooks by
using the markings at the top of the indoor unit as a guide.
4) Open the front panel, then open the service lid. (Refer to
Installation Tips.)
5) Pass the inter-unit wiring from the outdoor unit through the
feed-through wall hole and then through the back of the indoor
unit. Pull them through the front side.
Bend the ends of tie wires upward for easier work in advance.
(If the inter-unit wiring ends are to be stripped first, bundle wire
ends with adhesive tape.)
6) Press the bottom frame of the indoor unit with both hands to
set it on the mounting plate hooks. Make sure that the wires do
not catch on the edge of the indoor unit.

Bind coolant pipe


and drain hose
together with
insulating tape.

Hang indoor units hook here.

When stripping the


ends of inter-unit wiring
in advance, bind right
ends of wires with
insulating tape.

Inter-unit wiring

3-2. Left-side, left-back, or left-bottom piping.


1) Attach the drain hose to the underside of the refrigerant pipes
with adhesive vinyl tape.

Remove pipe port


cover here for
left-side piping.
Left-side
piping

Remove pipe port cover here for left-bottom piping.


Left-bottom piping

2) Be sure to connect the drain hose to the drain port in place of


a drain plug.

3) Shape the refrigerant pipe along the pipe path


marking on the mounting plate.
4) Pass drain hose and refrigerant pipes through
the wall hole, then set the indoor unit on
Drain
hose
mounting plate hooks, using the markings at
Caulk this hole
the top of indoor unit as a guide.
with putty or
caulking material.
5) Pull in the inter-unit wiring.
6) Connect the inter-unit piping.
7) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and drain hose together with
insulation tape as right figure, in case of setting the drain hose
through the back of the indoor unit.
8) While exercising care so that the inter-unit wiring do not catch
indoor unit, press the bottom edge of indoor unit with both hands
until it is firmly caught by the mounting plate hooks. Secure
indoor unit to the mounting plate with the screws (M4 12L).
3-3. Wall embedded piping.
Follow the instructions given under
Left-side, left-back, or left-bottom piping .
1) Insert the drain hose to this depth so it wont be pulled out of
the drain pipe.

122

Mounting plate

Left-back
piping

How to set drain plug


ap

No g

Do not apply lubricating


oil (refrigerant oil) when
inserting.
Application of causes
deterioration and drain
leakage of the plug.
Insert a hexagon wrench (4mm)

A Mounting plate

Bind with plastic


tape.

Wrap insulating tape around the


bent portion of refrigerant pipe.
Overlap at least half the width
of the tape with each turn.

Drain hose

Mounting
plate
Refrigerant
pipes

Bottom frame
H M4 12L (2 point)

Insert drain hose to this


depth so it wont be
pulled out of drain pipe.

Inner wall

50mm
or more

Drain hose

Outer wall

Vinyl chloride
drain pipe
(VP-30)

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Indoor Unit Installation (3)


4.

Wiring.
With a Multi indoor unit , install as described in the installation
manual supplied with the Multi outdoor unit.
1) Strip wire ends (15mm).
2) Match wire colours with terminal numbers on indoor and
outdoor units terminal blocks and firmly screw wires to the
corresponding terminals.
3) Connect the earth wires to the corresponding terminals.
4) Pull wires to make sure that they are securely latched up,
then retain wires with wire retainer.
5) In case of connecting to an adapter system. Run the remote
controller cable and attach the S21. (Refer to 5. When
connecting to an HA system.)
6) Shape the wires so that the service lid fits securely, then close
service lid.

Terminal block
Electrical component box
Shape wires so
that the service
lid will fit securely.

Use the
specified
wire type.

Firmly secure wire retainer


so that wires sustain no
external stress.

Firmly fix the wires with


the terminal screws.

Outdoor unit
1 23

When wire length exceeds


10m, use 2.0mm diameter wires.

Indoor
unit

Wire retainer

LN

1
2
3

Firmly fix the wires with


the terminal screws.

H05VV

WARNING
1) Do not use tapped wires, stranded wires, extensioncords, or starburst connections, as they may cause
overtheating, electrical shock,or fire.
2) Do not use locally purchased electrical parts inside the product. (Do not branch the power for the drain pump, etc.,
from the terminal block.) Doing so may cause electric shock or fire.

5.

When connecting to an HA system.


1) Remove the front grille.
Tab
Push
(3 screws)
Notched part
Tab
Push
2) Remove the electrical
wiring box. (1 screw)
Slide
3) Remove the metal plate
HA connector
Main body
(S21)
electrical wiring cover.
(4 tabs)
Metal plate
4) Attach the connection
electrical cover
Screw
4) Attach the connection cord to
Push
cord to the S21 connector 3) Remove the metal
the S21 connector and pull the
plate electrical
Tab
harness out through the
wiring cover.
and pull the harness out
notched part in the figure.
through the notched part
in the figure.
5) Replace the electrical wiring cover as it was, and pull the harness
around, as shown in the figure.

5) Replace the electrical


wiring cover as it was,
and pull the harness
around, as shown
in the figure.

Drain piping.
1) Connect the drain hose, as described below.
The drain hose should
be inclined downward.

3) When drain hose requires extension, obtain


an extension hose commercially available.
Be sure to thermally insulate the indoor
section of the extension hose.

No trap is permitted.

Indoor unit
drain hose

18

6.

HA cord

Extension drain hose

Do not put the end


of the hose in water.
Heat insulation tube
(Field supply)

4) When connecting a rigid polyvinyl chloride pipe


(nominal diameter 13mm) directly to the drain
hose attached to the indoor unit as with embedded
piping work, use any commercially available drain
socket (nominal diameter 13mm) as a joint.
18

2) Remove the air filters and pour some water


into the drain pan to check the water flows
smoothly.

Drain hose supplied with


the indoor unit

Installation Manual

Commercially available drain


socket
(nominal diameter 13mm)

Commercially available rigid


polyvinyl chloride pipe
(nominal diameter 13mm)

123

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Refrigerant Piping Work


, install as described in the installation manual supplied with the Multi outdoor unit.

With a Multi indoor unit

1.

Flaring the pipe end.


1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing
downward so that the chips do not enter the
pipe.
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made.

(Cut exactly at
right angles.)

Remove burrs

Flaring
Set exactly at the position shown below.
A

Die

Flare tool for R410A

Conventional flare tool

Clutch-type

Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)

0-0.5mm

1.0-1.5mm

1.5-2.0mm

Check
Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.

The pipe end must


be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
flare nut is fitted.

WARNING
1) Do not use mineral oil on flared part.
2) Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
3) Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
4) Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
5) The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
6) Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.

2.

Refrigerant piping.
CAUTION
1) Use the flare nut fixed to the main unit. (To prevent cracking of the flare nut by aged deterioration.)
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for R410A.)
3) Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent damage to the flare nuts and gas leakage.
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]

[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration
oil to the inner
surface of the flare.

Do not apply refrigeration


oil to the outer surface.

Flare nut tightening torque

Torque wrench

Gas side

Spanner

Liquid side

1/2 inch

5/8 inch

1/4 inch

49.5-60.3N m

61.8-75.4N m

14.2-17.2N m

Flare nut

(505-615kgf cm) (630-770kgf cm) (144-175kgf cm)


Do not apply refrigeration
oil to the flare nut avoid
tightening with over torque.

Piping union
Flare nut

Wall
2-1. Caution on piping handling.
Be sure to
place a cap.
1) Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
If no flare cap is
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe Rain
available, cover
the flare mouth
bender for bending.
with tape to keep
dirt or water out.
2-2. Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.
When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
1) Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/(mh C))
Refrigerant gas pipes surface temperature reaches 110C max.
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature.
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation dimensions as below.

Gas side
50/60 class

71 class

O.D. 12.7mm O.D. 15.9mm

Liquid side
50/60/71 classs
O.D. 6.4mm

Minimum bend radius


40mm or more 50mm or more

30mm or more

Thickness 0.8mm Thickness 1.0mm


(C1220T-O)
(C1220T-O)

Thickness 0.8mm
(C1220T-O)

Gas pipe thermal insulation


50/60 class

71 class

I.D. 14-16mm I.D. 16-20mm

Liquid pipe thermal insulation


50/60/71 class

Liquid pipe

I.D. 8-10mm

Thickness 10mm Min.

3) Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.

124

Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe

Gas pipe
insulation

Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape

Drain hose

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Trial Operation and Testing


1.

Trial operation and testing.


1-1 Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling mode.
Select the lowest programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
Use the remote controller for trial operation as described below.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
3) For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.

1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and
parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for
some time after installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.

If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original
operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.

Trial operation from remote controller.


1) Press ON/OFF button to turn on the system.
2) Simultaneously press centre of TEMP button and MODE button.
3) Press MODE button twice.
( will appear on the display to indicate that Trial Operation mode is selected.)
4) Trial run mode terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial
operation, press ON/OFF button.

2.

Test items.
Test items

Symptom
(diagnostic display on RC)

Indoor and outdoor units are installed properly on


solid bases.

Fall, vibration, noise

No refrigerant gas leaks.

Incomplete cooling/heating function

Refrigerant gas and liquid pipes and indoor drain


hose extension are thermally insulated.

Water leakage

Draining line is properly installed.

Water leakage

System is properly earthed.

Electrical leakage

The specified wires are used for inter-unit wiring


connections.

Inoperative or burn damage

Indoor or outdoor units air intake or exhaust has


clear path of air. Stop valves are opened.

Incomplete cooling/heating function

Indoor unit properly receives remote controller


commands.

Inoperative

Check

3P192027-1D

Installation Manual

125

Indoor Units

3.4

EDSG18-936

Wall Mounted Type FTKS50B

Accessories
1

D Wireless remote controller

J Insulation tape

50 class

E Remote controller holder

K Operation manual

60, 71 class

L Installation manual

A Mounting plate
B Mounting plate

fixing screws
M4 25L

C Air purifying filter with

photocatalytic deodorizing
function

Fixing screws for remote


controller holder M3 20L

G AAA dry-cell batteries

Indoor unit fixing screws


H
M4 12L

Choosing a Site
Before choosing the installation site, obtain user approval.

1.

Indoor unit.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

The indoor unit should be sited in a place where:


the restrictions on installation specified in the indoor unit installation drawings are met,
both air intake and exhaust have clear paths met,
the unit is not in the path of direct sunlight,
the unit is away from the source of heat or steam,
there is no source of machine oil vapour (this may shorten indoor unit life),
cool air is circulated throughout the room,
the unit is away from electronic ignition type fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start type) as they may shorten the
remote control range,
8) the unit is at least 1 metre away from any television or radio set (unit may cause interference with the picture or sound).

2.

Wireless remote controller.


1) Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote control signals are properly
received by the indoor unit (within 7 metres).

Installation Tips
1. Removing packaging material

<When there is no work space because the unit is close to ceiling>

Removal method
Lightly lift.

Removal method

Place both hands under the center of the front


grille, and while pushing up, pull it toward you.

1) Install the front grille and firmly engage the upper hooks (3 locations).
2) Install 2screws(50class)or 3screws(60, 71class)of the front grill.
3) Install the air filter and then mount the front panel.

4. How to set the different


addresses
Push the
rotating shaft
of the front
panel into the
groove.

mark area
(3 locations)

Upper hook

Removal method
1) Remove front panel to remove the air filter.
2) Remove the front grille. (50 class 2 screws, 6071
class 3 screws)
Lightly pull the front
3) In front of the
mark of the front
grille toward you with
grille, there are 3 upper hooks. Lightly pull
one hand, and push
down on the hooks with
the front grille toward you with one hand,
the fingers of your other
hand. (3 locations)
and push down on the hooks with the
fingers of your other hand.

Push
down.

Upper hook

Upper hook

When two indoor units are


installed in one room, the
two wireless remote
controllers can be set for
different addresses.
1) In the same way as when
connecting to an HA
system, remove the metal
plate electrical wiring
cover.
2) Cut the address jumper
(JA).
3) Cut the address jumper
(J4).

Address

Installation method

JA Address
EXIST
CUT

1
2

J4

J4 Address
EXIST
CUT

126

2) Pull toward you.

Installation method

Hook fingers on the panel protrusions on the left and right of the main body,
and open until the panel stops. Slide the front panel sideways to disengage
the rotating shaft. Then pull the front
panel toward you to remove it.

3. Removing and installing front grille

1) Push up.

Be sure to wear protection gloves.


Lift the panel
slightly and pull
out.

2. Removing and installing front panel

Align the tabs of the front panel with the


grooves, and push all the way in. Then close
slowly. Push the center of the lower surface
of the panel firmly to engage the tabs.

Caution

JA

Grasp the packaging material which


is in the center of the front panel, with
one hand, and lightly pull the front
panel up and toward you.

Packaging material

1
2

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Indoor Unit Installation Drawings


A Mounting plate

M4 25L

The mounting plate


should be installed on a
wall which can support the
weight of the indoor unit.

The figure shows a 50 class unit.


(See Indoor Unit Installation 1. Installing the mounting
plate for details regarding 60 and 71 class units.)
Caulk
pipe hole
gap
with putty.

30 mm or more from ceiling

Front grille

Cut thermal insulation


pipe to an appropriate
length and wrap it with
tape, making sure that no
gap is left in the insulation
pipes cut line.

Wrap the insulation pipe with


the finishing tape from bottom
to top.

50 mm or more from walls


(on both sides)
Intelligent-eye sensor

Air filters

Only for 60 and


71 class units.

C Air purifying filter with photocatalytic


deodorizing function
50 class

Service lid
Opening service lid
Service lid is opening/closing type.
Opening method
1) Remove the service lid screws.
2) Lift the service lid upward.

Tabs (upper 3 locations)

Tabs (lower 2 locations)


60, 71 class
Tabs (upper 3 locations)

D Wireless
remote controller

Tabs (lower 3 locations)


Insert the upper side of the C Air purifying filter
with photocatalytic deodorizing function into the tabs
(upper 3 locations),push the lower side of the filters
up a little and into the tabs (lower 2 locations) (lower
3 locations).

F
(M3 X 20L)

Before screwing the remote


control holder to the wall,
make sure that control
signals are properly
received by indoor unit.
E
Remote
controller holder

Intelligent-eye sensor
Caution
1) Do not hit or violently push the Intelligent-eye sensor. This can lead to damage and malfunction.
2) Do not place large objects near the sensor. Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the
sensors detection area.

Installation Manual

127

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Indoor Unit Installation


1.

Installing the mounting plate.


The mounting plate should be installed on a wall which can support the weight of the indoor unit.
1) Temporarily secure the mounting plate to the wall, make sure that the panel is completely level, and mark
the boring points on the wall.
2) Secure the mounting plate to the wall with screws.
Recommended mounting-plate retention spots and Dimensions

60, 71 class
Recommended mounting - plate retention
spots (9 spots in all)
b Place a leveler on raised tab.
(Bolt size : M10)

(Bolt size : M10)

100

90

290

125

Use tape
measure
as shown.
Position the
end of tape
measure at

80
52

52

80
60

83

413.5

44.5

100

99.5

1050
Through-the-wall
Drain hose position hole 80mm

Keep here the piece cut out


from the unit for piping

Gas pipe end


Liquid pipe end

Leveling mounting plate


b Place a leveler
on raised tab.
(Bolt size : M10)
125

(Bolt size : M10)

100

90

Recommended
mounting - plate
retention spots
(6 spots in all)

290

55

50 class

a Dangle a weighted thread and align thread with vertical arrow.

80

Use tape
measure
as shown.
Position the
end of tape
measure at

52

52

80

60

75

100
248.5

98

44.5
795

Through-the-wall
Drain hose position hole 80mm

* The removed pipe port cover can be


kept in the mounting plate pocket.

Gas pipe end


Liquid pipe end

Removed pipe
port cover

A Mounting plate

128

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Indoor Unit Installation


2.

Boring a wall hole and installing wall embedded pipe.


For walls containing metal frame or metal board, be sure to use a
wall embedded pipe and wall cover in the feed-through hole to
prevent possible heat, electrical shock, or fire.
Be sure to caulk the gaps around the
Outside
pipes with caulking material to prevent Wall embedded pipeInside
(field supply)
Caulking
water leakage.
1) Bore a feed-through hole of 80 mm in
80
the wall so it has a down slope toward
Wall hole cover
(field supply)
the outside.
Wall embedded pipe
(field supply)
2) Insert a wall pipe into the hole.
3) Insert a wall cover into wall pipe.
4) After completing refrigerant piping, wiring, and drain piping, caulk
pipe hole gap with putty.

3.

Installing indoor unit.


3-1. Right-Side, Right-Back, or Right-Bottom Piping
1) Attach the drain hose to the
underside of the refrigerant pipes
with adhesive vinyl tape.
2) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and Remove pipe port cover
here for right-side piping
Right-bottom
drain hose together with
piping
insulation tape.
Remove pipe port cover
here for right-bottom piping

Right-back piping
Bind coolant pipe
and drain hose
together with
insulating tape.

A Mounting plate

3) Pass the drain hose and


refrigerant pipes through the wall
hole, then set the indoor unit on
the mounting plate hooks by
using the markings at the top of
the indoor unit as a guide.

4) Open the front grille, then


Hang indoor units hook here.
open the service lid. (Refer to
Installation tips)
A Mounting plate
5) Pass the interconnecting
When stripping the
wires from the outdoor unit
ends of interconnecting
in advance, bind
Interconnecting
through the feed-through wall wires
right ends of wires with
wires
insulating tape.
hole and then through the
Wire guide
back of the indoor unit. Pull
them through the front side.
Bend the ends of tie wires upward in advance for easier work.
(If the interconnecting wire ends are to be stripped first, bundle
wire ends with adhesive tape.)
6) Press the indoor units bottom panel with both hands to set it
on the mounting plate hooks. Make sure the wires do not catch
on the edge of the indoor unit.
3-2. Left-Side, Left-Back, or Left Bottom Piping
1) Attach the drain hose to the
underside of the refrigerant
pipes with adhesive vinyl
tape.

Remove pipe
port cover
here for leftside piping

Remove pipe port cover here for left-bottom piping

Left-side
piping
Left-back
piping

Left-bottom piping

2) Be sure to connect the drain


hose to the drain port in place
of a drain plug.

Installation Manual

How to set drain plug


ap

No g

Do not apply lubricating


oil (refrigerant machine
oil) when inserting
Application of causes
deterioration and drain
leakage of the plug
Insert a hexagon wrench (4 mm)

129

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Indoor Unit Installation


3) Shape the refrigerant pipe along the pipe path marking on the
mounting plate.
4) Pass drain hose and refrigerant pipes through the wall hole,
then set the indoor unit on mounting plate hooks, using the
markings at the top of indoor unit as a guide.

Drain
hose

A Mounting plate

Caulk this hole


with putty or
caulking material.

Bind with plastic


tape.

Wrap insulating tape around the bent portion


of refrigerant pipe.
Overlap at least half the width of the tape
with each turn.

5) Pull in the interconnecting wires.


6) Connect the inter-unit piping.
7) Wrap the refrigerant pipes and drain hose together with insulation
tape as right figure, in case of setting the drain hose through the back
of the indoor unit.
8) While exercising care so that the
A
Mounting
Drain hose
plate
interconnecting wires do not catch
indoor unit, press the bottom edge of
Refrigerant
pipes
indoor unit with both hands until it is
firmly caught by the mounting plate
Bottom frame
hooks. Secure indoor unit to the
H M4 12L (2 point)
mounting plate with screws (M4 12L).
3-3. Wall Embedded Piping
Follow the instructions given under
Left-Side, Left-Back, or Left Bottom Piping
1) Insert the drain hose to this
depth so it wont be pulled out
of the drain pipe.

4.

Insert drain hose


to this depth so
it wont be pulled
out of drain pipe.

50 mm
or more

Outer wall

Inner wall

Drain hose
Vinyl chloride
drain pipe
(VP-30)

Wiring.
1) Strip wire ends (15 mm).
Terminal block
2) Match wire colours with terminal
Electrical component box
numbers on indoor and outdoor units
Wire retainer
Firmly secure wire retainer
terminal blocks and firmly screw wires
so that wires sustain no
external stress.
to the corresponding terminals.
Shape wires so that the service
3) Connect the earth wires to the
Use the specified wire type.
lid will fit securely.
corresponding terminals.
4) Pull wires to make sure that they are securely latched up, then
retain wires with wire retainer.
5) In case of connecting to an adapter system. Run the remote control
cable and attach the S21 connector as the illustration above.
6) Shape the wires so that the service lid fits securely, then close
service lid.
Firmly fix the wires with
the terminal screws.
Outdoor unit
When wire length exceeds
10 m, use 2.0-mm wires.

Indoor
unit

1 23

LN

1
2
3

Safety
breaker
20A
Firmly fix the wires with
the terminal screws.

H05VV

Earth leakage
circuit breaker

Power
supply
50Hz 220V - 240V
60Hz 220V - 230V

Earth

Warning
Do not use tapped wires, stand wires, extensioncords, or starbust connections,
as they may cause overtheating, electrical shock,or fire.

130

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Indoor Unit Installation


5.

When connecting to an HA system.


1)
2)
3)
4)

Remove the front grille. (50 class 2 screws, 6071 class 3 screws)
Remove the electrical wiring box. (1 screw)
Remove the metal plate electrical wiring cover. (4 tabs)
Attach the connection cord to the S21 connector and pull the
harness out through the notched part in the figure.
5) Replace the electrical wiring cover as it was, and pull the harness
around, as shown in the figure

HA cord
Tab

Push

Notched part

Tab
Push

Slide

Main body

HA connector
(S21)

Metal plate
electrical cover
Screw
3) Remove the metal
plate electrical
wiring cover.

6.

Push
Tab

4) Attach the connection cord to


the S21 connector and pull the
harness out through the
notched part in the figure.

5) Replace the electrical


wiring cover as it was,
and pull the harness
around, as shown
in the figure.

Drain piping.
The drain hose should
be inclined downward.

1) Connect the drain hose, as described


below.

No trap is permitted.
Do not put the end
of the hose in water.

3) When drain hose requires extension,


obtain an extension hose commercially
available.
Be sure to thermally insulate the indoor
section of the extension hose.

Indoor unit
drain hose

18

2) Remove the air filters and pour some


water into the drain pan to check the water
flows smoothly.

Extension drain hose

Heat insulation tube


(Field supply)

18

4) When connecting a rigid polyvinyl chloride pipe (nominal diameter


13 mm) directly to the drain hose attached to the indoor unit as with
embedded piping work, use any commercially available drain
socket (nominal diameter 13 mm) as a joint.

Drain hose supplied with


the indoor unit

Installation Manual

Commercially available drain


socket
(nominal diameter 13 mm)

Commercially available rigid


polyvinyl chloride pipe
(nominal diameter 13 mm)

131

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Refrigerant piping work


1.

Flaring the pipe end.

Check

1) Cut the pipe end with pipe cutterer.


2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing
downward so that the chips do not enter the pipe.
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made.

(Cut exactly at
right angles.)

Flares inner
surface must
be flaw-free.

Remove burrs

The pipe end must


be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
Make sure that the
flare nut is fitted.

Flaring
Set exactly at the position shown below.
A

Die

Flare tool for R410A

Conventional flare tool

Clutch-type

Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)

0 ~ 0.5 mm

1.0 ~ 1.5 mm

1.5 ~ 2.0 mm

Warning
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

2.

Do not use mineral oil on flared part.


Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.

Refrigerant piping.
Caution

1) Use the flare nut fixed to the main unit. (To prevent cracking of the flare nut by aged deterioration.)
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for R410A.)
3) Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent damage to the flare nuts and gas leakage.
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with
the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil]
Do not apply refrigeration
oil to the outer surface.

[Tighten]
Apply refrigeration oil to the
inner surface of the flare.

Flare nut tightening torque

Torque wrench

Gas side
1/2 inch

Flare nut

Liquid side
1/4 inch

5/8 inch

14.2-17.2N m
49.5-60.3N m
61.8-75.4N m
(505-615kgf cm) (630-770kgf cm) (144-175kgf cm)

Spanner

Piping union

Do not apply refrigeration oil to the flare


nut avoid tightening with over torque.

Flare nut

2-1. Caution on Piping Handling


1) Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
Rain
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe
bender for bending.
2-2. Selection of Copper and Heat Insulation materials
When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
1) Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045
kcal/mhC)
Refrigerant gas pipes surface temperature reaches 110 C max.
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature.
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide
insulation dimensions as below.
Liquid side

Gas side

Gas pipe thermal insulation

Wall

Be sure to
place a cap.
If no flare cap is
available, cover
the flare mouth
with tape to keep
dirt or water out.
Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe

Liquid pipe

Gas pipe
insulation

Liquid pipe
insulation
Finishing tape

Drain hose

Liquid pipe thermal insulation

50/60 class

71 class

50/60/71 class

50/60 class

71 class

50/60/71 class

O.D. 12.7mm

O.D. 15.9mm

O.D. 6.4mm

I.D. 14-16mm

I.D. 16-20mm

I.D. 8-10mm

Minimum bend radius


40mm or more

50mm or more

Thickness 0.8mm Thickness 1.0mm


(C1220T-O)
(C1220T-O)

Thickness 10mm Min.

30mm or more
Thickness 0.8mm
(C1220T-O)

3) Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.

132

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Trial Operation and Testing


1.

Trial Operation and Testing.


1-1 Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
For Heat pump
In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest
programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C
to 24C in heating mode).
3) For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.

For Cooling only


Select the lowest programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
Use the remote control for trial operation as described below.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
3) For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.

1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the Operation Manual to ensure that all functions and
parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for
some time after installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.

If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the
original operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.

2.

Trial Operation from Remote Controller.


1) Press ON/OFF button to turn on the system.
2) Simultaneously press centor of TEMP button and MODE button.
3) Press MODE button twice.
( will appear on the display to indicate that Trial Operation mode is selected.)
4) Trial run mode terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial
operation, press ON/OFF button.

3.

Test Items.
Test Items

Symptom
(diagnostic display on RC)

Indoor and outdoor units are installed properly on


solid bases.

Fall, vibration, noise

No refrigerant gas leaks.

Incomplete cooling/heating function

Refrigerant gas and liquid pipes and indoor drain


hose extension are thermally insulated.

Water leakage

Draining line is properly installed.

Water leakage

System is properly earthed.

Electrical leakage

The specified wires are used for interconnecting


wire connections.

Inoperative or burn damage

Indoor or outdoor units air intake or exhaust has


clear path of air. Shut-off valves are opened.

Incomplete cooling/heating function

Indoor unit properly receives remote control


commands.

Inoperative

Check

3P098801-18R

Installation Manual

133

Indoor Units

3.5

EDSG18-936

Duct Connected Type FDKS25/35CA

ACCESSORIES
Clamp metal
1 pc.

Insulation
for fitting

Washer for
Drain hose hanging bracket

Sealing pad
Large and small
3 pcs.
1 each
(only for 50-60 type)

1 each

1 pc.

1 pc.

Sealing
material

Clamp

2 pcs.

6 pcs.

8 pcs.

Screws for
Washer
fixing plate duct flanges
1 set

1 set

2 large
for gas pipe

Large

for liquid pipe

Small

Air fillter
1 pc.

Hanger (right)
1 small insulation
4 pcs.

Stored in outlet vent

Wireless
Remote controller
AAA
remote controller
holder
dry-cell batteries
1 pc.

1 pc.

1 set

24 pcs.

Receiver kit
1 pc.

1 pc.

Mounting frame

Decorative
cover

2 pcs.
Screws
M4 25

[ Other ]
Operation
manual
Installation
manual

2 pcs.

CHOOSING A SITE
Before choosing the installation site, obtain user approval.

Caution
When moving the unit during or after unpacking, make sure to lift it by holding its lifting lugs. Do not exert any pressure on
other parts, especially the refrigerant piping, drain piping and flange parts.
Wear protective gears (gloves and so on) when installing the unit.
If you think the humidity inside the ceiling might exceed 30C and RH80%, reinforce the insulation on the unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation so that the thickness is more than 10mm and fits inside the ceiling opening.

Optimum air distribution is ensured.


The air passage is not blocked.
Condensate can drain properly.
The ceiling is strong enough to bear the weight of the indoor unit.
A false ceiling does not seem to be at an incline.
Sufficient clearance for maintenance and servicing is ensured.
Piping between the indoor and outdoor units is within the allowable limits.
(Refer to the installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
T he indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring is at least 1
meter away from televisions and radios. This prevents image interference and noise in
electrical appliances. (Noise may be generated depending on the conditions under
which the electric wave is generated, even if a one-meter allowance is maintained.)
Use suspension bolts to install the unit. Check whether or not the ceiling is
strong enough to support the weight of the unit. If there is a risk that the
ceiling is not strong enough, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the carton box for installation. Refer to it to check
for points requiring reinforcing.) Select the *H dimension such that a downward
slope of at least 1/100 is ensured as indicated in DRAIN PIPING WORK.
The installation pitch is listed on the packing material, and should be
checked when deciding whether to reinforce the location or not.

134

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

CHOOSING A SITE
Select the signal receiver mounting location according to the following conditions:
Install the signal receiver, which has a built-in temperature sensor, near the intake vent
where there is convection of air and it can get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature.
If the intake vent is in another room or the unit cannot be installed near the intake vent for any
other reason, install it 1.5m above the floor on a wall where there is convection.
In order to get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature, install the
signal receiver in a location where it is not exposed directly to cold or hot air
from the air discharge grille or to direct sunlight.
Since the receiver has a built-in light receptor to receive signals from the wireless remote
controller, do not mount it in a location where the signal may be blocked by a curtain, etc.

Caution
If the signal receiver is not installed in a location where there is convection of air, it may be unable to get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature.

Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote controller signals are properly received
by the indoor unit (within 4 metres).

For outdoor unit installation, see the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION


Relation of the unit to the suspension bolt positions.

620
500

Control box

Open the installation hole. (Pre-set ceilings)


Once the installation hole is opened in the ceiling where the unit
is to be installed, pass refrigerant piping, drain piping,
transmission wiring, and remote controller wiring (unneeded if
using a wireless remote controller) to the units piping and
wiring holes.See REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, DRAIN
PIPING WORK, and WIRING.
After opening the ceiling hole, make sure ceiling is level if
needed. It might be necessary to reinforce the ceiling frame to
prevent shaking.Consult an architect or carpenter for details.

Air inlet

<SERVICE SPACE>
620

(See the technical documentation for the range of the external


static pressure setting.)

Air discharge

Ceiling

Make sure the range of the units external static


pressure is not exceeded.

(length : mm)

Suspension
bolt pitch

(Suspension bolt pitch )

Install the inspection opening on the control box side where


maintenance and inspection of the control box are easy. Install the
inspection opening also in the lower part of the unit.

450450
(Inspection
opening size)

Model
25 35 50 type
60 type

(length: mm)
A
B
900
940
1100
1140

Allow view
Inspection door
(Ceiling opening)

Install the suspension bolts.


(Use W3/8 to M10 suspension bolts.)
Use a hole-in-anchor, sunken insert, sunken anchor for existing
ceilings, and a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other part to be
procured in the field to reinforce the ceiling to bearing the weight
of the unit. (Refer to Fig.)

Mount chamber lid and air filter


(accessory).
For bottom intake, replace the chamber lid
in the procedure listed in Fig.
(1)Remove the chamber lid. (7 locations)
(2)Reattached the removed chamber lid in
the orientation shown in Fig. (7 locations)

Installation Manual

135

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

(3)Attach sealing pad as shown in the figure below. (Stored in outlet vent)
(In order to take in the air inside the ceiling, and when not taking in air from outdoor air, it is not necessary to stick.)
Attach the sealing pad (accessory) to
the plate metal sections which are not
covered by anti-sweat material.
Make sure there are no gaps between
the different pieces of sealing pad.

(4)Attach the hanger (right) insulation to the right hanger. (Stored in outlet vent)
(See the below figure for the sticking base line.)

(5)Attach the air filter (accessory) in the manner shown in the diagram.

When two indoor units are installed in one room, one of the two wireless remote controllers can be easily
set for another addresses.

136

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION


As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix
it securely by using a nut and washer from the upper and lower
sides of the hanger bracket. (Refer to Fig.)
[ PRECAUTION ]
Since the unit uses a plastic drain pan, prevent welding spatter
and other foreign substances from entering the outlet hole
during installation.

Adjust the height of the unit.


Check the unit is horizontally level.

Caution
Make sure the unit is installed level using a level or a plastic tube filled with water. In using a plastic tube instead of a level, adjust
the top surface of the unit to the surface of the water at both ends of the plastic tube and adjust the unit horizontally. (One thing to
watch out for in particular is if it is installed so that the slope is not in the direction of the drain piping, as this might cause leaking.)

Tighten the upper nut.


Mounting the receiver.
Mount the receiver as shown below.

1 Press the receiver into the


mounting frame.

2 Mount the completed


assembly using two screws.

3 Press the decorative cover into


the mounting frame.

Note) Mount the Remote controller cord far enough away from strong electrical wires (such as distribution wires for
electrical lights, air conditioners, etc.) and from weak electrical wires (such as wires for telephones, intercoms, etc.).

OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION


Install as described in the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

Installation Manual

137

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK


See the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

1.

FLARING THE PIPE END


1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing downward
so that the chips do not enter the pipe.
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made.

Warning
Do not use mineral oil on flared part.
Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.

2.

REFRIGERANT PIPING
1) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration machine oil on both
inner and outer surfaces of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for
R410A)
2) Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4
turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent
damage to the flare nuts and escaping gas.

Flare nut tightening torque


Gas side
3/8 inch
1/2 inch
32.7~39.9Nm
49.5~60.3Nm
(333~407kgfcm)
(505~615kgfcm)

Liquid side
1/4 inch
14.2~17.2Nm
(144~175kgfcm)

Caution
Overtightening may damage the flare and cause leaks.

138

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK


3) After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no
gas leak.

4) After checking for gas leaks, be sure to insulate the pipe connections.
Insulate using the insulation for fitting included with the liquid and gas pipes. Besides, make sure the insulation for fitting
on the liquid and gas piping has its seams facing up.
(Tighten both edges with clamp.)
For the gas piping, wrap the medium sealing pad over the insulation for fitting (flare nut part).

Caution
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping may cause
condensation or burns if touched.

Cautions on Pipe Handling


Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
(Tighten both edges with clamp.)
All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe bender for
bending.
(Bending radius should be 30 to 40 mm or larger.)

Selection of Copper and Heat Insulation materials


When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045 kcal/mhC)
Refrigerant gas pipes surface temperature reaches 110C max.
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature.
Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation dimensions as below.

Also, when subject to high humidity, heat insulation of the refrigerant


piping (the unit piping and branch piping) must be further reinforced.
Reinforce the insulation when installing the unit near bathrooms,
kitchens, and other similar locations.
Refer to the following:
30C, more than 75% RH: 20 mm Min. in thickness
If the insulation is not sufficient, condensation may form on the surface
of the insulation.
Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.

Installation Manual

139

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

DRAIN PIPING WORK


Caution
Make sure all water is out before making the duct connection.

Install the drain piping.


Make sure the drain works properly.
The diameter of the drain pipe should be greater than or equal to the
diameter of the connecting pipe (vinyl tube; pipe size: 20 mm; outer
dimension: 26 mm).

Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at


least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from forming.

Caution
Water accumulating in the drain piping can cause the drain to clog.

To keep the drain tube from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5 m.
Use the drain hose and the metal clamp. Insert the drain hose fully into the drain socket and firmly tighten the metal clamp with
the upper part of the tape on the hose end. Tighten the metal clamp until the screw head is less than 4 mm from the hose.
The two areas below should be insulated because condensation may form there causing water to leak.
Drain piping passing indoors
Large sealing pad
Clamp metal
Drain sockets
(attached)
(attached)
Referring the figure below, insulate the
metal clamp and drain hose using the
Clamp metal
included large sealing pad.
(attached)

Tape

Drain hose

4mm

PRECAUTIONS
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the
indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
Do not twist or bend the drain hose, so that excessive force is not applied to it.
(This type of treatment may cause leaking.)

After piping work is finished, check drainage flows smoothly.


Gradually insert approximately 1,000 cc of water into the drain pan to
check drainage in the manner described below.
Gradually pour approximately 1,000 cc of water from the outlet
hole into the drain pan to check drainage.
Check the drainage.

140

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

INSTALLING THE DUCT


Connect the duct supplied in the field.
Air inlet side
Attach the duct and intake-side flange (field supply).
Connect the flange to the main unit with accessory screws (in 20 or 24 positions).
Wrap the intake-side flange and duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.

Caution
When attaching a duct to the intake side, be sure also to attach an air filter inside the air passage on the intake side. (Usean air
filter whose dust collecting efficiency is at least 50% in a gravimetric technique.)

Outlet side
Connect the duct according to the inside of the outlet-side flange.
Wrap the outlet-side flange and the duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.

Caution
Be sure to insulate the duct to prevent condensation from forming. (Material: glass wool or polyethylene foam, 25 mm thick)
Use electric insulation between the duct and the wall when using metal ducts to pass metal laths of the net or fence shape or
metal plating into wooden buildings.

Installation Manual

141

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

WIRING
See the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

HOW TO CONNECT WIRINGS.


Wire only after removing the control box lid as shown in the Fig.
Control box lid
Power supply wiring
Earth wire

Wiring Diagram
(Rear)
Remote controller wiring

Make sure to let a wire go through a wire penetration area.


After wiring, seal the wire and wire penetration area to
prevent moisture and small creatures from the outside.
Wrap the strong and weak electric lines with the sealing
material as shown in the figure below.
(Otherwise, moisture or small creatures such as insects from
the outside may cause short-circuit inside the control box.)
Attach securely so that there are no gaps.
Sealing material
(attached)

Wiring
through hole

(Control box side)


Wiring
Wire

Clasp

(Power supply side)

Clamp
(for fixing in place)
(attached)

Outside
unit

Inside
unit

[How to adhere it]

Caution
When clamping the wiring, use the included clamping material as shown in the Fig. to prevent outside pressure being exerted
on the wiring connections and clamp firmly.
When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover
firmly. When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller wiring) and strong wiring (earth wire and power supply wiring) at least
50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together. Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.

[ PRECAUTIONS ]
See also the Electrical Wiring Diagram Nameplate when wiring the unit for electrical power.

[ Connecting electrical wiring ]

Terminal block (4P)

Power supply wiring and Earth wire


Remove the control box lid.
Next, pull the wires into the unit through the wiring through hole and
connect to the power wiring terminal block (4P).

Power supply wiring


Earth wire
Wiring through hole
Indoor PCboard
(ASSY)

Power supply wiring


Earth wire
Clamp (for fixing in place)
(attached)

Warning
Do not use tapped wires, stand wires, extensioncords, or starbust connections, as they may cause overheating, electrical shock, or fire.

10

142

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

TRIAL OPERATION AND TESTING


(1) Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
(2) Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.

3
For Heat pump.
In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest programmable temperature.
Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C to 24C in
heating mode).
For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
For Cooling only.
Select the lowest programmable temperature.
Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
Use the remote control for trial operation as described below.
After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
For protection, the unit disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
(3) Carry out the test operation in accordance with the Operation Manual to ensure that all functions and parts, are working
properly.
* The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for some time after
installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.
* If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original operation mode when
the circuit breaker is turned on again.

11
3P132003-2N

Installation Manual

143

Indoor Units

3.6

EDSG18-936

Duct Connected Type FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA

ACCESSORIES
Insulation
for fitting

Clamp metal
1 pc.

1 each

Washer for
Drain hose hanging bracket

Sealing pad
Large and small
3 pcs.
1 each
(only for 50-60 type)

1 pc.

Sealing
material

Clamp

2 pcs.

6 pcs.

8 pcs.

1 pc.

Washer
Screws for
fixing plate duct flanges
1 set

1 set

4 pcs.

24 pcs.

2 large
for gas pipe

Large

for liquid pipe

Small

Air fillter

Hanger (right)
1 small insulation
Stored in outlet vent

Wireless
Remote controller
AAA
remote controller
holder
dry-cell batteries

1 pc.

1 pc.

1 pc.

Receiver kit

1 set

1 pc.
Mounting frame

1 pc.
Decorative
cover

[ Other ]

2 pcs.

Operation
manual

Screws
M4 25

Installation
manual

2 pcs.

CHOOSING A SITE
Before choosing the installation site, obtain user approval.
Indoor unit

Caution
When moving the unit during or after unpacking, make sure to lift it by holding its lifting lugs. Do not exert any pressure on
other parts, especially the refrigerant piping, drain piping and flange parts.
Wear protective gears (gloves and so on) when installing the unit.
If you think the humidity inside the ceiling might exceed 30C and RH80%, reinforce the insulation on the unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation so that the thickness is more than 10mm and fits inside the ceiling opening.

Use suspension bolts to install the unit. Check whether or not the ceiling is
strong enough to support the weight of the unit. If there is a risk that the
ceiling is not strong enough, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the carton box for installation. Refer to it to check
for points requiring reinforcing.) Select the *H dimension such that a downward
slope of at least 1/100 is ensured as indicated in DRAIN PIPING WORK.
The installation pitch is listed on the packing material, and should be
checked when deciding whether to reinforce the location or not.

300
or more
Maintenance
space

20 or more
Ceiling

If there is
no ceiling

Control box

*H=
2500 or more 240 or more

Optimum air distribution is ensured.


The air passage is not blocked.
Condensate can drain properly.
The ceiling is strong enough to bear the weight of the indoor unit.
A false ceiling does not seem to be at an incline.
Sufficient clearance for maintenance and servicing is ensured.
Piping between the indoor and outdoor units is within the allowable limits.
(Refer to the installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
The indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring is at least
1 meter away from televisions and radios. This prevents image interference and
noise in electrical appliances. (Noise may be generated depending on the conditions
under which the electric wave is generated, even if a one-meter allowance is
maintained.)

200

Floor surface
(length : mm)

144

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

CHOOSING A SITE
Select the signal receiver mounting location according to the following conditions:
Install the signal receiver, which has a built-in temperature sensor, near the intake vent
where there is convection of air and it can get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature.
If the intake vent is in another room or the unit cannot be installed near the intake vent for any
other reason, install it 1.5m above the floor on a wall where there is convection.
In order to get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature, install the
signal receiver in a location where it is not exposed directly to cold or hot air
from the air discharge grille or to direct sunlight.
Since the receiver has a built-in light receptor to receive signals from the wireless remote
controller, do not mount it in a location where the signal may be blocked by a curtain, etc.

Air discharge grille:


Wooden or plastic grille is recommended
because condensation may occur
depending on humidity conditions.

Caution
If the signal receiver is not installed in a location where there is convection of air, it may be unable to get an accurate reading of the rooms temperature.
Wireless remote controller
Turn on all the fluorescent lamps in the room, if any, and find the site where remote controller signals are properly received
by the indoor unit (within 4 metres).
Outdoor unit
For outdoor unit installation, see the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION


Relation of the unit to the suspension bolt positions.

620

Install the inspection opening on the control box side where


maintenance and inspection of the control box are easy. Install
the inspection opening also in the lower part of the unit.

Air inlet

620

450450
(Inspection
opening size)

Model
25 35 type
50 type
60 type

(length: mm)
B
A
700
740
900
940
1100
1140

Install the suspension bolts.


(Use W3/8 to M10 suspension bolts.)
Use a hole-in-anchor, sunken insert, sunken anchor for existing
ceilings, and a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other part to be
procured in the field to reinforce the ceiling to bearing the weight
of the unit. (Refer to Fig.)

SERVICE SPACE

Control box

Open the installation hole. (Pre-set ceilings)


Once the installation hole is opened in the ceiling where the unit
is to be installed, pass refrigerant piping, drain piping,
transmission wiring, and remote controller wiring (unneeded if
using a wireless remote controller) to the units piping and
wiring holes.See REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, DRAIN
PIPING WORK, and WIRING.
After opening the ceiling hole, make sure ceiling is level if
needed. It might be necessary to reinforce the ceiling frame to
prevent shaking.Consult an architect or carpenter for details.

Air discharge

Ceiling
(Suspension bolt pitch )

(See the technical documentation for the range of the external


static pressure setting.)

(length : mm)

Suspension
bolt pitch

Make sure the range of the units external static


pressure is not exceeded.

500

Allow view
Inspection door
(Ceiling opening)

Ceiling slab
Anchor bolt
Long nut or turn-buckle
Suspension bolt
Indoor unit
Note: All the above parts are field supplied.

Installation Manual

145

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Mount chamber lid and air filter

Protection net
(1)
(2)
(accessory).
Air inlet
For bottom intake, replace the chamber lid and
the protection net (only for 25-35 type) in the
procedure listed in Fig.
Chamber lid
(1)Remove the protection net.
Chamber lid
Protection net
(only for 25-35 type, 6 locations)
Remove the chamber lid. (7 locations)
Air discharge
Air inlet
Air discharge
(2)Reattach the removed chamber lid in the
orientation shown in Fig.(7 locations)
Reattach the removed protection net in the
orientation shown in Fig. (only for 25-35 type, 6 locations)
Refer to Fig.for the direction of the protection net.
(3)Attach sealing pad as shown in the figure below. (Stored in outlet vent) (only for 50-60 type)
(In order to take in the air inside the ceiling, and when not taking in air from outdoor air, it is not necessary to stick.)
Attach the sealing pad (accessory) to
Sealing pad (Small)
Sealing pad (Small)
the plate metal sections which are not
(3)
(accessory)
(accessory)
covered by anti-sweat material.
Air inlet
Make sure there are no gaps between
the different pieces of sealing pad.

Air inlet
Air
discharge

Sealing pad (Large)


(accessory)
Anti-sweat material
included with the product

Sealing pad
(Large)
(accessory)

Air
discharge

Anti-sweat material
included with the product

For rear intake type

For bottom intake type

(4)Attach the hanger (right) insulation to the right hanger. (Stored in outlet vent)
(See the below figure for the sticking base line.)

Hanger bracket (right)

Hanger (right) insulation


ine

el

as

gb

Slit

ARROW VIEW

in
tick

(5)Attach the air filter (accessory) in the manner shown in the diagram.

In case of bottom side

In case of back side


Main unit

Force

Filter
Force

Attach the
filter to the
main unit
while
pushing
down on
the bends.
(2 bends for
25-35 type,
3 bends for
50-60 type)

146

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION


When two indoor units are installed in one room, one of the two wireless remote controllers can be easily
set for another addresses.

PCB in the indoor unit


Cut the jumper
JA on PCB.

Wireless remote controller


Cut the jumper J4.
1

J4

Wireless
remote
controller

JA

ADDRESS

JB
JC

ADDRESS: JA
EXIST 1
CUT
2

J4
ADDRESS
EXIST
1
CUT
2

INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION


As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix
it securely by using a nut and washer from the upper and lower
sides of the hanger bracket. (Refer to Fig.)

[ Securing the hanger bracket ]

[ How to secure washers ]

Part to be procured
in the field
Washer for
hanging bracket
(accessory)

[ PRECAUTION ]
Since the unit uses a plastic drain pan, prevent welding spatter
and other foreign substances from entering the outlet hole
during installation.

Hanger
bracket

Insert
below washer
Washer
fixing plate
(accessory)

Tighten
(double nut)

Adjust the height of the unit.


Check the unit is horizontally level.

Level
Vinyl tube

Caution
Make sure the unit is installed level using a level or a plastic tube filled with water.In using a plastic tube instead of a level ,adjust
the top surface of the unit to the surface of the water at both ends of the plastic tube and adjust the unit horizontally.(One thing to
watch out for in particular is if it is installed so that the slope is not in the direction of the drain piping,as this might cause leaking.)

Tighten the upper nut.


Mounting the receiver.
Mount the receiver as shown below.

1 Press the receiver into the


mounting frame.

2 Mount the completed


assembly using two screws.

3 Press the decorative cover into


the mounting frame.

Note) Mount the Remote controller cord far enough away from strong electrical wires (such as distribution wires for
electrical lights, air conditioners, etc.) and from weak electrical wires (such as wires for telephones, intercoms, etc.).

Installation Manual

147

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

For heat pump: If your feet feel cold when using the heating function, it is
recommended that the air discharge grille shown at below be
attached.
45
(Adjustable angle)

OUTDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION


Install as described in the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK


See the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.

1.

FLARING THE PIPE END


1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing downward
so that the chips do not enter the pipe.
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe.
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made.

(Cut exactly at right angles.)

Remove burrs

Flaring
Set exactly at the position shown below.
A

Die

Flare tool for R410A

Conventional flare tool

Clutch-type

Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)

0-0.5mm

1.0-1.5mm

1.5-2.0mm

Check
Flares inner surface
must be flaw-free.

The pipe end must


be evenly flared in a
perfect circle.

Make sure that the


flare nut is fitted.

Warning
Do not use mineral oil on flared part.
Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.

2.

REFRIGERANT PIPING
1) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration machine oil on both
inner and outer surfaces of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for
R410A)
2) Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4
turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent
damage to the flare nuts and escaping gas.

Flare nut tightening torque


Gas side
3/8 inch
1/2 inch
32.7-39.9Nm
49.5-60.3Nm
(333-407kgfcm)
(505-615kgfcm)

Liquid side
1/4 inch
14.2-17.2Nm
(144-175kgfcm)

Caution
Overtightening may damage the flare and cause leaks.

148

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK


3) After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no
gas leak.

Coat here with


refrigeration machine oil

Torque wrench

Spanner
Flare nut
Piping union

4) After checking for gas leaks, be sure to insulate the pipe connections.
Insulate using the insulation for fitting included with the liquid and gas pipes. Besides, make sure the insulation for fitting
on the liquid and gas piping has its seams facing up.
(Tighten both edges with clamp.)
For the gas piping, wrap the medium sealing pad over the insulation for fitting (flare nut part).
Gas Piping Insulation Procedure
Piping insulation
material (main unit)
Attach to base

Insulation for fitting


(accessory)

Small sealing pad


(accessory)
Main unit

Main unit
Clamp
(accessory)

Liquid Piping Insulation Procedure

Measure the length of the gas


pipe as you will have to cover
it with the sealing tape.

Flare nut connection


Turn seams up

Piping insulation material


(Field supplied)

Insulation for fitting


(accessory)

Piping insulation
material (main unit)

Flare nut connection

Attach to base

Liquid pipe
Gas pipe

Turn seams up

Main unit
Clamp (accessory)

Wrap the sealing


tape around the
gas pipe.

Piping insulation material


(Field supplied)

Caution
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping may cause
condensation or burns if touched.

Cautions on Pipe Handling

Wall

Be sure to
place a cap.

Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
(Tighten both edges with clamp.)
All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe bender for
bending.
(Bending radius should be 30 to 40mm or larger.)

Rain

If no flare cap is
available, cover
the flare mouth
with tape to keep
dirt or water out.

Selection of Copper and Heat Insulation materials


When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/mhC)
Refrigerant gas pipes surface temperature reaches 110C max.
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature.
Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation dimensions as below.

Gas side

Liquid side

25/35 class

50/60 class

O.D. 9.5mm

O.D. 12.7mm

O.D. 6.4mm

Gas pipe thermal insulation


25/35 class

50/60 class

Liquid pipe
thermal insulation

I.D. 12-15mm

I.D. 14-16mm

I.D. 8-10mm

Thickness 0.8mm
Also, when subject to high humidity, heat insulation of the refrigerant
piping (the unit piping and branch piping) must be further reinforced.
Reinforce the insulation when installing the unit near bathrooms,
kitchens, and other similar locations.
Refer to the following:
30C, more than 75% RH: 20mm Min. in thickness
If the insulation is not sufficient, condensation may form on the surface
of the insulation.
Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.

Thickness 10mm Min.


Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe

Gas pipe
insulation
Finishing tape

Liquid pipe

Liquid pipe
insulation
Drain hose

Installation Manual

149

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

DRAIN PIPING WORK


Caution
Make sure all water is out before making the duct connection.

Install the drain piping.


Drain pipe connection hole

Make sure the drain works properly.


The diameter of the drain pipe should be greater than or equal to the
diameter of the connecting pipe (vinyl tube; pipe size: 20mm; outer
dimension: 26mm).
Refrigerant pipes

Connect the drain pipe after


removing the rubber cap and
insulation tubing attached to
the connection hole.

Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at


least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from forming.

Caution
Water accumulating in the drain piping can cause the drain to clog.

To keep the drain tube from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5m.
Use the drain hose and the metal clamp. Insert the drain hose fully into the drain socket and firmly tighten the metal clamp with
the upper part of the tape on the hose end. Tighten the metal clamp until the screw head is less than 4mm from the hose.
The two areas below should be insulated because condensation may form there causing water to leak.
Drain piping passing indoors
Large sealing pad
Clamp metal
Drain sockets
(accessory)
(accessory)
Referring the figure below, insulate the
metal clamp and drain hose using the
Clamp metal
included large sealing pad.
(accessory)

Tape

Drain hose

4mm

PRECAUTIONS
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the
indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
Do not twist or bend the drain hose, so that excessive force is not applied to it.
(This type of treatment may cause leaking.)

After piping work is finished, check drainage flows smoothly.


Gradually insert approximately 1L of water into the drain pan to check
drainage in the manner described below.
Gradually pour approximately 1L of water from the outlet hole into
the drain pan to check drainage.
Check the drainage.

Air outlet
Portable pump

Bucket

Refrigerant pipes
Drain outlet

150

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

INSTALLING THE DUCT


Connect the duct supplied in the field.
Air inlet side
Attach the duct and intake-side flange (field supply).
Connect the flange to the main unit with accessory screws (in 16, 20 or 24 positions).
Wrap the intake-side flange and duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.

Caution

When attaching a duct to the intake side, be sure also to attach an air filter inside the air passage on the intake side. (Use an air
filter whose dust collecting efficiency is at least 50% in a gravimetric technique.)

Outlet side
Connect the duct according to the inside of the outlet-side flange.
Wrap the outlet-side flange and the duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent air escaping.
Flange
(Field supply)

Main unit

Connection screw
(accessory)

Flange

Insulation material
(Field supply)

Aluminum tape
(Field supply)

Aluminum tape
(Field supply)

Air inlet side

Outlet side

Caution
Be sure to insulate the duct to prevent condensation from forming. (Material: glass wool or polyethylene foam, 25mm thick)
Use electric insulation between the duct and the wall when using metal ducts to pass metal laths of the net or fence shape or
metal plating into wooden buildings.

Installation Manual

151

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

WIRING
See the installation manual supplied with the outdoor unit.
HOW TO CONNECT WIRINGS.
Wire only after removing the control box lid as shown in the Fig.
Control box lid
Make sure to let a wire go through a wire penetration area.
After wiring, seal the wire and wire penetration area to
prevent moisture and small creatures from the outside.
Wrap the strong and weak electric lines with the sealing
material as shown in the figure below.
(Otherwise, moisture or small creatures such as insects from
the outside may cause short-circuit inside the control box.)
Attach securely so that there are no gaps.

Power supply wiring


Earth wire

Wiring Diagram
(Rear)
Remote controller wiring

Sealing material
(accessory)

Wiring
through hole

(Control box side)


Wiring
Wire

Clasp

(Power supply side)

Clamp
(for fixing in place)
(accessory)

Outside
unit

Inside
unit

[How to adhere it]

Caution
When clamping the wiring, use the included clamping material as shown in the Fig. to prevent outside pressure being exerted
on the wiring connections and clamp firmly.
When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover
firmly. When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller wiring) and strong wiring (earth wire and power supply wiring) at least
50mm so that they do not pass through the same place together. Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.

[ PRECAUTION ]
See also the Electrical Wiring Diagram Nameplate when wiring the unit for electrical power.

[ Connecting electrical wiring ]

Terminal block (4P)

Power supply wiring and Earth wire

Power supply wiring


Earth wire

Remove the control box lid.


Next, pull the wires into the unit through the wiring through hole and
connect to the power wiring terminal block (4P).
Be sure to put the part of the sheathed vinyl into the control box.

Wiring through hole


Indoor PCboard
(ASSY)

Power supply wiring


Earth wire
Clamp (for fixing in place)
(accessory)

Warning
Do not use tapped wires, stand wires, extensioncords, or starbust connections, as they may cause overheating, electrical shock, or fire.
To outdoor unit

When wire length exceeds


10m, use 2.0mm wires.

Indoor
unit

1
2
3

1.6mm or 2.0mm
H05VV

10

152

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

TRIAL OPERATION AND TESTING


Trial operation and testing
(1) Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
(2) Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.

Trial operation from remote controller


(1) Press ON/OFF button to turn on the system.
(2) Simultaneously press center of TEMP button and MODE button.
(3) Press MODE button twice.
( will appear on the display to indicate that Trial Operation mode is selected.)
(4) Trial run mode terminates in approx. 30 minutes and switches into normal mode. To quit a trial operation, press
ON/OFF button.

For Heat pump.


In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest programmable temperature.
Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C in cooling mode, 20C to 24C in
heating mode).
For protection, the system disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
For Cooling only.
Select the lowest programmable temperature.
Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
Use the remote control for trial operation as described below.
After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26C to 28C).
For protection, the unit disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
(3) Carry out the test operation in accordance with the Operation Manual to ensure that all functions and parts, are working
properly.
* The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for some time after
installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.
* If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original operation mode when
the circuit breaker is turned on again.
Test items

Test items
Indoor and outdoor units are installed properly on solid bases.
No refrigerant gas leaks.
Refrigerant gas and liquid pipes and indoor drain hose
extension are thermally insulated.
Draining line is properly installed.
System is properly earthed.
The specified wires are used for interconnecting wire
connections.
Indoor or outdoor units air inlet or discharge has clear path of air.
Shut-off valves are opened.
Indoor unit properly receives remote controller commands.

Symptom
(diagnostic display on RC)

Check

Fall, vibration, noise


Incomplete cooling/heating
function
Water leakage
Water leakage
Electrical leakage
Inoperative or burn damage
Incomplete cooling/heating
function
Inoperative

11

3P132003-3N

Installation Manual

153

Indoor Units

3.7

EDSG18-936

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FFQ25/35/50/60B


FFQ25BV1B
FFQ35BV1B
FFQ50BV1B
FFQ60BV1B

SPLIT SYSTEM Air Conditioners

Installation manual

CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................................... 1


BEFORE INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 2
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE ............................................................................ 5
PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION.............................................................. 6
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 7
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ................................................................................. 9
DRAIN PIPING WORK.............................................................................................. 11
WIRING EXAMPLE ................................................................................................... 14
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK ...................................................................................... 15
INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL..................................................... 17
FIELD SETTINGS ..................................................................................................... 18
TEST OPERATION ................................................................................................... 19

1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read these SAFETY PRECAUTIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be
sure to install it correctly.
After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer how to
operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the customer to store
the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accessible to the general public.
Meaning of WARNING and CAUTION notices.
WARNING ........ Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ......... Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.

WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work.
Do not attempt to install the air conditioner yourself. Improper installation may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire.
Install the air conditioner in accordance with the instructions in this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in the unit falling, water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Install the air conditioner on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the unit.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injury.
Carry out the specified installation work after taking into account strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Failure to do so during installation work may result in the unit falling and causing accidents.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried
out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires are used, and that there is no strain on the terminal connections or wires.
Improper connections or securing of wires may result in abnormal heat build-up or fire.
English

154

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position
the wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
If refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant comes into contact with fire.
After completing installation, check for refrigerant gas leakage.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the room and comes into contact with a source
of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
Be sure to switch off the unit before touching any electrical parts.
Be sure to earth the air conditioner.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or fire.

CAUTION
While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping to ensure proper drainage and
insulate piping to prevent condensation.
Improper drain piping may result in indoor water leakage and property damage.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios to prevent picture interference and noise.
(Depending on the incoming signal strength, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient to eliminate
noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can be shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
Install the indoor unit as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
1. Where there is a high concentration of mineral oil spray or vapour (e.g. a kitchen).
Plastic parts will deteriorate, parts may fall off and water leakage could result.
2. Where corrosive gas, such as sulphurous acid gas, is produced.
Corroding of copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
3. Near machinery emitting electromagnetic radiation.
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of
the unit.
4. Where flammable gas may leak, where there is carbon fibre or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or
where volatile flammables such as paint thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire.
The air conditioner is not intended for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere.

2. BEFORE INSTALLATION
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening
Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect
refrigerant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
When opening the unit or moving it after opening, be sure to lift it by holding on to the lifting lugs without
exerting any pressure on other parts, especially, drain piping, and other resin parts.
Decide upon a line of transport.
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Use a sling of soft
material, where unpacking is unavoidable or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid
damage or scratches to the unit.
Especially, do not unfasten packing case(top) guarding the control box until suspending the unit.
Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit for items not described in this manual.
Do not dispose of any parts necessary for installation until the installation is complete.

Installation Manual

English

155

Indoor Units

2-1

EDSG18-936

PRECAUTIONS

2-2

Be sure to read this manual before installing the indoor unit.


When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
This unit is suitable for installation in a household, commercial and light industrial environment.
Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode.)
Where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline is used.
Where machines can generate electromagnetic waves. (Control system may malfunction.)
Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates
greatly such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.

ACCESSORIES

Check the following accessories are included with your unit.

Name

(1)Drain hose

(2)Metal clamp

(3)Washer for
hanger bracket

Quantity

1 pc.

1 pc.

8 pcs.

(4)Clamp
(Big)
6 pcs.

(5)Paper pattern
for installation

(Small)
1 pc.

1 pc.
Also used as
packing material

Shape

Name

(6)Screws
(M5)

Quantity

4 pcs.

(7)Washer
Insulation for fitting
fixing plate
4 pcs.

For paper pattern


for installation

Sealing pad

1 each.

1 each.

(8)For gas pipe

(12)Sealing
material
2 pcs.

(10)Large

Operation
manual
Installation
manual

Shape
(11)Small

(9)For liquid pipe

2-3

(Other)

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

The optional decoration panel and remote controller are required for this indoor unit.(Refer to Table 1, 2)
Table 1
Unit model

Optional decoration panel


BYFQ60BW1
Color : White

FFQ25355060BV1B

These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from Table 2
according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 2
Remote controller type
Wired type
Wireless type

Cooling only type

Heat Pump type


BRC1C61

BRC7E531W

BRC7E530W

NOTE
If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 2 on page 3, select a suitable remote controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials .
English

156

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Items to be checked
If not properly done, what is likely to occur
Are the indoor and outdoor unit fixed firmly? The units may drop, vibrate or make noise.
The unit may malfunction or the compoIs the outdoor unit fully installed?
nents burn out.
Is the gas leak test finished?
It may result in insufficient cooling.
Is the unit fully insulated?
Condensate water may drip.
Does drainage flow smoothly?
Condensate water may drip.
Does the power supply voltage correspond The unit may malfunction or the compoto that shown on the name plate?
nents burn out.
The unit may malfunction or the compoAre wiring and piping correct?
nents burn out.
Is the unit safely grounded?
Dangerous at electric leakage.
The unit may malfunction or the compoIs wiring size according to specifications?
nents burn out.
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet
It may result in insufficient cooling.
of either the indoor or outdoor units?
Are refrigerant piping length and additional The refrigerant charge in the system is not
refrigerant charge noted down?
clear.

Check

b. Items to be checked at time of delivery

Also review the SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


Items to be checked
Are the control box lid, air filter, suction grille attached?
Did you explain about operations while showing the instruction manual to your customer?
Did you hand the instruction manual over to your customer?

Check

c. Points for explanation about operations


The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items pertaining to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of
the product. Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents
and also ask your customers to read the instruction manual.

2-4

NOTE TO THE INSTALLER

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the manual.

Installation Manual

English

157

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE


Hold the unit by the 4 lifting lugs when opening the box and moving it, and do not exert pressure on to any
other part piping (refrigerant, drain, etc.) or plastic parts.
If the temperature or humidity inside the ceiling might rise above 30C or RH 80%, respectively, use the
high-humidity kit (sold separately) or add extra insulation to the main unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation and make sure it is at least 10mm thick and fits inside the
ceiling opening.
The direction this product blows can be selected. However, a separately sold shut-off material kit is
needed in order to make the unit blow in two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions.
(1) Select an installation location with the customers approval which matches the following conditions.
A location from which cool (warm) air will reach the whole room.
A location with no objects blocking the air passage.
A location where drainage can be done with no problem.
A location strong enough to support the weight of the indoor unit.
Locations where the wall is not significantly tilted.
A location which leaves enough room for installation and service work.
A location where there is no risk of flammable gas leaking.
A location where the length of the indoor-outdoor piping is no longer than the tolerated length (see the
installation manual that came with the outdoor unit for details).

[Space required for installation] (mm)


>

>

* 1500

Air
outlet

* 1500

1500

2500

>

>

>

For installation
in high places

* 1500

Air
Air outlet
inlet

>

* 1500

>

* 1500

Fig. 1

>

* 1500

Fig. 2

NOTE
Leave 200 mm or more space where marked with the *, on sides where the air outlet is closed.
Model

FFQ25355060

285 (Confirm the space of 295 or more)

CAUTION
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the
noise.)
(2) Air flow direction
The air direction shown is an example.
Select the appropriate number of directions according to the shape of the room and the location of the
unit. (Field settings have to be made using the remote controller and the outlet vents have to be shut off if
two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions are selected. See the shut-off materials (sold separately)
installation manual for details.)

English

158

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

[Air flow direction] (Example)


Piping

Piping

Air outlet in
4 directions

Piping

Air outlet in
3 directions

Air outlet in
2 directions

(3) Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to support the
weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is maked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcing.)

4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION


(1) Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position.

Suspension
bolt ( 4)

533 (Suspension bolt pitch)


575 (indoor unit)
585-660 (Ceiling opening)
700 (Decoration panel)

(Ceiling opening dimension)


585 *660
Hanger
bracket

False
ceiling

20

20

(Ceiling-panel overlapping dimension)


View as seen from A
Fig. 3
Fig. 4

(180)

700 (Decoration panel)


585-660 (Ceiling opening)
575 (indoor unit)
533 (Suspension bolt pitch)

Refrigerant
piping

(mm)

A
NOTE
Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of 660 mm (marked with *). However, to achieve a ceilingpanel overlapping dimension of 20 mm, the spacing between the ceiling and the unit should be 45 mm or
less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over 45 mm, attach ceiling material to
part or
recover the ceiling.

False
ceiling

False
ceiling

Ceiling material
< 45

< 45

(mm)
Fig. 5

(2) Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where applicable. (For existing ceilings)
Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimensions.
Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the side of the opening to the casing outlet,implement the refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller (unnecessary for wireless type) and wiring between units. Refer to each PIPING or WIRING section.
After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling level and to prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.

Installation Manual

English

159

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

(3) Install the suspension bolts.


(Use either a M8 ~ M10 size bolt)
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and
a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field
supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce
the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
Adjust clearance (50 100 mm) from the
ceiling before proceeding further.

<installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
Long nut or turn-buckle
Suspension bolt
False ceiling

NOTE
All the above parts are field supplied.

(mm)

Fig. 6

5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION


Installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel) before installing the indoor unit is
easier. However, for existing ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before
installing the unit.
As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
(1) For new ceilings
(1-1) Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using a nut and
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of the hanger bracket.
The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.

Washer (3) (accessory)


Hanger bracket
Nut
(Field supplied)

Insert

Tighten
(double nuts)

Washer fixing plate (7)


(accessory)

[Securing the hanger bracket]

[Securing the washer]

Fig. 7

Fig. 8

(1-2) Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceilling opening dimension.
Consult the builder or carpenter for details.
The center of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
The center of the unit is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
Fix the paper pattern to the unit with screws (6) (4).
Ceiling height is shown on the side of the paper pattern for installation (5). Adjust the height of the
unit according to this indication.
Please perform one of the following, as the shape of the paper pattern for installation differs
according to the model.
Paper pattern for installation (5)
(accessory)

Screws (6)
(accessory)
Screws (6)
(accessory) [Installation of paper pattern for installation]
Fig. 9
English

160

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

<Ceiling work>
(1-3) Adjust the unit to the right position for installation.
(Refer to 4.PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
(1-4) Check the unit is horizontally level.
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch. Verify that it is level by using
a water level or a waterfilled vinyl tube.
CAUTION
If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float
switch may malfunction and cause water to drip.
(1-5) Remove the washer fixing plate (7) used for preventing the washer from falling and tighten the
upper nut.
(1-6) Remove the paper pattern for installation (5).

3
Water level

Vinyl tube

[Maintaining horizontality]
(2) For existing ceilings
Fig. 10
(2-1) Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using a nut and
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of hanger bracket. The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.

Washer (3) (accessory)


Hanger bracket
Insert
Nut
(Field supplied)

Tighten
(double nuts)
[Securing the hanger bracket]
Fig. 11

Washer fixing plate (7)


(accessory)
[Securing the washer]
Fig. 12

(2-2) Adjust the height and position of the unit.


(Refer to 4.PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
(2-3) Perform steps (1-4), (1-5) in (1) For new ceilings.

Installation Manual

English

161

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK


<For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.>
<Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping.
Otherwise, a water leakage can result sometimes.>
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120 C, so use
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
<Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed
30 C or RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensation may form on
the surface of the insulating material.>
<Before refrigerant piping work, check which type of refrigerant is used. Proper operation is not possible if the types of refrigerant are not the same.>
CAUTION
Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the type of refrigerant.
Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare portions before connectiong.
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end
or cover it with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant
circuit, such as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room
thoroughly right away.
The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as
shown in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/
from the unit. (Refer to Fig. 13)
Refer to Table 3 for the dimensions of flare nut spaces.
When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare section (both inside and
outside) with ester oil or ether oil, rotate three or four times first,
then screw in. (Refer to Fig. 14)

Torque wrench

Spanner
Piping union

CAUTION

Flare nut

Over-tightening may damage the flare and cause a


refrigerant leakage.

Apply ester oil or


ether oil only inside

NOTE
Use the flare nut included with the unit main body.
Table 3
Pipe size

Tightening torque

6.4(1/4")

14.2 - 17.2 Nm
(144 - 175 kgfcm)
32.7 - 39.9 Nm
(333 - 407 kgfcm)

9.5(3/8")
12.7(1/2")

49.5 - 60.3 Nm
(505 - 615 kgfcm)

Fig. 13

Fig. 14

Flare dimensions
A (mm)

Flare

8.7-9.1
12.8-13.2
16.2 - 16.6

Refer to Table 3 to determine the proper tightening torque.

English

162

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Not recommendable but in case of emergency


You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may follow the installation method mentioned below.
After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no gas leak.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4")
9.5 (3/8")
12.7 (1/2")

Further tightening angle


60 90 degrees
60 90 degrees
30 60 degrees

Recommended arm length of tool


Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm

CAUTION
CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN BRAZING REFRIGERANT PIPING
Do not use flux when brazing refrigerant piping. Therefore, use the phosphor copper brazing filler metal
(BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P-710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the
refrigerant oil.)
Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the
piping.
If your brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping, and could cause system malfunction.
When brazing the refrigerant piping, only begin brazing after having carried out nitrogen substitution or
while inserting nitrogen into the refrigerant piping. Once this is done, connect the indoor unit with a flared
or a flanged connection.
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm2) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig.15)

Taping

Refrigerant piping

Pressure-reducing valve
Part to be
brazed

hands valve

Nitrogen

Nitrogen
Fig. 15

Make absolutely sure to execute heat insulation works on the pipe-connecting section after checking gas
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for fitting (8) and (9). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).)
(Refer to Fig. 16)
Wrap the sealing pad (11) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side.
(Refer to Fig. 16)

10

Installation Manual

English

163

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Small sealing pad


(accessory) (11)
(Wrap the piping union
with the sealing pad.)
Clamp (4)
(Big 4)
(accessory)

Liquid piping

Insulation for fitting


(accessory) (9)
(for liquid pipe)
Insulation for fitting (accessory) (8)
(for gas pipe)
Gas piping

Fig. 16
CAUTION
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping
may cause condensation or burns if touched.

7. DRAIN PIPING WORK


(1) Carry out the drain piping
Lay pipes so as to ensure that drainage can occur with problems.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section)
than that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 20 mm, outside diameter 26 mm).
keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from
forming.
If the drain hose cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, refer to PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING on page 12.
To keep the drain hose from sagging, space hanger bracket every 1 to 1.5 m.

Hanger bracket
GOOD

1/100
gradient or more

WRONG

WRONG

Fig. 17

Fig. 18

CAUTION
Water pooling in the drainage piping can cause the drain to clog.
Use the attached drain hose (1) and metal clamp (2).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the clamp securely within the portion
of a gray tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the clamp until the screw head is less than 4 mm from the
hose.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water
leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket
Wrap the attached sealing pad (10) over the metal clamp (2) and drain hose to insulate.

English

164

11

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Metal clamp (2)


(accessory)

Metal clamp (2)


(accessory)

Large sealing pad (10)


(accessory)

Drain hose (1)


(accessory)

Tape (Gray)

4mm

Fig. 19

Fig. 20

<PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING>


Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 545 mm.
Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit.

Drain hose (1)


(accessory)
300

Drain hose (accessory)(1)

Hanger bracket
Adjustable
( 545)

1-1.5m

Metal clamp (2)


(accessory)

750

To prevent air bubbles in the


drain hose part, keep it level or
slightly tilted up. Any bubbles in
the hose might cause the unit to
make noise due to backflow
when the drain pump stops.

Ceiling slab

205

Level or
tilted
slightly up

(mm)

Drain raising pipe


Raising section

Fig. 21

NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (1), do not bend or twist when
installing. (This may cause leakage.)
If converging multiple drain pipes, install according to the procedure shown below.

0 545mm

Central drain pipe


The drain pipe should have a downward
slope of at least 1/100 to prevent
air pockets from forming.
Fig. 22

Water accumulating in the drain


piping can cause the drain to clog.

Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit.
(2) After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.
Add approximately 1000 cc of water slowly from the air outlet and check drainage flow.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED
Check drainage flow during cooling operation, explained in HOW TO TEST OPERATION on page 19.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED

CAUTION
Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified electrician.
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after the
test run is complete.

Remove the control box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50Hz 220-240V) to connections No.1 and No.2 on the power supply terminal block. Do not connect to No.3 of the power supply terminal block. (The drain pump will not operate.) When carrying out wiring work around the control box, make sure
none of the connectors come undone. Be sure to attach the control box lid before turning on the power.
After confirming drainage (Fig.23, Fig.24), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the control box lid as before.

12

Installation Manual

English

165

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Drain sockets
(Check the drainage now.)
Drain pump
location

100

(mm)
Plastic container
for pouring
(Tube should be
about 100 mm long.)

Service drain outlet (with rubber plug)


(Use this outlet to drain water from
the drain pan)
<Adding water through air outlet>
[Method of adding water]
Fig. 23

Control
box lid

Remove the
control box lid
(take off 2 screws)

Power supply
terminal block

No.3
No.1 No.2

Ground
Single phase
power supply
(50Hz 220-240V)

Fig. 24

CAUTION
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage
might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
Keep in mind that it will become the cause of getting drain pipe blocked if water collects on drain pipe.

English

166

13

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

8. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor units.
Confirm the system type.
Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 25)
Multi system: 1 through 4 indoor units connect to 1 outdoor unit. The indoor unit is controlled by remote
controller connected to each indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 26)
However, the group control is not expected.
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to
the remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 27)
2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 28)

Multi system

Pair type

Main power supply

Main power supply

Main switch
Fuse

Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit

Outdoor unit

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

P1 P2

P1 P2

Indoor
unit

Indoor unit
P1 P2

Remote controller
(Optional accessories)

Fig. 25

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

P1 P2

P1 P2

Indoor
unit
P1 P2

Fig. 26

1 2 3

Indoor
unit
P1 P2

P1 P2

Remote controller
(Optional accessories)

Group control

2 remote controllers control

Main power supply

Main power supply

Main power supply

Main power supply

Main switch
Fuse

Main switch
Fuse

Main switch
Fuse

Main switch
Fuse

Outdoor unit

Outdoor unit

Outdoor unit

Outdoor unit

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3
P1 P2

1 2 3
P1 P2

Indoor unit

Indoor unit
P1 P2

Remote controller
(Optional accessories)

Fig. 27

1 2 3
P1 P2

Indoor unit

P1 P2

Indoor unit
Remote
controller 1 P P
(Optional
accessories)
1

P1 P2

Fig. 28

Remote
controller 2
(Optional
accessories)

NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal
symbol.
2. In case a shielding wire is to be used, connect a shielded portion with the
of a remote controller terminal board.(Also, connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
3. For group control remote controller, choose the remote controller that suits the indoor unit which has the
most functions (as attached swing flap)
4. When controlling the simultaneous operation system with 2 remote controllers, connect it to the master
unit. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)
14

Installation Manual

English

167

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK

All field supplied parts and materials and electric works must conform to local codes.
Use copper wire only.
For electric wiring work, refer to also Wiring diagram label attached to the Control box lid.
For remote controller wiring details, refer to the installation manual attached to the remote controller.
All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.
A circuit breaker capable of shutting down power supply to the entire system must be installed.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for the size of power supply electric wire connected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas and water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes : might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Water pipes : no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods : might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
during lighting storms.

Specifications for field wire


The remote controller cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 4 when preparing one.
Table 4
Wire

Size(mm2)

Wiring between units

H05VV-U4G(NOTE 1)

2.5

Remote controller cord

Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (2 wire) (NOTE 2)

0.75-1.25

Max.500 *

Wiring to ground terminal

Ground wire conform to local codes

2.0

Length(m)

*This will be the total extended length in the system when doing group control.
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
2. Asian market : Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
For Australian regular : Shield wire (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
CAUTION
Arrange the wires and fix a lid firmly so that the lid does not float during wiring work.
Do not clamp remote controller cords together with wiring between units together. Doing so may cause
malfunction.
Remote controller cords and wiring between units should be located at least 50 mm from other electric
wires. Not following this guideline may result in malfunction due to electrical noise.
Connection of wiring between units, ground wire and for the remote control cord (Refer to Fig. 29)
Wiring between units and ground wire
Remove the control box lid and connect wires of matching number to the power supply terminal block
(4P)inside. And connect the ground wire to the terminal block. In doing this, pull the wires inside through
the hole and fix the wires securely with the included clamp (4).
Give enough slack to the wires between the clamp (4) and power supply terminal block. (Use Fig. 30 as a
guide and allow at least 80mm for removing the sheath.)
Remove the control box lid and pull the wires inside through the hole and connect to the terminal block for
remote controller (6P). (no polarity) Securely fix the remote controller cord with the included clamp (4).
Give enough slack to the wires between the clamp (4) and the terminal block for the remote controller.
After connection, attach sealing material (12)
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water as well as any insects and other small creatures from
the outside. Otherwise a short circuit may occur inside the control box.

English

168

15

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Wiring Remote controller cord

Remote controller cord

the shield part of shielded wire.


(Ground
Refer to Note 2 in "8. WIRING EXAMPLE")
Note

Terminal block for


remote controller (6P)
15
10~

mm

control box lid

After clamping
Clamp(4)(small)
(accessory)
to wire sheath,
Clamp(4)
clamp the wire
(accessory) sheath with
(Big)
Clamp(4) Clamp(4)(Big)
(Small)
to clamp
material.
Be sure to clamp
wire sheath.
After securing the
Clamp
clamp (4) to clamp
material
material, cut off
any extra material

Wiring diagram label


(Back side of control box lid)

Remove the
control box lid
(take off 2
screws)

Wiring between units


Outdoor
unit

Note

Indoor
unit

(Wiring between units)


How to connect power
supply terminal block
(4P) with ground wire

10~15mm

Wiring between
units
Clamp(4)
(Big)

Power supply
terminal block

(accessory) Be sure to clamp

Clamp
material

wire sheath.
After securing the
clamp (4) to clamp material,
cut off any extra material

Fig. 29

Note)
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water
as well as any insects and other small creatures from
the outside. Otherwise a short circuit may occur
inside the control box.
(accessory)
Sealing material (12)

Sealing
material(12)

Attach completely to
hole of wiring without
leaving any space

(accessory)

Wiring

(Outside)

(Inside)

Wiring to
outside

[How to attach sealing materials]

Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power supply terminal block.
Tightening torque for the terminal blocks.
Use the correct screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. If the blade of screwdriver is too small, the
head of the screw might be damaged, and the screw will not be properly tightened.
If the terminal screws are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Terminal block for remote controller (6P)
Power supply terminal block (4P)

16

Installation Manual

Tightening torque (Nm)


0.79 - 0.97
1.18 - 1.44

English

169

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring


Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power supply terminal block. In case it cannot be
used due to unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instructions.
Be sure to peel off the sheath of wiring between units more than 80 mm.
(Refer to Fig. 30)
In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires
so that external forces are not applied to the terminals.

Attach insulation sleeve


Round crimp-style terminal
Wiring between units

or

rm

mm
80

Fig. 30

When none are available, follow the instructions below.


Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal.

Connect wires of the


same gauge to both
side.

Do not connect wires


of the same gauge to
one side.

Do not connect wires


of different gauges.

(Looseness in the connection may cause overheating.)


CAUTION
When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the
wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in,
they could cause short circuits in the control box.)
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller cord) and strong wiring (interunit,
ground, and other power wiring) at least 50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.

10. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL


Caution:
With a wireless remote controller, field setting and test operation cannot be performed without
attaching the decoration panel.
<Read 12. TEST OPERATION before making a test run without attaching the decorated panels.>
Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration panel.

English

170

17

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

11. FIELD SETTINGS


CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
(1) Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
(2) Field settings must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
Setting can be made by changing the Mode No., FIRST CODE NO. and SECOND CODE NO..
The Field Settings included with the remote control lists the order of the settings and method of operation.

11-1 Setting air outlet direction


For changing air outlet direction (2 or 3 directions), refer to the optional installation manual of the sealing
member of air discharge outlet kit or the service manual.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for air outlet in 4 directions.)

11-2 Setting for options


For settings for options, see the installation instructions provided with the option.

11-3 Setting air filter sign


Remote controllers are equiped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air filters.
Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to Table 5 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for air filter contamination-light.)
Table5
Setting
Air filter contamination-light
Air filter contamination-heavy

Spacing time of display air


filter sign (long life type)
Approx. 2500 hrs
Approx. 1250 hrs

Mode No.

FIRST CODE
NO.

10 (20)

SECOND
CODE NO.
01
02

When using wireless remote controllers


When using wireless remote controllers, wireless remote controller address setting is necessary. Refer to
the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller for setting instructions.

11-4 When implementing group control


When using as a pair unit, you may control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as possible.
Outdoor unit 1
Indoor unit 1

Outdoor unit 2

Indoor unit 2

Outdoor unit 3

Indoor unit 3

Group control remote controller

Wiring Method (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 15.)


(1) Remove the control box lid.
(2) Cross-wire the remote control terminal block (P1 P2) inside the control box. (There is no polarity.)
(Refer to Fig. 27 on page 14 and Table 4 on page 15)

11-5 Two remote Controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)


When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to MAIN and the other to SUB.
18

Installation Manual

English

171

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a
screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 31)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to S. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to M.) (Refer to Fig. 32)
Fig. 31

Fig. 32

Upper part of
remote controller

Insert the screwdriver


here and gently work
off the upper part of
remote controller.

Lower part of
remote controller

(Factory setting)

S
M

(Only one remote


controller needs S
to be changed if M
factory settings
have remained
untouched.)

Remote
controller
PC board

Wiring Method (See 9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page15. )


(3) Remove the control box lid.
(4) Add remote controller 2 to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2) in the control box.
(There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 28 on page 14 and Table 4 on page 15)

12. TEST OPERATION


CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED on page 4.
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation accordingly to protect the unit.

12-1 HOW TO TEST OPERATION


1. Open the gas side stop valve.
2. Open the liquid side stop valve.
3. Electrify for 6 hours.
4. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pressing ON/OFF button (
).
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller) and
operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6. Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button (
) to make sure the unit is in operation.
7. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) and operate normally.
8. Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
9. If the decoration panel has not been installed, turn off the power after the test operation.
PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to 12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is 00. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to 12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION.
NOTE
If a malfunction is preventing operation, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
English

172

19

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

12-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION


If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner, a malfunction shown in
the table below may happen.
Remote control display

No display

88*
88 flashing

Malfunction
Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Indoor PC board faulty
Power supply PCB assy faulty
Wrong remote control connection wiring
Remote control faulty
Fuse faulty
Indoor PC board faulty
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit

*After turning on the power, the maximun is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Diagnose with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (Note 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashes, and
and the malfunction code
are indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to the
table on the malfunction code list in case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit
No. with the trouble can be recognized. (Note 2)
2. With the wireless remote controller.
(Refer also to the operation manual attached to the wireless remote controller)
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the Error code list looking for the error code which can be found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1)Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button,
is displayed and 0 flashes.
(2)Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps ............................. Perform all the following operations
1 short beep............................... Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep ................................ No trouble
(3)Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the error code flashes.
(4)Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5)Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the error code flashes.
(6)Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
A long beep indicate the error code.
NOTE
1.In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,

starts flashing and changes the inspection mode.


2.Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble
history disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00(normal).
The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
Caution:
Check the items in b. Items to be checked at time of delivery on page 4 after a test operation.
12-3 Malfunction code list
For places where the Malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the system continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the Malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code
A0
A1
A3
A6
AF
20

Installation Manual

Malfunction/Remarks
Safety device operates
Indoor units PC board faulty
Drain water level abnormal
Indoor fan motor overloaded, overcurrent or locked
Humidifier faulty
English

173

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

AH
AJ
C4
C9
CC
CJ
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
E7
E9
F3
H3
H4
H7
H9
JA
JC
J1
J2
J3
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
L1
L4
L5
L8
L9
LC

English

174

Air cleaner faulty


Only the air cleaner does not function.
Type set improper
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
Sensor for heat exchanger temperature is fault
Sensor for suction air temperature is fault
Humidity sensor abnormal
Sensor for remote controller is fault
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is
possible.
Action of safety device (outdoor unit)
Outdoor units PC board faulty
High pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
Low pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
Compressor motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
Electronic expansion valve faulty (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe temperature abnormal (outdoor unit)
High pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
Low pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
Outdoor motor position signal malfunction
Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Equipment operation in response to errors will vary according to model.
Discharge pipe pressure sensor faulty
Suction pipe pressure sensor faulty
Pressure sensor system error (batch) (outdoor unit)
Power sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Equipment operation in response to errors will vary according to model.
Suction pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Equipment operation in response to errors will vary according to model.
Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Equipment operation in response to errors will vary according to model.
Liquid piping temperature sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Intake temperature sensor error (outdoor unit)
Inverter system error (outdoor unit)
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)
Inverter cooling defect.
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
Possible earth fault or short circuit in the compressor motor.
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
Possible electrical overload in the compressor or cut line in the compressor motor.
Stall prevention (outdoor unit)
Compressor possibly locked.
Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units inverters (outdoor unit)

21

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

P1
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2
U4
UF
U5
U8
UA
UC
UJ

22

Open-phase (outdoor unit)


P-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Type set improper (outdoor unit)
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
Suction pipe temperature abnormal
Reverse phase
Reverse two phase of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
Includes the defect in 52C.
Transmission error (indoor unit outdoor unit)
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
Transmission error (indoor unit remote controller)
Transmission is improper between the indoor unit and the remote controller.
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controls.
(Malfunction in sub remote controller.)
Miss setting for multi system
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
units PC board)
Central control address overlapping
Peripheral equipment transmission fault

English

3P184443-4D

Installation Manual

175

Indoor Units

3.8

EDSG18-936

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FCQ35/50/60/71B


1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during
the start-up operation. Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual along with the operation manual for
future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accesible to the general public.
Meaning of warning and caution symbols.
WARNING .........Failure to observe a warning may result in death.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe a caution may result in injury or damage to the equipment.

WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work. Do not try to install the air conditioner
yourself.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Perform installation work in accordance with this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in water leakage, electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
Install the air conditioner on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the unit.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injuries.
Carry out the specified installation work after considering strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Improper installation work may result in the equipment falling and causing accidents.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried
out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used, and no external forces act on the terminal
connections or wires.
Improper connections or installation may result in fire.
When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position the
wires so that the terminal box lids can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the terminal box lids may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire.
After completing the installation work, check that the refrigerant gas does not leak.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the room and comes into contact with a source
of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
Before touching electrical parts, turn off the unit.

176

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

CAUTION
Ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas or water pipes, lightning conductor or a telephone ground wire.
Incomplete grounding may result in electric shocks.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks.
While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping in order to ensure proper
drainage and insulate piping in order to prevent condensate.
Improper drain piping may result in water leakage and property damage.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wiring at least 1 meter away from
televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps. (inverter or rapid start types)
Install the indoor unit as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
(a) where a mineral oil mist or an oil spray or vapor is produced, for example in a kitchen
Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall off or result in water leakage.
(b) where corrosive gas, such as sulfurous acid gas, is produced
Corroding copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
(c) near machinery emitting electromagnetic waves
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of
the equipment.
(d) where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air,
or where volatile flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire.

2. BEFORE INSTALLATION
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening.
Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is completed. Do not discard them!
Decide upon a line of transport.
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage or scratches to the unit.
When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.

2-1 Precautions

Be sure to read this manual before installing the indoor unit.


When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
This unit is suitable for installation in a household, commercial and light industrial environment.
Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode.)
Where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline is used.
Where machines can generate electromagnetic waves. (Control system may malfunction.)
Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates greatly
such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.

Installation Manual

177

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

2-2 Accessories
Check the following accessories are included with your unit.
Name

1) Drain hose

2) Metal clamp

3) Washer for
hanger bracket

4) Clamp

5) Paper pattern
for installation

Quantity

1 pc.

1 pc.

8 pcs.

4 pcs.

1 pc.
Also used as
packing material

Shape

or

a corrugated sheet

Name

6) Screw (M5)

Quantity

3 pcs.

7) Washer
fixing plate
4 pcs.

For paper pattern


for installation

Insulation for
fitting
1 each

Sealing pad
1 each

8) for gas pipe

10) Large

9) for liquid pipe

11) Medium

2 pcs.
12) Small

Shape

Name
Quantity

Shape

13) Accessory piping


2 pcs.

9.5 - 12.7

(Other)
Installation
manual
Operation
manual

12.7 - 15.9

178

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

2-3 Optional accessories


The optional decoration panel and remote controller are required for this indoor unit. (Refer to Table 1, 2)
(However, the remote controller is not required for the slave unit of a simultaneous operation system.)
Table 1
Model

Optional decoration panel


Color
White
BYC125K-W1

FCQ35 50 60 71BVE

These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from Table 2
according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 2
Remote controller type
Wired type
Wireless type

Cooling only type

Heat pump type


BRC1C61

BRC7C613W

BRC7C612W

NOTE
If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in Table 2 on page 4, select a suitable remote controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.

FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Items to be checked
Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed
firmly?
Is the gas leak test finished?
Is the unit fully insulated?
Does drainage flow smoothly?
Does the power supply voltage correspond
to that shown on the name plate?
Are wiring and piping correct?
Is the unit safely grounded?
Is wiring size according to specifications?
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet
of either the indoor or outdoor units?
Are refrigerant piping length and additional
refrigerant charge noted down?

If not properly done, what is likely to occur

Check

The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.


It may result in insufficient cooling.
Condensate water may drip.
Condensate water may drip.
The unit may malfunction or the components burn out.
The unit may malfunction or the components burn out.
It may result in electric shock.
The unit may malfunction or the components burn out.
It may result in insufficient cooling.
The refrigerant charge in the system is not
clear.

b. Items to be checked at time of delivery


Also review the 1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Items to be checked

Check

Did you explain about operations while showing the operation manual to your customer?
Did you hand the operation manual over to your customer?

Installation Manual

179

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

c. Points for explanation about operations


The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the operation manual are the items pertaining
to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the operation manual.

2-4 Note to the installer


Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different
functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the
manual.

3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE


Please attach additional thermal insulation material to the unit body when it is believed that the relative humidity in the ceiling exceeds 80%. Use glass wool, polyethylene foam, or similar with a thickness of 10 mm or
more as thermal insulation material.
(1) Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets your customers approval.
In the upper space (including the back of the ceiling) of the indoor unit where there is no possible dripping of water from the refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, water pipe, etc.
Where optimum air distribution can be ensured.
Where nothing blocks air passage.
Where condensate can be properly drained.
Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
Where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.
Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit.
(Refer to the installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
CAUTION
Any vents, light fixtures, or other appliances which may disturb the airflow might cause the top side to
become dirty if located too nearby, so follow the figure below when installing.
Keep indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring at least 1 meter away from
televisions and radios. This is to prevent image interference and noise in those electrical appliances.
(Noise may be generated depending on the conditions under which the electric wave is generated, even
if 1 meter is kept.)
(2) Ceiling height
Install this unit where the height of bottom panel is more than 2.5 m so that the user cannot easily touch.
This indoor unit may be installed on ceilings up to 3.5 m in height. However, it becomes necessary to
make field settings by remote controller and close the air outlet when installing the unit at a height over
2.7 m.
Refer to the section entitled, 10. FIELD SETTING and the decoration panel installation manual.

180

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

(3) Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to support the
weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is maked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcing.)

1500

Air
discharge

1000

2500
For installation
in high places.

240

[Space required for installation]

3
Air Air discharge
inlet
1500

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

NOTE
Leave 200 mm or more space where marked with the , on sides where the air outlet is closed.

4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION


(1) Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position

Installation Manual

181

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Installation is possible when ceiling opening dimensions is as follows


When installing the unit within the frame for fixing false ceiling.

860
(Opening dimension inside
the flame for ceiling)

Frame
False
ceiling

20

20
860~* 910
(ceiling opening dimension) (Ceiling-panel
overlapping dimension)
Fig. 6

NOTE
Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of 910 mm (marked with ). However, to achieve a ceilingpanel overlapping dimension of 20 mm, the spacing between the ceiling and the unit should be 35 mm or
less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over 35 mm, attach ceiling material to
part or
recover the ceiling.

(2) Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where applicable. (For existing ceilings)
Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimensions.
Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the side of the opening to the casing outlet,
implement the refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller (unnecessary for wireless
type) and indoor-outdoor unit casing outlet. Refer to 6.REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK, 7.DRAIN PIPING WORK and 8.ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.
After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling
level and to prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.

NOTE
All the above parts are field supplied.

<installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
Long nut or turn-buckle

50 ~100

(3) Install the suspension bolts.


(Use either a M8~M10 size bolt)
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and
a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field
supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce
the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
Adjust clearance (50~100mm) from the ceiling before proceeding further.

Suspension bolt
False ceiling
Fig. 8

182

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION


Installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel) before installing the indoor unit is
easier. However, for existing ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before
installing the unit.
As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
<The two cushions provided on the top of the indoor unit serve to protect the floor from scratches or cracks
when it is directly placed on the floor with the topside down. Be sure to remove the cushions before installation.>
Some models have no cushions.

(1) For new ceilings


(1-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using a nut and
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of the hanger bracket.
The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.

Field supply
Washer (3) (attached)

Hanger bracket
Tighten
(double nuts)
[Securing the hanger bracket]
Fig. 10
(1-2)Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimension.
Consult the builder or carpenter for details.
The center of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
The center of the unit is indicated on the label attached to the unit and on the paper pattern for installation.
After removing the packaging material from the 4 corners of the paper pattern for installation (5), fix the
paper pattern to the unit with screws (6) (3).
Ceiling height is shown on the side of the paper pattern for installation (5). Adjust the height of the unit
according to this indication.

Installation Manual

183

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Please perform one of the following, as the shape of the paper pattern for installation differs according to the model.

Only the corner where the pipes go out, the


screw is already fixed at the drain pan.

Only the corner where the pipes go out, the


screw is already fixed at the drain pan.

Center of ceiling opening

Center of
ceiling opening

False ceiling
LOWER surface
of ceiling
(Height adjustment of the unit.)
Paper pattern for
installation (5)
Screw (6)
(attached)

Screw (6)
(attached)

Paper pattern for


installation (5)

Screw (6)
(attached)

Screw (6)
(attached)

Fig. 12

Fig. 13

[Installation of paper pattern for installation]


<Ceiling work>
(1-3)Adjust the unit to the right position for installation.
(Refer to 4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
(1-4)Check the unit is horizontally level.
CAUTION
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float
switch. Verify that it is level by using a level or a water-filled vinyl
tube.
(If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may
malfunction and cause water to drip.)
(1-5)Remove the washer fixing plate (7) used for preventing the
washer from falling and tighten the upper nut.
(1-6)Remove the paper pattern for installation (5).

Level
Vinyl tube
[Maintaining horizontality]
Fig. 14

(2) For existing ceilings


(2-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using nut and washer
from upper/lower sides of hanger bracket. If you use the washer fixing plate (7), it will prevent the falling
of the washer.

Field supply
Washer (3) (attached)
Hanger bracket
Tighten
(double nuts)
[Securing the hanger bracket
Fig. 15
(2-2)Adjust the height and position of the unit.
(Refer to 4.PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1).)
(2-3)Perform steps (2-4), (2-5) in (1) For new ceilings.

184

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK


<For refrigerant piping of outdoor unit and BP unit, see the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and BP unit.>
<Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.>
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120C, so use
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
<Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.>
<Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrigerant will
prevent normal operation of the unit.)>

CAUTION
Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the type of refrigerant.
Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare section before connecting.
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover it
with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such
as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as
shown in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/
from the unit. (Refer to Fig. 17)
Refer to Table 3 for the dimensions of flare nut spaces.
When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare
section (both inside and outside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing in. (Refer to Fig. 18)

Torque wrench

Spanner
Pipe union
Flare nut

NOTE
Use the flare nut included with the unit main body.

Fig. 17
Coat here with ester or ether oil

Fig. 18

Table 3

6.4

14.2 17.2N m (144 176 kgf cm)

8.7 9.1 (8.3 8.7)

9.5

32.7 39.9N m (333 407 kgf cm)

12.8 13.2 (12.0 12.4)

12.7

49.5 60.3N m (504 616 kgf cm)

16.2 16.6 (15.4 15.8)

15.9

61.8 75.4N m (630 770 kgf cm)

19.3 19.7 (18.6 19.0)

Flare
0

Flare dimensions
A (mm)

R0.4-0.8
A

90 0.5

Tightening torque

45 2

Pipe size

When refrigerant is R22, the dimensions in parentheses ( ) can also be used.


Refer to Table 3 to de termine the proper tightening torque.

CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the refrigerant to leak.

10

Installation Manual

185

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Not recommendable but in case of emergency


You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may
follow the installation method mentioned below
After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no gas leak.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the
tightening torque suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown
below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4)
9.5 (3/8)
12.7 (1/2)
15.9 (5/8)

Further tightening angle


60 to 90 degrees
60 to 90 degrees
30 to 60 degrees
30 to 60 degrees

Recommended arm length of tool


Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm
Approx. 300mm

Make absolutely sure to execute heat insulation works on the pipe-connecting section after checking gas
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for
fitting (8) and (9). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).) (Refer to Fig. 19)
Wrap the sealing pad (11) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side.
(Refer to Fig. 19)

Medium sealing pad


(attached) (11)
(Wrap the piping union
with the sealing pad.)
Clamp (4)
(4)

Liquid piping

Insulation for fitting


(attached) (9)
(for liquid line)
Insulation for fitting (attached) (8)
(for gas line)
Gas piping
Fig. 19

CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the
machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN BRAZING REFRIGERANT PIPING
Do not use flux when brazing refrigerant piping. Therefore, use the phosphor copper brazing filler metal
(BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P-710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the refrigerant oil.)
Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the
piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping,
and could cause system malfunction.

11

186

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

When brazing the refrigerant piping, only begin brazing after having carried out nitrogen substitution or
while inserting nitrogen into the refrigerant piping. Once this is done, connect the indoor unit with a flared
or a flanged connection.
2
Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 Mpa (0.2 kg/cm ) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig. 20)

Pressure-reducing valve
Refrigerant piping
Part to be
brazed

Taping
hands valve

Nitrogen

3
Nitrogen

Fig. 20

When refrigerant is R22 for 35 50 60


Since the piping connection sizes for the indoor unit and BP unit are different, the accessory
piping (13) should be used to make the connections shown in the figure below.

Indoor unit
piping union

Field piping
3512.7
50 6015.9

Accessory piping (13)


359.5-12.7
50 6012.7-15.9

359.5
50 6012.7

The accessory piping (13) is not used in cases other than those above.

7. DRAIN PIPING WORK


(1) Rig drain piping
As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
As for drain piping, the connection can be made from three different directions.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section) than
that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25 mm, outside diameter 32 mm).
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from
forming.
If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5 m.

Hanger bracket

1~1.5 m

1/100 gradient or more

Fig. 21

Fig. 22

CAUTION
Water pooling in the drainage piping can cause the drain to clog.
Use the attached drain hose (1) and Metal clamp (2).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within the
portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less than
4 mm from the hose.

12

Installation Manual

187

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Wrap the attached sealing pad (10) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket

Metal clamp (2)

Metal clamp (2)


(attached)

Large sealing pad (10)


(attached)

Drain hose (1)


Tape (White)
4 mm

Fig. 23

Fig. 24

<PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING>


Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 550 mm.
Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit.

Ceiling slab
300 mm
1 ~ 1.5 m

To prevent air bubbles in the


drain hose part, keep it level
or slightly tilted up. Any
bubbles in the hose might
cause the unit to make noise
due to backflow when the
drain pump stops.

Adjustab
(550)

750

Level or
tilted
slightly up

Hanger bracket

Drain raising pipe


Metal clamp
(attached) (2)

200

Drain hose (1)


(accessory)

Raising section
Drain hose (attached) (1)
Fig. 25

100 mm

NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (1), do not bend or twist when installing. (This may cause leakage.)
If converging multiple drain pipes, install according to the procedure shown below.

T-joint converging drain pipes


Fig. 26
Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit.
(2) After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.
Add approximately 2000 cc of water slowly from the inspection opening or the air outlet (Refer to Fig. 27)
and check drainage flow.

13

188

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED


Check drainage flow during COOL running, explained under 12. TEST OPERATION.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED
CAUTION
Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified electrician.
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after
test run is complete.
Remove the terminal box lid (2). Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50/60Hz
220-240V/220V) to connections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to
No.3 of the terminal block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the ground wire
firmly. When carrying out wiring work around the terminal box, make sure none of the connectors come
undone. Be sure to attach the terminal box before turning on the power.
After confirming drainage (Fig. 27, Fig. 28), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the terminal box lid (2) as before.

Drain pipe

Service cover

Portable pump
Inspection opening

Bucket
(Adding water from
inspection opening)
100
Plastic watering can
(Tube should be
about 100 mm long.)

Service drain outlet (with rubber plug)


(Use this outlet to drain
water from the drain pan)
Air outlet

<Adding water through air discharge outlet>


[Method of adding water]
Fig. 27

14

Installation Manual

189

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Terminal block for


wiring the units

Terminal box lid (2)

Terminal block for


wiring the units
Fig. 28

1 2 3
Power supply
Single phase

CAUTION
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.

8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK

All field supplied parts and materials and electric works must conform to local codes.
Use copper wire only.
For electric wiring work, refer to also 9. WIRING EXAMPLE attached to the unit body.
For remote controller wiring details, refer to the installation manual attached to the remote controller.
All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.
A circuit breaker capable of shutting down power supply to the entire system must be installed.
Refer to the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and BP unit for the size of power supply electric
wire connected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, plumbing pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes: might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
during lighting storms.
Specifications for field wire
The remote controller cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 4 when preparing one.
Table 4
Wire
Wiring the units
Remote controller cord

H05VV U4G (NOTE 1)


NOTE 2 (2 wire)

Size (mm )
2.5
0.75 1.25

Length

Max. 500 m

This will be the total extended length in the system when doing group control.

15

190

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
2. For Asian market : Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
For Australian regular : Shield wire (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
PRECAUTION
Connection of wiring between units, ground wire and for the remote control cord (Refer to Fig. 31)
Wiring the units and ground wire
Remove the terminal box lid and connect wires of matching number to the terminal block for wiring the units
(4 P) inside. In doing this, pull the wires inside through rubber bush A and clamp the wires along with other
wires using clamp A, untightening the clip of clamp A by pressing. After the connection, tighten clamp A as
before.
Remote controller cords (not neccessary for slave unit of simultaneous operation system)
Remove the terminal box lid (1) and pull the wires inside through rubber bush B and connect to the terminal
board for remote controller (6 P). (no polarity)
After connection, attach sealing pad (12)
Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water from the outside.

Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on
the wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the terminal box lids to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the terminal box lids, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the terminal boxs.)
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller cord) and strong wiring (interunit,
ground, and other power wiring) at least 50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 30)
Observe the notes when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
(Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units. In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, connect wires of the same gauge to the both
side as shown in Fig. 30 )

Round crimp-style terminal

Electric wire
Attach insulation sleeve
Fig. 29

Fig. 30

16

Installation Manual

191

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Be sure to attach it to prevent


the infiltration of water from the outside.

How to connect wiring


1 2 3

Note)Wrap it around the wire


without leaving any space
Rubber bush

(Wiring the units and ground wire)


How to connect terminal block for
wiring the units (4P)

Sealing pad (small) (12)


(Wrap it around the wire)

Fig. 32

Wiring

(Inside) (Outside)

Rubber bush A

[How to attach sealing pads]


Note) (If there are more than 2 pieces of power supply
wires, divide the sealing pad (small) (12) into
some pieces and wrap them around each wire.)

Clamp A
Terminal block for
wiring the units (4P)

Rubber bush B

Terminal block for


remote controller (6P)

Terminal box lid (2)

Terminal box lid (1)


WIRING DIAGRAM

Clamp A

Fig. 31

Clip

Blue Blue Green

Fig. 33

P1 P2

Noiseless earth

Remote controller cord


(Shield wire)

(In case a shield wire is used (P16 NOTE 2))

Follow the instructions below if the wiring gets very hot due to slack in the power wiring.
In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires so
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
Use the correct screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. If the blade of screwdriver is too small, the
head of the screw might be damaged, and the screw will not be properly tightened.
If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Tightening torque (Nm)
Terminal block for remote controller
Terminal block for wiring the units

0.79 to 0.97
1.18 to 1.44

17

192

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

9. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor unit and BP unit, refer to the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and
BP unit.
Confirm the system type.
1 remote controller control: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system)
(Refer to Fig. 34)
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to the
remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 35)
2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 36)
Fig. 34

1 remote controller control


BP unit
1 2 3

1 2 3
P1 P2

Indoor unit
P1 P2

Remote controller
(Optional accessory)
Fig. 36

Fig. 35

Group control
BP unit

2 remote controllers control


BP unit

BP unit

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

BP unit
1 2 3

1 2 3
P1 P2

P1 P2

Indoor unit

P 1 P2

Indoor unit
P1 P 2

Remote controller
(Optional accessory)

P1 P2

Indoor unit

Indoor unit
P1 P2

P1 P2

Remote
Remote
controller 1 controller 2
(Slave)
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal
symbol.
2. In case a shielding wire is to be used, connect a shielded portion with the of a terminal block for remote
controller. (Also, connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
3. For group control remote controller, choose the remote controller that suits the indoor unit which has the
most functions (as attached swing flap)

18

Installation Manual

193

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

10. FIELD SETTING


Make sure the terminal box lids are closed on the indoor unit, BP unit and outdoor unit.
Field setting must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
Settings can be made by changing the Mode No, FIRST CODE NO. and SECOND CODE NO..
For setting procedures and instructions, see Field settings provided with the remote controller.

10-1 Setting ceiling height


Select the SECOND CODE NO. that corresponds to the ceiling height Table 5.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for a ceiling height of less than 2.7m .)
Table 5
Ceiling height (m)
Less than 2.7 m
N
More than 2.7 m;
H
3.0 m or less
More than 3.0 m;
S
3.5 m or less

Mode No.

FIRST CODE NO.

13 (23)

SECOND CODE NO.


01
02
03

10-2 Setting when installing high performance filters


In case of installing high performance filters, refer to the option handbook of the high performance filters.

10-3 Setting air filter sign


Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filter signs to display the time to clean air filters.
Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to Table 6 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for filter contamination-light.)
Table 6
Spacing time of display air filter
sign (long life type)

Setting
Air filter contaminationlight
Air filter contaminationheavy

Mode No.

FIRST CODE
NO.

10 (20)

Approx. 2500 hrs

SECOND
CODE NO.
01

Approx. 1250 hrs

02

10-4 When implementing group control


When using as a pair unit or as a parent unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous start/
stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as possible.

Indoor unit 1

Indoor unit 2

Indoor unit 3

Group control remote control


Fig. 37

19

194

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Wiring Method
(1) Remove the terminal box lids. (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.)
(2) Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1 P2) inside the terminal box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 35 on page 18 and Table 4 on page 15)

10-5 Control by 2 remote controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)


When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to MAIN and the other to SUB.
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a
screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 38)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to S. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to M.) (Refer to Fig. 39)
Fig. 38

Fig. 39

Wiring Method (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 15)


(3) Remove the terminal box lids.
(4) Add remote control 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the terminal box.
(There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 36 on page 18 and Table 4 on page 15)

11. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL


<Read 12. TEST OPERATION before making a test run without attaching the decorated panel.>
Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration
panel.

12. TEST OPERATION


Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED. on page 4.
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation
accordingly to protect the unit.

12-1 How to test operation


1.
2.
3.
4.

Open the gas side stop valve.


Open the liquid side stop valve.
Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours.
Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button (

).

20

Installation Manual

195

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

5. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (


) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller) and
operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6. Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button (
) to make sure the unit is in operation.
7. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) and operate normally.
8. Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
9. If the decoration panel has not been installed, turn off the power after the test operation.
TEST

TEST

PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the Malfunction code is 00. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
NOTE
If a malfunction is preventing operation, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.

12-2 Cautions for servicing


With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
Remote control display

No display

88
88 flashing

Malfunction
Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Indoor PC board faulty
Wrong remote control conection wiring
Remote control faulty
Fuse faulty
Indoor PC board faulty
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit

After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and
and the Malfunction code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by refering to the table
on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit no with
the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
2. With the wireless remote controller.
(Refer also to the operation manual attached to the wireless remote controller)
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the Malfunction code list looking for the Malfunction code which can be
found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button,
is displayed and 0 flashes.
(2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps Perform all the following operations
1 short beep
Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep
No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper
code.
(5) Press the Operation selector button and lower figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
A long beep indicate the Malfunction code.

21

196

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,

starts flashing and changes the inspection mode.


2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble history disappears, after the Malfunction code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00 (normal).
The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.

12-3 Malfunction code list


For plases where the Malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the system
continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the Malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code
A1
A3
A6
AF
AH
AJ
C4
C5
C9
CJ
E0
E1
E3
E4
E5
E7
E9
F3
H3
H4
H7
H9
J3
J5
J6
L4
L5
L8

Malfunction/Remarks
Indoor units PC board faulty
Drain water level abnormal
Indoor fan motor overloaded, overcurrent or locked
Humidifier faulty
Air cleaner faulty
Only the air cleaner does not function.
Type set improper
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
Sensor (R2T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault
Sensor (R3T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault
Sensor for suction air temperature is fault
Sensor for remote controller is fault
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is
possible.
Action of safety device (outdoor unit)
Outdoor units PC board faulty
High pressure abnormal(outdoor unit)
Low pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
Compressor motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
Electronic expansion valve faulty (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe temperature abnormal (outdoor unit)
High pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
Low pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
Outdoor motor position signal malfunction
Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Suction pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)
Inverter cooling defect.
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
Possible earth fault or short circuit in the compressor motor.
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
Possible electrical overload in the compressor or cut line in the compressor motor.

22

Installation Manual

197

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

L9
LC
P1
P3
P4
PJ
U0
U1
U2

U4
UF

U5
U8
UA
UC

Stall prevention (outdoor unit)


Compressor possibly locked.
Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units inverters (outdoor unit)
Open-phase (outdoor unit)
P-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Type set improper (outdoor unit)
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
Suction pipe temperature abnormal
Reverse phase
Reverse two of the L1, L2 and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction
Includes the defect in 52C.
Transmission error (indoor unit outdoor unit)
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly
wired. Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring.
(The compressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of the remote controller operation.)
Transmission error (indoor unit remote controller)
Transmission is improper between the indoor unit and the remote controller.
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controls.
(Malfunction in sub remote control.)
Miss setting for multi system
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
units PC board)
Central control address overlapping

23
3P156215-2C

198

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

3.9

Indoor Units

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type FBQ60/71B


1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during
the start-up operation. Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual along with the operation manual for
future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accessible to the general public.
Meaning of warning and caution symbols.

WARNING .........Failure to observe a warning may result in death.


CAUTION ..........Failure to observe a caution may result in injury or damage to the equipment.

WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work. Do not try to install the air conditioner
yourself.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Perform installation work in accordance with this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in water leakage, electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
Install the air conditioner on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the unit.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injuries.
Carry out the specified installation work after considering strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Improper installation work may result in the equipment falling and causing accidents.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried
out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire.
Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used, and no external forces act on the terminal
connections or wires.
Improper connections or installation may result in fire.
When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position the
wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire.
After completing the installation work, check that the refrigerant gas does not leak.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the room and comes into contact with a source
of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
Before touching electrical parts, turn off the unit.

Installation Manual

199

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

CAUTION
Ground the air conditioner.
Do not connect the ground wire to gas or water pipes, lightning conductor or a telephone ground wire.
Incomplete grounding may result in electric shocks.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks.
While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping in order to ensure proper
drainage and insulate piping in order to prevent condensate.
Improper drain piping may result in water leakage and property damage.
Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wiring at least 1 meter away from
televisions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with electronic fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
Install the indoor unit as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
(a)where a mineral oil mist or an oil spray or vapor is produced, for example in a kitchen
Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall off or result in water leakage.
(b)where corrosive gas, such as sulfurous acid gas, is produced
Corroding copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
(c) near machinery emitting electromagnetic waves
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of the
equipment.
(d)where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air,
or where volatile flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire.

2. BEFORE INSTALLATION
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening.
Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is completed. Do not discard them!
Decide upon a line of transport.
Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage or scratches to the unit.
When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.

1. Precautions

Be sure to read this manual before installing the indoor unit.


When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
This unit is suitable for installation in a household, commercial and light industrial environment.
Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode.)
Where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline is used.
Where machines can generate electromagnetic waves. (Control system may malfunction.)
Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates
greatly such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.

200

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

2. Accessories
Check if the following accessories are included with your unit.
Name

(1) Metal clamp

Quantity

1 pc.

(2) Paper pattern for


installation
1 pc.

(3) Drain hose

Insulation for
fitting

Sealing pad

1 pc.

1 each

1 each

(4) For gas pipe

(6) Large

Shape

(5) For liquid pipe

Name
Quantity

(8) Washer for


hanger bracket
8 pcs.

Clamp
6 pcs.
(9) Large

3 pcs.

(11) Screws for fixing


the paper pattern
for installation
6 pcs.

(7) Middle

(12) Duct companion


flange connection screw
12 pcs.

(10) Small

Shape

Name (13) Small sealing pad


Quantity
2 pcs.

Shape

(Other)
Operation manual
Installation manual

Screws for fixing panels are attached to decoration panel.

Installation Manual

201

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

3. Optional accessories
For this indoor unit, the optional remote controller is necessary. In case of downward air inlet, the decoration panel and the canvas for decoration panel are necessary.
(Refer to 4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION)
Remote controller
Remote controller

BRC1C61

NOTE
If the customer wishes to use a remote controller that is not listed on the table, select a suitable remote
controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
Use the decoration panel which apply to the below table.
Model

Min. height above ceiling

FBQ60BV1
FBQ71BV1
FBQ60BVL
FBQ71BVL

Decoration panel
Color

Canvas duct for


decoration panel

White

KSAJ25K80
BYBS71DJW1

35 cm or more

Installation not required

When using the canvas duct for the decoration panel, the decoration panel needs at least 42.5 cm
of ceiling space.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER
INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Items to be checked

If not properly done, what is likely to occur

Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed


firmly?

The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.

Is the gas leak test finished?

It may result in insufficient cooling.

Is the unit fully insulated?

Condensate water may drip.

Does drainage flow smoothly?

Condensate water may drip.

Does the power supply voltage correspond


to that shown on the name plate?

The unit may malfunction or the components burn out.

Are wiring and piping correct?

The unit may malfunction or the components burn out.

Is the unit safely grounded?

It may result in electric shock.

Is wiring size according to specifications?

The unit may malfunction or the components burn out.

Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet


of either the indoor or outdoor units?

It may result in insufficient cooling.

Are refrigerant piping length and additional


refrigerant charge noted down?

The refrigerant charge in the system is not


clear.

Check

b. Items to be checked at time of delivery


Also review the 1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Items to be checked

Check

Did you explain about operations while showing the operation manual to your customer?
Did you hand the operation manual over to your customer?

202

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

c. Points for explanation about operations


The items with
WARNING and
CAUTION marks in the operation manual are the items pertaining
to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the operation manual.

4. Note to the installer


Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while
looking at the manual.

3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE


Please attach additional thermal insulation material to the unit body when it is believed that the relative humidity in the ceiling exceeds 80%. Use glass wool, polyethylene foam, or similar with a thickness of 10 mm or
more as thermal insulation material.

1. Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets
your customers approval.
In the upper space (including the back of the ceiling) of the indoor unit where there is no possible
dripping of water from the refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, water pipe, etc.
Where optimum air distribution can be ensured.
Where nothing blocks air passage.
Where condensate can be properly drained.
Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
Where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.
Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the
installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
CAUTION
Keep indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring at least 1 meter away from
televisions and radios. This is to prevent image interference and noise in those electrical appliances.
(Noise may be generated depending on the conditions under which the electric wave is generated,
even if 1 meter is kept.)

Drain pipe
Liquid pipe

300 or
more
(Service space)

Gas pipe
Maintenance
drain hose

Floor

Power supply
wiring port
Transmission
wiring port
2500 or higher
from the floor
For installation
in high places

Required service space

2. Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to
support the weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before
installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcement.)

Installation Manual

203

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION

1000 (Indoor unit)


1050
(Suspension bolt pitch)

1. Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position. (Refer to Fig. 1)

Indoor unit

Pipe

145

630

Suspension bolt (4)

(Suspension
bolt pitch)
800 (Indoor unit)
Fig. 1

For standard installation (air inlet on the both side), choose one of the below two means of installation.
NOTE
For other than standard installation, contact your Daikin dealer for details.

Ceiling
surface

462
(Ceiling opening)

120

Indoor unit
(Back side)

(120-300)

180

Canvas duct for


decoration panel
(Optional accessory)

425 or more

For mounting decoration panel with canvas duct

Decoration panel
(Optional accessory)

1060
(Ceiling opening)

350
or more

For mounting decoration panel directly

180

Ceiling
surface

462

Decoration panel

(Ceiling opening)

Indoor unit
(Back side)
1060
(Ceiling opening)

2. The fan speed for this indoor unit is preset to provide standard external static pressure.
If higher or lower external static pressure is required, reset the external static pressure by changing
the initial setting from the remote controller. Refer to the section entitled 10. FIELD SETTING.

204

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

3. Install the suspension bolts. (Refer to Fig. 2)


(Use M10 size bolt for the suspension bolt)
Use anchors for existing ceilings, and a sunken insert,
sunken anchor or other field supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.

<Installation example>
Ceiling slab
Anchor
Long nut or
turn-buckle

NOTE
All the above parts are field supplied.

Suspension bolt

Indoor unit
Fig. 2

5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION


<When installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel), read also the installation
manual for optional accessories.
Depending on the field conditions, it may be easier to install optional accessories before the indoor
unit is installed.>
Be sure to use the furnished accessories or ones that match the specifications when installing.

1. Install the indoor unit temporarily.

Field supply
(8)Washer for hanger
bracket (attached)

Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to


fix it securely by using a nut and washer (8) from the upper
and lower sides of the hanger bracket. (Refer to Fig. 3)

Tighten (double nuts)

2. Check the unit is horizontally level. (Refer to Fig. 4)

Fig. 3

Level

Fig. 4

Vinyl tube

CAUTION
The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch. Verify that it is level by using a level
or a water-filled vinyl tube.
(If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may malfunction and cause water to drip.)

3. Tighten the upper nut.


4. Fix the installation paper pattern
The paper pattern for installation corresponds with the measurements of the ceiling opening. Consult the builder for details.
Attach the paper pattern for installation to
the unit with the attached screws.
(Refer to Fig. 5)
The paper pattern for installation is marked
for 3 types of ceiling openings. Read the
notations carefully when installing.

(2) Paper pattern


for installation
(attached)

Fig. 5

(11) Screws for fixing


the paper pattern
for installation
(6 attached)

Installation Manual

205

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK


<For refrigerant piping of outdoor unit and BP unit, see the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and BP unit.>
<Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.>
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120C, so use
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
<Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.>
<Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrigerant will
prevent normal operation of the unit.)>
CAUTION
Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the type of refrigerant.
Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare section before connecting.
To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover it
with tape.
Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such as
air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as shown
in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the
unit. (Refer to Fig. 6)
Refer to Table 1 for the dimensions of flare nut spaces.
When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare
section (both inside and outside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing
in. (Refer to Fig. 7)

Torque wrench

Spanner
Pipe union
Flare nut

NOTE
Use the flare nut included with the unit main body.

Fig. 6

Coat here with ester or ether oil

Fig. 7

Table 1

6.4

14.2 17.2N m (144 176 kgf cm)

8.7 9.1

9.5

32.7 39.9N m (333 407 kgf cm)

12.8 13.2

12.7

49.5 60.3N m (504 616 kgf cm)

16.2 16.6

15.9

61.8 75.4N m (630 770 kgf cm)

19.3 19.7

Flare
0

Flare dimensions
A (mm)

R0.4-0.8
A

90 0.5

Tightening torque

45 2

Pipe size

Refer to Table 1 to determine the proper tightening torque.


CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the refrigerant to leak.

206

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

Not recommendable but in case of emergency


You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may
follow the installation method mentioned below
After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no gas leak.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the
tightening torque suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown
below:
Pipe size
6.4 (1/4)
9.5 (3/8)
12.7 (1/2)
15.9 (5/8)

Further tightening angle


60 to 90 degrees
60 to 90 degrees
30 to 60 degrees
30 to 60 degrees

Recommended arm length of tool


Approx. 150mm
Approx. 200mm
Approx. 250mm
Approx. 300mm

Make absolutely sure to execute heat insulation works on the pipe-connecting section after checking gas
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for
fitting (4) and (5). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (9).) (Refer to Fig. 8)
Wrap the sealing pad (7) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side. (Refer to Fig. 8)

(7) Middle sealing pad (attached)


(Wrap from the bottom up)
(4) Insulation for fitting (attached)
(for gas line)
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
(5)Insulation for fitting (attached)
(for liquid line)

Attach to the bottom


(For both gas piping
and liquid piping)

(9) Clamp (attached) (4)


Fig. 8

CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN BRAZING REFRIGERANT PIPING
Do not use flux when brazing refrigerant piping. Therefore, use the phosphor copper brazing filler metal
(BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P-710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the refrigerant oil.)
Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the
piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping,
and could cause system malfunction.
When brazing the refrigerant piping, only begin brazing after having carried out nitrogen substitution or
while inserting nitrogen into the refrigerant piping. Once this is done, connect the indoor unit with a flared
or a flanged connection.

Installation Manual

207

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 Mpa (0.2 kg/cm ) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig. 9)

Pressure-reducing valve
Refrigerant piping
Part to be
brazed

Taping
hands valve

Nitrogen

Nitrogen

Fig. 9

7. DRAIN PIPING WORK


1. Rig drain piping (Refer to Fig. 10, Fig. 11)
As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
As for drain piping, the connection can be made from three different directions.
Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section)
than that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25 mm, outside diameter 32 mm).
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets
from forming.
If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5 m.

Hanger bracket

1~1.5 m

1/100 gradient or more

Fig. 11

Fig. 10
CAUTION
Water pooling in the drainage piping can cause the drain to clog.

Use the attached drain hose (3) and Metal clamp (1).
Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within
the portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less
than 4 mm from the hose.
Wrap the attached sealing pad (6) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water
leakage due to dew condensation.
Indoor drain pipe
Drain socket

Metal clamp (1)

Metal clamp (1)


(attached)

Large sealing pad (6)


(attached)

Drain hose (3)


Tape (White)
4 mm
Fig. 12

Fig. 13

10

208

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

<PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING>


Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 250 mm.
Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit.

Ceiling slab
300 mm or less 1~1.5m

Hanging bracket

Adjustable (0~250mm)

(1) Metal clamp


(attached)

Drain raising pipe


(Field supplied parts)
(3) Drain hose(attached)
Fig. 14

A
When canvas duct
350 - 530
is installed
When decoration panel
275
is directly installed

100 mm

NOTE
To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (3), do not bend or twist when
installing. (This may cause leakage.)
If converging multiple drain pipes, install according to the procedure shown below.

T-joint converging drain pipes


Fig. 15
Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit.

2. After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.


Open the water inlet lid, add approximately 1000 cc of water gradually and check drainage flow.
(Refer to Fig. 16)

Water inlet
Portable pump
Water inlet lid

Refrigerant pipes
Drain outlet for maintenance
(with rubber plug)
Fig. 16

Close
Open
Bucket

NOTE
Use the drain outlet for maintenance to drain water from the drain pan.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED
Check drainage flow during cool running, explained in the section entitled. 12. TEST OPERATION

11

Installation Manual

209

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED


CAUTION
Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified electrician.
If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after
test run is complete.
Remove the control box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50/60Hz
220-240V/220V) to connections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to No.3 of the terminal block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the
ground wire firmly. When carrying out wiring work around the control box, make sure none of the connectors come undone. Be sure to attach the control box before turning on the power.
After confirming drainage (Fig. 16, Fig. 17), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
Attach the control box lid as before.

Terminal block for wiring

1 2 3
Control box

Single phase power supply


Fig. 17

8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK

All field supplied parts and materials and electric works must conform to local codes.
Use copper wire only.
For electric wiring work, refer also to 13. WIRING DIAGRAM
For remote controller wiring details, refer to the installation manual attached to the remote controller.
All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.
A circuit breaker capable of shutting down power supply to the entire system must be installed.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit and BP unit for the size of power supply electric
wire connected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
Be sure to ground the air conditioner
Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, plumbing pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
Gas pipes: might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
during lighting storms.
Specifications for field wire
The remote controller cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 2 when preparing one.
Table 2
Wire
Wiring the units

H05VV - U4G (NOTE 1)

Remote controller cord

(NOTE 2) (2 wires)

Size (mm )

Length

2.5

0.75 - 1.25

Max. 500 m

NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
2. For Asian market : Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
For Australian regular : Shield wire (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)

12

210

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

PRECAUTION
Connection of wiring units, ground wire and remote controller cord. (Refer to Fig. 18 and 19)
Wiring the units and ground for the wire
Remove the control box lid and pull out the control box. (Refer to Fig. 18)
Next, pull the wires inside through the rubber bush A and connect them to their respective terminals on the
terminal block for wiring the units (4P) inside. Also, connect the ground wire to the ground terminal. In doing
this, pull the wiring through the rubber bush A and fix it in place with the clamp.
Remote controller cord
Connect the cord to the terminal block for remote controller (2P) (no polarity). In doing this, pull the wiring
through the rubber bush B and fix it in place with the clamp.

Rubber bush A

Rubber bush B

CAUTION

After wiring, adhere the attached


small sealing pad (13) around the
wires as shown below.
(Be sure to adhere it to avoid
water from outside unit.)

*Wiring the units


*Do not clamp remote
controller cords together with
wires connecting the units.
Doing so may cause
malfunction.

Note) No gap are allowed.


(Between rubber bush
and sealing material.)
Rubber bush

*Remote controller cord

Wire
Inside unit

Control box

Outside unit
Small sealing pad (13)
(Adhere it around the wire)

WIRING DIAGRAM
Control box lid

Fig. 18

[ How to adhere it ]
Note) In case of two wires or more,
adhere sealing material to
each wire separately.

Grounding terminal for


the remote controller

Control box Motor lead wire


Terminal block for
wiring the units
Clamp material

Wiring the
units

123

Ground the shield


part of shield wire.
If using shield wire.
Refer to NOTE of
9. WIRING EXAMPLE
Grounding
terminal

Ground
wire
(10) Clamp (attached)
Clamp material
P1 P2

Shield part

C-cup
washer

Remote
controller
cord
(10) Clamp (attached)

Indoor PC board Terminal block for remote controller

Arrow view A
Fig. 19

13

Installation Manual

211

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on
the wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (procured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the control box.)
Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller cord) and strong wiring (interunit,
ground, and other power wiring) at least 50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 20)
Observe the notes when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
(Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units. In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, connect wires of the same gauge to the both
side as shown in Fig. 20.)

Round crimp-style
terminal

Attach insulation
sleeve

Connect wires of the


same gauge to both
side. (GOOD)

Do not connect wires


of the same gauge to
one side. (WRONG)

Do not connect
wires of different
gauges. (WRONG)

Electric wire
Fig. 20

Follow the instructions below if the wiring gets very hot due to slack in the power wiring.
In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires so
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
Use the correct screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. If the blade of screwdriver is too small, the
head of the screw might be damaged, and the screw will not be properly tightened.
If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Tightening torque (N m)
Terminal block for remote controller
Terminal block for wiring the units
Ground terminal

0.79 to 0.97
1.18 to 1.44
1.44 to 1.94

14

212

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

9. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor unit and BP unit, refer to the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit and
BP unit.
Confirm the system type.
1 remote controller control: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit (standard system). (Refer to Fig. 21)
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units.
(All indoor units operate according to the remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 22)
2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 23)

Fig. 21

1 remote controller control


BP unit
1 2 3

Indoor unit
1 2 3
P1 P2

(NOTE.2)
Remote controller
(Optional accessories)

P1 P2

Fig. 23

Fig. 22

2 remote controllers control

Group control
BP unit

BP unit

1 2 3

1 2 3

Indoor unit

BP unit

BP unit

1 2 3

1 2 3

Indoor unit

Indoor unit

Indoor unit

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3
P1 P2

P1 P2

P 1 P2

P1 P2

(NOTE.2)

(NOTE.2)
P1 P2

(NOTE.2) (NOTE.2)

Remote controller
(Optional accessories)

(NOTE.2)

(NOTE.2)

(NOTE.2)
P1 P2

P1 P2

Remote controller
(Optional accessories)

NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal
symbol.
2. In case a shielding wire is to be used, connect a shielded portion with the grounding terminal for remote
controller inside the control box. (Also, connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
3. For group control remote controller, choose the remote controller that suits the indoor unit which has the
most functions (as attached swing flap)

15

Installation Manual

213

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

10. FIELD SETTING


<Field setting must be made from the remote controller in accordance with the installation condition.>
Setting can be made by changing the Mode No., FIRST CODE NO. and SECOND CODE NO..
For setting procedures and instructions, refer to the FIELD SETTING in the installation manual of the
remote controller.

1. Setting external static pressure


Change the SECOND CODE No. according to Table 3 depending on the resistance of the connecting duct.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 normal.)
Table 3
External static pressure

Mode No.

FIRST CODE NO.

FIRST CODE NO.

Normal: 49Pa (5 mmH2O)

01

High static pressure:


88/108Pa (9/11 mmH2O)

13 (23)

02

Low static pressure: 20Pa


(2 mmH2O)

03

2. Setting with installing optional accessories


Refer to the installation manual of the optional accessories for the optional accessories installation.

3. Setting air filter sign


Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air
filters.
Change the SECOND CODE No. according to Table 4 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to 01 for filter contamination-light)
Table 4
Setting
Air filter
contamination-light
Air filter
contamination-heavy

Spacing time of display air filter


sign (long life type)

Mode No.

FIRST CODE
NO.

Approx. 2500 hrs

SECOND
CODE NO.
01

10 (20)
Approx. 1250 hrs

0
02

4. When implementing group control


When using as a pair unit or as a parent unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous
start/stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote
controller.
Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as
possible.

Indoor unit 1

Indoor unit 2

Indoor unit 3

Group control remote control


Fig. 24
Wiring Method
(1)Remove the control box lids. (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK.)
(2)Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1 P2) inside the control box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 22 on page 15 and Table 2 on page 12)

16

214

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

5. Control by 2 remote controllers


(Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)
When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to MAIN and the other to SUB.
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1)Insert a
screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and,
working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to
the upper part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 25)
(2)Turn the MAIN/SUB changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC board to S.
(Leave the switch of the other remote controller set to M.) (Refer to Fig. 26)

Upper part of remote controller


S
M

(Factory setting)
Lower part of
remote
controller
Insert the screwdriver here and gently
work off the upper part of remote controller.
Fig. 25

S
M

Remote controller
PC board

(Only one remote controller


needs to be changed
if factory settings have
remained untouched.)
Fig. 26

Wiring Method (See 8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK on page 12)


(3)Remove the control box lids.
(4)Add remote control 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the control
box. (There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 23 on page 15 and Table 2 on page 12)

11. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL


Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration
panel.

12. TEST OPERATION


Refer to the section of FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED .
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation
accordingly to protect the unit.

1. How to test operation


1. Open the gas side stop valve.
2. Open the liquid side stop valve.
3. Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling
only).
4. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button (
).
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller) and operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button (
) and operate normally.
7. Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
TEST

TEST

17

Installation Manual

215

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

PRECAUTIONS
Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the
unit in inspection mode, and make sure the Malfunction code is 00 (=normal).
If the code reads anything other than 00, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
NOTE
If a malfunction is preventing operation, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.

2. Cautions for servicing


With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
Remote control display

No display

88
88 flashing

Malfunction
Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Indoor PC board faulty
Wrong remote control connection wiring
Remote control faulty
Fuse faulty
Indoor PC board faulty
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit

After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display 88. This is not
a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and
and the Malfunction
code are indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by refering to the table on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that
the indoor unit no with the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
starts flashing and changes the inspection mode.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble
history disappears, after the Malfunction code goes on and off twice, followed by the code 00(normal). The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.

3. Malfunction code
For places where the Malfunction code is left blank, the
indication is not displayed. Though the
system continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the Malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code

Malfunction/Remarks

A1

Indoor units PC board faulty

A3

Drain water level abnormal

A6

Indoor fan motor overloaded, overcurrent or locked

A7

Swing flap motor locked


Only the air flow direction can not be controlled.

AF

Humidifier faulty

AH

Air cleaner faulty


Only the air cleaner does not function.

18

216

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Indoor Units

AJ

Type set improper


Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.

C4

Sensor (R2T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault

C5

Sensor (R3T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault

C9

Sensor for suction air temperature is fault

CJ

Sensor for remote controller is fault


The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is possible.

E0

Action of safety device (outdoor unit)

E1

Outdoor units PC board faulty (outdoor unit)

E3

High pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)

E4

Low pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)

E5

Compressor motor lock malfunction (outdoor unit)

E7

Outdoor fan motor lock malfunction


Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction (outdoor unit)

E9

Electronic expansion valve faulty (outdoor unit)

F3

Discharge pipe temperature abnormal (outdoor unit)

H3

High pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)

H4

Low pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)

H7

Outdoor motor position signal malfunction (outdoor unit)

H9

Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)

J3

Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)

J5

Suction pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)

J6

Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)

L4
L5
L8
L9

Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)


Inverter cooling defect.
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
Possible earth fault or short circuit in the compressor motor.
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
Possible electrical overload in the compressor or cut line in the compressor motor.
Stall prevention (outdoor unit)
Compressor possibly locked.

LC

Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units inverters (outdoor unit)

P1

Open-phase (outdoor unit)

P3

PC board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)

P4

Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)

PJ

Type set improper (outdoor unit)


Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.

U0

Suction pipe temperature abnormal

U1
U2

Reverse phase
Reverse two of the L1, L2 and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
Includes the defect in K1M.

19

Installation Manual

217

Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

U4
UF

U5
U8
UA
UC

Transmission error (indoor unit outdoor unit)


Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board mounted
on the indoor and the outdoor units.
If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly wired.
Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring. (The compressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of the
remote controller operation.)
Transmission error (indoor unit remote controller)
Transmission is improper between the indoor unit and the remote controller.
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controls.
(Malfunction in sub remote control.)
Miss setting for multi system
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system.
(see switch SS2 on the main units PC board)
Central control address overlapping

20
3P156215-4C

218

Installation Manual

EDSG18-936

Part 4
Operation Manual
1. Operations...........................................................................................220
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5

RMKS112/140/160E Series .................................................................220


FTKS, FDKS Series .............................................................................221
FFQ25/35/50/60B Series......................................................................275
FCQ35/50/60/71B Series .....................................................................288
FBQ60/71B Series ...............................................................................299

Operation Manual

219

Operations

EDSG18-936

1. Operations
1.1

RMKS112/140/160E Series
REGARDING USE
Super Multi Plus System air conditioner

POINTS THE CUSTOMER SHOULD BE AWARE OF


COMFORT
At startup
After the power is initially turned on, it will take approx. 10 minutes until startup. Usually the unit will start

in 3 minutes.

Heating operation (Not for a unit for cooling only)


The colder it is outside or the greater the number of indoor units, the longer the time required from the

start of operation until the emission of warm air (around 35C). When the outside temperature is -5 to
2C, the inside temperature is 5 to 10C, and total indoor unit combination is 100% capacity, the first startup of all indoor units in the morning will take approximately 20 to 30 minutes.
Oil return operation will be performed once every 8 hours to preserve the lubrication of oil to the compressor.
Since operation is switched to cooling cycle during heating operation in order to return the oil, heating
operation will not be possible for around 5 to 10 minutes.
When the outside temperature is 28C or higher, the unit will be set to the standby mode for protection.

OPERATING NOISE
At startup
During startup, in order to emit warm or cool air as quickly as possible, the sound of refrigerant flowing

will be heard for a short time (1 to 2 minutes) from the outdoor unit.

At shutdown
In order to ensure smooth startup the next time this unit is operated, the outdoor unit will continue to oper-

ate for around 1 minutes after shutdown. (The time of continued operation depends on the outside temperature, capacity of connected indoor units, and connection pipe length.)

Cooling at low outside temperatures


During cooling operation when the outside temperature is 20C or less, the fan of the outdoor unit will

operate at low speed to preserve capacity and the outdoor unit valve will be opened depending on the
pressure conditions, making it more likely that the sound of refrigerant flowing will be heard.

Defrost (Not for a unit for cooling only)


When the outside unit is performing defrosting operation, the fan of the indoor unit will stop temporarily,

and the slight sound of refrigerant flowing will be heard.

Excessive heating load (Not for a unit for cooling only)


During heating operation when the outside temperature is high (15 to 24C), the fan of the outdoor unit

will be operated at low speed, making it more likely that the sound of refrigerant flowing will be heard from
the outdoor unit.
3PN07192-3

220

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

1.2

FTKS, FDKS Series

1.2.1

Manual Contents and Reference Page


Wall Mounted Type

Model Series

Duct Connected Type

FTKS25/35D

FTKS50/60/71

FTKS50B

FDKS25/35CA

FDKS50/60C
FDKS25/35EA

222

222

222

222

222

Read before Operation


Safety Precautions
Names of Parts

224

227

230

233

233

Preparation before Operation

236

236

236

236

236

DRY, COOL, FAN Operation

239

239

239

239

239

Adjusting the Airflow Direction

241

243

243

POWERFUL Operation

245

245

245

245

245

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation

246

246

246

246

246

ECONO Operation

247

MOLD PROOF Operation

248

249

Operation

HOME LEAVE Operation

249

249

249

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation

251

253

253

TIMER Operation

255

255

255

255

255

Note for Multi System

257

257

257

257

257

259

262

265

268

270

Care
Care and Cleaning
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Drawing No.

272

272

272

272

272

3P194550-4C

3P192025-1

3P098595-11P

3P196326-8C

3P196326-9C

: Illustrations are for wall mounted type FTKS50/60/71F as representative.

Operation Manual

221

Operations

1.2.2

EDSG18-936

Safety Precautions

Safety precautions

Keep this manual where the operator can easily find them.
Read this manual attentively before starting up the unit.
For safety reason the operator must read the following cautions carefully.
This manual classifies precautions into WARNING and CAUTION. Be sure to follow all precautions below: they are all
important for ensuring safety.

WARNING

CAUTION

If you do not follow these instructions exactly, the unit may


cause property damage, personal injury or loss of life.

If you do not follow these instructions exactly, the unit may


cause minor or moderate property damage or personal injury.

Never do.

Be sure to follow the instructions.

Be sure to earth the air conditioner.

Never cause the air conditioner (including the remote


controller) to get wet.

Never touch the air conditioner (including the remote


controller) with a wet hand.

WARNING
In order to avoid fire, explosion or injury, do not operate the unit when harmful, among which flammable or
corrosive gases, are detected near the unit.
It is not good for health to expose your body to the air flow for a long time.
Do not put a finger, a rod or other objects into the air outlet or inlet. As the fan is rotating at a high speed, it will
cause injury.
Do not attempt to repair, relocate, modify or reinstall the air conditioner by yourself. Incorrect work will cause electric
shocks, fire etc.
For repairs and reinstallation, consult your Daikin dealer for advice and information.
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner is safe. Although leaks should not occur, if for some
reason any refrigerant happens to leak into the room, make sure it does not come in contact
with any flame as of gas heaters, kerosene heaters or gas range.
If the air conditioner is not cooling (heating) properly, the refrigerant may be leaking, so call your dealer.
When carrying out repairs accompanying adding refrigerant, check the content of the repairs with our service staff.
Do not attempt to install the air conditioner by your self. Incorrect work will result in water leakage, electric shocks or
fire. For installation, consult the dealer or a qualified technician.
In order to avoid electric shock, fire or injury, if you detect any abnormally such as smell of fire, stop the operation and
turn off the breaker. And call your dealer for instructions.

CAUTION
The air conditioner must be earthed. Incomplete earthing may result in electric shocks. Do not connect the
earth line to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod, or a telephone earth line.
In order to avoid any quality deterioration, do not use the unit for cooling precision instruments, food, plants,
animals or works of art.
Never expose little children, plants or animals directly to the air flow.
Do not place appliances which produce open fire in places exposed to the air flow from the unit or under the
indoor unit. It may cause incomplete combustion or deformation of the unit due to the heat.
Do not block air inlets nor outlets. Impaired air flow may result in insufficient performance or trouble.

222

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Do not stand or sit on the outdoor unit. Do not place any object on the unit to avoid injury, do not remove the fan guard.
Do not place anything under the indoor or outdoor unit that must be kept away from moisture. In certain conditions,
moisture in the air may condense and drip.
After a long use, check the unit stand and fittings for damage.
Do not touch the air inlet and aluminum fins of outdoor unit. It may cause injury.
The appliance is not intended for use by young children or infirm persons without supervision.
Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
To avoid oxygen deficiency, ventilate the room sufficiently if equipment with burner is used together with the
air conditioner.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation, turn the breaker off or pull out the supply cord.
Do not connect the air conditioner to a power supply different from the one as specified. It may cause trouble or fire.
Depending on the environment, an earth leakage breaker must be installed. Lack of an earth leakage breaker may
result in electric shocks.
Arrange the drain hose to ensure smooth drainage. Incomplete draining may cause wetting of the building, furniture
etc.
Do not place objects in direct proximity of the outdoor unit and do not let leaves and other debris accumulate around
the unit.
Leaves are a hotbed for small animals which can enter the unit. Once in the unit, such animals can cause malfunctions, smoke or fire when making contact with electrical parts.

Do not operate the air conditioner with wet hands.

Do not wash the indoor unit with excessive water, only use a slightly wet cloth.
Do not place things such as vessels containing water or anything else on top of the unit. Water may penetrate into the unit and degrade electrical insulations, resulting in an electric shock.

Installation site.
To install the air conditioner in the following types of environments, consult the dealer.
Places with an oily ambient or where steam or soot occurs.
Salty environment such as coastal areas.
Places where sulfide gas occurs such as hot springs.
Places where snow may block the outdoor unit.
The drain from the outdoor unit must be discharged to a place of good drainage.

Consider nuisance to your neighbours from noises.


For installation, choose a place as described below.
A place solid enough to bear the weight of the unit which does not amplify the operation noise or vibration.
A place from where the air discharged from the outdoor unit or the operation noise will not annoy
your neighbours.

Electrical work.
For power supply, be sure to use a separate power circuit dedicated to the air conditioner.

System relocation.
Relocating the air conditioner requires specialized knowledge and skills. Please consult the dealer if relocation is necessary for moving or remodeling.

Operation Manual

223

Operations

1.2.3

EDSG18-936

Names of Parts

FTKS25/35D

Names of parts
Indoor Unit
1

5
7

11

10

8
16

14
13

15
ON/OFF

224

12

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Outdoor Unit
17

22
19
20

18

21

Indoor Unit

1. Air filter
2. Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter:
These filters are attached to the inside of the air
filters.

12. Indoor Unit ON/OFF switch:


Push this switch once to start operation.
Push once again to stop it.
The operation mode refers to the following
table.

3. Air inlet

Mode

4. Front panel

COOL

5. Panel tab
6. Room temperature sensor:
It senses the air temperature around the unit.
7. INTELLIGENT EYE sensor:
It detects the movements of people and automatically switches between normal operation
and energy saving operation.
8. Display
9. Air outlet
10. Flaps (horizontal blades)
11. Louvers (vertical blades):
The louvers are inside of the air outlet.

Temperature
setting
22C

Air flow
rate
AUTO

This switch is useful when the remote controller


is missing.
13. Operation lamp (green)
14. TIMER lamp (yellow)
15. INTELLIGENT EYE lamp (green)
16. Signal receiver:
It receives signals from the remote controller.
When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a
short beep.
Operation start .............beep-beep
Settings changed..........beep
Operation stop ..............beeeeep

Outdoor Unit
17. Air inlet: (Back and side)
18. Air outlet
19. Refrigerant piping and inter-unit cable
20. Drain hose

21. Earth terminal:


It is inside of this cover.
22. Outside air temperature sensor:
It senses the ambient temperature around the
unit.

Appearance of the outdoor unit may differ from some models.

Operation Manual

225

Operations

EDSG18-936

Remote Controller
1

ECONO

ON/OFF

3
POWERFUL

TEMP

4
7
8
13

MODE
FAN
SWING
QUIET MOLD PROOF SENSOR

ON

CANCEL

9
10
12
11
16

OFF
TIMER

18
17

15
14

<ARC433B47>
1. Signal transmitter:
It sends signals to the indoor unit.
2. Display:
It displays the current settings.
(In this illustration, each section is shown
with all its displays ON for the purpose of
explanation.)
3. ECONO button:
ECONO operation.
4. POWERFUL button:
POWERFUL operation
5. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons:
It changes the temperature setting.
6. ON/OFF button:
Press this button once to start operation.
Press once again to stop it.
7. MODE selector button:
It selects the operation mode.
(DRY/COOL/FAN)

226

8. QUIET button: OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET


operation.
9. FAN setting button:
It selects the air flow rate setting.
10. SWING button:
Adjusting the Air Flow Direction.
11. MOLD PROOF button:
MOLD PROOF operation.
12. SENSOR button: INTELLIGENT EYE
operation.
13. ON TIMER button
14. OFF TIMER button
15. TIMER Setting button:
It changes the time setting.
16. TIMER CANCEL button:
It cancels the timer setting.
17. CLOCK button
18. RESET button:
Restart the unit if it freezes.

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

FTKS50/60/71F

Names of parts
Indoor Unit

3
2

5
6
10

11

7
8

12

16

13
15
14

Operation Manual

227

Operations

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Unit
17
19
20
21

18

Indoor Unit
1. Air filter
2. Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter
3. Air inlet
4. Front panel
5. Panel tab

14. HOME LEAVE lamp (red):


Lights up when you use HOME LEAVE
Operation.
15. Indoor Unit ON/OFF switch:
Push this switch once to start operation.
Push once again to stop it.
The operation mode refer to the following table.

6. INTELLIGENT EYE sensor:


It detects the movements of people and
automatically switches between normal operation
and energy saving operation.

Mode
COOL

9. Air outlet
10. Flap (horizontal blade):
11. Louvers (vertical blades):
The Louvers are inside of the air outlet.
12. Operation lamp (green)

Air flow rate


AUTO

This switch is useful when the remote controller


is missing.

7. Room temperature sensor:


It senses the air temperature around the unit.
8. Display

Temperature
setting
22C

16. Signal receiver:


It receives signals from the remote controller.
When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a
short beep.
Operation start .............beep-beep
Settings changed..........beep
Operation stop ..............beeeeep

13. TIMER lamp (yellow):

Outdoor Unit
17. Air inlet: (Back and side)

20. Drain hose

18. Air outlet

21. Earth terminal:


It is inside of this cover.

19. Refrigerant piping and inter-unit cable

Appearance of the outdoor unit may differ from some models.

228

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Remote Controller
1

3
6

9
11

7
8
13

ON

CANCEL

12
10
16

OFF
TIMER

18
17

15
14

< ARC433B71 >


1. Signal transmitter:
It sends signals to the indoor unit.
2. Display:
It displays the current settings.
(In this illustration, each section is shown with all
its displays ON for the purpose of explanation.)
3. HOME LEAVE button:
HOME LEAVE operation
4. POWERFUL button:
POWERFUL operation
5. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons:
It changes the temperature setting.
6. ON/OFF button:
Press this button once to start operation.
Press once again to stop it.
7. MODE selector button:
It selects the operation mode.
(DRY/COOL/FAN)

Operation Manual

8. QUIET button: OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET


operation
9. FAN setting button:
It selects the air flow rate setting.
10. SENSOR button: INTELLIGENT EYE
operation
11. SWING button:
Flap (Horizontal blade)
12. SWING button:
Louver (Vertical blades)
13. ON TIMER button:
14. OFF TIMER button:
15. TIMER Setting button:
It changes the time setting.
16. TIMER CANCEL button:
It cancels the timer setting.
17. CLOCK button:
18. RESET button:
Restart the unit if it freezes.
Use a thin object to push.

229

Operations

EDSG18-936

FTKS50B

Indoor Unit
4
2

10

15

6
7

11
12
14
13

Main unit control panel

17

16

230

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Outdoor Unit
18
20
21
22

19

Indoor Unit

1. Air filter
2. Air purifying filter with photocatalytic
deodorizing function:
These filters are attached to the inside of the air
filters.

14. Indoor Unit ON/OFF switch:


Push this switch once to start operation.
Push once again to stop it.
The operation mode refer to the following table.

3. Air inlet
FTKS
FTXS

4. Front grille
5. Grille tab
6. INTELLIGENT EYE sensor:
It detects the movements of people and
automatically switches between normal operation
and energy saving operation.
7. Display
8. Air outlet
9. Flap (horizontal blade)
10. Louvers (vertical blades):
The Louvers are inside of the air outlet.
11. Operation lamp (green)
12. TIMER lamp (yellow)
13. HOME LEAVE lamp (red):
Lights up when you use HOME LEAVE
Operation.

Temperature
setting
COOL
22C
25C
AUTO
Mode

Air flow
rate
AUTO
AUTO

This switch is useful when the remote controller


is missing.
15. Packaging materials: 50 class only
If any packaging materials are included,
please remove before operating.
16. Room temperature sensor:
It senses the air temperature around the unit.
17. Signal receiver:
It receives signals from the remote controller.
When the unit receives a signal, you will hear a
short beep.
Operation start .............beep-beep
Settings changed..........beep
Operation stop ..............beeeeep

Outdoor Unit
18. Air inlet: (Back and side)

21. Drain hose

19. Air outlet

22. Earth terminal:


It is inside of this cover.

20. Refrigerant piping and inter-unit cable

Appearance of the outdoor unit may differ from some models.

Operation Manual

231

Operations

EDSG18-936

Remote Controller
1

ON

HOME LEAVE

ON/OFF

3
POWERFUL

TEMP

4
7

MODE
SILENT

FAN
SENSOR SWING

8
13

ON

CANCEL

OFF

9
11
12
10
16
17

TIMER

15
14

< ARC433A21, A22 >


1. Signal transmitter:
It sends signals to the indoor unit.
2. Display:
It displays the current settings.
(In this illustration, each section is shown with all
its displays ON for the purpose of explanation.)
3. HOME LEAVE button:
for HOME LEAVE operation
4. POWERFUL button:
for POWERFUL operation
5. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons:
It changes the temperature of time setting.
6. ON/OFF button:
Press this button once to start operation.
Press once again to stop it.
7. MODE selector button:
It selects the operation mode.
(AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN)

232

8. SILENT button: for OUTDOOR UNIT


SILENT operation
9. FAN setting button:
It selects the air flow rate setting.
10. SENSOR button: for INTELLIGENT EYE
operation
11. SWING button:
Flap (Horizontal blade)
12. SWING button:
Louver (Vertical blades)
13. ON TIMER button
14. OFF TIMER button
15. TIMER Setting button:
It changes the time setting.
16. TIMER CANCEL button:
It cancels the timer setting.
17. CLOCK button

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

FDKS25/35CA, FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA

Names of parts
Indoor Unit
1

3
6
8
7

9
10

Operation Manual

233

Operations

EDSG18-936

Outdoor Unit
11
12
13

15

14

Indoor Unit

1. Air outlet
2. Air outlet grille: (Field supply)
Appearance of the Air outlet grille and Air inlet
grille may differ with some models.
3. Display, Control panel

10. Indoor Unit ON/OFF switch:


Push this switch once to start operation.
Push once again to stop it.
This switch is useful when the remote controller
is missing.

4. Suction grille: (Option)


Appearance of the suction grille and Air inlet
grille may differ with some models.

The operation mode refers to the following table.

5. Air inlet

F(C)DKS COOL
F(C)DXS AUTO

6. Room temperature sensor:


It senses the air temperature around the unit.

Mode

Temperature
setting
22C
25C

Air flow
rate
AUTO
AUTO

7. Operation lamp (green)


8. TIMER lamp (yellow)
9. HOME LEAVE lamp (red):
LIghts up when you use HOME LEAVE
operation.

Outdoor Unit
11. Air inlet: (Back and side)
12. Refrigerant piping and inter-unit cable

14. Earth terminal:


It is inside of this cover.

13. Drain hose

15. Air outlet

Appearance of the outdoor unit may differ from some models.

234

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Remote Controller
1

3
6

9
7
8
13

10

15
14

12
11

ARC433B69, B76
1. Signal transmitter:
It sends signals to the indoor unit.
2. Display:
It displays the current settings.
(In this illustration, each section is shown
with all its displays ON for the purpose of
explanation.)
3. HOME LEAVE button:
HOME LEAVE operation
4. POWERFUL button:
POWERFUL operation
5. TEMPERATURE adjustment buttons:
It changes the temperature setting.
6. ON/OFF button:
Press this button once to start operation.
Press once again to stop it.

Operation Manual

7. MODE selector button:


It selects the operation mode.
(AUTO/DRY/COOL/HEAT/FAN)
8. QUIET button: OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
operation
9. FAN setting button:
It selects the air flow rate setting.
10. ON TIMER button
11. OFF TIMER button
12. TIMER Setting button:
It changes the time setting.
13. TIMER CANCEL button:
It cancels the timer setting.
14. CLOCK button
15. RESET button:
Restart the unit if it freezes.
Use a thin object to push.

235

Operations

1.2.4

EDSG18-936

Preparation before Operation

Preparation Before Operation


To set the batteries
1. Slide the front cover to take it off.

Position + and
correctly!

2. Set two dry batteries (AAA).

3. Set the front cover as before.

3
1

ATTENTION
About batteries
When replacing the batteries, use batteries of the same type, and replace the two old batteries
together.
When the system is not used for a long time, take the batteries out.
We recommend replacing once a year, although if the remote controller display begins to fade or if
reception deteriorates, please replace with new alkali batteries. Using manganese batteries reduces
the lifespan.
The attached batteries are provided for the initial use of the system.
The usable period of the batteries may be short depending on the manufactured date of the air
conditioner.

236

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Preparation Before Operation


To operate the remote
controller
To use the remote controller, aim the transmitter at
the indoor unit. If there is anything to block signals
between the unit and the remote controller, such
as a curtain, the unit will not operate.
Do not drop the remote controller. Do not get it wet.
The maximum distance for communication is
about 7m.

Receiver

To fix the remote controller


holder on the wall
1. Choose a place from where the
signals reach the unit.
2. Fix the holder to a wall, a pillar, or
similar location with the screws
procured locally.
3. Place the remote controller in the
remote controller holder.

Remote controller
holder
Set.

To remove, pull it upwards.

ATTENTION
About remote controller
Never expose the remote controller to direct sunlight.
Dust on the signal transmitter or receiver will reduce the sensitivity. Wipe off dust with soft cloth.
Signal communication may be disabled if an electronic-starter-type fluorescent lamp (such as
inverter-type lamps) is in the room. Consult the shop if that is the case.
If the remote controller signals happen to operate another appliance, move that appliance to
somewhere else, or consult the shop.

Operation Manual

237

Operations

EDSG18-936

To set the clock


1. Press CLOCK button.
is displayed.
blinks.

2. Press TIMER setting button to


set the clock to the present time.
Holding down or button
rapidly increases or decreases the time
display.

3. Press CLOCK button.


blinks.

Turn the breaker ON


Turning ON the breaker opens the flap, then
closes it again. (This is a normal procedure.)

2
ON

CANCEL

1, 3

OFF
TIMER

NOTE
Tips for saving energy
Be careful not to cool the room too much.
Keeping the temperature setting at a moderate level helps save energy.
Cover windows with a blind or a curtain.
Blocking sunlight and air from outdoors increases the cooling effect.
Clogged air filters cause inefficient operation and waste energy. Clean them
once in about every two weeks.

Recommended temperature setting


For cooling:26C 28C

Please note
The air conditioner always consumes 15-35 watts of electricity even while it is not operating.
If you are not going to use the air conditioner for a long period, for example in spring or autumn, turn the breaker OFF.
Use the air conditioner in the following conditions.
Mode

Operating conditions

If operation is continued out of this range

COOL

Outdoor temperature:
<3MKS50/4MKS71> 10 to 46C
<4MKS80> 10 to 46C
<RKS> 10 to 46C
Indoor temperature: 18 to 32C
Indoor humidity: 80% max.

A safety device may work to stop the operation.


(In multi system, it may work to stop the operation of the
outdoor unit only.)
Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.

DRY

Outdoor temperature:
<3MKS50/4MKS71> 10 to 46C
<4MKS80> 10 to 46C
<RKS> 10 to 46C
Indoor temperature: 18 to 32C
Indoor humidity: 80% max.

A safety device may work to stop the operation.


Condensation may occur on the indoor unit and drip.

Operation outside this humidity or temperature range may cause a safety device to disable the system.

238

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

1.2.5

Operations

DRY COOL FAN Operation

DRY COOL FAN Operation


The air conditioner operates with the operation mode of your
choice.
From the next time on, the air conditioner will operate with the
same operation mode.

To start operation
1. Press MODE selector button
and select a operation mode.
Each pressing of the button advances the
mode setting in sequence.

: DRY

2, 3
1

: COOL
: FAN

5
ON

CANCEL

2. Press ON/OFF button.


OFF

The OPERATION lamp lights up.

TIMER

To stop operation
3. Press ON/OFF button again.
Then OPERATION lamp goes off.

To change the temperature setting


4. Press TEMPERATURE adjustment button.
DRY or FAN mode

COOL mode
Press

The temperature setting is not variable.

Operation Manual

to raise the temperature and press

to lower the temperature.

Set to the temperature you like.

239

Operations

EDSG18-936

To change the air flow rate setting


5. Press FAN setting button.
DRY mode

COOL or FAN mode


Five levels of air flow rate setting from
plus

to

are available.

The air flow rate setting is not variable.

Indoor unit quiet operation


When the air flow is set to , the noise from the indoor unit will become quieter.
Use this when making the noise quieter.
The unit might lose capacity when the air flow rate is set to a weak level.

NOTE
Note on COOL operation
This air conditioner cools the room by blowing the hot air in the room outside, so if the
outside temperature is high, performance drops.
Note on DRY operation
The computer chip works to rid the room of humidity while maintaining the temperature as
much as possible. It automatically controls temperature and fan strength, so manual
adjustment of these functions is unavailable.
Note on air flow rate setting
At smaller air flow rates, the cooling effect is also smaller.

240

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

1.2.6

Operations

Adjusting the Airflow Direction

FTKS25/35D

Adjusting the Air Flow Direction


You can adjust the air flow direction to increase your comfort.

To adjust the horizontal


blades (flaps)
1. Press SWING button.
is displayed on the LCD and the flaps
will begin to swing.

2. When the flaps have reached the


desired position, press SWING
button once more.
The display will go blank.
The flaps will stop moving.

4
ECONO
POWERFUL

ON/OFF
TEMP

MODE
SWING
FAN
QUIET MOLD PROOF SENSOR

ON

1, 2

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

Operation Manual

241

Operations

EDSG18-936

To adjust the vertical blades


(louvers)
Hold the knob and move the louvers.
(You will find a knob on the left-side and the right-side blades.)
When the unit is installed in the corner of a room,
the direction of the louvers should be facing away
from the wall.
If they face the wall, the wall will block off the wind,
causing the cooling efficiency to drop.

Notes on flaps and louvers angles


When SWING button is selected, the
flaps swinging range depends on the
operation mode. (See the figure.)
If the unit is operated after being stopped
with the flaps pointed down in cooling or dry
operation, the flaps will automatically move
to a horizontal position after about one hour
to prevent condensation from forming on
them.
ATTENTION
Always use a remote controller to adjust the
flaps angle. If you attempt to move it forcibly
with hand when it is swinging, the
mechanism may be broken.
Be careful when adjusting the louvers.
Inside the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a high
speed.

242

In DRY mode or COOL mode


When stop operation
10
Upper limit

50

Lower limit

In FAN mode

When stop operation 5


Upper limit

70

Lower limit

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

FTKS50/60/71F, FTKS50B

Adjusting the Air Flow Direction


You can adjust the air flow direction to increase your
comfort.

To adjust the horizontal


blade (flap)
1. Press SWING button

is displayed on the LCD and the

flaps will begin to swing.

2. When the flap has reached the


desired position,
press SWING button
once
more.

1, 2

The flap will stop moving.


3, 4

disappears from the LCD.


ON

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

To adjust the vertical blades (louvers)


3. Press SWING button

is displayed on the LCD.

4. When the louvers have reached the desired position, press the
SWING button
once more.
The louvers will stop moving.

disappears from the LCD.

12

Operation Manual

243

Operations

EDSG18-936

To 3-D Airflow
1. 3. Press the SWING button
and the SWING button
:
the and
display will light up and the flap and louvers will
move in turn.

To cancel 3-D Airflow


2. 4. Press either the SWING button

or the SWING button

Notes on louvers angles


ATTENTION
Always use a remote controller to adjust the louvers angles. In side the air outlet, a fan is rotating at a
high speed.

Notes on flap angle


When SWING button is selected, the flaps swinging
range depends on the operation mode. (See the figure.)
Three-Dimensional (3-D) Airflow
Using three-dimensional airflow circulates cold air,
which tends to collected at the bottom of the room, and
hot air, which tends to collect near the ceiling,
throughout the room, preventing areas of cold and hot
developing.
ATTENTION
Always use a remote controller to adjust the flaps angle.
If you attempt to move it forcibly with hand when it is
swinging, the mechanism may be broken.
Be careful when adjusting the louvers. Inside the air
outlet, fan is rotating at a high speed.

In COOL or DRY mode

STOP
COOL
approx. 10~40
DRY
approx. 5~35

In FAN mode

STOP
FAN
approx. 5~55

13

244

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

1.2.7

Operations

POWERFUL Operation

POWERFUL Operation
POWERFUL operation quickly maximizes the cooling effect
in any operation mode. You can get the maximum capacity.

To start POWERFUL
operation
1. Press POWERFUL button.
POWERFUL operation ends in 20 minutes.
Then the system automatically operates
again with the settings which were used
before POWERFUL operation.
When using Powerful operation, there are
some functions which are not available.

is displayed on the LCD.

4
1, 2

To cancel POWERFUL
operation
2. Press POWERFUL button
again.

disappears from the LCD.

ON

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

NOTE
Notes on POWERFUL operation
POWERFUL Operation cannot be used together with QUIET Operation. Priority is given to
the function of whichever button is pressed last.
POWERFUL Operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the operation stop button
causes the settings to be canceled, and the disappears from the LCD.
In COOL mode
To maximize the cooling effect, the capacity of outdoor unit must be increased and the air
flow rate be fixed to the maximum setting.
The temperature and air flow settings are not variable.
In DRY mode
The temperature setting is lowered by 2.5C and the air flow rate is slightly increased.
In FAN mode
The air flow rate is fixed to the maximum setting.
When using priority-room setting
See Note for multi system

Operation Manual

245

Operations

1.2.8

EDSG18-936

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation


OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation lowers the noise
level of the outdoor unit by changing the frequency and
fan speed on the outdoor unit. This function is
convenient during night.

To start OUTDOOR UNIT


QUIET operation
1. Press QUIET button.

is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel OUTDOOR UNIT


QUIET operation
2. Press QUIET button again.

disappears from the LCD.

1, 2
ON

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

NOTE
Note on OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation
If using a multi system, this function will work only when the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
operation is set on all operated indoor units.
However, if using priority-room setting, see Note for multi system.
This function is available in COOL mode.
(This is not available in FAN and DRY mode.)
POWERFUL operation and OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation cannot be used at the
same time.
Priority is given to the function of whichever button is pressed last.
If operation is stopped using the remote controller or the main unit ON/OFF switch when
using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation,
will remain on the remote controller
display.

246

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

1.2.9

Operations

ECONO Operation

ECONO Operation
ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by lowering the maximum power consumption value.

To start ECONO operation


1. Press ECONO button .

is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel ECONO operation

2. Press ECONO button again.

disappears from the LCD.

1, 2

ECONO
POWERFUL

ON/OFF
TEMP

MODE
FAN
SWING
QUIET MOLD PROOF SENSOR

ON

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

NOTE
ECONO Operation can only be set when the unit is running. Pressing the operation stop
button causes the settings to be canceled, and the disappears from the LCD.
ECONO operation is a function which enables efficient operation by limiting the power
consumption of the outdoor unit (operating frequency).
ECONO operation functions in COOL and DRY modes. The fan strength does not change
in ECONO operation.
POWERFUL operation and ECONO operation cannot be used at the same time.
Priority is given to POWERFUL operation.
Power consumption may not drop even if ECONO operation is used, when the level of
power consumption is already low.

Operation Manual

247

Operations

EDSG18-936

1.2.10 MOLD PROOF Operation

MOLD PROOF Operation


MOLD PROOF operation is a function which reduces the spread of mold by using Fan mode to lower
the humidity inside the indoor unit.

To set MOLD PROOF


operation
1. Press and hold the MOLD PROOF
button for two seconds.

is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel MOLD PROOF


operation
2. Press and hold the MOLD PROOF
button for two seconds one more
time.

disappears from the LCD.

ECONO
POWERFUL

ON/OFF
TEMP

MODE
SWING
FAN
QUIET MOLD PROOF SENSOR

1, 2
ON

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

NOTE
MOLD PROOF operation will operate for approximately one hour after dry or cooling mode
is turned off.
This function is not designed to remove existing dust or mold.
MOLD PROOF operation is not available when the unit is turned off using the OFF TIMER.

248

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

1.2.11 HOME LEAVE Operation

HOME LEAVE Operation


HOME LEAVE operation is a function which allows you to record your preferred temperature and air
flow rate settings.

To start HOME LEAVE


operation
1. Press HOME LEAVE button.

is displayed on the LCD.

The HOME LEAVE lamp lights up.

4
1, 2

To cancel HOME LEAVE


operation
2. Press HOME LEAVE button again.

disappears from the LCD.


ON

The HOME LEAVE lamp goes off.

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

Before using HOME LEAVE operation.


To set the temperature and air flow rate for HOME LEAVE operation
When using HOME LEAVE operation for the first time, please set the temperature and air flow rate
for HOME LEAVE operation. Record your preferred temperature and air flow rate.
Initial setting
temperature
Cooling

25C

Selectable range

Air flow rate

temperature
18-32C

Air flow rate


5 step,

and

1. Press HOME LEAVE button. Make sure is displayed in the remote


controller display.
2. Adjust the set temperature with
or
as you like.
3. Adjust the air flow rate with FAN setting button as you like.
Home leave operation will run with these settings the next time you use the unit. To change
the recorded information, repeat steps 1 3.

Operation Manual

249

Operations

EDSG18-936

Whats the HOME LEAVE operation?


Is there a set temperature and air flow rate which is most comfortable, a set temperature and air flow rate which
you use the most? HOME LEAVE operation is a function that allows you to record your favorite set temperature
and air flow rate. You can start your favorite operation mode simply by pressing the HOME LEAVE button on the
remote controller. This function is convenient in the following situations.

Useful in these cases


1.Use as an energy-saving mode.
Set the temperature 2-3C higher (cooling) than normal. Setting the fan strength to the lowest setting allows the
unit to be used in energy-saving mode. Also convenient for use while you are out or sleeping.
Every day before you leave the house...

When you go out, push the HOME LEAVE


Operation button, and the air conditioner
will adjust capacity to reach the preset
temperature for HOME LEAVE Operation.

When you return, you will be


welcomed by a comfortably air
conditioned room.

Push the HOME LEAVE Operation


button again, and the air conditioner
will adjust capacity to the set
temperature for normal operation.

The unit will maintain the


temperature in the room at a
comfortable level while you sleep.

When you enter the living room in the


morning, the temperature will be just right.

Before bed...

Set the unit to HOME LEAVE


Operation before leaving the living
room when going to bed.

Disengaging HOME LEAVE Operation


will return the temperature to that set
for normal operation. Even the coldest
winters will pose no problem!

2.Use as a favorite mode.


Once you record the temperature and air flow rate settings you most often use, you can retrieve them by
pressing HOME LEAVE button. You do not have to go through troublesome remote control operations.

NOTE
Once the temperature and air flow rate for HOME LEAVE operation are set, those settings will be
used whenever HOME LEAVE operation is used in the future. To change these settings, please refer
to the Before using HOME LEAVE operation section above.
HOME LEAVE operation is only available in COOL mode. Cannot be used in DRY, and FAN mode.
HOME LEAVE operation runs in accordance with the previous operation mode (COOL) before using
HOME LEAVE operation.
HOME LEAVE operation and POWERFUL operation cannot be used at the same time.
Last button that was pressed has priority.
The operation mode cannot be changed while HOME LEAVE operation is being used.
When operation is shut off during HOME LEAVE operation, using the remote controller or the indoor
unit ON/OFF switch, will remain on the remote controller display.

250

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

1.2.12 INTELLIGENT EYE Operation


FTKS25/35D

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation


INTELLIGENT EYE is the infrared sensor which
detects the human movement.

To start INTELLIGENT
EYE operation
1. Press SENSOR button.

is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel the
INTELLIGENT EYE
operation
2. Press SENSOR button again.

disappears from the LCD.

[EX.]
When somebody in the room
Normal operation.

4
ECONO
POWERFUL

ON/OFF
TEMP

MODE
FAN
SWING
QUIET MOLD PROOF SENSOR

1, 2
ON

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

When nobody in the room


20 min. after, start energy saving
operation.

Somebody back in the room


Back to normal operation.

Operation Manual

251

Operations

EDSG18-936

INTELLIGENT EYE is useful for Energy Saving.


Energy saving operation
Change the temperature +2C in cooling / +2C in dry mode from set temperature.
Decrease the air flow rate slightly in fan operation. (In FAN mode only)

Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE


Application range is as follows.
Vertical angle 90
(Side View)

Horizontal angle 110


(Top View)

90

7m

55 55

7m

Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range)
Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of passersby, temperature range, etc.
The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of
mirrors as passersby.
INTELLIGENT EYE operatipon will not go on during powerful operation.
Night set mode will not go on during you use INTELLIGENT EYE operation.

CAUTION
Do not place large objects near the sensor.
Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensors detection area. This sensor can
detect objects it shouldnt as well as not detect objects it should.
Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and
malfunction.

252

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

FTKS50/60/71F, FTKS50B

INTELLIGENT EYE Operation


INTELLIGENT EYE is the infrared sensor which
detects the human movement.

To start INTELLIGENT
EYE operation
1. Press SENSOR button.

is displayed on the LCD.

To cancel the
INTELLIGENT EYE
operation

2. Press SENSOR button again.


disappears from the LCD.

[EX.]

1, 2
ON

When somebody in the room

CANCEL

OFF
TIMER

Normal operation

When nobody in the room


20 min. after, start energy

saving

operation.

Somebody back in the room


Back to normal operation.

18

Operation Manual

253

Operations

EDSG18-936

INTELLIGENT EYE is useful for Energy Saving.


Energy saving operation
Change the temperature +2C in cooling / +1C in dry mode from set temperature.
Decrease the air flow rate slightly in fan operation. (In FAN mode only)

Notes on INTELLIGENT EYE


Application range is as follows.
Vertical angle 90
(Side View)

Horizontal angle 110


(Top View)

90

7m

55 55
7m

Sensor may not detect moving objects further than 7m away. (Check the application range)
Sensor detection sensitivity changes according to indoor unit location, the speed of
passersby, temperature range, etc.
The sensor also mistakenly detects pets, sunlight, fluttering curtains and light reflected off of
mirrors as passersby.
INTELLIGENT EYE operation will not go on during powerful operation.
Night set mode (page 20.) will not go on during you use INTELLIGENT EYE operation.

CAUTION
Do not place large objects near the sensor.
Also keep heating units or humidifiers outside the sensors detection area. This sensor can
detect objects it shouldnt as well as not detect objects it should.
Do not hit or violently push the INTELLIGENT EYE sensor. This can lead to damage and
malfunction.

19

254

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

1.2.13 TIMER Operation

TIMER Operation
Timer functions are useful for automatically switching the
air conditioner on or off at night or in the morning. You can
also use OFF TIMER and ON TIMER in combination.

To use OFF TIMER


operation
Check that the clock is correct.
If not, set the clock to the present time.

1. Press OFF TIMER button.


is displayed.

blinks.

2. Press TIMER Setting button


until the time setting reaches the
point you like.
Every pressing of either button increases
or decreases the time setting by 10
minutes. Holding down either button
changes the setting rapidly.

ON

CANCEL

2
4

OFF
TIMER

3. Press OFF TIMER button


again.

1, 3

The TIMER lamp lights up.

To cancel the OFF TIMER Operation


4. Press CANCEL button.
The TIMER lamp goes off.

NOTE
When TIMER is set, the present time is not displayed.
Once you set ON, OFF TIMER, the time setting is kept in the memory. (The memory is canceled when
remote controller batteries are replaced.)
When operating the unit via the ON/OFF Timer, the actual length of operation may vary from the time
entered by the user. (Maximum approx. 10 minutes)
NIGHT SET MODE
When the OFF TIMER is set, the air conditioner automatically adjusts the temperature setting (0.5C
up in COOL) to prevent excessive cooling for your pleasant sleep.

Operation Manual

255

Operations

EDSG18-936

To use ON TIMER operation


Check that the clock is correct. If not, set the
clock to the present time.

1. Press ON TIMER button.


is displayed.
blinks.

2. Press TIMER Setting button


until the time setting reaches the
point you like.
Every pressing of either button increases or
decreases the time setting by 10 minutes.
Holding down either button changes the
setting rapidly.

3. Press ON TIMER button again.


The TIMER lamp lights up.

1, 3
ON

CANCEL

4
OFF
TIMER

To cancel ON TIMER operation


4. Press CANCEL button.
The TIMER lamp goes off.

To combine ON TIMER and OFF TIMER


A sample setting for combining the two timers is shown below.

Display

(Example)
Present time: 11:00 p.m.
(The unit operating)
OFF TIMER at 0:00 a.m.
ON TIMER at 7:00 a.m.

Combined

ATTENTION
In the following cases, set the timer again.
After a breaker has turned OFF.
After a power failure.
After replacing batteries in the remote controller.

256

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

1.2.14 Note for Multi System

Note for Multi System

What is a Multi System?

This system has one outdoor unit connected to


multiple indoor units.

A
room

Outdoor
unit

When the simultaneous


operational capacity is
exceeded

B
room

D
room
C
room

If the simultaneous operational capacity is exceeded


for outdoor unit capacity, the indoor unit enters
Standby Mode, and the operation light flashed; this is
not a malfunction.
<Example>
When the units in rooms A, B, and C are being used, and the D is used, causing an overload:
The room (from A to D) which is closest to the set temperature will go into standby mode.
The room in standby mode will resume operation once operation in the other rooms is
stopped.

NIGHT QUIET Mode


NIGHT QUIET Mode requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your retailer
or dealer for assistance.
NIGHT QUIET Mode reduces the operation noise of the outdoor unit during the night time hours to
prevent annoyance to neighbors.
The NIGHT QUIET Mode is activated when the temperature drops 5C or more below the
highest temperature recorded that day. Therefore, when the temperature difference is less than
5C, this function will not be activated.
NIGHT QUIET Mode reduces slightly the cooling efficiency of the unit.

OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Operation


1. With the Priority Room Setting present but inactive or not present.
When using the OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation feature with the Multi system, set all
indoor units to OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation using their remote controllers.
When clearing OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation, clear one of the operating indoor units
using their remote controller.
However OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation display remains on the remote controller for other
rooms.
We recommend you release all rooms using their remote controllers.

2. With the Priority Room Setting active.


See Priority Room Setting on the next page.

Operation Manual

257

Operations

EDSG18-936

Priority Room Setting


The Priority Room Setting requires initial programming during installation. Please consult your
retailer or dealer for assistance.
The room designated as the Priority Room takes priority in the following situations;

1. Operation Mode Priority.


As the operation mode of the Priority Room takes precedence, the user can select a different
operation mode from other rooms.
Example
* Room A is the Priority Room in the examples.
When COOL mode is selected in Room A while operating the following modes in Room
B,C and D:
Operation mode in Room B, C and D
COOL or DRY or FAN

Status of Room B, C and D when the unit in Room A is in COOL mode


Current operation mode maintained

2. Priority when POWERFUL operation is used.


Example
* Room A is the Priority Room in the examples.
The indoor units in Rooms A,B,C and D are all operating. If the unit in Room A enters
POWERFUL operation, operation capacity will be concentrated in Room A. In such a case,
the cooling efficiency of the units in Rooms B,C and D may be slightly reduced.

3. Priority when using OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET operation.


Example
* Room A is the Priority Room in the examples.
Just by setting the unit in Room A to QUIET operation, the air conditioner starts OUTDOOR
UNIT QUIET operation.
You dont have to set all the operated indoor units to QUIET operation.

258

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

1.2.15 Care and Cleaning


FTKS25/35D

Care and Cleaning


CAUTION

Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation and


turn the breaker OFF.

Units
Indoor unit, Outdoor unit and Remote controller

1. Wipe them with dry soft cloth.

Front panel
1. Open the front panel.
Hold the panel by the tabs on the two sides and lift
it unitl it stops with a click.

2. Remove the front panel.


Lift the front panel up, slide it slightly to the right,
and remove it from the horizontal axle.

3. Clean the front panel.


Wipe it with a soft cloth soaked in water.
Only neutral detergent may be used.
In case of washing the panel with water, dry it with
cloth, dry it up in the shade after washing.

4. Attach the front panel.


Set the 2 keys of the front panel into the slots
and push them in all the way.
Close the front panel slowly and push the
panel at the 3 points.
(1 on each sides and 1 in the middle.)

Fit the key


into the slot.

CAUTION

Dont touch the metal parts of the indoor unit. If you touch those parts, this may cause an injury.
When removing or attaching the front panel, use a robust and stable stool and watch your steps carefully.
When removing or attaching the front panel, support the panel securely with hand to prevent it from falling.
For cleaning, do not use hot water above 40 C, benzine, gasoline, thinner, nor other volatile oils, polishing compound, scrubbing brushes, nor other hand stuff.
After cleaning, make sure that the front panel is securely fixed.

Operation Manual

259

Operations

EDSG18-936

Filters
1. Open the front panel.
2. Pull out the air filters.
Push a little upwards the tab at the center of each air
filter, then pull it down.

3. Take off the Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter.


Hold the recessed parts of the frame and unhook
the four claws.

4. Clean or replace each filter.

Titanium Apatite
Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter

See figure.

Air filter

Filter frame

Tab

5. Set the air filter, Titanium Apatite


Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter as
they were and close the front panel.

Push

Insert claws of the filters into slots of the front panel.


Close the front panel slowly and push the panel at the
3 points. (1 on each sides and 1 in the middle.)

Air Filter
1. Wash the air filters with water or clean them with
vacuum cleaner.
If the dust does not come off easily, wash them with neutral detergent
thinned with lukewarm water, then dry them up in the shade.
It is recommended to clean the air filters every two weeks.

Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic


Air-Purifying Filter

Tab

The Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter can be renewed


by washing it with water once every 6 months. We recommend replacing
it once every 3 years.

[ Maintenance ]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove dust with a vacuum cleaner and wash lightly with water.
If it is very dirty, soak it for 10 to 15 minutes in water mixed with a neutral cleaning agent.
Do not remove filter from frame when washing with water.
After washing, shake off remaining water and dry in the shade.
Since the material is made out of polyester, do not wring out the filter when removing water from it.

[ Replacement ]
1. Remove the tabs on the filter frame and replace with a new filter.
Dispose of the old filter as non-flammable waste.

260

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

NOTE
Operation with dirty filters:
(1) cannot deodorize the air.
(2) cannot clean the air.
(3) results in poor cooling.
(4) may cause odour.
To order Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter contact to the service shop
there you bought the air conditioner.
Dispose of the old filter as non-flammable waste.
Item
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter.
(without frame) 1 set

Part No.
KAF970A46

Check
Check that the base, stand and other fittings of the outdoor unit are not decayed or corroded.
Check that nothing blocks the air inlets and the outlets of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Check that the drain comes smoothly out of the drain hose during COOL or DRY operation.
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the service shop if this is the case.

Before a long idle period


1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry out the
inside.
Press MODE selector button and select fan operation.
Press ON/OFF button and start operation.

2. Clean the air filters and set them again.


3. Take out batteries from the remote controller.
4. Turn OFF the breaker for the room air conditioner.
When a multi outdoor unit is connected, make sure the heating operation is not used at the
other room before you use the fan operation.

Operation Manual

261

Operations

EDSG18-936

FTKS50/60/71F

Care and Cleaning


CAUTION

Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation and


turn the breaker OFF.

Units
Indoor unit, Outdoor unit and Remote controller
1. Wipe them with dry soft cloth.

Front panel
1. Open the front panel.
Hold the panel by the tabs on the two
sides and lift it until it stops with a
click.

2. Remove the front panel.


Open the front panel further while sliding
it to either the left or right and pulling it
toward you. This will disconnect the
rotation dowel on one side. Then
disconnect the rotation dowel on the
other side in the same manner.

3. Clean the front panel.


Wipe it with a soft cloth soaked in water.
Only neutral detergent may be used.
In case of washing the panel with water, dry it with cloth, dry it up in the shade after washing.

4. Attach the front panel.


Align the rotation dowels on the left and right of the front panel
with the slots, then push them all the way in.
Close the front panel slowly. (Press the panel at both sides
and the center.)

CAUTION

Dont touch the metal parts of the indoor unit. If you touch those parts, this may cause an injury.
When removing or attaching the front panel, use a robust and stable stool and watch your steps carefully.
When removing or attaching the front panel, support the panel securely with hand to prevent it from falling.
For cleaning, do not use hot water above 40C, benzine, gasoline, thinner, nor other volatile oils,
polishing compound, scrubbing brushes, nor other hand stuff.
After cleaning, make sure that the front panel is securely fixed.

262

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Filters
1. Open the front panel.
2. Pull out the air filters.
Push a little upwards the tab at the
center of each air filter, then pull it
down.

3. Take off the Titanium


Apatite Photocatalytic
Air-Purifying Filter.
Press the top of the aircleaning filter onto the tabs
(3 tabs at top). Then press
the bottom of the filter up
slightly, and press it onto
the tabs (3 at bottom).

tabs (3 tabs at top)

4
tabs (3 at bottom)

4. Clean or replace each filter.


See figure.

5. Set the air filter and the Titanium


Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying
Filter as they were and close the
front panel.
Press the front panel at both sides and the
center.

Air Filter
1. Wash the air filters with water or clean them with
vacuum cleaner.
If the dust does not come off easily, wash them with neutral
detergent thinned with lukewarm water, then dry them up in the
shade.
It is recommended to clean the air filters every two weeks.

Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-purifying Filter


The Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter can be renewed by washing it with water
once every 6 months. We recommend replacing it once every 3 years.

[ Maintenance ]
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove dust with a vacuum cleaner and wash lightly with water.
If it is very dirty, soak it for 10 to 15 minutes in water mixed with a neutral cleaning agent.
After washing, shake off remaining water and dry in the shade.
Since the material is made out of polyester, do not wring out the filter when removing water
from it.

[ Replacement ]
1. Remove the tabs on the filter frame and replace with a new filter.
Dispose of the old filter as non-flammable waste.

Operation Manual

263

Operations

EDSG18-936

NOTE
Operation with dirty filters:
(1) cannot deodorize the air.
(2) cannot clean the air.
(3) results in poor cooling.
(4) may cause odour.
To order Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter contact to the service shop
there you bought the air conditioner.
Dispose of old filters as non-flammable waste.
Item
Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air-Purifying Filter
(without frame) 1 set

Part No.
KAF952B42

Check
Check that the base, stand and other fittings of the outdoor unit are not decayed or corroded.
Check that nothing blocks the air inlets and the outlets of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Check that the drain comes smoothly out of the drain hose during COOL or DRY operation.
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the
service shop if this is the case.

Before a long idle period


1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry out the
inside.
Press MODE button and select FAN operation.
Press ON/OFF button and start operation.

2. After operation stops, turn off the breaker for the room air conditioner.
3. Clean the air filters and set them again.
4. Take out batteries from the remote controller.

264

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

FTKS50B

Care and Cleaning


CAUTION

Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation and


turn the breaker OFF.

Units
Indoor unit, Outdoor unit and Remote controller
1. Wipe them with dry soft cloth.

Front grille
1. Open the front grille.
Hold the grille by the tabs on the two sides
and lift it until it stops with a click.

2. Remove the front grille.


Open the front panel further while
sliding it to either the left or right and
pulling it toward you. This will disconnect
the rotation dowel on one side. Then
disconnect the rotation dowel on the
other side in the same manner.

3. Clean the front grille


Wipe it with a soft cloth soaked in water.
Only neutral detergent may be used.
In case of washing the grille with water, dry it with cloth, dry it up in the shade after washing.

4. Attach the front grille


Align the rotation dowels on the left and right of the front panel with
the slots, then push them all the way in.
Close the front panel slowly. (Press the panel at both sides and the
center.)

CAUTION
When the packaging materials are attached to the front panel, please remove
them.
Dont touch the metal parts of the indoor unit. If you touch those parts,
this may cause an injury.
When removing or attaching the front grille, use a robust and stable stool
and watch your steps carefully.
When removing or attaching the front grille, support the grille securely with
hand to prevent it from falling.
For cleaning, do not use hot water above 40 C, benzine, gasoline,
thinner, nor other volatile oils, polishing compound, scrubbing brushes, nor other hand stuff.
After cleaning, make sure that the front grille is securely fixed.

Operation Manual

265

Operations

EDSG18-936

Filters
1. Open the front grille.
2. Pull out the air filters.
Push a little upwards the tab at the center of
each air filter, then pull it down.

3. Take off the air


purifying filter with
photocatalytic
deodorizing function.
Press the top of the air-cleaning
filter onto the tabs (3 tabs at top).
Then press the bottom of the filter
up slightly, and press it onto the
tabs (2 at bottom)(3 at bottom).

tabs (3 tabs at top)

tabs (2 at bottom)
50class
tabs (3 tabs at top)

tabs (3 at bottom)
60,71class

4. Clean or replace each filter.


See figure.

5. Set the air filter and the air purifying filter


with photocalytic deodorizing function as
they were and close the front grille.
Press the front panel at both sides and the center.

Air Filter
1. Wash the air filters with water or clean them with vacuum cleaner.
If the dust does not come off easily, wash them with neutral detergent
thinned with lukewarm water, then dry them up in the shade.
It is recommended to clean the air filters every two weeks.

Air purifying filter with photocatalytic deodorizing function. (gray)


The air purifying capacity of the photocatalytic purifying filter can be renewed by washing it with
water once every 6 months. We recommend replacing it once every 3 years.

[ Maintenance ]
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove dust with a vacuum cleaner and wash lightly with water.
If it is very dirty, soak it for 10 to 15 minutes in water mixed with a neutral cleaning agent.
After washing, shake off remaining water and dry in the shade.
Since the material is made out of paper, do not wring out the filter when removing water from it.

[ Replacement]
1. Remove the tabs on the filter frame and replace with a new filter.
Dispose of the old filter as flammable waste.

266

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Check
Check that the base, stand and other fittings of the outdoor unit are not decayed or corroded.
Check that nothing blocks the air inlets and the outlets of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Check that the drain comes smoothly out of the drain hose during COOL or DRY operation.
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the
service shop if this is the case.

Before a long idle period


1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry out the
inside.

Press MODE button and select FAN operation.


Press ON/OFF button and start operation.

2. After operation stops, turn off the breaker for the room air conditioner.
3. Clean the air filters and set them again.
4. Take out batteries from the remote controller.

NOTE
Operation with dirty filters:
(1) cannot deodorize the air.
(2) cannot clean the air.
(3) results in poor heating or cooling.
(4) may cause odour.
To order air purifying filter with photocatalytic deodorizing function contact to the service shop there
you bought the air conditioner.
Dispose of old air filter as non-burnable and photocatalytic deodorizing filters as burnable
waste.
Item
Air purifying filter with photocatalytic deodorizing
function. (without frame) 1 set

Operation Manual

Part No.
KAF952A42

267

Operations

EDSG18-936

FDKS25/35CA

Care and Cleaning


CAUTION

Only a qualified service person is allowed to


perform maintenance.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation
and turn the breaker OFF.

Cleaning the air filter


1.Removing the air filter.
Rear suction
Pull the bottom side of the air filter backwards, over the 3 bends.
Bottom suction
Pull the filter over the 3 bends situated at the backside of the unit.

2.Cleaning the air filter.


Remove dust from the air filter using a vacuum cleaner and
gently rinse them in cool water. Do not use detergent or hot
water to avoid filter shrinking or deformation. After cleaning
dry them in the shade.

3.Replacing the air filter.


Rear suction
Hook the filter behind the flap situated at the top of the unit
and push the other side gently over the 3 bends.
Bottom suction
Hook the filter behind the flap situated at the middle of the unit and push the other side gently
over the 3 bends.

Main unit
Force

Filter
Force

In case of back side

268

Attach the filter to the


main unit while
pushing down on the
tabs.

In case of bottom side

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Cleaning the drain pan


Clean the drain pan periodically, or drain piping may be clogged with dust and may result in water leakage.
Ask your DAIKIN dealer to clean them.
Prepare a cover locally to prevent any dust in the air around the indoor unit from getting in the drain pan, if
there is a great deal of dust present.

CAUTION
Do not operate the air conditioner without filters, this to avoid dust accummulation inside the
unit.
Do not remove the air filter except when cleaning.
Unnecessary handling may damage the filter.
Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing powder, liquid insecticide, It may cause discoloring or
warping.
Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause an electric shock or a fire.
Operation with dusty air filters lowers the cooling and heating capacity and wastes energy.
The suction grille is option.
Do not use water or air of 50C or higher for cleaning air filters and outside panels.

Check
Check that the base, stand and other fittings of the outdoor unit are not decayed or corroded.
Check that nothing blocks the air inlets and the outlets of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Check that the drain comes smoothly out of the drain hose during COOL or DRY operation.
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the service shop if this is the case.

Before a long idle period


1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry out the inside.
Press MODE selector button and select FAN operation.
Press ON/OFF button and start operation.

2. After operation stops, turn off the breaker for the room air conditioner.
3. Clean the air filters and set them again.
4. Take out batteries from the remote controller.
When a multi outdoor unit is connected, make sure the heating operation is not used at the
other room before you use the fan operation.

Operation Manual

269

Operations

EDSG18-936

FDKS50/60C, FDKS25/35EA

Care and Cleaning


CAUTION

Only a qualified service person is allowed to


perform maintenance.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop the operation
and turn the breaker OFF.

Cleaning the air filter


1.Removing the air filter.
Rear suction
Pull the bottom side of the air filter backwards, over the bends. (2 bends for 25/35 type, 3 bends
for 50/60 type)
Bottom suction
Pull the filter over the bends (2 bends for 25/35 type, 3 bends for 50/60 type) situated at the
backside of the unit.

2.Cleaning the air filter.


Remove dust from the air filter using a vacuum cleaner and
gently rinse them in cool water. Do not use detergent or hot
water to avoid filter shrinking or deformation. After cleaning
dry them in the shade.

3.Replacing the air filter.


Rear suction
Hook the filter behind the flap situated at the top of the unit
and push the other side gently over the bends. (2 bends for 25/35 type, 3 bends for 50/60 type)
Bottom suction
Hook the filter behind the flap situated at the middle of the unit and push the other side gently
over the bends. (2 bends for 25/35 type, 3 bends for 50/60 type)

Main unit
Force

Filter
Force

In case of back side

270

Attach the filter to the


main unit while
pushing down on the
bends. (2 bends for
25/35 type, 3 bends
for 50/60 type)

In case of bottom side

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Cleaning the drain pan


Clean the drain pan periodically, or drain piping may be clogged with dust and may result in water leakage.
Ask your DAIKIN dealer to clean them.
Prepare a cover locally to prevent any dust in the air around the indoor unit from getting in the drain pan, if
there is a great deal of dust present.

CAUTION
Do not operate the air conditioner without filters, this to avoid dust accumulation inside the
unit.
Do not remove the air filter except when cleaning.
Unnecessary handling may damage the filter.
Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing powder, liquid insecticide, It may cause discoloring or
warping.
Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause an electric shock or a fire.
Operation with dusty air filters lowers the cooling and heating capacity and wastes energy.
The suction grille is option.
Do not use water or air of 50C or higher for cleaning air filters and outside panels.
Ask your DAIKIN dealer how to clean it.

Check
Check that the base, stand and other fittings of the outdoor unit are not decayed or corroded.
Check that nothing blocks the air inlets and the outlets of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit.
Check that the drain comes smoothly out of the drain hose during COOL or DRY operation.
If no drain water is seen, water may be leaking from the indoor unit. Stop operation and consult the service shop if this is the case.

Before a long idle period


1. Operate the FAN only for several hours on a fine day to dry out the inside.
Press MODE selector button and select FAN operation.
Press ON/OFF button and start operation.

2. Clean the air filters and set them again.


3. Take out batteries from the remote controller.
4. Turn OFF the breaker for the room air conditioner.
When a multi outdoor unit is connected, make sure the heating operation is not used at the
other room before you use the fan operation.

Operation Manual

271

Operations

EDSG18-936

1.2.16 Troubleshooting

Trouble Shooting
These cases are not troubles.
The following cases are not air conditioner troubles but have some reasons. You may just continue using it.

Case

Explanation

Operation does not start soon.


When ON/OFF button was
pressed soon after
operation was stopped.
When the mode was
reselected.

This is to protect the air conditioner.


You should wait for about 3 minutes.

The outdoor unit emits water or


steam.

In COOL or DRY mode


Moisture in the air condenses into water on the cool
surface of outdoor unit piping and drips.

Mists come out of the indoor


unit.

This happens when the air in the room is cooled into mist by
the cold air flow during cooling operation.

The indoor unit gives out odour. This happens when smells of the room, furniture, or
cigarettes are absorbed into the unit and discharged with the
air flow.
(If this happens, we recommend you to have the indoor unit
washed by a technician. Consult the service shop where you
bought the air conditioner.)

272

The outdoor fan rotates while


the air conditioner is not in
operation.

After operation is stopped:


The outdoor fan continues rotating for another 60
seconds for system protection.
While the air conditioner is not in operation:
When the outdoor temperature is very high, the out door
fan starts rotating for system protection.

The operation stopped


suddenly.
(OPERATION lamp is on.)

For system protection, the air conditioner may stop


operating on a sudden large voltage fluctuation.
It automatically resumes operation in about 3 minutes.

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Check again.
Please check again before calling a repair person.

Case
The air conditioner does not
operate.
(OPERATION lamp is off.)

Check
Hasn't a breaker turned OFF or a fuse blown?
Isn't it a power failure?
Are batteries set in the remote controller?
Is the timer setting correct?

Cooling effect is poor.

Are the air filters clean?


Is there anything to block the air inlet or the outlet of the
indoor and the outdoor units?

Is the temperature setting appropriate?


Are the windows and doors closed?
Are the air flow rate and the air direction set appropriately?
Is the unit set to the INTELLIGENT EYE mode?
Operation stops suddenly.
(OPERATION lamp flashes.)

Are the air filters clean?


Is there anything to block the air inlet or the outlet of the
indoor and the outdoor units?
Clean the air filters or take all obstacles away and turn the
breaker OFF. Then turn it ON again and try operating the air
conditioner with the remote controller. If the lamp still flashes,
call the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
Are operation modes all the same for indoor units
connected to outdoor units in the multi system?
If not, set all indoor units to the same operation mode and
confirm that the lamps flash.

An abnormal functioning
happens during operation.

Operation Manual

The air conditioner may malfunction with lightning or radio


waves. Turn the breaker OFF, turn it ON again and try
operating the air conditioner with the remote controller.

273

Operations

EDSG18-936

Call the service shop immediately.

WARNING
When an abnormality (such as a burning smell) occurs, stop operation and turn the breaker OFF.
Continued operation in an abnormal condition may result in troubles, electric shocks or fire.
Consult the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.
Do not attempt to repair or modify the air conditioner by yourself.
Incorrect work may result in electric shocks or fire.
Consult the service shop where you bought the air conditioner.

If one of the following symptoms takes place, call the service shop immediately.

The power cord is abnormally hot or damaged.


An abnormal sound is heard during operation.
The safety breaker, a fuse, or the earth leakage breaker
cuts off the operation frequently.
A switch or a button often fails to work properly.
There is a burning smell.
Water leaks from the indoor unit.

After a power failure


The air conditioner automatically resumes
operation in about 3 minutes. You should just
wait for a while.

Turn the breaker


OFF and call the
service shop.

Lightning
If lightning may strike the neighbouring area,
stop operation and turn the breaker OFF for
system protection.

We recommend periodical maintenance.


In certain operating conditions, the inside of the air conditioner may get foul after several seasons of
use, resulting in poor performance. It is recommended to have periodical maintenance by a specialist
aside from regular cleaning by the user. For specialist maintenance, contact the service shop where
you bought the air conditioner.
The maintenance cost must be born by the user.

274

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

1.3

Operations

FFQ25/35/50/60B Series
5 12

3
7

hr

C
hr

6
8

NOT
AVAILABLE

TEST

9
11
10
13

L H

14

21

20
TEST

19

17

15

16

18

22

e
d

h
f
g

b
d
c

hr

l
2

[1]

[1]

Operation Manual

275

Operations

EDSG18-936

CONTENTS
ILLUSTRATIONS .............................................. [1]
1. WHAT TO DO BEFORE
OPERATION ................................................. 1
2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.............................. 2
3. OPERATION RANGE.................................... 4
4. INSTALLATION SITE .................................... 4
5. NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH SWITCH
AND DISPLAY ON THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER .............................................. 5
6. OPERATION PROCEDURE ......................... 5
7. OPTIMUM OPERATION ............................... 8
8. MAINTENANCE
(FOR SERVICE PERSONNEL)..................... 8
9. NOT MALFUNCTION OF THE AIR
CONDITIONER ........................................... 10
10. TROUBLE SHOOTING ............................... 11

1. WHAT TO DO BEFORE
OPERATION
This operation manual is for the following systems
with standard control. Before initiating operation,
contact your Daikin dealer for the operation that
corresponds to your sysem.
Pair system

Indoor unit

Heat pump type


This system provides cooling, heating, automatic,
program dry, and fan operation modes.
Cooling only type
This system provides cooling, program dry, and
fan operation modes.

PRECAUTIONS FOR GROUP CONTROL


SYSTEM OR TWO REMOTE CONTROLLER
CONTROL SYSTEM
This system provides two other control systems
beside individual control (one remote controller controls one indoor unit) system. Confirm the following
if your unit is of the following control system type.
Group control system
One remote controller controls up to 16 indoor
units.
All indoor units are equally set.
Two remote controllers control system
Two remote controllers control one indoor unit
(In case of group control system, one group of
indoor units)
The unit is individually operated.
NOTE
Contact your Daikin dealer in case of changing
the combination or setting of group control and
two remote controllers control system.

Names and functions of parts


Refer to figure 2 on page [1]
a

Outdoor unit
Unit with
remote
controller

Multi system

Indoor unit

Indoor unit

Outdoor unit
Unit with
remote
controller

Unit with
remote
controller

NOTE
If the unit you purchased is controlled by a wireless remote controller, also refer to the wireless
remote controllers operation manual.
If your installation has a customized control system,
ask your Daikin dealer for operation that corresponds to your system.

276

c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k

Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
The external appearance of the outdoor
unit varies depending on its capacity
class. The outdoor unit shown in the figure is for reference to indicate features.
Contact your Daikin Dealer and verify
which outdoor unit you have.
Remote controller
Depending on the system configuration,
the remote controller is not provided.
Inlet air
Discharged air
Air outlet
Air flow flap (at air outlet)
Refrigerant piping, connection electric wire
Drain pipe
Air inlet
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Drain pumping out device (built-in)
Drains water removed from the room during cooling.
Ground wire
Wire to ground from the outdoor unit to prevent electrical shocks.

English

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
To gain full advantage of the air conditioners functions and to avoid malfunction due to mishandling,
we recommend that you read this instruction manual carefully before use.
This air conditioner is classified under appliances
not accessible to the general public.
The precautions described herein are classified as WARNING and CAUTION. They both
contain important information regarding
safety. Be sure to observe all precautions
without fail.
WARNING ...Failure to follow these instructions
properly may result in personal
injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ....Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or personal injury,
which may be serious depending
on the circumstances.
After reading, keep this manual in a convenient place so that you can refer to it whenever necessary. If the equipment is
transferred to a new user, be sure also to
hand over the manual.
WARNING
Be aware that prolonged, direct exposure to
cool or warm air from the air conditioner, or
to air that is too cool or too warm can be
harmful to your physical condition and
health.
When the air conditioner is malfunctioning
(giving off a burning odour, etc.) turn off
power to the unit and contact your local
dealer.
Continued operation under such circumstances
may result in a failure, electric shocks or fire hazards.
Consult your local dealer about installation
work.
Doing the work yourself may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire hazards.
Consult your local dealer regarding modification, repair and maintenance of the air conditioner.
Improper workmanship may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire hazards.
Do not place objects, including rods, your
fingers, etc., in the air inlet or outlet.
Injury may result due to contact with the air conditioners highspeed fan blades.
Beware of fire in case of refrigerant leakage.
If the air conditioner is not operating correctly,
i.e. not generating cool or warm air, refrigerant
leakage could be the cause.
Consult your dealer for assistance.
The refrigerant within the air conditioner is safe
and normally does not leak.
English

Operation Manual

Operations

However, in the event of a leakage, contact with


a naked burner, heater or cooker may result in
generation of noxious gas.
Do not longer use the air conditioner until a qualified service person confirms that the leakage
has been repaired.
Consult your local dealer regarding what to
do in case of refrigerant leakage.
When the air conditioner is to be installed in a
small room, it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked refrigerant does not exceed the concentration limit in the
event of a leakage. Otherwise, this may lead to
an accident due to oxygen depletion.
Contact professional personnel about attachment of accessories and be sure to use only
accessories specified by the manufacturer.
If a defect results from your own workmanship, it
may result in water leaks, electric shock or fire.
Consult your local dealer regarding relocation and reinstallation of the air conditioner.
Improper installation work may result in leakage,
electric shocks or fire hazards.
Be sure to use fuses with the correct ampere
reading.
Do not use improper fuses, copper or other wires
as a substitute, as this may result in electric
shock, fire, injury or damage to the unit.
Be sure to earth the unit.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning
conductor or telephone earth lead. Imperfect
earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other
sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may
result in electric shocks or fire.
Consult the dealer if the air conditioner submerges owing to a natural disaster, such as a
flood or typhoon.
Do not operate the air conditioner in that case, or
otherwise a malfunction, electric shock, or fire
may result.
Do not start or stop operating the air conditioner with the power supply breaker turned
ON or OFF.
Otherwise, fire or water leakage may result. Furthermore, the fan will rotate abruptly if power failure compensation is enabled, which may result
in inlury.
Do not use the product in the atmosphere
contaminated with oil vapor, such as cooking
oil or machine oil vapor.
Oil vapor may cause crack damage, electric
shocks, or fire.
Do not use the product in places with excessive oily smoke, such as cooking rooms, or
in places with flammable gas, corrosive gas,
or metal dust.
Using the product in such places may cause fire
or product failures.

277

Operations

Do not use flammable materials (e.g., hairspray or insecticide) near the product.
Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as paint thinner.
The use of organic solvents may cause crack
damage to the product, electric shocks, or fire.
Be sure to use a dedicated power supply for
the air conditioner.
The use of any other power supply may cause
heat generation, fire, or product failures.
CAUTION
Do not use the air conditioner for purposes
other than those for which it is intended.
Do not use the air conditioner for cooling precision instruments, food, plants, animals or works
of art as this may adversely affect the performance, quality and/or longevity of the object
concerned.
Do not remove the outdoor units fan guard.
The guard protects against the units high speed
fan, which may cause injury.
Do not place objects that are susceptible to
moisture directly beneath the indoor or outdoor units.
Under certain conditions, condensation on the
main unit or refrigerant pipes, air filter dirt or
drain blockage may cause dripping, resulting in
fouling or failure of the object concerned.
To avoid oxygen depletion, ensure that the
room is adequately ventilated if equipment
such as a burner is used together with the air
conditioner.
After prolonged use, check the unit stand
and its mounts for damage.
If left in a damaged condition, the unit may fall
and cause injury.
Do not place flammable sprays or operate
spray containers near the unit as this may
result in fire.
Before cleaning, be sure to stop unit operation, turn the breaker off or remove the power
cord.
Otherwise, an electric shock and injury may
result.
To avoid electric shocks, do not operate with
wet hands.
Do not place appliances that produce naked
flames in places exposed to the air flow from
the unit as this may impair combustion of the
burner.
Do not place heaters directly below the unit,
as resulting heat can cause deformation.
Do not allow a child to mount on the outdoor
unit or avoid placing any object on it.
Falling or tumbling may result in injury.
Do not block air inlets nor outlets.
Impaired air flow may result in insufficient performance or trouble.

278

EDSG18-936

Be sure that children, plants or animals are


not exposed directly to airflow from the unit,
as adverse effects may ensue.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water,
as this may result in electric shocks or fire.
Do not install the air conditioner at any place
where there is a danger of flammable gas
leakage.
In the event of a gas leakage, build-up of gas
near the air conditioner may result in fire hazards.
Do not put flammable containers, such as
spray cans, within 1 m from the blow-off
mouth.
The containers may explode because the warm
air output of the indoor or outdoor unit will affect
them.
Arrange the drain hose to ensure smooth
drainage.
Imperfect drainage may cause wetting.
The appliance is not intended for use by
unattended young children or infirm persons.
Impairment of bodily functions and harm to
health may result.
Children should be supervised to ensure that
they do not play with the unit or its remote
controller.
Accidental operation by a child may result in
impairment of bodily functions and harm health.
Do not let children play on or around the outdoor unit.
If they touch the unit carelessly, injury may be
caused.
Consult your dealer regarding cleaning the
inside of the air conditioner.
Improper cleaning may cause breakage of plastic parts, water leakage and other damage as
well as electric shocks.
To avoid injury, do not touch the air inlet or
aluminium fins of the unit.
Do not place objects in direct proximity of the
outdoor unit and do not let leaves and other
debris accumulate around the unit.
Leaves are a hotbed for small animals which can
enter the unit. Once in the unit, such animals can
cause malfunctions, smoke or fire when making
contact with electrical parts.
Never touch the internal parts of the controller.
Do not remove the front panel. Touching certain
internal parts will cause electric shocks and
damage to the unit. Please consult your dealer
about checking and adjustment of internal parts.
Do not leave the remote controller wherever
there is a risk of wetting.
If water gets into the remote controller there is a
risk of electrical leakage and damage to electronic components.

English

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Watch your steps at the time of air filter


cleaning or inspection.
High-place work is required, to which utmost
attention must be paid.
If the scaffold is unstable, you may fall or topple
down, thus causing injury.

3. OPERATION RANGE
If the temperature or the humidity is beyond the following conditions, safety devices may work and the
air conditioner may not operate, or sometimes,
water may drop from the indoor unit.
COOLING
OUTDOOR
UNIT
RKS25 35
50 60
RXS25 35
50 60

INDOOR
TEMPERA- HUMIDTURE
ITY
D
B 21 to 32
W 14 to 23
B

RMXS112 140 D
160
21 to 32
RMKS112 140 B
160
3MKS58 75
W 14 to 23
4MKS90
B
3MXS52 68
4MXS80

80% or
below

OUTDOOR
TEMPERATURE

D 10 to 46
B (5)

80% or
below

INDOOR
TEMPERATURE

RXS25 35

DB

10 to 30

RXS50 60

DB

10 to 30

RMXS112 140
160
3MXS52 68
4MXS80

DB

10 to 30

D 10 to 46
B

OUTDOOR
TEMPERATURE
DB
14 to 24
WB
15 to 20
DB
14 to 24
WB
15 to 18
DB
14 to 21
WB

15 to 15.5

DB: Dry bulb temperature (C)


WB: Wet bulb temperature (C)
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16 C to 32 C.
The numerical value in a parenthesis shows the
operation range of the model for Australia.
Tips for saving energy
Be careful not to cool (heat) the room too much.
Keeping the temperature setting at a moderate
level helps save energy.
Cover windows with a blind or a curtain.
Blocking sunlight and air from outdoors increases
the cooling (heating) effect.
Recommended temperature setting
For cooling
26 to 28 C
For heating
20 to 24 C
English

Operation Manual

Regarding places for installation


Is the air conditioner installed at a well-ventilated place where there are no obstacles
around?
Do not use the air conditioner in the following
places.
a. Filled with much mineral oil such as cutting oil
b. Where there is much salt such as a beach
area
c. Where sulfured gas exists such as a hot-spring
resort.
d. Where there are considerable voltage
fluctuations such as a factory or plant
e. Vehicles and vessels
f. Where there is much spray of oil and vapor
such as a cookery, etc.
g. Where there are machines generating
electromagnetic waves.
h. Filled with acid and/or alkaline steam or vapor
Is a snow protection measure taken?
For details, consult your dealer.

Regarding wiring

HEATING
OUTDOOR
UNIT

4. INSTALLATION SITE

All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.


To do wiring, ask your dealer. Never do it by
yourself.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit
is provided for this air conditioner and that all
electrical work is carried out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations.

Pay attention to running noises, too


Are the following places selected?
a. A place that can sufficiently withstand the
weight of the air conditioner with less running
noises and vibrations.
b. A place where the hot wind discharged from
the air outlet of outdoor unit and the running
noises.
Are you sure that there are no obstacles near
the air outlet of the outdoor unit?
Such obstacles may result in declined performance and increased running noises.
If abnormal noises occur in use, stop the
operation of the air conditioner, and then consult your dealer or our service station.

Regarding drainage of drain piping


Is the drain piping executed to perform complete drainage?
If proper drainage is not carried out from the outdoor drain pipes during air-conditioning operation, chances are that dust and dirt are clogged
in the pipe. This may result in a water leakage
from the indoor unit. Under such circumstances,
stop the operation of the air conditioner, and then
con sult your dealer or our service station.

279

Operations

EDSG18-936

5. NAME AND FUNCTION OF


EACH SWITCH AND DISPLAY
ON THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER
Refer to figure 1 on page [1]
The illustrations in this operating manual correspond to the remote control format BRC1C type.
1

ON/OFF BUTTON
Press the button and the system will start.
Press the button again and the system will
stop.
OPERATION LAMP (RED)
The lamp lights up during operation.
DISPLAY
(UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL)
When this display shows, the system is
UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
(This is not a standard specification)
DISPLAY

(VENTILATION/AIR CLEANING)
This display shows that the total heat
exchange and the air cleaning unit are in
operation (These are optional accessories).
DISPLAY

(OPERATION MODE)
This display shows the current OPERATION
MODE. For cooling only type,
(Auto)
and
(Heating) are not installed.
DISPLAY TEST (INSPECTION/TEST
OPERATION)
When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION
BUTTON is pressed, the display shows the
system mode is in.
DISPLAY

13

14
15

16

17

18

19

20

21
22

NON-FUNCTIONING DISPLAY
If that particular function is not available,
pressing the button may display the words
NOT AVAILABLE for a few seconds.
When running multiple units simultaneously
The NOT AVAILABLE message will only be
appear if none of the indoor units is equipped
with the function. If even one unit is equipped
with the function, the display will not appear.
TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
Refer to PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION.
TIMER ON/ OFF BUTTON
Refer to PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
This button is used only by qualified service
persons for maintenance purposes.
PROGRAMMING TIME BUTTON
Use this button for programming START and/
or STOP time.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
Press this button to select the fan speed,
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
Press this button to select OPERATION MODE.
AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
Refer to AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST.

NOTE
For the sake of explanation, all indications are
shown on the display in figure 1 contrary to
actual running situations.

(PROGRAMMED TIME)

7
This display shows the PROGRAMMED
TIME of the system start or stop.
DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
8
This display shows the set temperature.
DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
9
This display shows the set fan speed.
DISPLAY
(AIR FLOW FLAP)
10
Refer to AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST.
DISPLAY
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FIL11 TER)
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER.
DISPLAY
(DEFROST/HOT
12 START)
Refer to DEFROST OPERATION".

280

6. OPERATION PROCEDURE
Refer to figure 1 on page [1]
Operating procedure varies with heat pump type
and cooling only type. Contact your Daikin dealer
to confirm your system type.
To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch
6 hours before operation.
If the main power supply is turned off during
operation, operation will restart automatically
after the power turns back on again.

English

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

COOLING, HEATING, AUTOMATIC, FAN,


AND PROGRAM DRY OPERATION
Operate in the following order.

OPERATION MODE SELECTOR

Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button several times and select the OPERATION MODE of your choice as follows.
COOLING OPERATION ........................
HEATING OPERATION .........................
AUTOMATIC OPERATION ....................

In this operation mode,COOL/HEAT


changeover is automatically conducted.
FAN OPERATION .................................

DRY OPERATION .................................


The function of this program is to decrease
the humidity in your room with the minimum
temperature decrease.
Micro computer automatically determines
TEMPERATURE and FAN SPEED.
This system dose not go into operation if the
room temperature is below 16 C.
Refer to figure 3 on page [1]
For cooling only type, COOLING , FAN and
DRY operation are able to select.

(3) OPERATION START


For ordinary heating, it will take longer for the
room temperature to reach the set temperature than with cooling. We therefore recommend starting the unit ahead of time using the
timer operation.

Regarding outside air temperature and


heating capacity
The heating capacity of the air conditioner
declines as the outside air temperature falls.
In such a case, use the air conditioner in combination with other heating systems.
A warm air circulating system is employed, and
therefore it takes some time until the entire room
is warmed up after the start of operation.
An indoor fan runs to discharge a gentle wind
automatically until the temperature inside the air
conditioner reaches a certain level. At this time,
the remote controller displays
. Leave it
as it stands and wait for a while.
When the warm air stays under the ceiling and
your feet are cold, we recommend that you use a
circulator (a fan to circulate the air inside the
room). For details,consult your dealer.

ADJUSTMENT
For programming TEMPERATURE, FAN SPEED
and AIR FLOW DIRECTION, follow the procedure
shown below.

TEMPERATURE SETTING

ON/OFF

Press ON/OFF button


OPERATION lamp lights up or goes off and the system starts or stops OPERATION.

[EXPLANATION OF HEATING OPERATION]


(1) DEFROST OPERATION
As the frost on the coil of an outdoor unit
increase, heating effect decreases and the
system goes into DEFROST OPERATION.
The indoor unit fan stops and the remote controller display shows
.
After 6 to 8 minutes (maximum 10 minutes) of
DEFROST OPERATION, the system returns
to HEATING OPERATION.
(2) HOT START
In order to prevent cold air from blowing out of
an indoor unit at the start of heating operation,
the indoor fan is automatically stopped. The
display of the remote controller shows

(DEFROST/HOT START).

English

Operation Manual

Press TEMPERATURE SETTING button and


program the setting temperature.
Each time this button is pressed,setting
temperature rises 1 C.
Each time this button is pressed, setting temperature lowers 1 C.
The setting is impossible for fan operation.
NOTE
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16 C to 32 C.

FAN SPEED CONTROL


Press FAN SPEED CONTROL button.
High or Low fan speed can be selected.
Micro computer may sometimes control the fan
speed in order to protect the unit.

281

Operations

EDSG18-936

AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST


Press the AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button
to adjust the air flow angle.

Programming the start time (


) .... The system starts operating after the set time has
elapsed.
The timer can be programmed a maximum of
72 hours.
The start and the stop time can be simultaneously programmed.

1
Up and down adjustment
The movable limit of the flap is changeable.
Contact your Daikin dealer for details.

Press the AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST


button to select the air direction as following.
The AIR FLOW FLAP display
swings as shown left and the
air flow direction continuously
varies. (Automatic swing setting)

swing

TIMER MODE START/STOP

Press the TIMER MODE START/STOP button several times and select the mode on
the display.
The display flashes.
For setting the timer stop ....
For setting the timer start ....

PROGRAMMING TIME

Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and


set the time for stopping or starting the system.

Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION


ADJUST button to select the air
direction of your choice.

When this button is pressed, the time


advances by 1 hour.
When this button is pressed, the time
goes backward by 1 hour.

The AIR FLOW FLAP display


stops swinging and the air
flow direction is fixed (Fixed
air flow direction setting).

TIMER ON/OFF

MOVEMENT OF THE AIR FLOW FLAP

Press the TIMER ON/OFF button.

For the following conditions, micro computer controls the air flow direction so it may be different from
the display.

The timer setting procedure ends.


The display
or
changes from flashing light to a constant light.

Operation
mode
Operation
condition

Heating
When starting operation
When room temperature is higher
than the set temperature
At defrost operation
(Air is blown horizontally to prevent
the cool air from being blown
directly onto anyone in the room.)

Operation mode includes automatic operation.


ATTENTION:
The movable limit of the flap is changeable. Contact your Daikin dealer for details.
Avoid operating in the horizontal direction

which may cause dew or dust to settle on ceiling.

PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION

Refer to figure 4 on page [1]

For example:
When the timer is programmed to
stop the system after 3 hours and
start the system after 4 hours, the
system will stop after 3 hours and
then 1 hour later the system will
start.
NOTE
When setting the timer Off and On at the same
time, repeat the above procedure from 1 to 3
once again.
After the timer is programmed, the display shows
the remaining time.
Press the TIMER ON/OFF button once again to
cancel programming. The display vanishes.

Operate in the following order.


The timer is operated in the following two ways.
Programming the stop time (
) .... The system stops operating after the set time has elapsed.
7

282

English

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

7. OPTIMUM OPERATION
Observe the following precautions to ensure the
system operates.
Adjust the room temperature properly for a comfortable environment. Avoid excessive heating or
cooling.
Prevent direct sunlight from entering a room during cooling operation by using curtains or blinds.
Ventilate the room regularly.
Using the unit for long periods of time requires
attentive ventilation of the room.
Do not place items that might be damaged by
water under the indoor unit.
Water may condensate and drip if the humidity
reaches 80% or if the drain exit gets clogged.
Keep doors and windows closed. If the doors and
windows remain open, room air will flow out and
cause to decrease the effect of cooling and heating.
Do not place other heaters directly below the
indoor unit.
They may deform due to the heat.
Never place objects near the air inlet and the air
outlet of the unit. It may cause deterioration in the
effect or stop in the operation.
Turn off the main power supply switch when it is
not used for long periods of time. When the main
power switch is turned on, some watts of electricity is being used even if the system is not operating. Turn off the main power supply switch for
saving energy. When reoperating, turn on the
main power supply switch 6hours before operation for smooth running (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
When the display shows
(TIME TO
CLEAN AIR FILTER), ask a qualified service person to clean the filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
Fully use the function of air flow direction adjust.
Cold air gathers on the floor, and warm air gathers in the ceiling.
Set the air flow direction parallel during cooling or
dry operation, and set it downwards during heating operation.
Do not let the air blow directly to a person.
It takes time for the room temperature to reach
the set temperature.
We recommend starting the operation in advance
using timer operation.

English

Operation Manual

Operations

8. MAINTENANCE
(FOR SERVICE PERSONNEL)
ONLY A QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSON IS
ALLOWED TO PERFORM MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Before touching any of connection wirings, be
sure to turn off all power supply switches.
Contact professional personnel about attachment of accessories and be sure to use only
accessories specified by the manufacturer.
If a defect results from your own workmanship, it
may result in water leaks, electric shock or fire.

CAUTION
Before cleaning, be sure to stop unit operation, turn the breaker off or remove the power
cord.
Otherwise, an electric shock and injury may
result.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water, as
this may result in electric shocks or fire.
Consult your dealer regarding cleaning the
inside of the air conditioner.
Improper cleaning may cause breakage of plastic
parts, water leakage and other damage as well as
electric shocks.
Take care of scaffolding and exercise caution
when working high above ground level.

HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER


Clean the air filter when the display shows
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER).

It will display that it will operate for a set amount of


time.
Increase the frequency of cleaning if the unit is
installed in a room where the air is extremely contaminated.
If the dirt becomes impossible to clean, change the
air filter (Air filter for exchange is optional)
1. Open the suction grille.
Push it downward slowly while pressing horizontally the buttons provided on two spots.
(Follow the same procedure for closing.)

283

Operations

EDSG18-936

2. Detach the air filter.


Pull the hook of the air filter out diagonally downward, and remove the filter.

3. Clean the air filter.


Use vacuum cleaner A) or wash the air filter with
water B).
A) Using a vacuum cleaner

When the flap is extremely contaminated,


remove it as below and clean or exchange it.
(For changing the flap, please contact your
dealer.)
NOTE
Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing
powder, liquid insecticide. It may cause discoloring or warping.
Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause an
electric shock or a fire.
Do not scrub firmly when washing the blade with
water.
The surface sealing may peel off.
Do not use water or air of 50C or higher for
cleaning air filters and outside panels.

HOW TO CLEAN THE SUCTION GRILLE


1. Open the suction grille.
Push it downward slowly while pressing horizontally the buttons provided on two spots. (Follow
the same procedure for closing.)

B) Washing with water


When the air filter is very dirty, use
soft brush and neutral detergent.
Remove water and dry in the shade.
NOTE
Do not wash the air conditioner with hot water of
more than 50C, as doing so may result in discoloration and/or deformation.
Do not expose it to fire, as doing so may result in
burning.
4. Fix the air filter.
(1) Hook the air filter to a protrusion on the suction grille.
(2) Push the lower part of the air filter onto the
protrusion at the lower part of the suction
grille, and fix the air filter there.

2. Detach the suction grille.


Open the suction grille 45 degrees and lift it
upward.

3. Detach the air filter.


Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTERitem No.2.
5. Shut the suction grille.
Refer to item No.1.
6. After turning on the power, press FILTER
SIGN RESET button.
The TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER display vanishes.

HOW TO CLEAN AIR OUTLET AND OUTSIDE PANELS


Clean with soft cloth.
When it is difficult to remove stains, use water or
neutral detergent.

284

4. Clean the suction grille.


Wash with a soft bristle brush and
neutral detergent or water, and dry
throughly.
When very grimy
Directly apply the type of detergent
used for cleaning ventilation fans or ovens, wait
10 minutes, and then rinse with water.
5. Fix the air filter.
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTERitem No.4.

English

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

6. Fix the suction grille.


Refer to item No. 2.
7. Shut the suction grille.
Refer to item No. 1.

START UP AFTER A LONG STOP


Confirm the following
Check that the air inlet and outlet are not
blocked. Remove any obstacle.
Check if the earth is connected.
Might there be a broken wire somewhere?
Contact your dealer if there are any problems.
Clean the air filter and outside panels
After cleaning the air filter, make sure to attach it.
Turn on the main power supply switch
The display on the remote controller will be
shown when the power is turned on.
To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch
at least 6 hours before operation.

WHAT TO DO WHEN STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR A LONG PERIOD


Turn on FAN OPERATION for a half day and dry
the unit.
Refer to 6.OPERATION PROCEDURE.
Cut off the power supply.
When the main power switch is turned on, some
watts of electricity is being used even if the system is not operating.
Turn off the main power supply switch for saving
energy.
The display on the remote controller will vanish
when the main power switch is turned off.
Clean the air filter and the exterior.
Be sure to replace the air filter to its original place
after cleaning. Refer to MAINTENANCE.

9. NOT MALFUNCTION OF THE


AIR CONDITIONER
The following symptoms do not indicate air conditioner malfunction
I. THE SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE
The system does not restart immediately
after the ON/OFF button is pressed.
If the OPERATION lamp lights, the system is in
normal condition.
It does not restart immediately because a safety
device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on
again automatically.
The system does not restart immediately
when TEMPERATURE SETTING button is
returned to the former position after pushing
the button.
If the OPERATION lamp lights, the system is in
normal condition.
English

Operation Manual

Operations

It does not restart immediately because a safety


device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on
again automatically.
The system does not start when the display
shows
(UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL) and it flashes for few seconds
after pressing an operation button.
This is because the system is under centralized
control. Flashes on the display indicates that the
system cannot be controlled by the remote controller.
The system does not start immediately after
the power supply is turned on.
Wait one minute until the micro computer is prepared for operation.
The outdoor unit is stopped
This is because the room temprerature has
reached the set temprerature. The indoor unit
switches to fan operation.

II. The display shows


(UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL) and the unit operates
in a mode different to what is shown on the
remote controller display.
When using a unit in a multi system, the operation condition of that unit is controlled by a micro
computer as described below, according to the
operation condition of other indoor units connected to the system.
If the operation mode does not match other
indoor units that are already running, the indoor
unit will assume the STANDBY state (the fan is
stopped and the air flow flap is positioned horizontally).
If HEATING mode is set together with COOLING,
DRY or FAN mode, the above mentioned condition will occur.
NOTE
Normally, the operation mode in the room where
the unit is first run is given priority, but the following situations are exceptions, so please keep this
in mind.
a. If the operation mode of the first room is FAN
Mode, then using Heating Mode in any room
after this will give priority to heating. In this situation, the air conditioner running in FAN
Mode will go on standby.
b. With the Priority Room Setting active.
Contact your Daikin dealer for the operation
that corresponds to your system.
If the total capacity of operating indoor units
exceeds the limit, the indoor unit will assume the
STANDBY state (FAN and AIR FLOW DIRECTION will be left as set). (This only applies to
cooling only type.)
If another indoor unit commences a HEATING
operation after this indoor unit is running in
COOLING mode, this indoor unit may switch to
DRY operation (fan on low, air flow flap set at horizontal).

10

285

Operations

III. The fan speed is different from the setting.


Pressing the fan speed control button does
not change the fan speed.
When the room temperature reaches the set
temperature in heating mode, the power supply
from the outdoor unit is stopped and the indoor
unit will operate on the low fan setting. (If using
the multi system, the fan will alternate between
off and low.)
This is to prevent the cool air from being blown
directly onto anyone in the room.
IV. AIR BLOW DIRECTION IS NOT AS SPECIFIED.
Actual air blow direction is not as shown on
the remote contoller.
Automatic swing setting does not work.
Refer to AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST.
V. WHITE MIST COMES OUT OF A UNIT
When humidity is high during cooling operation (In oily or dusty places)
If the inside of an indoor unit is extremely contaminated, the temperature distribution inside a
room becomes uneven. It is necessary to clean
the inside of the indoor unit. Ask your Daikin
dealer for details on cleaning the unit. This operation requires a qualified service person.
When the system is changed over to HEATING
OPERATION after DEFROST OPERATION.
Moisture generated by DEFROST becomes
steam and exists.
VI.NOISE OF AIR CONDITIONERS
A ringing sound after the unit is started.
This sound is generated by the temperature regulator working.
It will quiet down after about a minute.
A continuous flow Shuh sound is heard
when the systems is in COOLING or
DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the sound of refrigerant gas flowing
through both indoor and outdoor units.
A Shuh sound which is heard at the start or
immediately after the stop of operation or
which is heard at the start or immediately
after the stop of DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the noise of refrigerant caused by flow
stop and flow change.
A continuous flowing sound "Shah"or a trickling sound "Jyuru Jyuru"are heard when the
system is in COOLING OPERATION or at a
stop.
The noise is heard when the drain pump is in
operation.
A Pishi-pishi squeaking sound is heard
when the system is in operation or after the
stop of operation.
Expansion and contraction of plastic parts
caused by temperature change makes this noise.
VII.DUST FROM THE UNITS
Dust may blow out from the unit after starting
operation from long resting time.
Dust absorbed by the unit blows out.
11

286

EDSG18-936

VIII.THE UNITS GIVE OFF ODORS


The unit absorbs the smell of rooms, furniture,
cigarettes, etc., and then emits them.
IX.THE LIQUID CRYSTAL OF THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER SHOW

It happens immediately after the main power


supply switch is turned on.
This shows that the remote controller is in normal condition.
This continues temporary.
X. THE ROOM TEMPERATURE DOES NOT DROP
The air conditioner is in program dry operation.
The air conditioner in program dry operation
does not drop the room temperature as much as
possible. See page 5-6 OPERATION PROCEDURE.

10. TROUBLE SHOOTING


I. If one of the following malfunctions occurs,
take the measures shown below and contact
your Daikin dealer.
The system must be repaired by a qualified service
person.
WARNING
When the air conditioner is in abnormal conditions (smell of something burning, etc),
unplug the power cord from the outlet, and
contact your dealer
Continued operation under such circumstances
may result in a failure, electric shock, and fire.
If a safety device such as a fuse, a breaker or an
earth leakage breaker frequently actuates;
Measure: Do not turn on the main power switch.
If the ON/OFF switch does not properly work;
Measure: Turn off the main power switch.
If water leaks from unit.
Measure: Stop the operation.
If the display
(INSPECTION), UNIT No.,
and the OPERATION lamp flash and the MALFUNCTION CODE appears.
OPERATION lamp

UNIT No.

INSPECTION
display

L H

INDOOR UNIT No. in which


a malfunction occurs
MALFUNCTION CODE

Measure: Notify and inform the model name


and what the malfunction code indicates to your Daikin dealer.

English

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

II. If the system does not properly operate


except for the above mentioned case, and
none of the above mentioned malfunctions is
evident, investigate the system according to
the following procedures.
1. If the system does not operate at all.
Check if there is a power failure.
Wait until power is restored. If power failure
occurs during operation, the system automatically restarts immediately after the power supply
recovers.
Check if no fuse has blown.
Turn off the power supply.
Check if the breaker is blown.
Turn the power on with the breaker switch in the
off position.
Do not turn the power on with the breaker switch
in the trip position.
(Contact your dealer.)

ON
Switch
Trip position
Breaker

OFF

2. If the system stops operating after operating


the system.
Check if the air inlet or outlet of outdoor or indoor
unit is blocked by obstacles.
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated.
Check if the air filter is clogged.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
3. The system operates but it does not sufficiently cool or heat.
If the air inlet or outlet of the indoor or the outdoor
unit is blocked with obstacles.
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated.
If the air filter is clogged.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
If the set temperature is not proper (Refer to
ADJUSTMENT).
If the FAN SPEED button is set to LOW SPEED
(Refer to ADJUSTMENT).
If the air flow angle is not proper (Refer to AIR
FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST).
If the doors or the windows are open.
Shut doors or windows to prevent wind from coming in.
If direct sunlight enters the room (when cooling).
Use curtains or blinds.
When there are too many inhabitants in the room
(when cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the room
is too large.
If the heat source of the room is excessive (when
cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the room
is too large.

English

12

3P184442-4D

Operation Manual

287

Operations

1.4

EDSG18-936

FCQ35/50/60/71B Series
2

4 11

3
6

hr

C
hr

5
7

NOT
AVAILABLE

TEST

8
10
9
12

L H

13

20
19
18

15

14

17

16

21

g
e
3

f
d

hr

[1]

288

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

1. WHAT TO DO BEFORE
OPERATION
This operation manual is for the system with standard control. Before initiating operation, contact
your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system.
NOTE
If the unit you purchased is controlled by a wireless remote controller, also refer to the wireless
remote controllers operation manual.
If your installation has a customized control system,
ask your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system.
Heat pump type
This system provides cooling, heating, automatic,
program dry, and fan operation modes.
Cooling only type
This system provides cooling, program dry, and
fan operation modes.

Operations

PRECAUTIONS FOR GROUP CONTROL


SYSTEM OR TWO REMOTE CONTROLLERS CONTROL SYSTEM
This system provides two other control systems
beside individual control (one remote controller controls one indoor unit) system. Confirm the following if
your unit is of the following control system type.
Group control system
One remote controller controls up to 16 indoor
units.
All indoor units are equally set.
Two remote controllers control system
Two remote controllers control one indoor unit (In
case of group control system, one group of indoor
units)
The unit is individually operated.

NOTE
Contact your Daikin dealer in case of changing
the combination or setting of group control and
two remote controllers control system.

Names and functions of parts


Refer to figure 2 on page [1]
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j

Operation Manual

Indoor unit
Remote controller
Inlet air
Discharge air
Air outlet
Air flow flap (at air outlet)
Refrigerant piping, connection electric wire
Drain pipe
Air inlet
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Drain pumping out device(built-in)
Condensate removed from the room during
cooling.

289

Operations

2. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
We recommend that you read this instruction manual carefully before use to gain full advantage of the
function of the air conditioner, and to avoid malfunction due to mishandling.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accessible to the general public.
The precautions described below are WARNING and CAUTION. These are very important
precautions concerning safety. Be sure to
observe all of them without fail.
WARNING ...These are the matters with possibilities leading to serious consequences such as death or serious
injury due to erroneous handling.
CAUTION ....These are the matters with possibilities leading to injury or material
damage due to erroneous handling including probabilities leading to serious consequences in
some cases.
After reading, keep this manual at a place
where any user can read at any time. Furthermore, make certain that this operation manual
is handed to a new user when he takes over
the operation.
WARNING
Avoid exposure of your body directly to the
cold air for a long time, or avoid excessive
exposure of your body to the cold air.
Otherwise, your physical condition may be deteriorated and/or your health may be ruined.
When the air conditioner is in abnormal conditions (smell of something burning, etc),
turn off power, and contact the dealer where
you purchased the air conditioner.
Continued operation under such circumstances
may result in a failure, electric shock, and fire.
Ask your dealer for installation of the air conditioner.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself
may result in a water leakage, electric shock,
and fire.
Ask your dealer for improvement, repair, and
maintenance.
Incomplete improvement, repair, and maintenance may result in a water leakage, electric
shock, and fire.
Do not insert your finger, a stick, etc., into the
air inlet, outlet, and fan blades.
A fan in high-speed running may result in injury.
The refrigerant in the air conditioner is safe
and normally does not leak. If the refrigerant
leaks inside the room, the contact with a fire
of a burner, a heater or a cooker may result in
a harmful gas.
Do not use the air conditioner until when a service person confirms to finish repairing the portion where the refrigerant leaks.

290

EDSG18-936

For refrigerant leakage, consult your dealer.


When the air conditioner is to be installed in a
small room, it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked refrigerant does not exceed the limiting concentration
even when it leaks. If the refrigerant leaks
exceeding the level of limiting concentration, an
oxygen deficiency accident may happen.
For installation of separately sold component parts, ask a specialist.
Be sure to use the separately sold component
parts designated by our company.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself may
result in a water leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Ask your dealer to move and reinstall the air
conditioner.
Incomplete installation may result in a water
leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Do not use any fuse with improper capacity.
The use of a piece of wire and whatnot may
result in a failure and fire.
CAUTION
Do not use the air conditioner for other purposes.
Do not use the air conditioner for a special application such as the storage of foods, animals and
plants, precision machines, and art objects as
otherwise the deterioration of quality may result.
Do not remov e the air outlet of the ou tdoor unit.
The fan may get exposed and result in injury.
Do not place items that might be damaged by
water under the indoor unit.
Water may condensate and drip if the humidity
reaches 80% or if the drain exit gets clogged.
When the air conditioner is used in combination with burners or heaters, perform sufficient ventilation.
Insufficient ventilation may result in an oxygen
deficiency accident.
Check and make sure that foundation blocks
are not damaged after a long use.
If they are left in a damaged condition, the unit
may fall and result in injury.
Neither place a flammable spray bottle near
the air conditioner nor perform spraying.
Doing so may result in a fire.
To clean the air conditioner, stop operation,
and unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Otherwise, an electric shock and injury may
result.
Do not operate the air conditioner with a wet
hand.
An electric shock may result.
Do not place a burner or heater at a place
directly exposed to the wind from the air conditioner.
Incomplete combustion of the burner or heater
may result.
Do not allow a child to mount on the outdoor
unit or avoid placing any object on it.
Falling or tumbling may result in injury.

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

Never expose little children, plants or animals directly to the air flow.
Adverse influence to little children, plants or
animals may result.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water.
Electric shock or fire may result.
Do not install the air conditioner at any place
where flammable gas may leak out.
If the gas leaks out and stays around the air conditioner, a fire may break out.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Unless it is installed, an electric shock or fire may
result.
Be sure the air conditioner is electrically
grounded.
Do not connect the grounding conductor to a gas
pipe, water pipe, lightning arrester, and the
grounding conductor for a telephone.
Imperfect grounding work may result in an electric shock.
Execute complete drain piping for perfect
drainage.
Incomplete piping may result in a water leakage.
The appliance is not intended for use by
young children or infirm persons without
supervision.
Young children should be supervised to
ensure that they do not play with the appliance.

3. OPERATION RANGE
If the temperature or the humidity is beyond the following conditions, safety devices may work and the
air conditioner may not operate, or sometimes,
water may drop from the indoor unit.
COOLING ONLY TYPE
TEMPERATURE[C]
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
21 to 32(DB)/
5 to 46(DB)
14 to 23(WB)
HEAT PUMP TYPE
OPERATION
COOLING
HEATING

TEMPERATURE[C]
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
21 to 32(DB)/
5 to 46(DB)
14 to 23(WB)
14 to 21(DB)/
14 to 28(DB)
15 to 15.5(WB)

D B: Dry bulb temperature


WB: Wet bulb temperature
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16C to 32C.

Operation Manual

4. INSTALLATION SITE
Regarding places for installation
Is the air conditioner installed at a well-ventilated place where there are no obstacles
around?
Do not use the air conditioner in the following
places.
a. Filled with much mineral oil such as cutting oil
b. Where there is much salt such as a beach area
c. Where sulfured gas exists such as a hot-spring
resort
d. Where there are considerable voltage fluctuations such as a factory or plant
e. Vehicles and vessels
f. Where there is much spray of oil and vapor
such as a cookery, etc.
g. Where there are machines generating electromagnetic waves
h. Filled with acid and/or alkaline steam or vapor
Is a snow protection measure taken?
For details, consult your dealer.

Regarding wiring
All wiring must be performed by an authorized
electrician.
To do wiring, ask your dealer. Never do it by yourself.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this air conditioner and
that all electrical work is carried out by qualified personnel according to local laws and
regulations.

Pay attention to running noises, too


Are the following places selected?
a. A place that can sufficiently withstand the
weight of the air conditioner with less running
noises and vibrations.
b. A place where the hot wind discharged from
the air outlet of the outdoor unit and the running
noises.
Are you sure that there are no obstacles near
the air outlet of the outdoor unit?
Such obstacles may result in declined performance and increased running noises.
If abnormal noises occur in use, consult your
dealer.

Regarding drainage of drain piping


Is the drain piping executed to perform complete drainage?
If proper drainage is not carried out from the outdoor drain pipes during air-conditioning operation,
chances are that dust and dirt are clogged in the
pipe. This may result in a water leakage from the
indoor unit. Under such circumstances, stop the
operation of the air conditioner, and then consult
your dealer or our service station.

291

Operations

EDSG18-936

5. NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH


SWITCH AND DISPLAY ON THE
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Refer to figure 1 on page [1]
The illustrations in this operating manual correspond to the remote control format BRC1C type.
Although the display and shape of the buttons on
the BRC1B type are slightly different, they may be
operated in the same manner.

ON/OFF BUTTON
Press the button and the system will start.
Press the button again and the system will
stop.
OPERATION LAMP (RED)
The lamp lights up during operation.
DISPLAY
(UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL)
When this display shows, the system is
UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
This display shows the current OPERATION
MODE. For cooling only type, (Auto)
and (Heating) are not installed.
DISPLAY
TEST (INSPECTION/TEST
OPERATION)
When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION
BUTTON is pressed, the display shows the
system mode is in.
hr

DISPLAY

7
8
9

This display shows the PROGRAMMED


TIME of the system start or stop.
DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
This display shows the set temperature.
DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
This display shows the set fan speed.
DISPLAY (AIR FLOW FLAP)
Refer to AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST.
C

DISPLAY
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR
10 FILTER)
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER.
DISPLAY
(DEFROST)
11
Refer to DEFROST OPERATION.
NON-FUNCTIONING DISPLAY
12 If that particular function is not available,
pressing the button may display the words
NOT AVAILABLE for a few seconds.
TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
13
Refer to PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION.

292

15

16

17
18
19

20
21

TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON


Refer to PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION.
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
This button is used only by qualified service
persons for maintenance purposes.
PROGRAMMING TIME BUTTON
Use this button for programming START and/
or STOP time.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
Press this button to select the fan speed,
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
Press this button to select OPERATION
MODE.
AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
Refer to AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST.

NOTE
For the sake of explanation, all indications are
shown on the display in figure 1 contrary to
actual running situations.

6. OPERATION PROCEDURE
Refer to figure 1 on page [1]

(PROGRAMMED TIME)

hr

14

Operating procedure varies with heat pump type


and cooling only type. Contact your Daikin dealer
to confirm your system type.
To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch
6 hours before operation.
If the main power supply is turned off during operation, operation will restart automatically after the
power turns back on again.

COOLING, HEATING, AUTOMATIC, FAN,


AND PROGRAM DRY OPERATION
Operate in the following order.

OPERATION MODE SELECTOR

Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button several times and select the OPERATION MODE of your choice as follows.

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

COOLING OPERATION ................................


HEATING OPERATION .................................
AUTOMATIC OPERATION............................

In this operation mode, COOL/HEAT


changeover is automatically conducted.
FAN OPERATION..........................................
DRY OPERATION .........................................
The function of this program is to decrease the
humidity in your room with the minimum temperature decrease.
Micro computer automatically determines
TEMPERATURE and FAN SPEED.
This system does not go into operation if the
room temperature is below 16C.
Refer to figure 3 on page [1]
For cooling only type, COOLING , FAN and
DRY operation are able to select.

ON/OFF

Press ON/OFF button


OPERATION lamp lights up or goes off and the system starts or stops OPERATION.

[EXPLANATION OF HEATING OPERATION]


DEFROST OPERATION
As the frost on the coil of an outdoor unit increase,
heating effect decreases and the system goes
into DEFROST OPERATION.
The indoor unit fan stops and the remote controller display shows
.
After 6 to 8 minutes (maximum 10 minutes) of
DEFROST OPERATION, the system returns to
HEATING OPERATION.

ADJUSTMENT
For programming TEMPERATURE, FAN SPEED
and AIR FLOW DIRECTION, follow the procedure
shown below.

TEMPERATURE SETTING
Press TEMPERATURE SETTING button and
program the setting temperature.
Each time this button is pressed, setting
temperature rises 1C.
Each time this button is pressed, setting
temperature lowers 1C.

The setting is impossible for fan operation.


NOTE
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16C to 32C.

FAN SPEED CONTROL


Press FAN SPEED CONTROL button.
High or Low fan speed can be selected.
The microchip may sometimes control the fan speed
in order to protect the unit.

AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST


Press the AIR FLOW DIRECTION button to adjust
the air flow angle.

Regarding outside air temperature and heating capacity


The heating capacity of the air conditioner
declines as the outside air temperature falls. In
such a case, use the air conditioner in combination with other heating systems.
A warm air circulating system is employed, and
therefore it takes some time until the entire room
is warmed up after the start of operation.
An indoor fan runs to discharge a gentle wind
automatically until the temperature inside the air
conditioner reaches a certain level. At this time,
the remote controller displays
. Leave it
as it stands and wait for a while.
When the warm air stays under the ceiling and
your feet are cold, we recommend that you use a
circulator (a fan to circulate the air inside the
room). For details, consult your dealer.

Operation Manual

Up and down adjustment


The movable limit of the flap is changeable.
Contact your Daikin dealer for details.

293

Operations

EDSG18-936

Press the AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST


button to select the air direction as shown
below.

swing

The AIR FLOW FLAP display


swings as shown below and
the air flow direction continuously varies. (Automatic swing
setting)
Press AIR FLOW DIRECTION
ADJUST button to select the air
direction of your choice.
The AIR FLOW FLAP display
stops swinging and the air flow
direction is fixed (Fixed air flow
direction setting).

Press the TIMER MODE START/STOP button


several times and select the mode on the
display.
The display flashes.
For setting the timer stop ....
For setting the timer start ....

Operation
mode

Cooling

Heating

When room
When room
temperature is
temperature is
lower than the
higher than the
Operation
set temperature
set temperature
condition When operating At defrost operacontinuously at
tion
horizontal air
flow direction
Operation mode includes automatic operation.

PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION


Operate in the following order.
The timer is operated in the following two ways.
Programming the stop time (
) .... The system stops
operating after the set time has elapsed.
Programming the start time (
) .... The system starts
operating after the set time has elapsed.
The timer can be programmed a maximum of
72 hours.
The start and the stop time can be simultaneously
programmed.

294

PROGRAMMING TIME

Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and


set the time for stopping or starting the system.
When this button is pressed, the time
advances by 1 hour.
When this button is pressed, the time
goes backward by 1 hour.

MOVEMENT OF THE AIR FLOW FLAP


For the following conditions, micro computer controls the air flow direction so it may be different from
the display.

TIMER MODE START/STOP

TIMER ON/OFF

Press the TIMER ON/OFF button.


The timer setting procedure ends.
The display
or
changes from flashing light to a constant light.
Refer to figure 4 on page [1]
NOTE
When setting the timer Off and On at the same
time, repeat the above procedure from 1 to 3
once again.
When the timer is programmed to stop the system
after 3 hours and start the system after 4 hours, the
system will stop after 3 hours and then 1 hour later
the system will start.
After the timer is programmed, the display shows
the remaining time.
Press the TIMER ON/OFF button once again to
cancel programming. The display vanishes.

7. OPTIMUM OPERATION
Observe the following precautions to ensure the
system operates.
Adjust the room temperature properly for a comfortable environment. Avoid excessive heating or
cooling.
Prevent direct sunlight from entering a room during cooling operation by using curtains or blinds.

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Ventilate the room regularly.


Using the unit for long periods of time requires
attentive ventilation of the room.
Keep doors and windows closed. If the doors and
windows remain open, room air will flow out and
cause to decrease the effect of cooling and heating.
Do not place other heaters directly below the
indoor unit.
They may deform due to the heat.
Never place objects near the air inlet and the air
outlet of the unit. It may cause deterioration in the
effect or stop in the operation.
Turn off the main power supply switch when it is
not used for long periods of time. When the main
power switch is turned on, some watts of electricity is being used even if the system is not operating. Turn off the main power supply switch for
saving energy. When reoperating, turn on the
main power supply switch 6hours before operation for smooth running (Refer to MAINTENANCE).

Operations

HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER


Clean the air filter when the display shows

(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER).


It will display that it will operate for a set amount of
time.
Increase the frequency of cleaning if the unit is
installed in a room where the air is extremely
contaminated.
If the dirt becomes impossible to clean, change the
air filter. (For changing air filter, please contact your
dealer.)
1. Open the suction grille.
Pull it downward slowly while pressing the
buttons provided on two spots.
(Do the same procedure for closing.)

Fig. 1

When the display shows


(TIME TO CLEAN
AIR FILTER), ask a qualified service person to
clean the filter (Refer to MAINTENANCE).

8. MAINTENANCE
(FOR SERVICE PERSONNEL)
ONLY A QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSON IS
ALLOWED TO PERFORM MAINTENANCE

2. Remove the air filters.


Pull the hook of the air filter out diagonally
downward, and remove the filter.

Fig. 2

IMPORTANT!
BEFORE OBTAINING ACCESS TO TERMINAL
DEVICES, ALL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
MUST BE INTERRUPTED
To clean the air conditioner, be sure to stop operation, and turn the power switch off. Otherwise, an
electric shock and injury may result.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water.
Doing so may result in an electric shock.
Be careful with a scaffold or staging.
Caution must be exercised because of work at a
high place.

3. Clean the air filter.


Use vacuum cleaner A) or wash the air filter with
water B).
A)Using a vacuum cleaner

B)Washing with water


When the air filter is very
dirty, use soft brush and
neutral detergent.
Remove water and dry in the shade.

Operation Manual

295

Operations

NOTE
Do not wash the air conditioner with hot water of
more than 50C, as doing so may result in discoloration and/or deformation.
Do not expose it to fire, as doing so may result in
burning.

EDSG18-936

HOW TO CLEAN THE SUCTION GRILLE


1. Open the suction grille.
Push it downward slowly while pressing the buttons provided on two spots. (Follow the same
procedure for closing.)

Fig. 4

4. Fix the air filter.


(1)Hook the air filter to a protrusion on the suction grille.
(2)Push the lower part of the air filter onto the
protrusion at the lower part of the suction
grille, and fix the air filter there.

Fig. 3

2. Detach the suction grille.


Open the suction grille 45 degrees and lift it
upward.

Fig. 5
5. Shut the suction grille.
Refer to item No. 1.
6. After turning on the power, press FILTER
SIGN RESET button.
The TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER display
vanishes.

HOW TO CLEAN AIR OUTLET AND OUTSIDE PANELS


Clean with soft cloth
When it is difficult to remove stains, use water or
neutral detergent.
When the flap is extremely contaminated, remove
it as below and clean or exchange it.
(For changing the flap, please contact your
dealer.)
NOTE
Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing
powder, liquid insecticide. It may cause discoloring or warping.
Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause an
electric shock or a fire.
Do not scrub firmly when washing the blade with
water.
The surface sealing may peel off.
Do not use water or air of 50C or higher for cleaning air filters and outside panels.

296

3. Detach the air filter.


Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER.
(Refer to Fig. 2)
4. Clean the suction grille.
Wash with a soft bristle brush
and neutral detergent or
water, and dry throughly.
5. Reattach the air filter.
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER
(Refer to Fig. 3)
6. Reattach the suction grille.
Refer to item No. 2.
7. Close the suction grille.
Refer to item No. 1.

START UP AFTER A LONG STOP


Confirm the following
Check that the air inlet and outlet are not blocked.
Remove any obstacle.
Check if the earth is connected.
Might there be a broken wire somewhere?
Contact your dealer if there are any problems.

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Clean the air filter and outside panels


After cleaning the air filter, make sure to attach it.
Turn on the main power supply switch
The display on the remote controller will be shown
when the power is turned on.
To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch
at least 6 hours before operation.

WHAT TO DO WHEN STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR A LONG PERIOD


Turn on FAN OPERATION for a half day and dry
the unit.
Refer to FAN OPERATION.
Cut off the power supply.
When the main power switch is turned on, some
watts of electricity is being used even if the system is not operating.
Turn off the main power supply switch for saving
energy.
The display on the remote controller will vanish
when the main power switch is turned off.
Clean the air filter and the exterior.
Be sure to replace the air filter to its original place
after cleaning. Refer to MAINTENANCE.

9. NOT MALFUNCTION OF THE AIR


CONDITIONER
The following symptoms do not indicate air conditioner malfunction.
I. THE SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE
The system does not restart immediately after
the ON/OFF button is pressed.
If the OPERATION lamp lights, the system is in
normal condition.
It does not restart immediately because a safety
device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on again
automatically.
The system does not restart immediately
when TEMPERATURE SETTING button is
returned to the former position after pushing
the button.
If the OPERATION lamp lights, the system is in
normal condition.
It does not restart immediately because a safety
device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on again
automatically.

Operations

The system does not start when the display


shows
(UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL) and it flashes for a few seconds
after pressing an operation button.
This is because the system is under centralized
control. Flashes on the display indicates that the
system cannot be controlled by the remote controller.
The system does not start immediately after
the power supply is turned on.
Wait one minute until the micro computer is prepared for operation.
II. WHITE MIST COMES OUT OF A UNIT
When humidity is high during cooling operation. (In oily or dusty places)
If the inside of an indoor unit is extremely contaminated, the temperature distribution inside a room
becomes uneven. It is necessary to clean the
inside of the indoor unit. Ask your Daikin dealer
for details on cleaning the unit. This operation
requires a qualified service person.
When the system is changed over to HEATING
OPERATION after DEFROST OPERATION.
Moisture generated by DEFROST becomes
steam and exists.

III.NOISE OF AIR CONDITIONERS


A ringing sound after the unit is started.
This sound is generated by the temperature regulator working.
It will quiet down after about a minute.
A continuous flow Shuh sound is heard
when the systems is in COOLING or
DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the sound of refrigerant gas flowing
through both indoor and outdoor units.
A Shuh sound which is heard at the start or
immediately after the stop of operation or
which is heard at the sta rt or immediately after
the stop of DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the noise of refrigerant caused by flow stop
and flow change.
A continuous low Shah sound is heard
when the system is in COOLING OPERATION
or at a stop.
The noise is heard when the drain pump is in
operation.
A Pishi-pishi squeaking sound is heard
when the system is in operation or after the
stop of operation.
Expansion and contraction of plastic parts caused
by temperature change makes this noise.
IV.DUST FROM THE UNITS
Dust may blow out from the unit after starting
operation from long resting time.
Dust absorbed by the unit blows out.

Operation Manual

297

Operations

EDSG18-936

V. THE UNITS GIVE OFF ODORS


The unit absorbs the smell of rooms, furniture,
cigarettes, etc., and then emits them.
VI.THE LIQUID CRYSTAL OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER SHOW

It happens immediately after the main power


supply switch is turned on.
This shows that the remote controller is in normal
condition.
This continues temporary.

10. TROUBLE SHOOTING


I. If one of the following malfunctions occurs,
take the measures shown below and contact
your Daikin dealer.
The system must be repaired by a qualified service
person.
WARNING
When the air conditioner is in abnormal conditions (smell of something burning, etc),
turn off power, and contact your dealer
Continued operation under such circumstances
may result in a failure, electric shock, and fire.
If a safety device such as a fuse, a breaker, or an
earth leakage breaker frequently actuates, or ON/
OFF switch does not properly work.
Measure: Turn off the main power switch
If water leaks from unit.
Measure: Stop the operation.
If the display
(INSPECTION), UNIT No.,
and the OPERATION lamp flash and the MALFUNCTION CODE appears.

OPERATION lamp

INDOOR UNIT No. in which a


malfunction occurs
MALFUNCTION
CODE
Measure: Notify your Daikin dealer and inform
him/her of the display.

INSPECTION
display

II. If the system does not properly operate


except for the above mentioned case, and
none of the above mentioned malfunctions is
evident, investigate the system according to
the following procedures.
1. If the system does not operate at all.
Check if there is a power failure.
Wait until power is restored. If power failure
occurs during operation, the system automatically restarts immediately after the power supply recovers.
Check if the fuse has blown or breaker has
worked.
Change the fuse or set the breaker.
2. If the system stops operating after operating
the system.
Check if the air inlet or outlet of outdoor or
indoor unit is blocked by obstacles.
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated.
Check if the air filter is clogged.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air
filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
3. The system operates but it does not sufficiently cool or heat.
If the air inlet or outlet of the indoor or the outdoor unit is blocked with obstacles.
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated.
If the air filter is clogged.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air
filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
If the set temperature is not proper (Refer to
ADJUSTMENT).
If the FAN SPEED button is set to LOW
SPEED (Refer to ADJUSTMENT).
If the air flow angle is not proper
(Refer to AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST).
If the doors or the windows are open. Shut
doors or windows to prevent wind from coming
in.
If direct sunlight enters the room (when cooling).
Use curtains or blinds.
When there are too many inhabitants in the
room (when cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the
room is too large.
If the heat source of the room is excessive
(when cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the
room is too large.

3P156215-1

298

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

1.5

Operations

FBQ60/71B Series
2

4 10

3
6

hr

C
hr

5
7

NOT
AVAILABLE

TEST

8
9

L H

11

12

19

18
TEST

14

17

13

16

15

e
g
c

hr

[1]

Operation Manual

299

Operations

1. WHAT TO DO BEFORE OPERATION


This operation manual is for the system with standard control. Before initiating operation, contact
your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system.
If your installation has a customized control system,
ask your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system.
Heat pump type
This system provides cooling, heating, automatic,
program dry, and fan operation modes.
Cooling only type
This system provides cooling, program dry, and
fan operation modes.

PRECAUTIONS FOR GROUP CONTROL


SYSTEM OR TWO REMOTE CONTROLLERS CONTROL SYSTEM
This system provides two other control systems
beside individual control (one remote controller controls one indoor unit) system. Confirm the following if
your unit is of the following control system type.
Group control system
One remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units.
All indoor units are equally set.
Two remote controllers control system
Two remote controllers control one indoor unit (In case
of group control system, one group of indoor units)
The unit is individually operated.

EDSG18-936

NOTE
Contact your Daikin dealer in case of changing
the combination or setting of group control and
two remote controllers control system.

Names and functions of parts


Refer to figure 2 on page [1]
a
b
c
d
e
f
g

Indoor unit
Remote controller
Inlet air
Discharge air
Refrigerant piping, connection electric wire
Drain pipe
Suction panel (optional)
Equipped with an air filter that removes dust
and dirt.
Drain pumping out device (built-in)
Drains water removed from the room during
cooling.

2. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
We recommend that you read this instruction manual carefully before use to gain full advantage of the
function of the air conditioner, and to avoid malfunction due to mishandling.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accessible to the general public.
The precautions described below are WARNING and CAUTION. These are very important
precautions concerning safety. Be sure to
observe all of them without fail.
WARNING .. These are the matters with possibilities leading to serious consequences such as death or serious
injury due to erroneous handling.
CAUTION ... These are the matters with possibilities leading to injury or material
damage due to erroneous handling including probabilities leading to serious consequences in
some cases.
After reading, keep this manual at a place
where any user can read at any time. Furthermore, make certain that this operation manual
is handed to a new user when he takes over
the operation.

300

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

WARNING
Avoid exposure of your body directly to the
cold air for a long time, or avoid excessive
exposure of your body to the cold air.
Otherwise, your physical condition may be deteriorated and/or your health may be ruined.
When the air conditioner is in abnormal conditions (smell of something burning, etc),
turn off power, and contact the dealer where
you purchased the air conditioner.
Continued operation under such circumstances
may result in a failure, electric shock, and fire.
Ask your dealer for installation of the air conditioner.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself
may result in a water leakage, electric shock,
and fire.
Ask your dealer for improvement, repair, and
maintenance.
Incomplete improvement, repair, and maintenance may result in a water leakage, electric
shock, and fire.
Do not insert your finger, a stick, etc., into the
air inlet, outlet, and fan blades.
A fan in high-speed running may result in injury.
The refrigerant in the air conditioner is safe
and normally does not leak. If the refrigerant
leaks inside the room, the contact with a fire
of a burner, a heater or a cooker may result in
a harmful gas.
Do not use the air conditioner until when a service person confirms to finish repairing the portion where the refrigerant leaks.
For refrigerant leakage, consult your dealer.
When the air conditioner is to be installed in a
small room, it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked refrigerant does not exceed the limiting concentration
even when it leaks. If the refrigerant leaks
exceeding the level of limiting concentration, an
oxygen deficiency accident may happen.
For installation of separately sold component parts, ask a specialist.
Be sure to use the separately sold component
parts designated by our company.
Incomplete installation performed by yourself
may result in a water leakage, electric shock,
and fire.
Ask your dealer to move and reinstall the air
conditioner.
Incomplete installation may result in a water
leakage, electric shock, and fire.
Do not use any fuse with improper capacity.
The use of a piece of wire and whatnot may
result in a failure and fire.
CAUTION
Do not use the air conditioner for other purposes.
Do not use the air conditioner for a special application such as the storage of foods, animals and
plants, precision machines, and art objects as
otherwise the deterioration of quality may result.

Operation Manual

Operations

Do not remove the air outlet of the outdoor unit.


The fan may get exposed and result in injury.
Do not place items that might be damaged by
water under the indoor unit.
Water may condensate and drip if the humidity
reaches 80% or if the drain exit gets clogged.
When the air conditioner is used in combination with burners or heaters, perform sufficient ventilation.
Insufficient ventilation may result in an oxygen
deficiency accident.
Check and make sure that foundation blocks
are not damaged after a long use.
If they are left in a damaged condition, the unit
may fall and result in injury.
Neither place a flammable spray bottle near
the air conditioner nor perform spraying.
Doing so may result in a fire.
To clean the air conditioner, stop operation,
and unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Otherwise, an electric shock and injury may
result.
Do not operate the air conditioner with a wet
hand.
An electric shock may result.
Do not place a burner or heater at a place
directly exposed to the wind from the air conditioner.
Incomplete combustion of the burner or heater
may result.
Do not allow a child to mount on the outdoor
unit or avoid placing any object on it.
Falling or tumbling may result in injury.
Never expose little children, plants or animals directly to the air flow.
Adverse influence to little children, plants or
animals may result.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water.
Electric shock or fire may result.
Do not install the air conditioner at any place
where flammable gas may leak out.
If the gas leaks out and stays around the air conditioner, a fire may break out.
Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Unless it is installed, an electric shock or fire may
result.
Be sure the air conditioner is electrically
grounded.
Do not connect the grounding conductor to a gas
pipe, water pipe, lightning arrester, and the
grounding conductor for a telephone.
Imperfect grounding work may result in an electric shock.
Execute complete drain piping for perfect
drainage.
Incomplete piping may result in a water leakage.
The appliance is not intended for use by
young children or infirm persons without
supervision.
Young children should be supervised to
ensure that they do not play with the appliance.

301

Operations

EDSG18-936

3. OPERATION RANGE
If the temperature or the humidity is beyond the following conditions, safety devices may work and the
air conditioner may not operate, or sometimes,
water may drop from the indoor unit.
COOLING ONLY TYPE
TEMPERATURE[C]
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
21 to 32(DB)/
5 to 46(DB)
14 to 23(WB)
HEAT PUMP TYPE
OPERATION
COOLING
HEATING

TEMPERATURE[C]
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
21 to 32(DB)/
5 to 46(DB)
14 to 23(WB)
14 to 21(DB)/
14 to 28(DB)
15 to 15.5(WB)

D B: Dry bulb temperature


WB: Wet bulb temperature
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16C to 32C.

4. INSTALLATION SITE
Regarding places for installation
Is the air conditioner installed at a well-ventilated
place where there are no obstacles around?
Do not use the air conditioner in the following
places.
a. Filled with much mineral oil such as cutting oil
b. Where there is much salt such as a beach area
c. Where sulfured gas exists such as a hot-spring
resort
d. Where there are considerable voltage fluctuations such as a factory or plant
e. Vehicles and vessels
f . Where there is much spray of oil and vapor
such as a cookery, etc.
g. Where there are machines generating electromagnetic waves
h. Filled with acid and/or alkaline steam or vapor
Is a snow protection measure taken?
For details, consult your dealer.

302

Regarding wiring
All wiring must be performed by an authorized
electrician.
To do wiring, ask your dealer. Never do it by yourself.
Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this air conditioner and
that all electrical work is carried out by qualified personnel according to local laws and
regulations.

Pay attention to running noises, too


Are the following places selected?
a. A place that can sufficiently withstand the
weight of the air conditioner with less running
noises and vibrations.
b. A place where the hot wind discharged from the
air outlet of the outdoor unit and the running
noises.
Are you sure that there are no obstacles near
the air outlet of the outdoor unit?
Such obstacles may result in declined performance and increased running noises.
If abnormal noises occur in use, consult your
dealer.

Regarding drainage of drain piping


Is the drain piping executed to perform complete drainage?
If proper drainage is not carried out from the outdoor drain pipes during air-conditioning operation,
chances are that dust and dirt are clogged in the
pipe. This may result in a water leakage from the
indoor unit. Under such circumstances, stop the
operation of the air conditioner, and then consult
your dealer or our service station.

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

5. NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH


SWITCH AND DISPLAY ON THE
REMOTE CONTROLLER
Refer to figure 1 on page [1]
The illustrations in this operating manual correspond to the remote control format BRC1C type.
Although the display and shape of the buttons on
the BRC1B type are slightly different, they may be
operated in the same manner.
1

ON/OFF BUTTON
Press the button and the system will start. Press
the button again and the system will stop.
OPERATION LAMP (RED)
The lamp lights up during operation.
DISPLAY
(UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL)
When this display shows, the system is
UNDER CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
DISPLAY
(OPERATION MODE)
This display shows the current OPERATION
MODE. For cooling only type, (Auto)
and (Heating) are not installed.
TEST (INSPECTION/TEST
DISPLAY
OPERATION)
When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION
BUTTON is pressed, the display shows the
system mode is in.

DISPLAY

hr

(PROGRAMMED TIME)

hr

6
This display shows the PROGRAMMED
TIME of the system start or stop.
7

DISPLAY
(SET TEMPERATURE)
This display shows the set temperature.

DISPLAY
(FAN SPEED)
This display shows the set fan speed.

DISPLAY
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER)
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER.

10

NON-FUNCTIONING DISPLAY
If that particular function is not available,
pressing the button may display the words
NOT AVAILABLE for a few seconds.
11 When running multiple units simultaneously
The NOT AVAILABLE message will only be
appear if none of the indoor units is equipped
with the function. If even one unit is equipped
with the function, the display will not appear.
12
13

14

15

16

17

18

19

TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON


Refer to PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION.
TIMER ON/OFF BUTTON
Refer to PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION.
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
This button is used only by qualified service
persons for maintenance purposes.
PROGRAMMING TIME BUTTON
Use this button for programming START and/
or STOP time.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
Refer to HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
Press this button to select the fan speed,
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
Press this button to select OPERATION
MODE.

NOTE
For the sake of explanation, all indications are
shown on the display in figure 1 contrary to
actual running situations.

DISPLAY
(DEFROST)
Refer to DEFROST OPERATION.

Operation Manual

6. OPERATION PROCEDURE
Refer to figure 1 on page [1]
Operating procedure varies with heat pump type
and cooling only type. Contact your Daikin dealer
to confirm your system type.
To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch
6 hours before operation.
If the main power supply is turned off during operation, operation will restart automatically after the
power turns back on again.

303

Operations

EDSG18-936

COOLING, HEATING, AUTOMATIC, FAN,


AND PROGRAM DRY OPERATION
Operate in the following order.

OPERATION MODE SELECTOR

Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button several times and select the OPERATION MODE of your choice as follows.
COOLING OPERATION .........................
HEATING OPERATION ..........................
AUTOMATIC OPERATION.....................

In this operation mode, COOL/HEAT


changeover is automatically conducted.
FAN OPERATION...................................
DRY OPERATION ..................................
The function of this program is to decrease the
humidity in your room with the minimum temperature decrease.
Micro computer automatically determines
TEMPERATURE and FAN SPEED.
This system does not go into operation if the
room temperature is below 16C.
Refer to figure 3 on page [1]
For cooling only type, COOLING, FAN and
DRY operation are able to select.

ON/OFF

Press ON/OFF button


OPERATION lamp lights up or goes off and the system starts or stops OPERATION.

[EXPLANATION OF HEATING OPERATION]


DEFROST OPERATION
As the frost on the coil of an outdoor unit increase,
heating effect decreases and the system goes
into DEFROST OPERATION.
The indoor unit fan stops and the remote controller display shows
.
After 6 to 8 minutes (maximum 10 minutes) of
DEFROST OPERATION, the system returns to
HEATING OPERATION.

Regarding outside air temperature and heating capacity


The heating capacity of the air conditioner
declines as the outside air temperature falls. In
such a case, use the air conditioner in combination with other heating systems.
A warm air circulating system is employed, and
therefore it takes some time until the entire room
is warmed up after the start of operation.

304

An indoor fan runs to discharge a gentle wind


automatically until the temperature inside the air
conditioner reaches a certain level. At this time,
the remote controller displays
. Leave it
as it stands and wait for a while.
When the warm air stays under the ceiling and
your feet are cold, we recommend that you use a
circulator (a fan to circulate the air inside the
room). For details, consult your dealer.

ADJUSTMENT
For programming TEMPERATURE, FAN SPEED
and AIR FLOW DIRECTION, follow the procedure
shown below.

TEMPERATURE SETTING
Press TEMPERATURE SETTING button and
program the setting temperature.
Each time this button is pressed, setting
temperature rises 1C.
Each time this button is pressed, setting
temperature lowers 1C.
The setting is impossible for fan operation.
NOTE
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16C to 32C.

FAN SPEED CONTROL


Press FAN SPEED CONTROL button.
High or Low fan speed can be selected.
The microchip may sometimes control the fan speed
in order to protect the unit.

PROGRAM TIMER OPERATION


Operate in the following order.
The timer is operated in the following two ways.
Programming the stop time (
) ....
The system stops operating after the set time has
elapsed.
Programming the start time (
) ....
The system starts operating after the set time has
elapsed.
The timer can be programmed a maximum of
72 hours.
The start and the stop time can be simultaneously
programmed.

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Operations

TIMER MODE START/STOP

Press the TIMER MODE START/STOP button


several times and select the mode on the
display.
The display flashes.
For setting the timer stop ....
For setting the timer start ....

PROGRAMMING TIME

Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and


set the time for stopping or starting the system.
When this button is pressed, the time
advances by 1 hour.
When this button is pressed, the time
goes backward by 1 hour.

Keep doors and windows closed. If the doors and


windows remain open, room air will flow out and
cause to decrease the effect of cooling and heating.
Do not place other heaters directly below the
indoor unit.
They may deform due to the heat.
Never place objects near the air inlet and the air
outlet of the unit. It may cause deterioration in the
effect or stop in the operation.
Turn off the main power supply switch when it is
not used for long periods of time. When the main
power switch is turned on, some watts of electricity is being used even if the system is not operating. Turn off the main power supply switch for
saving energy. When reoperating, turn on the
main power supply switch 6hours before operation for smooth running (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
When the display shows
(TIME TO CLEAN
AIR FILTER), ask a qualified service person to
clean the filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).

TIMER ON/OFF

Press the TIMER ON/OFF button.


The timer setting procedure ends.
The display
or
changes from flashing light to a constant light.
Refer to figure 4 on page [1]
NOTE
When setting the timer Off and On at the same time,
repeat the above procedure from 1 to 3 once again.
When the timer is programmed to stop the system
after 3 hours and start the system after 4 hours, the
system will stop after 3 hours and then 1 hour later
the system will start.
After the timer is programmed, the display shows
the remaining time.
Press the TIMER ON/OFF button once again to
cancel programming. The display vanishes.

8. MAINTENANCE
(FOR SERVICE PERSONNEL)
ONLY A QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSON IS
ALLOWED TO PERFORM MAINTENANCE

IMPORTANT!
BEFORE OBTAINING ACCESS TO TERMINAL
DEVICES, ALL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS
MUST BE INTERRUPTED
To clean the air conditioner, be sure to stop operation, and turn the power switch off. Otherwise, an
electric shock and injury may result.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water.
Doing so may result in an electric shock.
Be careful with a scaffold or staging.
Caution must be exercised because of work at a
high place.

HOW TO CLEAN THE AIR FILTER

7. OPTIMUM OPERATION
Observe the following precautions to ensure the
system operates.
Adjust the room temperature properly for a comfortable environment. Avoid excessive heating or cooling.
Prevent direct sunlight from entering a room during cooling operation by using curtains or blinds.
Ventilate the room regularly.
Using the unit for long periods of time requires
attentive ventilation of the room.

Operation Manual

Clean the air filter when the display shows

(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER).


It will display that it will operate for a set amount of time.
Increase the frequency of cleaning if the unit is installed
in a room where the air is extremely contaminated.
If the dirt becomes impossible to clean, change the
air filter. (For changing air filter, please contact your
dealer.)

305

Operations

EDSG18-936

1. Open the suction grille.


Slide both knobs simultaneously as shown and
then pull them downward.
(Do the same procedure for closing.)
(Refer to Fig.1)

NOTE
Do not wash the air conditioner with hot water of
more than 50C, as doing so may result in discoloration and/or deformation.
Do not expose it to fire, as doing so may result in
burning.
4. Fix the air filter.
Align the two hangers and push the air filter up.
Confirm that four hangers are fixed.
(Refer to Fig.4)

Fig. 1
(If chains are present. Unhook the chains.)
(Refer to Fig.2)

Fig. 4

Fig. 2
2. Remove the air filters.
Remove the air filters by pulling its cloth forward.
(Refer to Fig.3)

5. Close the suction grille.


Refer to item No. 1.
6. After turning on the power, press FILTER
SIGN RESET button.
The display
(TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER) vanishes.

HOW TO CLEAN AIR OUTLET, SUCTION


GRILLE AND OUTSIDE PANELS
Clean with soft cloth.
When it is difficult to remove stains, use water or
neutral detergent.
Clean the suction grille when it is shut.

Fig. 3
3. Clean the air filter.
Use vacuum cleaner A) or wash the air filter with
water B).
A)Using a vacuum cleaner

NOTE
Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing
powder, liquid insecticide. It may cause discoloring or warping.
Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause an
electric shock or a fire.
Do not use water or air of 50C or higher for cleaning air filters and outside panels.

START UP AFTER A LONG STOP

B)Washing with water


When the air filter is very
dirty, use soft brush and
neutral detergent.

Confirm the following


Check that the air inlet and outlet are not blocked.
Remove any obstacle.
Check if the earth is connected.
Might there be a broken wire somewhere?
Contact your dealer if there are any problems.

Remove water and dry in the shade.

306

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Clean the air filter and outside panels


After cleaning the air filter, make sure to attach it.
Turn on the main power supply switch
The display on the remote controller will be shown
when the power is turned on.
To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch
at least 6 hours before operation.

WHAT TO DO WHEN STOPPING THE SYSTEM FOR A LONG PERIOD


Turn on FAN OPERATION for a half day and dry
the unit.
Refer to FAN OPERATION.
Cut off the power supply.
When the main power switch is turned on, some
watts of electricity is being used even if the system is not operating.
Turn off the main power supply switch for saving
energy.
The display on the remote controller will vanish
when the main power switch is turned off.
Clean the air filter and the exterior.
Be sure to replace the air filter to its original place
after cleaning. Refer to MAINTENANCE.

9. NOT MALFUNCTION OF THE AIR


CONDITIONER
The following symptoms do not indicate air conditioner malfunction
I. THE SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE
The system does not restart immediately after
the ON/OFF button is pressed.
If the OPERATION lamp lights, the system is in
normal condition.
It does not restart immediately because a safety
device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on again
automatically.
The system does not restart immediately
when TEMPERATURE SETTING button is
returned to the former position after pushing
the button.
If the OPERATION lamp lights, the system is in
normal condition.
It does not restart immediately because a safety
device operates to prevent overload of the system. After 3 minutes, the system will turn on again
automatically.

Operation Manual

Operations

The system does not start when the display


shows
(UNDER CENTRALIZED
CONTROL) and it flashes for few seconds
after pressing an operation button.
This is because the system is under centralized control. Flashes on the display indicates that the system
cannot be controlled by the remote controller.
The system does not start immediately after
the power supply is turned on.
Wait one minute until the micro computer is prepared for operation.
II. WHITE MIST COMES OUT OF A UNIT
When humidity is high during cooling operation (In oily or dusty places)
If the inside of an indoor unit is extremely contaminated, the temperature distribution inside a room
becomes uneven. It is necessary to clean the
inside of the indoor unit. Ask your Daikin dealer
for details on cleaning the unit. This operation
requires a qualified service person.
When the system is changed over to HEATING
OPERATION after DEFROST OPERATION.
Moisture generated by DEFROST becomes
steam and exists.

III.NOISE OF AIR CONDITIONERS


A ringing sound after the unit is started.
This sound is generated by the temperature regulator working.
It will quiet down after about a minute.
A continuous flow Shuh sound is heard
when the systems is in COOLING or
DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the sound of refrigerant gas flowing
through both indoor and outdoor units.
A Shuh sound which is heard at the start or
immediately after the stop of operation or
which is heard at the start or immediately after
the stop of DEFROST OPERATION.
This is the noise of refrigerant caused by flow stop
and flow change.
A continuous low Shah sound is heard
when the system is in COOLING OPERATION
or at a stop.
The noise is heard when the drain pump is in
operation.
A Pishi-pishi squeaking sound is heard
when the system is in operation or after the
stop of operation.
Expansion and contraction of plastic parts caused
by temperature change makes this noise.
IV.DUST FROM THE UNITS
Dust may blow out from the unit after starting
operation from long resting time.
Dust absorbed by the unit blows out.

307

Operations

EDSG18-936

V. THE UNITS GIVE OFF ODORS


The unit absorbs the smell of rooms, furniture,
cigarettes, etc., and then emits them.
VI.THE LIQUID CRYSTAL OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER SHOW

It happens immediately after the main power


supply switch is turned on.
This shows that the remote controller is in normal
condition.
This continues temporary.

10. TROUBLE SHOOTING


I. If one of the following malfunctions occurs,
take the measures shown below and contact
your Daikin dealer.
The system must be repaired by a qualified service
person.
WARNING
When the air conditioner is in abnormal conditions (smell of something burning, etc),
turn off power, and contact your dealer
Continued operation under such circumstances
may result in a failure, electric shock, and fire.
If a safety device such as a fuse, a breaker, or an
earth leakage breaker frequently actuates, or ON/
OFF switch does not properly work.
Measure: Turn off the main power switch
If water leaks from unit.
Measure: Stop the operation.
If the display
(INSPECTION), UNIT No.,
and the OPERATION lamp flash and the MALFUNCTION CODE appears.

OPERATION lamp

UNIT No.

INSPECTION
display

L H

INDOOR UNIT No. in


which a malfunction occurs
MALFUNCTION CODE

Measure: Notify your Daikin dealer and inform


him/her of the display.

II. If the system does not properly operate


except for the above mentioned case, and
none of the above mentioned malfunctions is
evident, investigate the system according to
the following procedures.
1. If the system does not operate at all.
Check if there is a power failure.
Wait until power is restored. If power failure
occurs during operation, the system automatically restarts immediately after the power supply recovers.
Check if the fuse has blown or breaker has
worked.
Change the fuse or set the breaker.
2. If the system stops operating after operating
the system.
Check if the air inlet or outlet of outdoor or
indoor unit is blocked by obstacles.
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated.
Check if the air filter is clogged.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air
filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
3. The system operates but it does not sufficiently cool or heat.
If the air inlet or outlet of the indoor or the outdoor unit is blocked with obstacles.
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated.
If the air filter is clogged.
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air
filters (Refer to MAINTENANCE).
If the set temperature is not proper (Refer to
ADJUSTMENT).
If the FAN SPEED button is set to LOW
SPEED (Refer to ADJUSTMENT).
If the doors or the windows are open. Shut
doors or windows to prevent wind from coming
in.
If direct sunlight enters the room (when cooling).
Use curtains or blinds.
When there are too many inhabitants in the
room (when cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the
room is too large.
If the heat source of the room is excessive
(when cooling).
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the
room is too large.

3P156215-3

308

Operation Manual

EDSG18-936

Part 5
Options
1. Option List ...........................................................................................310
1.1 Outdoor Units .......................................................................................310
1.2 BP Units ...............................................................................................310
1.3 Indoor Units ..........................................................................................310

2. Options for Outdoor & BP Units ..........................................................314


2.1 Options for Outdoor Units.....................................................................314
2.2 Options for BP Units.............................................................................315

3. Options for Indoor Units ......................................................................318


3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Duct Connected Type...........................................................................318


Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (600600)..........................................319
Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (950950)..........................................329
Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type ..............................................................345

4. Control Devices...................................................................................355
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15

Options

<DCS302CA61> Central Remote Controller .......................................355


<DCS301BA61> Unified ON/OFF Controller .......................................387
<DST301BA61> Schedule Timer .........................................................395
Combination of <DCS302CA61 / DCS301BA61 / DST301BA61>
Combinations of Optional Controllers for Centralized Control..............414
<KRP928B2S> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET
(Residential Air Conditioner) ................................................................417
<DTA112BA51> Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir).....................419
<KRC72> Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms...........................421
<KRP413A1S> Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock / Remote Controller...423
<KRP4AA51/53> Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices.................427
<KRP1BA54/57> Adaptor for Wiring ....................................................432
<KRP1BA101> Installation Box for Adaptor PCB ................................433
<KRCS01-1B> Remote Sensor............................................................435
<BRC1C61> Wired Remote Controller for SkyAir................................438
<BRC7C613W> Wireless Remote Controller.......................................445
<BRC7E531W> Wireless Remote Controller.......................................450

309

Option List

EDSG18-936

1. Option List
1.1

Outdoor Units
Option Name

1.2

Cool/Heat Selector

Cool/Heat Selector Fixing Box

KRC19-26A

Drain Plug

KKPJ5F180

Fixture for Preventing Overturning

KPT-60B160

Wire Type Fixture for Preventing Overturning

K-KYZP15C

REFNET Joint

KJB111A

BP Units
Option Name

1.3

RMKS112/140/160E

BPMKS967B2(3)B
KHRP26A22T

Indoor Units

Wall Mounted Type


Option Name

Note:

Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms 1

Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock/Remote Controller 2


(Normal Open Pulse Contact / Normal Open Contact)

FTKS25/35D

KRC72
KRP413A1S

Central Remote Controller 3

DCS302CA61

Unified ON/OFF Controller 3

DCS301BA61

Schedule Timer 3

DST301BA61

Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (Residential Air Conditioner)

KRP928B2S

Titanium Apatite Photocatalytic Air Purifying Filter


(without Frame)

Remote Controller Loss Prevention with Chain

KAF970A46

310

KAF952B42

KKF917A4

1 A wiring adaptor (KRP413A1S) is also required for each indoor unit.


2 Time clock and other devices ; obtained locally.
3 An interface adaptor (KRP928B2S) is also required for each indoor unit.
Option Name

Note:

FTKS50/60/71F

Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms 1

Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock/Remote Controller 2


(Normal Open Pulse Contact / Normal Open Contact)

FTKS50B
KRC72
KRP413A1S

Central Remote Controller 3

DCS302CA61

Unified ON/OFF Controller 3

DCS301BA61

Schedule Timer 3

DST301BA61

Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (Residential Air Conditioner)

KRP928B2S

Air Purifying Filter with Photocatalytic Deodorizing Function


(without Frame)

KAF952A42

Remote Controller Loss Prevention with Chain

KKF917A4

1 A wiring adaptor (KRP413A1S) is also required for each indoor unit.


2 Time clock and other devices ; obtained locally.
3 An interface adaptor (KRP928B2S) is also required for each indoor unit.

Options

EDSG18-936

Option List

Duct Connected Type


FDKS25/35CA
FDKS50C

Option Name

Note:

Centralized Control Board-up to 5 Rooms 2

Wiring Adaptor for Timer Clock/Remote Controller 3


(Normal Open Pulse Contact / Normal Open Contact)

FDKS60C
KRC72
KRP413A1S

Central Remote Controller 4

DCS302CA61

Unified ON/OFF Controller 4

DCS301BA61
DST301BA61

Schedule Timer 4

Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (Residential Air Conditioner)

KRP928B2S

Suction Grille

KDGF19A45

Insulation Kit for High Humidity

Remote Controller Loss Prevention with Chain

FDKS25/35EA

KDT25N50

KDT25N63

KDT25N32

KKF917A4

1 A wiring adaptor (KRP413A1S) is also required for each indoor unit.


2 Time clock and other devices ; obtained locally.
3 An interface adaptor (KRP928B2S) is also required for each indoor unit.

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (600600)


Option Name

Note:

Options

FFQ25/35/50/60B

Decoration Panel (required)

BYFQ60B8W1

Remote Controller
(required)

Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet

KDBHQ44BA60 (KDBHQ44B60)

Panel Spacer

KDBQ44BA60A (KDBQ44B60A)

Fresh Air Intake Kit

Longlife Filter

Central Remote Controller 3

DCS302CA61

Unified ON/OFF Controller 3

DCS301BA61

Schedule Timer 3

DST301BA61

10

Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir)

DTA112BA51

Wired Type 1
Wireless
Type

BRC1C61

Cooling Only

Direct Installation Type

BRC7E531W

KDDQ44XA60 (KDDQ44X60)
KAFQ441BA60 (KAFQ441B60)

11

Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices 2

12

Adaptor for Wiring 2

KRP1BA57

13

Installation Box for Adaptor PCB

KRP1BA101

14

Remote Sensor

KRCS01-1B

KRP4AA53

1 Wiring for wired remote controller should be obtained locally.


2 Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1BA101) is necessary.
3 An interface adaptor (DTA112BA51) is also required for each indoor unit.

311

Option List

EDSG18-936

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (950950)


Option Name
1
2

Remote Controller
(required)

Panel Spacer

Note:

FCQ35/50/60/71B

Decoration Panel (required)

Fresh Air Intake Kit

High Efficiency Filter

BYC125K-W1

Wired Type
Wireless
Type

BRC1C61
Cooling Only

BRC7C613W
KDBP55H160WA

Chamber
Type

Without T-shaped
Pipe and Fan 1
With T-shaped Pipe,
without Fan 2

KDDP55D160
KDDP55D160K

Direct Installation Type 3

KDDJ55X160

(Colorimetric Method 65%)

KAFP556D80

(Colorimetric Method 90%)

KAFP557D80

(Colorimetric Method 65%)

KAFP552H80

Replacement High
Efficiency Filter

High Efficiency Filter Chamber

KDDF55DA160

Replacement Longlife Filter

KAF551KA160

Branch Duct Chamber

KDJ55K80

10

Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices 4

KRP4AA53

11

Adaptor for Wiring 4

KRP1BA57

12

Installation Box for Adaptor PCB

13

Central Remote Controller 5

DCS302CA61

(Colorimetric Method 90%)

KAFP553H80

KRP1B98

14

Unified ON/OFF Controller 5

DCS301BA61

15

Schedule Timer 5

DST301BA61

16

Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir)

DTA112BA51

1 With a suction chamber. Fresh air is intaken from 2 holes on the sides of the connection chamber.

(This method should be selected if a wireless remote controller is used.)


2 Without a suction chamber. Fresh air is intaken from 2 holes on the connection chamber via a T-

shaped pipe connection. (A wireless remote controller can not be used in this case.)
3 Without a suction chamber. Fresh air is intaken directly from a hole on the main unit.
4 Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1B98) is necessary
5 An interface adaptor (DTA112BA51) is also required for each indoor unit.

312

Options

EDSG18-936

Option List

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type


Option Name
1

Decoration Panel (required)

Remote Controller
(required)

Service Access Panel

Options

Wired Type

BRC1C61
KTB25KA80W

(Colorimetric Method 65%)

KAF252LA80

(Colorimetric Method 90%)

KAF253LA80

Resin net

KAFJ251K80

High Efficiency Filter

Replacement
Longlife Filter

Filter Chamber for Rear Suction

KAJ25L80B

Filter Chamber for Bottom Suction

KAJ25L80D

Canvas Duct (Air Suction Canvas)

KSA-25KA80

Note:

FBQ60/71B
BYBS71DAW1 (BYBS71DJW1)

Discharge Grille

10

Discharge Chamber

11

Branch Duct

150

K-DG5DW

200

K-DG9DW

150

K-DGC5D

200

K-DGC9D

200150

K-DDV20A

150

K-FDS151C(1m)/K-FDS152C(2m)/
K-FDS153C(3m)/K-FDS154C(4m)/
K-FDS155C(5m)/K-FDS156C(6m)

200

K-FDS201C(1m)/K-FDS202C(2m)/
K-FDS203C(3m)/K-FDS204C(4m)/
K-FDS205C(5m)/K-FDS206C(6m)

12

Flexible Duct

13

Blind Board

KBBJ25KA80

14

Adaptor for Discharge

KDAJ25KA71

15

Flange for Suction

KDJ2507K80

16

Wiring Adaptor for Electrical Appendices

17

Adaptor for Wiring (Interlock for Fresh Air Intake Fan)

18

Central Remote Controller 1

DCS302CA61

KRP4AA51
KRP1BA54

19

Unified ON/OFF Controller 1

DCS301BA61

20

Schedule Timer 1

DST301BA61

21

Interface Adaptor for DIII-NET (SkyAir)

DTA112BA51

1 An interface adaptor (DTA112BA51) is also required for each indoor unit.

313

Options for Outdoor & BP Units

EDSG18-936

2. Options for Outdoor & BP Units


2.1

Options for Outdoor Units

2.1.1

<KKPJ5F180> Drain Plug

Installation Manual
Use this plug to connect a drain hose to dispose the drain from the outdoor unit.

3P066795-1B

314

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Outdoor & BP Units

2.2

Options for BP Units

2.2.1

<KHRP26A22T> REFNET Joint

Dimensions

GAS SIDE JOINT


I.D12.7
I.D15.9
I.D19.1

I.D22.2
O.D19.1

INSULATION
I.D15.9
I.D12.7

O.D15.9

I.D19.1

I.D15.9

80

80
100

I.D12.7

338

(42)
380

LIQUID SIDE JOINT


ACCESSORY
REDUCER : GAS SIDE : 2pcs
INSULATION : 2pcs
INSTALLATION MANUAL

INSULATION
I.D9.5

I.D9.5

I.D6.4

80

5
I.D9.5
I.D6.4

250

(40)

290

D3K05234A

Installation Manual

THIS KIT INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING PARTS.


KIT NAME

KHRP26A
22T

SHAPE
GAS SIDE JOINT

KHRP26A
33T

KHRP26A
72T

KHRP26A
73T

LIQUID SIDE JOINT INSULATION

REDUCER (FOR GAS PIPE)

2 pcs.

19.1

22.2

2 pcs.

19.1

22.2

2 pcs.

22.2

2 pcs.

12.7 22.2 28.6 31.8 38.1

REDUCER (FOR LIQUID PIPE)

25.4

25.4/22.2 28.6 2 PCS.

15.9

19.1

6.4 19.1 22.2

Make sure gas side joint and liquid side joint are for R410A. (Label for R410A is attached on each part.)

SELECTION PROCEDURE
According to the INSTALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit.

Options

315

Options for Outdoor & BP Units

EDSG18-936

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
The pipe size of each parts are shown below.
KIT NAME

GAS SIDE JOINT


I.D12.7
I.D19.1

KHRP26A
22T

LIQUID SIDE JOINT


I.D15.9
I.D12.7

I.D15.9

Inlet

I.D31.8
I.D25.4

Inlet

I.D19.1
I.D15.9

I.D15.9
I.D12.7

Outlet

Outlet

Inlet

I.D12.7
I.D15.9
I.D28.6
I.D31.8
I.D25.4

KHRP26A
73T

I.D25.4

I.D15.9
I.D19.1

I.D19.1

I.D19.1
I.D15.9

Outlet
Inlet

Inlet

I.D6.4
I.D9.5

I.D12.7

I.D19.1
I.D38.1
I.D31.8

I.D6.4
I.D9.5
I.D12.7
I.D9.5

I.D12.7

I.D25.4

I.D28.6

Outlet

Inlet

Outlet

Inlet

I.D9.5
I.D6.4

I.D12.7
I.D9.5

I.D19.1
I.D15.9

I.D15.9

KHRP26A
72T

I.D6.4
I.D9.5

I.D12.7

I.D22.2
I.D19.1

KHRP26A
33T

Outlet

Inlet

Outlet
I.D15.9

I.D9.5
I.D6.4

I.D9.5

I.D12.7

I.D15.9

I.D15.9
I.D12.7

Outlet
I.D9.5

According to SELECTION PROCEDURE, cut the pipe with a pipe cutter for use.
(Ex.) FOR KHRP26A33T
1 GAS SIDE JOINT

To next joint or
indoor unit

Outlet (1)

Inlet
To outdoor unit

Inlet

Field pipe
22.2 or 19.1

Part A

ns

Outlet (2)

To outdoor unit
Note) For the size of outlet (1) is 22.2 or
the size of outlet (2) is 19.1.

Joint
Field pipe
19.1 or 15.9

To next joint or
indoor unit
Outlet (1)

Field pipe
15.9 or 12.7

Outlet (2)

Note) For the size of inlet is 19.1 or


the size of outlet (1) is 19.1,
the size of outlet (2) is 15.9.
Cut the pipe with a pipe cutter.
Joint

2 LIQUID SIDE JOINT

Field pipe
19.1 or 15.9

Part B

Field pipe
12.7 or 9.5

Note) For the size of inlet is 9.5 or


the size of outlet (1) is 9.5,
the size of outlet (2) is 9.5.
Cut the pipe with a pipe cutter.
Joint

Part A

Field pipe
22.2 or 19.1
ns

Field pipe
9.5 or 6.4

ns

Field pipe
9.5

tio
ec
nn
o
C
Cut in the center of the connections.

Pipe size reducer


tio
ec
(Supplied)
nn
o
C
Cut in the center of the connections.

tio
ec
nn
o
C
Cut in the center of the connections.

Cut in the center of the part A


and connect a field pipe.

Cut in the center of the part B,


use Pipe size reducer (supplied)
and connect a field pipe.

Cut in the center of the part A


and connect a field pipe.

Make sure to flow nitrogen gas through the pipe when brazing.

316

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Outdoor & BP Units

Insulation of Joint
Be sure to insulate the gas and liquid side Joint.
Note) The insulation of the refrigerant piping must be reinforced based on the environment of installation.
Otherwise, dew may condensate on the surface of the insulation. For details, see Engineering Data.
GAS SIDE

LIQUID SIDE

Set the insulation matching the joint and wind the field supplied tape from the center
without any clearances on the matching face of insulation.
Seal the insulation and field piping insulation joint with the field supplied tape.
Insulate by the same method as gas side joint.
Tape
(Field supply)

Insulation
(Supplied)

Field piping
insulation

Joint

INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
Install the Joint so that it is branched vertically or horizontally.
Horizontal
(Inclination 30 Max.)

Vertical
30

Max.

30

"A" ARROW VIEW

Do not apply extra force on the piping part. The brazed part may be damaged and
it may result in gas leakage.

2P182411-1

Options

317

Options for Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

3. Options for Indoor Units


3.1

Duct Connected Type

3.1.1

<KDT25N32/50/63> Insulation Kit for High Humidity


Caution
This kit can be installed to the Ceiling mounted Built-in Type Air Conditioners. <Slim duct type>
When the Installation box for adapter PCB(KPP1B101) is used together, mount this kit before Installation box.
It is recommended to mount this kit before installing the indoor unit.

Details of parts

Number of
pieces

Kit name
KDT25N32
KDT25N50
KDT25N63

5 Bottom plate insulation

B-1

6
(mm)

Slit

420

Shape

(mm) Score
A
700
900
1100

Kit name
KDT25N32
KDT25N50
KDT25N63

380

Number of
pieces

Designation

A
700
900
1100

Kit name
KDT25N32
KDT25N50
KDT25N63

7 Hanger (right) insulation


390

4 Side plate insulation

S-2

240

(mm)

Chamber cover insulation


A

C-1
(mm)

Slit

A
704
904
1104

S-1

Slit (mm)

3 Side plate insulation

200

Designation

T-2
Slit

207

380

Shape

(mm)

Slit

207

2 Top plate insulation

T-1

1 Top plate insulation

240

Designation

Kit name
KDT25N32
KDT25N50
KDT25N63

A
621
821
1021

H-1

8 Hanger (left) insulation

(mm)

H-2

9 Installation manual
(mm)

390

Slit
Number of
pieces

90

90

Shape
Slit

(This instruction)

When moving the unit at or after opening, hold the unit by the hanger brackets.
Do not apply force to the refrigernat piping, drain piping or flange parts.

How to attach

<Procedure> Stick the insulations carefully according to the following procedures


and do not make a gap between the adjacent thermal insulations.
(1) Stick the top plate insulation T-1 , T-2 to the indoor unit top plate.
(2) Cut off the side plate insulation S-1 following the score.(See the right figure)
(3) Stick the side plate insulation S-1 to the indoor unit right side plate.
(4) Stick the side plate insulation S-1 to the indoor unit left side plate
without cutting off the area surrounded by the score.
(5) Stick the side plate insulation S-2 to the indoor unit left side plate.
(6) Stick the bottom plate insulation B-1 to the indoor unit bottom plate.
(7) Stick the chamber cover insulation C-1 to the indoor unit chamber cover.
(8) Stick the hanger (left) insulation H-2 and the hanger (right) insulation H-1
respectively to the left and right hangers respectively.
(See the right figure for the sticking base line.)

Cut off the area shown with oblique lines and throw it away.
VRV model only
VRV and Room Airconditioners
KDT25N50, KDT25N63 model only

T-2

T-1

g
kin

se

ba

lin

Stic

S-2
H-2

ARROW VIEW

S-1

Hanger brackets(right)

Hanger bracket (left)

H-2

H-1

Side plate(right)
Side plate(left)

C-1

S-1

H-1

DETAIL B

DETAIL C

B-1

C: 3P131323-1E

318

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

3.2

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (600600)

3.2.1

<BYFQ60B8W1> Decoration Panel

1.

BEFORE INSTALLATION
1. PRECAUTIONS
Refer also to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.

2. ACCESSORIES
Installation manual.
Screw (4 pcs.)

3. NOTE TO INSTALLER
Be sure to instruct the customer how to properly operate the system showing him/her the attached operation
manual to the indoor unit or the outdoor unit.

2.

PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL

For this unit, you are able to select air flow directions. To discharge air in 2 or 3 directions, it is necessary to
purchase optional kit Sealing member of air discharge outlet.

HANDLING OF DECORATION PANELS


Never place the panel facing down nor lean it against a wall nor leave it on a projecting object.
Never touch or put pressure on the swing flap.
(The swing flap may malfunction)

(1) Remove the suction grille from the decoration panel.


1 Open the suction grille by sliding the 2 suction grille tabs in the direction of the arrow. (Refer to Fig. 1)

Fig. 1

2 Detach the suction grille from the decoration panel by lifting the grille up approximately 45 degrees. (Refer to Fig. 2)

45

Fig. 2

3PA64319-12N-1

Options

319

Options for Indoor Units

3.

EDSG18-936

INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL TO THE INDOOR UNIT BODY

Refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for the installation of the indoor unit.
(1) Match the PIPING SIDE and DRAIN SIDE displays on the decoration panel with the position of the piping section
and drain section on the indoor unit.
(2) Install the decoration panel.
1 Make sure the wire has not come out of the groove for the wiring route inside the indoor unit. (3 locations)
If it has, put it back in.
(Connecting the panel with wires out of the groove may cause water leakage.)
2 Temporarily tighten the attached screws approximately 5mm into the opposing sides of the control box in
the indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 3)
Attached screws

Wiring route grooves

(2 locations)

(3 locations)

Fig. 3
Control box

3 Slide the panel in the direction of the arrow, passing the 2 attachment holes (the
temporarily tight ened screws. (Refer to Fig. 4)

shapes parts) over the

Panel temporary suspension


Fig. 4

4 Hang the panel temporary suspension on the hook located on the control box of indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Control box

Hook

Fig. 5

5 Attach the remaining 2 screws, and tighten all 4 screws until the sealant between the decoration panel and indoor
unit is compressed to between 6 and 8 mm thick. (Refer to Fig. 6)
Indoor unit
6 - 8 mm

Ceiling material

Sealant

Decoration panel

Section of air outlet

Fig. 6

Horizontal blade
3PA64319-12N-2

320

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

[ PRECAUTIONS ]
Improper screwing of the screws may cause the troubles
shown in Fig. 7, Screw them properly.

Air leak

Air leak from ceiling

Contamination

If gap is still left between the ceiling and the decoration


panel after screwing the screws, readjust the indoor unit
body height.

Dew formation, dew dripping

Fig. 7

(3) Wiring of the decoration panel (Refer to Fig. 8)


6 Remove the control box lid after making sure the power to the unit is off.
7 Connect the connectors for swing flap motor lead wire installed on the decoration panel.
Failing to connect the connectors will prevent the swing flap from working, so be sure to connect them.
8 Replace the control box lid reversing the procedure to remove it.
Make sure that the swing flap motor lead wire is not caught between the indoor unit and the decoration panel.

Control box lid

Screws
(2 locations)
Hang the swing motor lead wire
on this tab.

Pass the swing motor lead wire through


the clamp material as shown in the diagram.
After connection, store the connector inside
the control box.
Clamping material

Swing motor lead wire


Indoor unit side

Swing motor lead wire


Decoration panel side

Fig. 8

4.

INSTALLATION OF SUCTION GRILLE


Install the suction grille
Install by reversing the procedure shown in PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL.
It is possible to install the suction grille in 4 directions by turning the suction grille.
Change the direction when adjusting the direction of the suction grille of multiple units or in meeting
g customers demands.
NOTE
Be careful not to get swing flap motor lead wire get caught when installing the suction grille.
3PA64319-12N-3

Options

321

Options for Indoor Units

3.2.2

EDSG18-936

<KDBH44BA60 (KDBHQ44B60)> Sealing Member of Air Discharge Outlet


Caution
Refer to the installation manual for both indoor unit and the decoration panel.

Contents of kit
Check the following parts are include with your kit.
Name

Sealing material

Tape for fixing the


sealing material

Quantity

2 pieces

2 pieces

Moisture absorber
for bell-mouth

Insulation for side plate


1 piece

1 piece

-1

1 piece

-2

Moisture absorber
for swing flap

1 piece

3 pieces

-3

Shape
100mm179mm

Name

Moisture absorber
for swing flap

Quantity

Moisture absorber
for panel edge

3 pieces

3 pieces
6

100mm370mm

Moisture absorber
for attached point

1 piece

100mm1538mm

25mm361mm

Moisture absorber
for flesh air intake

2 pieces

Shape
8mm450mm

50mm20mm

The direction of air discharge and the positioning of sealing material


(1) Selection of the air outlet
Select the direction of air discharge from the following table according to the location of the indoor unit.
Refer to

Setting for indoor unit

for setting position number.

Refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for selection of installation location.

Caution

Never select the direction of air discharge other than the following pattern.
(You may have a condensation problem.)
Air
outlet 3

Air
outlet 2

Closed

3-way air
discharge

Closed Closed

Closed
1

Air
outlet 1

Air
outlet 4

2-way air
discharge

Closed
4

Closed

(2) Prepare the sealing material 1 and the tape for fixing the sealing material 2 according to the air outlet No. to be closed.
Cut off the sealing material 1 and the tape for fixing the sealing material 2 along the perforated lines (marked---).
Adhere the sealing material 1 to tape for fixing the sealing material 2 .
(Make sure that the sealing material 1 is placed at the center of the tape for fixing the sealing material 2 .)
Example) For closing the air outlet 3
<How to prepare the sealing material 1 and tape for fixing the sealing material 2 >
Sealing material

Step 2

Peel off the


release paper.

3
1

Sealing material

(10mm)

Step 1
Cut off these pieces.

Tape for fixing the


sealing material

Released paper

Tape for fixing the


sealing material 2

Step 3
Adhere the sealing material 1 to the center
of tape for fixing the sealing material 2 .

(10mm)

Sticking reference

*When closing the air outlet 2 ,it is not required to cut off the sealing material 1 and tape for fixing the sealing material 2 .
(3) Adhere the sealing material 1 and tape for fixing the sealing material 2
prepared according to the procedure (2) to the indoor unit air outlet.

The sealing material 1 and


tape for fixing the sealing material

Indoor unit
2

Air
outlet

Adhering the sealing material for air outlet

1P109292B

322

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

Setting for indoor unit


It is required to make a field setting from the remote controller according to how the indoor units are installed.
The direction of air discharge must also be set by the remote controller.
The 3 different kinds of setting such as "Mode number" , "The setting switch number" and "The setting position number" must be made by
the remote controller.
Refer to the item of "Field setting" in the operation manual of the remote controller for the setting procedure.
Setting according to number of use of the air discharge.
Check the setting position number corresponding to the direction of air discharge in a table, below.

(Content of setting)
(Number of use
of air outlets)
3-way air discharge

Mode number

2-way air discharge

13(23)

The setting
position number

The setting
switch number

02

03

Installation of the insulation


Please turn off the power supply for safety absolutely, before you do installation of the decoration panel and
affixation of insulation and connected work of swing conector.
(1) Adhere the insulations for side plate 3 in position, referring
Fig.1
Fig.2
.
(2) Adhere the moisture absorber forbell-mouth 4 on the inner surface of the bell-mouth.
Fig.2
Fig.3 .
See Fig.1
Bell-mouth

Fig.1

Insulation for
3
side plate

Insulation for
side plate
3 -3

Fig.3

-1

Moisture absorber
for bell-mouth
4

Insulation for
side plate
3 -2

Section of the bell-mouth

Sticking
4 reference

Moisture absorber
for bell-mouth
4

Fig.2
*Adhere the insulations for side plate
3 -1, 3 -2and 3 -3inturn.

Moisture absorber
4
for bell-mouth

Sticking
-1 reference

Insulation for
side plate
3 -3
Sticking
reference

Insulation for
side plate
3

3 -3
Insulation for
side plate
3 -2

Sticking reference

-1

3 -2

1P109292B

Options

323

Options for Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Fig.4 .
(3) Confirm the air outlet and NO. not to be closed on the panel. See
(4) Confirm the air outlet and NO. not to be closed on the panel. See 5 6 aligning with the upper edgeof
the swing flap on the air outlet. And, adhere the moisture absorbers for panel edge 7
with the panel edge on the air outlet. See Fig.5 .
(5) Confirm the air outlet and NO. not to be closed on the panel. See 8 with the attached point to indoor unit
between the airoutlet 2 and 3 .And, adhere the moisture absorbers for flesh air intake 9
with the flesh air intake hole. See Fig.6 .

Fig.4
Air
outlet

Air
outlet

Air
outlet

Air
outlet

Swing connector
Swing motor

Fig.5

Moisture absorber
for swing flap
6
Align it with the upper
edge of swing flap

Moisture absorber
5 for swing flap
Align it with the upper
edge of swing flap

Upper edge

Swing flap
Sticking
6 reference
Sticking
6 reference

Swing flap

Closed

Not closed

Moisture absorber
7
for panel edge

Moisture absorber
7
for panel edge
Sticking
7 reference

)
mm

(30

Panel

*All air outlets which


are not closed.

Section of the panel edge

Fig.6

Sticking
9 reference

Sticking
9 reference

Air
outlet

Air
outlet

Swing connector

Moisture absorber
for flesh air intake 9

Moisture absorber
for attached point 8

Moisture absorber
for flesh air intake 9
Section of the attached point

Air
outlet

Air
outlet

1P109292B

324

Options

EDSG18-936

3.2.3

Options for Indoor Units

<KDBQ44BA60A (KDBQ44B60A)> Panel Spacer


Contents of kit

Combination table

Check if following parts are included with your kit.


Panel spacer

Decoration
panel

KDBQ44B60
KDBQ44B60A
KDBQ44BA60A

Name

Panel spacer frame Resin corner part

Quantity

BYFQ60BW1
BYFQ60BAW1
BYFQ60B8W1

4 PCS.
1

Screw

Fixing metal

4 PCS.

4 PCS.

28 PCS.

Shape number
M412

Caution

Tapping screw
(Class 2)

When the Panel Spacer is installed, it is not possible


to have 2-way air outlet.
Refer to the installation manual for both indoor
unit and the Panel spacer for its installation.

Name

Sealing material

Quantity

2 PCS.
5

2 PCS.
6

Shape number

Preparation of the decoration panel


Handle the decoration panel with care.
Never place the panel face down, or lean the panel against wall or place on the
projective object.
(It causes the dent or damage of the surface of the panel or damage of swing motor.)

(1) Remove the suction grill from the decoration panel.


(Refer to the installation manual of the decoration panel how to remove.)
(2) Place the panel face down on the corrugated board or the vinyl sheet
to protect the surface of the panel.

Installation of the indoor unit


Adjust the height of the indoor unit.
Be sure the piping will not contact with the ceiling joist etc. after adjusting the height.

Standard installation

When the Panel spacer is installed

Options

245mm

False ceiling

255mm or more

285mm

(180mm)

False ceiling

(140mm)

Hanger
bracket

Hanger
bracket

325

Options for Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Assembly of panel spacer


(1) Assemble the panel spacer frame 1 and the plastic corner joint 2 temporarily.

(2) Fix with the screws 4 from the top. (4 screws in each corner)

2
1

4
2

1
1

1
2

Insert

Insert
1

Fixing to the decoration panel


(1) Set the fixing metal 3 on each corner
with screws 4 .

(2) Place the panel spacer assembled in item 3 Assembly of panel spacer
of the above on the outer frame of the decoration panel.

(3) Fix the panel spacer to the fixing metal


3 with screws 4 (4 portions).

Decoration panel

Adhesion of the sealing material


Adhere the sealing material 5

6 on the upper face of the panel spacer in the order of 5 and

6 .

5
6

Sticking reference
(Adhere it along
the inner rib.)

Sealing material
5

Panel spacer

Decoration panel

Installation of the decoration panel


Install the decoration panel to the indoor unit according to the installation manual of decoration panel.
The panel spacer is not firmly fixed to the decoration panel, so that never hold the panel spacer directly or lean
the decoration panel extremely.

1P107764-1C

326

Options

EDSG18-936

3.2.4

Options for Indoor Units

<KDDQ44XA60 (KDDQ44X60)> Fresh Air Intake Kit

Remarks :
1. This kit can be installed to the Ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi-flow).
2. When installing this kit, duct (Nominal dia. : 100) is required on site.
In case that metal duct is penetrated through wooden walls, make sure the duct and the
wall electrically insulated.
Install the duct inclined downwardly to outdoor so that the rain may not get into the duct.
(Inclination 1/100 to 1/50)
To avoid birds, small animals or insects getting inside the duct, make sure to install net
where it contacts the outside air.
Contents
Prior to installation, make sure you have the complete kit of parts.
Name

1 Duct flange

Q'ty

1 piece

2 Screws

3 Insulation for duct flange

4 pieces

4 Insulation for opening of


unit

1 piece

1 piece

5 Installation manual

1 piece

Shape
M412

Necessary tools
Philips head screw driver, nipper, cutter etc.

Installation procedures of duct flange

1. Cut off the knockout hole on the side plate. (Fig.1)


The knockout hole is opposite to ref. pipe.
Ref. pipe
Knockout hole

Drain pipe

Side plate

Fig.1

Cut it off
with nipper.

Slit
Side plate

Options

327

Options for Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

2. Adhere the insulation 4 for opening of unit to the opening. (Fig. 2)


Put the insulation 4 to be suitable for the hole of the insulation 4
and hole of the indoor unit.
However, put the insulation 4 so as not to conceal the screw hole of the indoor unit.

Insulation 4

Fig. 2
3. Install the duct flange 1 with screws 2 (M412, 4 screws) to the opening and adhere the insulation 3 (Fig. 3)
Duct flange 1

Screws 2
(M412, 4screws)

Insulation 3

Fig. 3

Installation procedures of duct <Nominal diameter of duct : 100>


1. Connect the duct to the duct flange. (Flange fits inside the duct.) (Fig. 4)
2. After connection, wrap vinyl tape (field supply) around the duct connection to prevent
air leak.
Duct flange

Wrap the tape around the duct to avoid air leak.

Indoor unit
Tape

Fig. 4

100 Duct (Field supply)

Precaution
All ducts must be completely insulated.
Do not do the followings when installing duct.
A) To bend the duct excessively

B) To bend the duct too many times

WRONG

WRONG

C) To reduce the duct diameter

WRONG
2P108307-1A

328

Options

EDSG18-936

3.3

Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type (950950)

3.3.1

<BYC125K-W1> Decoration Panel

Options for Indoor Units

Options

329

Options for Indoor Units

330

EDSG18-936

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

Options

331

Options for Indoor Units

332

EDSG18-936

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

Options

333

Options for Indoor Units

3.3.2

EDSG18-936

<KDBP55H160WA> Panel Spacer


Contents of kit

Combination table

Check if following parts are included with your kit.


Panel spacer

KDBP55H160FA

KDBP55H160WA
KDB55K160WA

Decoration
panel

BYCP125K-W1

BYCP125D-W1
BYC125K-W1
BYC125KJW1

Name
Quantity

Panel spacer frame


4 PCS.

Resin corner part


4 PCS.

Fixing metal
4 PCS.

Screw
28 PCS.
4

Shape number
M410
Tapping screw

Caution

(Class 2)

When the Panel Spacer is installed, it is not possible


to have 2-way air outlet.
Refer to the installation manual for both indoor
unit and the Panel spacer for its installation.

Name

Sealing material

Quantity

2 PCS.
5

Caution label

2 PCS.
6

Others

1 PC.
z

Shape number

This
Installation
Manual

Preparation of the Decoration panel


Handle the decoration panel with care.
Never place the panel face down, or lean the panel against wall or place on the
projective object.
(It causes the dent or damage of the surface of the panel or damage of swing motor.)

(1)Remove the suction grill from the decoration panel.


(Refer to the installtion manual of the decoration panel how to remove.)
(2)Place the panel face down on the corrugated board or the vinyl sheet
to protect the surface of the panel.

Installation of the indoor unit


Adjust the height of the indoor unit.
Be sure the piping will not contact with the ceiling joist etc. after adjusting the height.
When the Panel spacer is installed

Standard installation
Suspension
bracket

Ceiling surface

Suspension
bracket

Ceiling surface

Decoration panel

334

A[mm]

Decoration panel

A[mm]

BYCP125D-W1
BYC125K-W1
BYC125KJW1

145~150

BYCP125D-W1
BYC125K-W1
BYC125KJW1

105~110

BYCP125K-W1

125~130

BYCP125K-W1

85~90

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

Assembly of panel spacer


(1)Assemble the panel spacer frame 1 and the plastic corner joint 2 temporarily.

(2)Fix with the screws 4 from the top.(4 screws in each corner)

2
1

1
1

1
2

Insert

Insert
1

Fixing to the Decoration panel


(1)Set the fixing metal 3 on each corner
with screws 4 .
(Screw positions change with
decoration panels,
as shown in the following figure.)
In the case of BYCP125K-W1

(3)Fix the panel spacer to the fixing metal


3 with screws 4 (4 portions).

(2)Place the panel spacer assembled in item 3 Assembly of panel spacer


of the above on the outer frame of the Decoration panel.

3
In the cases of other than the above.

Adhesion of the sealing material


Adhere the sealing material 5

6 on the upper face of the panel spacer in the order of

5 and 6 .

5
6

Sticking reference
(Adhere it along
the inner rib.)

Sealing material
5

Installation of the Decoration panel


(1) install the decoration panel to the indoor unit according to
the installation manual of decoration panel.
The panel spacer is not firmly fixed to the decoration panel, so
that never hold the panel spacer directly or lean the decoration
panel extremely.
(2)After installation of the Decoration panel, adhere the caution sticker
7 next to the name plate of the indoor unit as shown on the right.

Name plate for


indoor unit
7

upper

1P136564E

Options

335

Options for Indoor Units

3.3.3

EDSG18-936

<KDDP55D160(K)> Fresh Air Intake Kit (Chamber Type)


Caution

REMARKS

Before starting the installation work, carefully read the following


safety precautions and observe them to ensure safety during work.

This kit can be installed to the Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type


Air Conditioner <Multi-flow type>.
Before installation, make sure the indoor unit number.
Refer to the installation manuals for the indoor unit and
the decoration panel.
Components C h e c k i f t h e f o l l o w i n g p a r t s a r e i n c l u d e d w i t h y o u r k i t
Shaded part
is separately packed.
Make sure to use the attached or specified components to install the products.
Otherwise, it may cause air leak or the product may fall.
After installation, check whether there is no abnormality during the trial operating.

1 Suction

Name

Chamber

2 C o n n e c t i n g 3 C o n n e c t i n g 4 S c r e w 5 Closing 6 T J o i n t 7 F l e x i b l e 8 C l a m p 9 Installation

Chamber
(Right)

Chamber
(Left)

1PC.
1PC.

1PC.
1PC.

Material

Manual

Duct

Shape
M4 12
1PC.
1PC.

Q' KDDP55D160
ty KDDP55D160K

4PCS.
4PCS.

1PC.
1PC.

2PCS.

4PCS.

1PC.
1PC.

Selection of Location and Access Door


1. Refer to the following table.

Duct (Field supply) In case of KDDP55D160

Indoor unit
Inspection hatch

2. Inspection hatch (lager than 450

When the intake from both sides can not be obtained due to an obstacle,
one side intake is acceptable.
In this case, make sure to close the opening with the material 5 .
In case of one side intake, the noise will be larger than intake from both sides.
[Example of one side intake]
Close the opening with closing material

Inspection hatch

Inspection hatch

Indoor unit
25 ~ 80
100 ~ 140

306
348

Inspection hatch

725

Install either one of hatches

Connecting chamber (Right)

When installing the wireless receiver kit on the indoor unit, the duct

must be led from right side as shown. In this case, use KDDP55D160.

Installation of the Suction chamber


1. Remove the decoration panel. (This is not required for the new installation)
Remove the decoration panel in the reverse step when the panel is installed.
(Refer to the installation manual of the decoration panel for the details.)

2 . Temporarily install the suction chamber to the indoor unit by hanging the latch on the opposite side of the suction chamber to the hook of the indoor body. (2 portions)
Temporarily hang the remaining 2 hooks of the suction chamber to the hooks on the sides of the indoor unit. f i g . 1 ~ f i g . 3
(When the indoor unit is already installed, hang the hook to the suspension bracket temporarily and fix the hook.)
Installation set outline of the indoor unit
fig.2
3 . Tighten 2 hexahead screws located beneath the lutches until the thickness of the sealing material of chamber reduces to 5~8mm.
fig.4 fig.5
Latch
f i g . 2 When installing
f i g . 3 After installation
fig.1
(2 portions)
Hook
Suction chamber
Hook
Suction chamber

Suspension
bracket

fig.4

Hook
(2 portions)
Hook
Indoor unit

Lead wire Suspension bracket

Set outline of the indoor unit


Indoor unit

Suction chamber

f i g . 5 When completed

When installing
fig.2
Suspension bracket
(4 portions)

336

Refrigerant
pipe

Indoor unit

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

Installation of the Indoor Unit and the Suction Chamber

Indoor unit

[ Attachment of
the paper pattern ]

Paper pattern
(included in the indoor unit)
Suction chamber

Screw
(included in the indoor unit)

(200)

Install the indoor unit and the suction chamber.


Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit.
(For the height of the unit, refer to the drawing on the right.)
Be complete installed refrigerant piping, and drain piping.
Attach the paper pattern for installation to the indoor unit with screws to protect the indoor unit from dirt. [See below]
(When the indoor unit is newly installed)
(See below)
In case of attaching the chamber after installed indoor unit.
suspension bracket
For the height of the unit, change the height shown on the right drawing.
(Level of the indoor unit)
Ceiling surface

Installation of Connecting duct


1 . Install the Connecting chamber (right & left) in accordance with the procedure shown In case of KDDP55D160K
in fig.5.
2. Connect the T Joint and Connecting
Connecting chamber
(right)
2

<Procedure 1>
Hook the square hole of connecting
chamber 2 to suspension bracket of
suction chamber 1 .

Screw 4
Fresh air intake
Suction chamber 1

Connecting chamber (Left) 3

Duct (Field supplied)

(150)

<Procedure 2>
Install the connecting chamber with
the attached screw 4 .(2 portions)
Connecting chamber (Right) 2
fig.5 Installation of the connecting chamber (right)

(Same as the left side)

<How to tighten the clamp>


(1)
(2)

(3)
Wrong

(4)

fig.6

[ Installation of closing material in case of one side intake ] (for KDDP55D160)


Install the closing material in accordance with the following procedures.
Closing material can be used either right or left side opening.

Correct

Closing material 5

( 1 ) Wrap the clamp ( 2 ) Install the edge ( 3 )Make sure the tightening ( 4 ) Completed.
around the
of clamp between
direction and tighten the
Screw 4
duct.
the sit of the pin. clamp with standard tools
Suction chamber 1
Tighten the clamp (ex.Screwdriver or pliers)
by hand.
as shown.

Caution

Do not turn the slit pin reversely.


If turned reversely, ratchet part many break down.

Duct connection

Clamp 8
Suspension band for duct
(Field supplied)
Hang the T Joint with suspension band
for duct to reduce the weight of
duct to the chamber.

7 Flexible duct
Slip pin

chamber. fig.6

Flexible duct 7
T Joint 6

fig.7

<Procedure 1>
Hook the square hole of connecting
chamber 5 to suspension bracket of
suction chamber 2 .
<Procedure 2>
Install the connecting chamber with
the attached screw 4 .(2 portions)
fig.7

<Duct: diameter 150>

1) Attach the duct to the outside of the Branch duct chamber.


Wrap the duct tape (Field supplied) around the connection to prevent air leak. To bend excessively To bend too many times
To reduce the diameter
Insulate the duct to prevent condensate.
2) Do not perform the following duct work.
Caution
follow the local code or regulation to install the duct.
In case that metal duct is penetrated through wooden wall, make sure the duct and the wall are electrically insulated.
Install the outdoor unit duct inclined downwardly so that the rain will not get into the duct. (Inclination 1/100 to 1/50)
Where it contact the outside air, make sure to install screen to avoid birds, small animals or insects getting inside the duct.
Where it contact the outside air, make sure to install air filter to protect heat exchanger for indoor unit.

Installation of Decoration panel


Install the Decoration panel in accordance with the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
Suction chamber

Decoration panel
Fixing metal
Rubber bush

Lead wire of Decoration panel


:Wire from Decoration panel to suction chamber
(Before fixing the Chamber, put the lead wire through Rubber bushing hole.)

In case of the panel for Wireless remote controller


Put the Connector for receiver lead wire through rubber bush and connect to the indoor PC board.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller kit (optional) for the detail.
3K011144-1A

Options

337

Options for Indoor Units

338

EDSG18-936

Options

EDSG18-936

3.3.4

Options for Indoor Units

<KDDJ55X160> Fresh Air Intake Kit (Direct Installation Type)

The fresh air is taken into the unit by the indoor unit fan or duct fan, which is field supplied. The location of fresh air intake port will be
changeable by installing the duct fan.

KDDJ55X160

Remarks :
1. This kit can be installed to the Ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi-flow).
2. When installing this kit, duct (Nominal dia. : 75) is required on site.
Contents
Prior to installation, make sure you have the complete kit of parts.
Name

1 Duct Flange

2 Screws

Q'ty

1 piece

4 pieces

3 Insulation for Duct Flange

4 Insulation for Opening of


Unit

5 Installation Manual

1 piece

1 piece

1 piece

Shape
M412

Necessary tools
Philips head screw driver, nipper, cutter etc.

Installation procedures of Duct flange


The method of installation varies with indoor unit type.
The unit type can be distinguished by the position of knockout hole.
1. Cut off the knockout hole on the side plate. (Fig. 1)

Ref. pipe
Knockout hole
Drain pipe

Fig.1
Side plate

There is no inner insulation.


Cut off only side plate.
Cut it off
with nipper.

Slit
Side plate

Options

339

Options for Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

2. Adhere the insulation

for opening of unit to the opening. (Fig. 2)

Adhere to cover the edge


of opening.

Side plate

Insulation 4

Fig.2
insulation 4

3. Install the duct flange 1 with screws 2 (M412, 4 screws) to the opening and adhere the insulation 3 (Fig. 3)

Duct flange 1

Screws 2
(M412, 4screws)

Fig.3

insulation 3

<Nominal diameter of duct : 75>

Installation procedures of Duct

1. Connect the duct to the duct flange. (Flange fits inside the duct.) (Fig. 4)
2. After connection, wrap vinyl tape (field supply) around the duct connection to prevent
air leak.
Duct flange

Wrap the tape around the duct to avoid air leak.

indoor unit
Tape

Fig.4

75 Duct (Field supply)

Precaution
ALL ducts must be completely insulated.
Do not do the followings when installing duct.
A) To bend the duct excessively

WRONG

B) To bend the duct too many times

WRONG

C) To reduce the duct diameter

WRONG
C : 2P066796-1C

340

Options

EDSG18-936

3.3.5

Options for Indoor Units

<KAFP556/557D80, KAFP552/553H80> High Efficiency Filter

KAFP556D80 High Efficiency Filter (Including Filter Chamber)


KAFP557D80 High Efficiency Filter (Including Filter Chamber)
Combination table
High Efficiency Filter (Set)

High Efficiency Filter

Filter Chamber

KAFP556D80
KAFP557D80

KAFP552H80
KAFP553H80

KDDF55DA160

KAFP552H80 High Efficiency Filter (Replacement)


KAFP553H80 High Efficiency Filter (Replacement)
Specifications
High Efficiency Filter (Replacement) KAFP552H80
Filter Chamber

KAFP553H80
KDDF55DA160

Collecting Efficiency (%)

65% (NBS Calorimetric method)

90% (NBS Calorimetric method)

Initial Pressure Loss (Pa)

34 or less

Final Pressure Loss (Pa)

98 or less

Filter

Non-woven Fabric of Synthetic Fiber


2,500 h
(Dust Concentration 0.15 mg / m3)

Life (h)

1,800 h
(Dust Concentration 0.15 mg / m3)

Precaution at use
1. The high efficiency filter, and the other filter can not be installed together.
2. The unit should be operated with 4-way discharge when the high efficiency filter is installed.
It can not be applied to the high ceiling room.
3. Field setting by remote controller is necessary when the high efficiency filter is installed.
Dimension

Options

Model

KAFP552H80, 553H80

25

341

Options for Indoor Units

3.3.6

342

EDSG18-936

<KDDF55DA160> High Efficiency Filter Chamber

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

Options

343

Options for Indoor Units

3.3.7

EDSG18-936

<KAF551KA160> Replacement Longlife Filter


Specifications
Life

2,500 h (Dust concentration 0.15 mg / m3)

Average collection efficiency

65% (Gravimetric method)

Filter material

Mildew proof resin net

Quantity per unit

Dimensions
23

542

560

Filter Frame
(HIPS)

Filter
(R4929)

3.3.8

<KDJ55K80> Branch Duct Chamber


Purpose
This chamber is the parts which connects indoor unit and duct (field supply) when a part of the wind (cool/
warm) which blows from decoration panel is sent to the another room with the duct.
Caution
1. Choose either left or right side of the indoor unit.
2. Close the branch duct chamber side air outlet of decoration panel.

Indoor Unit
Screw (11 pcs)

Branch Duct Chamber


1P012634B

344

Options

EDSG18-936

3.4

Options for Indoor Units

Ceiling Mounted Built-in Type

Screening Door
Air Suction Flange
Filter Chamber (For Rear Suction)

Filter Chamber (For Bottom Suction)


Air Suction Canvas

Half Panel
Access Panel
High Efficiency Filter (65%, 95%)
Long Life Replacement Filter
(R4915)

3.4.1

<KTB25KA80W> Service Access Panel


Specifications
Model
Item

KTB25KA80W

Color

White

Dimension

Options

345

Options for Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

Installation
[Before installation]
1. Make an opening on the ceiling

2. Install ceiling joist supports to fit the ceiling opening

[Installation of the ceiling board]


The ceiling board can be installed into the inner frame assembly as follows.
1. Remove decoration panel retainer from the inner frame assembly.
2. Remove the decoration panel and substitute with the ceiling board.
3. Set the ceiling board by retainer removed in step 1 of above.
Cautions
When the ceiling board is installed, the decoration panel is not needed.

346

Options

EDSG18-936

3.4.2

Options for Indoor Units

<KAF252/253LA80> High Efficiency Filter


Specifications
Model

KAF252LA80

KAF253LA80

Colorimetric method 65%

Colorimetric method 90%

Initial Pressure Loss (Pa)

49 or less

49 or less

Final Pressure Loss (Pa)

98

98

Non-woven fabric of synthetic fiber

Non-woven fabric of synthetic fiber

Items
Dust Collection
Efficiency (%)

Filter
Life Time (h)

2,500 hours (Dust density 0.15mg/m)

1,800 hours (Dust density 0.15mg/m)

High Efficiency Filter


Chamber
(for the Bottom Suction)

KAJ25L80D

KAJ25L80D

High Efficiency Filter


Chamber
(for the Rear Suction)

KAJ25L80B

KAJ25L80B

(25475360)2

(25475360)2

External Dimension
(mm) (TWD)

Installation

Characteristics of Filter
65% type

Options

90% type

347

Options for Indoor Units

3.4.3

EDSG18-936

<KAFJ251K80> Replacement Longlife Filter


Specifications
Model

KAFJ251K80

Item
Average Efficiency (%)
Pressure Loss
(Pa)

50% (Gravity method)

Initial

9.8

Final

49

Materials

Mildew Proof Resin Net

Number Required per Model


Life Time (h)

2
2,500 hours (dust particle concentration at 0.15 mg/m)

Characteristics of filter

3.4.4

<KSA-25KA80> Canvas Duct (Air Suction Canvas)


Specifications
Model

KSA-25KA80

Item
Dimensions
(mm)

255

1000

405

Canvas Duct

TOYOBOSL1000SIMVERFlame resistant

Installation

3.4.5

<KDAJ25KA71> Adaptor for Discharge


Specifications
Model
Item
Connection Dia. (mm)

348

KDAJ25KA71
2002 port

Options

EDSG18-936

3.4.6

Options for Indoor Units

<KAJ25L80B> Filter Chamber for Rear Suction


This kit will be used for the rear-suction type when the high efficiency filter or the long life filter will be built
in.
Installation

Be sure to remove the long life filter and attach the rear-suction type's sealing plate there
when the filter chamber (for the rear-suction type) must be installed.

Note:
Refer to the appearance figure of optional accessory describing later for further details.

Options

349

Options for Indoor Units

3.4.7

EDSG18-936

<KAJ25L80D> Filter Chamber for Bottom Suction


Dimension

Installation

Note:
Refer to the appearance figure of optional accessory describing later for further details.

350

Options

EDSG18-936

3.4.8

Options for Indoor Units

<KDJ2507K80> Flange for Suction


When this kit will be used, the rear suction type's sealing plate will be required separately.
Specifications
Model
Item
Dimensions (mm)

Size of Connecting
Duct (mm)

KDJ2507K80

977

278

25

927

228

Materials

Galvanized steel plate

Example of Installation

5
3.4.9

<KBBJ25KA80> Blind Board


Specifications
Model
Item
Dimensions (mm)

Materials

KBBJ25KA80

985

404

10
Galvanized Steel Plate

Dimension

Installation

Options

351

Options for Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

3.4.10 <K-DG5/9DW> Discharge Grille


K-DG5DW

344

SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL : RESIN (ABS)
(INSULATION STICKED)
WEIGHT : 0.6Kg
COLOR : WHITE

152
72
(FIXING
SCREW PITCH)

ACCESSORIES
INSTALLATION MANUAL

370
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)

40

294
(FIXING SCREW PITCH)

160
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)

400

PRESSURE LOSS [Pa]

190

PRESSURE LOSS CURVE


m/s:DISCHARGE VELOCITY
10
4.0m/s

4-M5 SCREW

2.6m/s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AIR FLOW RATE [m3/min]
D3K03307A

K-DG9DW

152
72
(FIXING
SCREW PITCH)

ACCESSORIES
INSTALLATION MANUAL

40

614
564
(FIXING SCREW PITCH)

SPECIFICATION
MATERIAL : RESIN (ABS)
(INSULATION STICKED)
WEIGHT : 1.0Kg
COLOR : WHITE

640
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)

160
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)

4-M5 SCREW

PRESSURE LOSS CURVE


m/s : DISCHARGE VELOCITY
10
PRESSURE LOSS [Pa]

190

670

3.6m/s
5

2.9m/s

0
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
AIR FLOW RATE [m3/min]
D3K03309B

352

Options

EDSG18-936

Options for Indoor Units

3.4.11 <K-DGC5/9D> Discharge Chamber


K-DGC5D
160

3-SUSPENSION BOLT HOLE


(M10 OR W3/8)

SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL : FUSION GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET
(OUTSIDE INSULATION STICKED)
WEIGHT : 1.6Kg
ACCESSORIES
WING NUT : 1 pcs.
PLAIN WASHER : 2 pcs.
INSULATION PIPE COVER : 1 pcs.
INSTALLATION MANUAL

DAMPER

NOTE) 1. DUCT FLANGE ATTACHABLE


148

50

110
225

160
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)

35~40

370
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)
294

148

340

72

4-M5

D3K03301B

K-DGC9D
SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIAL : FUSION GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET
(OUTSIDE INSULATION STICKED)
WEIGHT : 3.0Kg

3-SUSPENSION BOLT HOLE


(M10 OR W3/8)

400

ACCESSORIES
WING NUT : 1 pcs.
PLAIN WASHER : 2 pcs.
INSULATION PIPE COVER : 1 pcs.
INSTALLATION MANUAL
NOTE) 1. DUCT FLANGE ATTACHABLE

DAMPER
50

160
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)

135
290
4-M5

72

564

35~40

640
(CEILING OPENING SIZE)

148

198

610

D3K03303C

Options

353

Options for Indoor Units

EDSG18-936

3.4.12 <K-DDV20A> Branch Duct


K-DDV20A

62

250

3
1 10
48

SPECIFICATIONS
1. MATERIAL
CASING : STEEL SHEET
INSULATION : FLEXIBLE URETHANE FOAM (OUTER CASING)
FOAM POLYSTHYRENE (INNER CASING)
POLYETHYLENE FOAM (INNER FLANGE)
2. WEIGHT : 3.0Kg
3. ACCESSORIES
WASHER
INSULATION COVER
INSULATION
WING NUT
INSTALLATION MANUAL

PRESSURE LOSS CURVE

62

360
198

[Pa]
16

65

62

4
1

15 SUSPENSION
BOLT HOLE
(M10 OR W3/8)

14
12
10
8
6
4
2
10

20

30

40

AIR FLOW RATE [m3/min]

D3K1966C

354

Options

EDSG18-936

Control Devices

4. Control Devices
4.1

<DCS302CA61> Central Remote Controller


64 groups (zones) of indoor units can be controlled
individually same as LCD Remote controller.
Max.64 groups (128 indoor units controllable)
Max. 128 groups (128 indoor units) are controllable
by using 2 central remote controllers, which can
control from 2 different places.
Zone control
Malfunction code display
Max. wiring length 1,000 m (Total : 2,000 m)
Combination with Unified ON/OFF controller,
schedule timer and BMS system
Airflow volume and direction can be controlled
individually for indoor units in each group operation.
Ventilation volume and mode can be controlled for
Heat Reclaim Ventilation (HRV).
Up to 4 Operation/Stop pairs can be set per day by
connecting a schedule timer.

4.1.1

Applied Model
Applied model

Remark

SkyAir series

Interface adaptor (DTA112BA51) is required for each indoor unit.

Residential Air conditioner

Wiring adaptor (KRP928B2S) is required for each indoor unit.

4.1.2

Specifications / Dimensions

SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Power supply

1 ~ 50/60Hz, 100V 240V

Power consumption

Max. 8W

Forced ON/OFF input

Continuous a contact
Contact current: approximately 10mA

Size

180 (W) 120 (H) 64.5 (D)

Weight

420g

Outline drawings
48.5

71

16

120

180

When using this unit, an electric parts box of KJB311AA is required.


For installation, a steel electric parts box to be embedded is mandatory.

Options

355

Control Devices

4.1.3

EDSG18-936

Installation Manual

Please read these SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be sure to install it correctly. After
completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during the start-up operation.
Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term appliances not accessible to the general public.

Meaning of warning, caution and note symbols.


WARNING ...... Indication a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION ....... Indication a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be
used to alert against unsafe practices.
NOTE ............. Indication situation that may result in equipment or property-damage-only accidents.

WARNING
Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out instal